PART NO. OMT390731X19
Operator’s Manual
260F-FE-6n
260FLC-FE-6n
Forestry Excavator
Zaxis260F-FE-6N and
Zaxis260FLC-FE-6N
Forestry Excavator
(PIN: 1FFDC272_ _F260001— )
*OMT390731X19*
OPERATOR'S MANUAL
Zaxis260F-FE-6N and Zaxis260FLC-
FE-6N Forestry Excavator
(PIN: 1FFDC272_ _F260001— )
OMT390731X19 ISSUE I1 (ENGLISH)
CALIFORNIA
Proposition 65 Warning
Diesel engine exhaust and some of its constituents
are known to the State of California to cause cancer,
birth defects, and other reproductive harm.
If this product contains a gasoline engine:
WARNING
The engine exhaust from this product contains
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer, birth defects or other reproductive harm.
The State of California requires the above two warnings.
Additional Proposition 65 Warnings can be found in this manual.
Worldwide Construction
And Forestry Division
PRINTED IN U.S.A.
Introduction
KR46761,0001377 -19-15SEP16-1/1
Foreword
READ THIS MANUAL carefully to learn how to operate and
service machine correctly. Personal injury or equipment
damage can result if manual is not read. This manual and
safety signs on the machine may also be available in other
languages; see an authorized Hitachi dealer to order.
THIS MANUAL SHOULD BE CONSIDERED a permanent
part of the machine and should remain with machine
when machine is sold.
MEASUREMENTS in this manual are given in both
metric and customary U.S. unit equivalents. Use only
correct replacement parts and fasteners. Metric and inch
fasteners may require a specic metric or inch wrench.
RIGHT-HAND AND LEFT-HAND sides are determined by
facing in the direction of forward travel.
WRITE PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION NUMBERS (P.I.N.)
in the Machine Numbers section. Accurately record all the
numbers to help in tracing the machine if machine is ever
stolen. A dealer also needs these numbers when parts
are ordered. File the identication numbers in a secure
place off machine.
WARRANTY is provided as part of Hitachi’s support
program for customers who operate and maintain their
equipment as described in this manual. The warranty is
explained on the warranty certicate or statement which
should have been received from the dealer.
This warranty provides the assurance that Hitachi backs
the products where defects appear within the warranty
period. In some circumstances, Hitachi also provides eld
improvements, often without charge to the customer, even
if the product is out of warranty. Should the equipment be
abused, or modied to change its performance beyond the
original factory specications, the warranty will become
void and eld improvements may be denied. Setting fuel
delivery above specications or otherwise overpowering
machines results in such action.
If current owner is not the original owner of this machine,
contact an authorized Hitachi dealer to inform them of this
unit's serial number. This will help Hitachi notify current
owner of any issues or product improvements.
112321
PN=2
Introduction
Continued on next page KR46761,000132E -19-26AUG20-1/2
Manual Identication—READ THIS FIRST!
IMPORTANT: Use only supporting manuals
designated for each specic machine. If the
incorrect manual is chosen, improper service
may occur. Verify the product identication
number (PIN) when choosing the correct manual.
Choosing the Correct Supporting Manuals
Machines are available in different machine congurations
based on the various markets into which they are sold.
Different supporting manuals exist for different machine
congurations.
When necessary, product identication numbers are listed
on the front cover of the manuals. These numbers are
used to identify the correct supporting manual for the
machine.
Product Identication Number
The product identication number (PIN) plate (1) is located
on the right front corner of the cab. Each machine has a
17-character PIN (2) shown on PIN plate.
TX1213375 —UN—28MAR16
PIN Plate Location—Rear Entry Cab
TX1213374 —UN—28MAR16
PIN Plate Location—Side Entry Cab
2
1
TX1223482 —UN—18OCT16
Example of PIN Plate
1— PIN Plate
2— 17-Character PIN
112321
PN=3
Introduction
KR46761,000132E -19-26AUG20-2/2
TX,SERIALNUM -19-08AUG18-1/1
The PIN identies the producing factory, machine model
number, machine option, year of manufacture, engine
emission level, and machine serial number.
The following is an example for a machine that meets
Final Tier 4 and Stage IV emission levels:
17-Character PIN Example
1 2 3 4
5
6
7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
1 F F D
C
2
7
2
_ _
F 2 6 0 0 0 1
•
(1—3) World Code: Identies location where machine
is manufactured.
1FF ................
World Code (manufacturing location)
1DW ........... Davenport Works
1T8 ............. Thibodaux Works
1T0 ............. Dubuque Works
1FF .............
Deere—Hitachi (Kernersville, NC, USA)
1F9 .............
Deere—Hitachi (Indaiatuba, São Paulo, Brazil)
1BZ .............
Brazil Works (Indaiatuba, São Paulo, Brazil)
•
(4—8) Machine Model and Series Identier: Identies
model number and series.
DC272 ............ Machine Model and Series Identier
•
(9) Check Letter: This is a random character assigned
by the factory. This is not used in machine identication.
_ ...................
Check Letter (variable)
•
(10) Manufacturing Year Code: Identies year of
machine manufacture.
_ ...................
Manufacturing Year Code (variable)
J ................ 2018
K ................ 2019
L ................ 2020
M ............... 2021
•
(11) Engine Emission Code: Represents engine
emission certication.
F ...................
Engine Emission Code
C ................ Tier 2 and Stage II
D ................
Tier 3 and Stage III A
E ................
Interim Tier 4 and Stage III B
F ................
Final Tier 4 and Stage IV
G ................ Interim Tier 4 and Stage III A (19-56 kW)
H ................
Final Tier 4 and Stage III A (19-37 kW)
J ................
Final Tier 4 and Stage III B (37-56 kW)
K ................
Final Tier 4 (8-19 kW)
L ................
Final Tier 4 and Stage V
•
(12—17) Machine Serial Number: Identies machine
serial number. These characters change from one
machine to another.
260001 ...........
Machine Serial Number
Serial Number Listing Information
Serial number information provided indicates to which
products the specied service information applies. For
example:
No serial number break
>
The information pertains to all indicated products.
(S.N. 000000— )
>
The information pertains to products beginning with the serial number listed.
(S.N. —000000)
>
The information pertains to products up to and including the serial number listed.
(S.N. 000000—000000)
>
The information pertains to products between and including the serial number listed.
When XXXXXX is listed in place of a serial number, a
serial number change was made, but the exact serial
number was not available at the time of publication.
112321
PN=4
Introduction
TX,IMPORTANT -19-08MAY20-1/1
IMPORTANT
Warranty will not apply to engine and drivetrain failures
resulting from unauthorized adjustments to this engine.
Unauthorized adjustments are in violation of the emissions
regulations applicable to this engine and may result in
substantial nes and penalties.
112321
PN=5
Introduction
Continued on next page TX,JDEULA -19-11JUL16-1/3
License Agreement for John Deere Software
TX1219045 —UN—11JUL16
112321
PN=6
Introduction
Continued on next page TX,JDEULA -19-11JUL16-2/3
TX1219046 —UN—11JUL16
112321
PN=7
Introduction
TX,JDEULA -19-11JUL16-3/3
TX1219047 —UN—14JUL16
112321
PN=8
Introduction
Continued on next page TX,ECWS,ISUZU -19-24FEB20-1/2
Non-Road Diesel Engine Emission Control System Warranty Statement
EMISSION RELATED SYSTEM DEFECT WARRANTY
Isuzu Motors America LLC. warrants to the initial owner and subsequent owner of a certied non-road diesel engine (powering non-road
machines and equipment), that such engine is:
1. Designed, built, and equipped so as to conform, at the time of sale, to all applicable regulations adapted by the United States Environmental
Protection Agency (EPA) and the California Air Resource Board (CARB).
2. Free from defects in materials and workmanship in specic emission-related parts:
- For a period of two (2) years or 1,500 hours of operation whichever occurs rst, after date of delivery to the initial owner of non-road
diesel engine less than 19 kW (25 hp).
- For a period of two (2) years or 1,500 hours of operation whichever occurs rst, after date of delivery to the initial owner of non-road diesel
engine for constant speed engine less than 37 kW (50 hp) with rated speeds greater than or equal to 3000 rpm.
- For a period of ve (5) years or 3,000 hours of operation whichever occurs rst, after date of delivery to the initial owner of non-road
diesel engine (19 kW [25 hp] and greater engines) except above constant speed engine.
If an emission-related parts fails during the warranty period, it will be repaired or replaced under warranty and is warranted for the remainder
of the warranty period.
During the terms of this warranty, Isuzu Motors America LLC. will provide, through an Isuzu engine dealer or other establishment authorized by
Isuzu Motors America LLC., repair or replacement of any warranted parts at no charge to the non-road diesel engine owner.
In an emergency, repairs may be performed at any service establishment, or by the owner, using any replacement part.
Isuzu Motors America LLC. will reimburse the owner for their expenses, including diagnostic charges for such emergency repair. These expenses
shall not exceed Isuzu Motors America LLC. suggested retail price for all warranted parts replaced, and labor charges based on Isuzu Motors
America LLC. recommended time allowance for the warranty repair and the geographically appropriate hourly labor rate.
A part not available within 30 days or a repair not being complete within 30 days constitute an emergency.
As a condition of reimbursement, replaced parts and receipt invoices must be presented at a place of business of an authorized Isuzu engine
dealer or other establishment authorized by Isuzu Motors America LLC.
This warranty covers the following emission-related parts and components for Common Rail System.
Fuel Metering System
•
Fuel Supply Pump
•
Fuel Common Rail
•
Injector
•
Injection Pipe
Air Induction System
•
Intake Manifold
•
Turbocharger
•
Charge Air Cooler and Charge Air Cooler
Hosing
Exhasut Gas Recirculation (EGR) System
•
EGR Valve
•
EGR Cooler
Thermal Reactor System
•
Exhaust Manifold
•
Diesel Oxydization Catalyst (build within
DPD)
Particulate Controls
•
Particulate Filter (build within DPD)
Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) System
•
PCV
Miscellaneous Items Used in Above Systems
•
Engine Coolant Temperature (ETC) Sensor
•
Intake Manifold Temperature (IMT) Sensor
•
Boost Pressure Sensor
•
Barometric Pressure Sensor
•
Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor
•
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
•
Exhaust Gas Temperature Sensor (in front of
DOC)
•
Exhaust Gas Temperature Sensor (behind of
DOC)
•
Engine Speed Sensor (Ne)
•
Differential Pressure Sensor
•
Common Rail Pressure Sensor
•
Cylinder Detection Sensor
•
Fuel Temperature Sensor
•
Engine Control Module
•
Turbo Controller
•
Emission Control Label
If failure of one of these components results in failure of another part, both will be covered by this warranty. Any replacement part may be used for
maintenance or repairs. The owner should ensure that such parts are equivalent in design and durability to Isuzu genuine parts. Use of non-genuine
Isuzu parts does not invalidate the warranty. However, Isuzu Motors America LLC. is not liable for parts which are not genuine Isuzu parts.
112321
PN=9
Introduction
TX,ECWS,ISUZU -19-24FEB20-2/2
LIMITATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITIES
These warranties are subject to the following:
ISUZU MOTORS AMERICA LLC. RESPONSIBILITIES
During the emission warranty period, if a defect in material or workmanship of a warranted part or component is found, Isuzu Motors America
LLC. will provide:
•
New, remanufactured, or repaired parts and/or components required to correct the defect. Note: Items replaced under this warranty become
the property of Isuzu Motors America LLC.
•
Labor, during normal working hours, required to make the warranty repair. This includes diagnosis and labor to remove and install the
engine, if necessary.
OWNER RESPONSIBILITIES
During the emission warranty period, the owner is responsible for:
•
The performance of all required maintenance. A warranty claim will not be denied because the scheduled maintenance was not performed.
However, if the lack of required maintenance was the reason for the repair, then the claim will be denied.
•
Premium of overtime costs.
•
Costs to investigate complaints, which are not caused by a defect in Isuzu Motors America LLC. material
or workmanship.
•
Providing timely notice of a warrantable failure and promptly making the product available for repair.
LIMITATIONS
Isuzu Motors America LLC. is not responsible for resultant damages to an emission-related part or component resulting from:
•
Any application or installation Isuzu Motors America LLC. deems improper as explained in the Instruction Manual.
•
Attachments, accessory items, or parts not authorized for use by Isuzu Motors America LLC.
•
Improper non-road diesel engine maintenance, repair, or abuse.
•
Owner’s unreasonable delay in making the product available after being notied of a potential product problem. This warranty is in addition to
Isuzu Motors America LLC. standard warranty, applicable to the non-road diesel engine product involved.
Remedies under this warranty are limited to the provision of material and services as specied herein. Isuzu Motors America LLC. is not
responsible for incidental or consequential damages such as downtime or loss use of engine powered equipment.
112321
PN=10
Introduction
Continued on next page TX,CALIFORNIA,ECWS,ISUZU -19-24FEB20-1/2
Off-Road Compression-Ignition Engines CALIFORNIA EMISSIONS CONTROL WARRANTY
STATEMENT
WARRANTY RIGHTS AND OBLIGATIONS
The California Air Resources Board (CARB) and Isuzu Motors America LLC. are pleased to explain the emission control system warranty to
meet the State's 2010 and later engines. In California, new off-road compression ignition engines must be designed, built, and equipped
to meet the State’s stringent anti-smog standards.
Isuzu Motors America LLC. must warrant the emission control system on engine for the periods of time listed below provided there has been no
abuse, neglect, or improper maintenance of engine.
Emission control system may include parts such as the fuel injection system and air induction system. Also included may be hoses, belts,
connectors, and other emission-related assemblies.
Where a warrantable condition exists, Isuzu Motors America LLC. will repair off-road compression ignition engine, at no cost, including diagnosis,
parts, and labor.
MANUFACTURER’S WARRANTY COVERAGE:
The 2010 and later off-road compression-ignition engines:
1. Power rating at 19 kW (25 hp) and greater engines.
For a period of ve (5) years or 3,000 hours of operation, whichever occurs rst, after date of delivery to the initial owner.
2. Power rating at less than 19 kW (25 hp), and for constant speed engines rated under 37 kW (50 hp) with rated speeds greater than and
equal to 3,000 rpm engines.
For a period of two (2) years of 1,500 hours of operation, whichever occurs rst, after date of delivery to the initial owner.
If any emission related part on engine is defective, the part will be repaired or replaced by Isuzu Motors America LLC.
OWNER’S WARRANTY RESPONSIBILITIES:
•
As the off-road compression-ignition engine owner, responsibility for the performance of required maintenance listed in owner's manual
is necessary. Isuzu Motors America LLC. recommends that all receipts covering maintenance of off-road compression-ignition engine
are retained, but Isuzu Motors America LLC. cannot deny warranty solely for the lack of receipts or for failure to ensure the performance
of all scheduled maintenance.
•
As the off-road compression-ignition engine owner, be aware that Isuzu Motors America LLC. may deny the warranty coverage if off-road
compression-ignition engine or a part has failed due to abuse, neglect, improper maintenance, or unapproved modications.
•
The engine is designed to operate on ultra low sulfur diesel fuel only. Use of any other fuel may result in engine no longer operating in
compliance with California's emissions requirements.
•
Owner is responsible for initiating the warranty process. The CARB suggests that the off-road compression-ignition engine is presented to an
Isuzu Motors America LLC. dealer as soon as problem exists. The warranty repairs should be completed by the dealer as expeditiously as
possible.
If there are any questions regarding warranty rights and responsibilities, contact Isuzu Motors America LLC. PowerTrain Division at 46401
Commerce Center Drive Plymouth, MI 48170 (Tel. No. : 734-582-9470).
112321
PN=11
Introduction
TX,CALIFORNIA,ECWS,ISUZU -19-24FEB20-2/2
DX,EMISSIONS,PERFORM -19-12JAN18-1/1
MAINTENANCE RECOMMENDATION:
Some Isuzu Motors America LLC. off-road engines are certied by the United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and California Air
Resource Board (CARB) to comply with smoke and gaseous emission standards prescribed by Federal laws at the time of maintenance.
The engine is certied if it has a special certication label. An Isuzu engine dealer can also inform if the engine is certied.
Efciency of emission control and engine performance depends on adherence to proper operation and maintenance recommendations and use of
recommended fuels and lubricating oils. It is recommended that major adjustments and repair be made by an authorized Isuzu engine dealer.
Various chemical fuel additives, which claim to reduce visible smoke, are available commercially. Although additives have been used by
individuals to solve some isolated smoke problems in the eld, they are not recommended for general use.
Federal smoke regulations require that engines be certied without smoke depressants.
The corrective step taken immediately on discovery of worn parts, which may affect emission levels, will help assure proper operation of emission
control systems. The use of genuine Isuzu parts recommended.
Suppliers of non-Isuzu parts must assure the owner that the use of such parts will not adversely affect emission levels.
Regular maintenance intervals, along with special emphasis on the following items, are necessary to keep exhaust emissions within acceptable
limit for the useful life of the engine.
Refer to the maintenance intervals. If the engine is operating under severe conditions, adjust the maintenance schedule accordingly. See an
authorized Isuzu engine dealer to help analyze the specic application, operating environment, and maintenance adjustments.
The following is an explanation of maintenance for emission-related components.
See the Maintenance Schedule for the specic interval for the following items.
FUEL INJECTION PUMP OR NOZZLES—Fuel injection pumps or nozzles are subject to tip wear as a result to fuel contamination. This damage
can cause an increase in fuel consumption, the engine to emit black smoke misre, or run rough. Inspect, test, and replace if necessary. Fuel
injection pumps can be tested by an authorized Isuzu engine dealer.
TURBOCHARGER—Check for any unusual sound or vibration in the turbocharger. Inspect inlet and exhaust piping and connections. Check
bearing condition and perform maintenance as described in the Maintenance Schedule.
Slow engine response and low power may indicate a need for adjustment or repair. An Isuzu engine dealer is equipped with the necessary
tools, personnel, and perform this service. Owner is encouraged to keep adequate maintenance records, but the absence of such, in and
of itself, will not invalidate the warranty.
The machine or equipment owner may perform routine maintenance, repairs, and other non-warranty work or have it done at any repair facility.
Such non-warranty work need not be performed at a designated warranty station in order for the warranty to remain in force.
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE—EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM WARRANTY:
Isuzu Motors America LLC. aims to ensure that the Emission Control Systems Warranty is properly administrated. In the event that the warranty
service under the Emission Control System Warranty is not upheld, call or write:
Isuzu Motors America LLC.
PowerTrain Division
46401 Commerce Center Drive Plymouth, MI 48170
Tel: 734-582-9470
Authorized dealers are recommended for major maintenance and repair work as they are staffed with trained personnel, proper tools, and are
aware of the latest maintenance methods and procedures. Owners and others who desire to perform their own work should purchase a Service
Manual and obtain current information from an Isuzu engine dealer.
Emissions Performance and Tampering
Operation and Maintenance
The engine, including the emissions control system,
shall be operated, used, and maintained in accordance
with the instructions provided in this manual to
maintain the emissions performance of the engine
within the requirements applicable to the engine's
category/certication.
Tampering
No deliberate tampering with or misuse of the engine
emissions control system shall take place; in particular
with regard to deactivating or not maintaining an exhaust
gas recirculation (EGR) or a DEF dosing system.
Tampering with an engine’s emissions control system
will void the European Union (EU) type approval and
applicable emissions-related warranties.
112321
PN=12
Introduction
Continued on next page DX,EMISSIONS,CO2 -19-20JUL21-1/2
Carbon Dioxide Emissions (CO₂₂
₂
)
RG33429 —UN—04FEB21
SAMPLE - Engine Emissions Label
To identify the carbon dioxide (CO₂) output, locate the
engine emissions label. Find the appropriate family on the
emissions label and reference the chart.
NOTE: The rst letter of the family number is not utilized
for family identication on the chart.
Emissions Label Family
CO₂₂
₂
Result
_JDXL02.9323
952 g/kW-hr
_JDXL02.9327
784 g/kW-hr
_JDXL04.5337
819 g/kW-hr
_JDXL04.5338
682 g/kW-hr
_JDXL04.5304
1004 g/kW-hr
_JDXN04.5174
792 g/kW-hr
_JDXL06.8324
720 g/kW-hr
_JDXL06.8328
683 g/kW-hr
_JDXL06.8336
701 g/kW-hr
_JDXN06.8175
771 g/kW-hr
_JDXL09.0319
646 g/kW-hr
_JDXL09.0325
695 g/kW-hr
_JDXL09.0329
657 g/kW-hr
_JDXL09.0333
650 g/kW-hr
_JDXL13.5326
684 g/kW-hr
_JDXL13.6320
651 g/kW-hr
_JDXL13.5340
632 g/kW-hr
_JDXL18.0341
683 g/kW-hr
F28
870 g/kW-hr
F32
710 g/kW-hr
F33
677 g/kW-hr
This CO₂ measurement results from testing over a xed
test cycle under laboratory conditions a(n) (parent) engine
representative of the engine type (engine family) and shall
not imply or express any guarantee of the performance
of a particular engine.
112321
PN=13
Introduction
TX,FCC -19-20FEB20-1/1
FCC Notications to User
FCC Notication
These devices comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
These devices may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) these devices must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
These devices must be operated as supplied by John
Deere Ag Management Solutions. Any changes or
modications made to these devices without the express
written approval of John Deere Ag Management Solutions
may void the user’s authority to operate these devices.
Modular Telematics Gateway and Satellite Module
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with
the limits for Class B digital devices, pursuant to part 15
of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses,
and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if not installed
and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. However,
no guarantee shall be made that interference will not occur
in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television reception, which
can be determined by turning the equipment off and on,
the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by
one or more of the following measures:
•
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
•
Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
•
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit
different from that to which the receiver is connected.
•
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV
technician for help.
112321
PN=14
Introduction
Continued on next page TX,SAR -19-20FEB20-1/4
Service ADVISOR™ Remote (SAR)—SOFTWARE TERMS AND CONDITIONS
IMPORTANT -- READ CAREFULLY: THIS SOFTWARE
LICENSE AGREEMENT IS A LEGAL CONTRACT
BETWEEN YOU AND THE LICENSOR ("LICENSOR")
IDENTIFIED BELOW AND GOVERNS YOUR USE OF
THE SOFTWARE DELIVERED TO YOUR MACHINE
(THE “MACHINE”).
BY INDICATING YOUR ACCEPTANCE ON A DISPLAY
ON THE MACHINE, BY INSTALLING SOFTWARE
TO THE MACHINE, OR USING SOFTWARE ON THE
MACHINE, YOU ARE ACCEPTING AND AGREEING TO
THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT WITH
RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE (THE "Software") THAT
IS DELIVERED TO YOUR MACHINE. YOU AGREE THAT
THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT, INCLUDING
THE WARRANTY DISCLAIMERS, LIMITATIONS OF
LIABILITY AND TERMINATION PROVISIONS BELOW,
IS BINDING UPON YOU, AND UPON ANY COMPANY
ON WHOSE BEHALF YOU USE THE SOFTWARE
AS WELL AS THE EMPLOYEES OF ANY SUCH
COMPANY (COLLECTIVELY REFERRED TO AS
"YOU" IN THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT).
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THIS
AGREEMENT, OR IF YOU ARE NOT AUTHORIZED
TO ACCEPT THESE TERMS ON BEHALF OF YOUR
COMPANY OR ITS EMPLOYEES, PLEASE CLICK THE
[Decline] ICON ON THE DISPLAY ON THE MACHINE
TO DECLINE THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS.
THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT REPRESENTS THE
ENTIRE AGREEMENT CONCERNING THE SOFTWARE
BETWEEN YOU AND THE LICENSOR.
1. Delivery of Software. Software may be delivered to
your Machine by Licensor wirelessly or via an agent of
Licensor, such as a dealer. If it is delivered wirelessly,
you may be responsible for any data transmission fees
incurred due to such delivery.
2. License. Licensor hereby grants to you, and you
accept, a nonexclusive license to use the Software in
machine-readable, object code form, only as authorized
in this License Agreement and the applicable provisions
of the Operators' Manuals, which you agree to review
carefully prior to using the Software. The Software may
be used only on the Machine to which it was initially
delivered. You agree that you will not assign, sublicense,
transfer, pledge, lease, rent, or share your rights under
this License Agreement, except that you may permanently
transfer all of your rights under this License Agreement
in connection with the sale of the Machine on which the
Software covered by this Agreement is installed.
3. Licensor's Rights. You acknowledge and agree that
the Software is proprietary to Licensor and is protected
under copyright law. You further acknowledge and agree
that all right, title, and interests in and to the Software,
including associated intellectual property rights, are and
shall remain with Licensor. This License Agreement does
not convey to you any title or interest in or to the Software,
but only a limited right of use revocable in accordance
with the terms of this License Agreement. You agree
that you will not: (a) reverse assemble, reverse compile,
modify, or otherwise translate the Software, or attempt to
defeat the copyright protection and application enabling
mechanisms therein; (b) copy or reproduce the Software;
or, (b) remove or obliterate any copyright, trademark or
other proprietary rights notices from the Software. You
also agree not to permit any third party acting under your
control to do any of the foregoing.
4. License Fees. The license fees paid by you, if any, are
paid in consideration of the licenses granted under this
License Agreement.
5. Limited Warranty. Licensor warrants, for your
benet alone and not for the benet of any other party,
that during the "Warranty Period" dened below, the
Software will operate substantially in accordance with the
applicable functional specications ("Specications")
set forth in the Operators' Manuals. If, prior to expiration
of the Warranty Period, the Software fails to perform
substantially in accordance with the Specications, you
may return the Machine to the place of purchase for
repair or replacement of the non-performing Software.
The Warranty Period is ninety (90) days from the date of
installation of the Software or the duration of the warranty
period of the component of the Machine on which the
Software is installed, whichever is longer. The Software
Warranty Period does not affect the warranty period of the
Machine itself or any component thereof.
6. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES. YOU HEREBY
AGREE THAT THE LIMITED WARRANTY PROVIDED
ABOVE (THE "LIMITED WARRANTY") CONSTITUTES
YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR ANY
PROBLEM WHATSOEVER WITH THE SOFTWARE.
EXCEPT AS PROVIDED IN THE LIMITED WARRANTY,
THE SOFTWARE IS LICENSED “AS IS,” AND
LICENSOR, ITS AFFILIATES AND THIRD PARTY
SUPPLIERS EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM AND YOU
EXPRESSLY WAIVE, RELEASE AND RENOUNCE ALL
WARRANTIES ARISING BY LAW OR OTHERWISE
WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO: ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE; ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY ARISING
FROM COURSE OF PERFORMANCE, COURSE OF
DEALING OR TRADE USAGE; ANY WARRANTY OF
TITLE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT; AND, ANY OTHER
WARRANTY ARISING UNDER ANY THEORY OF
LAW, INCLUDING TORT, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
LIABILITY, CONTRACT OR OTHER LEGAL OR
EQUITABLE THEORY. NO REPRESENTATION OR
OTHER AFFIRMATION OF FACT INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, STATEMENTS REGARDING SUITABILITY
FOR USE, SHALL BE DEEMED TO BE A WARRANTY
BY LICENSOR OR ANY OF ITS AFFILIATES OR THIRD
PARTY SUPPLIERS. LICENSOR DOES NOT WARRANT
THAT THE SOFTWARE IS ERROR-FREE OR WILL
OPERATE WITHOUT INTERRUPTION.
112321
PN=15
Introduction
Continued on next page TX,SAR -19-20FEB20-2/4
7. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. EXCEPT AS SET
FORTH IN THE LIMITED WARRANTY, UNDER NO
CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL LICENSOR, ITS AFFILIATES
OR ITS THIRD PARTY SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE TO
YOU OR TO ANY THIRD PARTIES FOR DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES OF ANY KIND, INCLUDING ANY LOSS
OR DAMAGE CAUSED BY THE SOFTWARE; ANY
PARTIAL OR TOTAL FAILURE OF THE SOFTWARE;
PERFORMANCE, NONPERFORMANCE OR DELAYS
IN CONNECTION WITH ANY INSTALLATION,
MAINTENANCE, WARRANTY OR REPAIRS OF THE
SOFTWARE, DAMAGES FOR CROP LOSS, DAMAGE
TO LAND, LOST PROFITS, LOSS OF BUSINESS OR
LOSS OF GOODWILL, LOSS OF USE OF EQUIPMENT
OR SERVICES OR DAMAGES TO BUSINESS OR
REPUTATION ARISING FROM THE PERFORMANCE
OR NON-PERFORMANCE OF ANY ASPECT OF THIS
AGREEMENT, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT OR
OTHERWISE, AND WHETHER OR NOT LICENSOR,
ITS AFFILIATES OR ITS THIRD PARTY SUPPLIERS
HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGES. IN NO EVENT SHALL LICENSOR’S
CUMULATIVE LIABILITY TO YOU OR TO ANY OTHER
PARTY FOR ANY LOSSES OR DAMAGES RESULTING
FROM ANY CLAIMS, LAWSUITS, DEMANDS, OR
ACTIONS ARISING FROM OR RELATING TO USE OF
THE SOFTWARE EXCEED YOUR TOTAL PAYMENT
FOR THE MACHINE AND FOR THE LICENSE OF THE
SOFTWARE.
8. Termination of License. Licensor may terminate the
license granted under this Agreement upon written notice
of termination provided to you if you violate any material
term of this Agreement pertaining to your use of the
Software or Licensor's rights, including, without limitation,
the provisions of Sections 2 and 3 above.
9. Compliance with Law. You agree that you will use the
Software in accordance with United States law and the
laws of the country in which you are located, as applicable,
including foreign trade control laws and regulations. The
Software may be subject to export and other foreign
trade controls restricting re-sales and/or transfers to
other countries and parties. By accepting the terms of
this Agreement, you acknowledge that you understand
that the Software may be so controlled, including, but
not limited to, by the Export Administration Regulations
and/or the foreign trade control regulations of the Treasury
Department of the United States. Any other provision
of this Agreement to the contrary notwithstanding, you
agree that the Software will not be resold, re-exported or
otherwise transferred. The Software remains subject to
applicable U.S. laws.
10. Indemnication. You agree to defend, indemnify
and hold Licensor, its afliates and third party supplier,
and their, ofcers, directors, employees, agents and
representatives (each an "Indemnied Party"), harmless
from and against all claims, demands proceedings,
injuries, liabilities, losses, or costs and expenses (including
reasonable legal fees) brought by any third party against
any such persons arising from or in connection with your
use of the Software, regardless of whether such losses
are caused, wholly or partially, by any negligence, breach
of contract or other fault of an Indemnied Party.
11. Costs of Litigation. If any claim or action is brought
by either party to this License Agreement against the other
party regarding the subject matter hereof, the prevailing
party shall be entitled to recover, in addition to any other
relief granted, reasonable attorney fees and expenses
of litigation.
12. Severability and Waiver. Should any term of this
Agreement be declared void or unenforceable by any
court of competent jurisdiction, such declaration shall
have no effect on the remaining terms hereof. The failure
of either party to enforce any rights granted hereunder
or to take action against the other party in the event of
any breach hereunder shall not be deemed a waiver
by that party as to subsequent enforcement of rights of
subsequent actions in the event of future breaches.
13. Language Clause. If you are a resident of Canada
at the time you accept this Agreement, then the parties
hereby acknowledge that they have required this
Agreement, and all other documents relating hereto,
be drawn up in the English language only. Les parties
reconnaissent avoir demandé que le présent contrat ainsi
que toute autre entente ou avis requis ou permis à être
conclu ou donné en vertu des stipulations du présent
contrat, soient rédigés en langue anglaise seulement. If
you are a resident of any country other than the United
States, Canada, Great Britain, Australia or New Zealand
then you agree as follows: there may be a translated
version of this Agreement. If there is an inconsistency
or contradiction between the translated version and the
English version of this Agreement, the English version of
this Agreement shall control.
14. Assignment by Licensor. Licensor may assign this
Agreement without your prior consent to any company
or entity afliated with Licensor, or by an assignment
associated with a corporate restructuring, merger or
acquisition.
15. Governing Law and Forum. This Agreement will
be governed by and construed in accordance with the
substantive laws identied in the table in Section 18, below
The respective courts of the venue identied in the table
in Section 18, below, for the location of the Machine shall
have non-exclusive jurisdiction over all disputes relating
to this Agreement. This Agreement will not be governed
by the conict of law rules of any jurisdiction or the United
Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale
of Goods, the application of which is expressly excluded.
16. Specic Exceptions.
112321
PN=16
Introduction
Continued on next page TX,SAR -19-20FEB20-3/4
16.1 Limited Warranty for Users Residing in European
Economic Area Countries or Switzerland. If you
obtained the Software in any European Economic Area
country or Switzerland, and you usually reside in such
country, then Section 6 does not apply, instead, Licensor
warrants that the Software provides the functionalities
set forth in the Operators Manuals (the "agreed upon
functionalities") for the Warranty Period. As used
in this Section, "Warranty Period" means one (1)
year. Non-substantial variation from the agreed upon
functionalities shall not be considered and does not
establish any warranty rights. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY
DOES NOT APPLY TO SOFTWARE PROVIDED TO
YOU FREE OF CHARGE, FOR EXAMPLE, UPDATES,
OR SOFTWARE THAT HAS BEEN ALTERED BY YOU,
TO THE EXTENT SUCH ALTERATIONS CAUSED A
DEFECT. To make a warranty claim, during the Warranty
Period you must return, at our expense, the Software and
proof of purchase to the location where you obtained it.
If the functionalities of the Software vary substantially
from the agreed upon functionalities, Licensor is entitled
-- by way of re-performance and at its own discretion --
to repair or replace the Software. If this fails, you are
entitled to a reduction of the purchase price (reduction)
or to cancel the purchase agreement (rescission). For
further warranty information, please contact Licensor at
the address listed in Section 18.
16.2 Limitation of Liability for Users Residing in
European Economic Area Countries or Switzerland.
(a) If you obtained the Software in any European
Economic Area country or Switzerland, and you usually
reside in such country, then Sections 7 and 10 do not
apply, Instead, Licensor's statutory liability for damages
shall be limited as follows: (a) Licensor shall be liable only
up to the amount of damages as typically foreseeable
at the time of entering into this Agreement in respect
of damages caused by a slightly negligent breach of a
material contractual obligation and (b) Licensor shall
not be liable for damages caused by a slightly negligent
breach of a non-material contractual obligation.
(b) The aforesaid limitation of liability shall not apply to any
mandatory statutory liability, in particular, to liability under
the German Product Liability Act, liability for assuming a
specic guarantee or liability for culpably caused personal
injuries.
(c) You are required to take all reasonable measures to
avoid and reduce damages, in particular to make back-up
copies of the Software and your computer data subject to
the provisions of this Agreement.
17. Representations of Licensee. BY ACCEPTING
THIS AGREEMENT, YOU: (A) ACKNOWLEDGE
THAT YOU HAVE READ AND UNDERSTAND THIS
AGREEMENT; (B) REPRESENT THAT YOU HAVE THE
AUTHORITY TO ENTER INTO THIS AGREEMENT; (C)
AGREE THAT THIS AGREEMENT IS ENFORCEABLE
AGAINST YOU AND ANY LEGAL ENTITY THAT
OBTAINED THE SOFTWARE AND ON WHOSE BEHALF
IT IS USED; AND, (D) AGREE TO PERFORM THE
OBLIGATIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT.
18. Identication of Licensor and Notices. The
Licensor is the entity identied in the table below. All
notices to Licensor shall be sent by certied or registered
mail to the corresponding address for the Licensor given
below. In each case a copy of the notice shall also be
sent to John Deere Intelligent Solutions Group, ATTN:
Legal, 4140 114th Street Urbandale, IA 50322 U.S.A. All
notices to Licensor shall be effective upon receipt. All
notices required to be given to you shall, in Licensor’s sole
discretion, either be sent via certied or registered mail
to the address given to Licensor in connection with your
purchase of the Machine. Either method of notication
used by Licensor shall be effective upon dispatch. You
agree to notify Licensor of any change in your address in
the manner set forth above.
Place of Purchase
Address
Governing Law
Venue
United States of America John Deere Shared Services, Inc.
One John Deere Place
Moline, IL 61265 U.S.A.
State of Illinois, USA Rock Island County, Illinois,
USA
Argentina
Industrias John Deere Argentina, S.A.
Casilla de Correo 80
Rosario (Santa Fe), 2000, Argentina
Province of Santa Fe, Argentina Province of Santa Fe, Argentina
Australia or New Zealand
John Deere Limited (Australia)
P.O. Box 2022
Crestmead, Queensland, Australia
4132
State of Queensland, Australia State of Queensland, Australia
Canada
John Deere Limited
295 Hunter Road
P.O. Box 1000
Grimsby, ON L9K 1M3
Province of Ontario, Canada Province of Ontario, Canada
Chile John Deere Water, S.A.
Cerro Santa Lucia 9990
Quilicura, Santiago, Chile
Province of Santiago, Chile Province of Santiago, Chile
112321
PN=17
Introduction
TX,SAR -19-20FEB20-4/4
TX,JDOBS -19-20FEB20-1/1
Mexico
Industrias John Deere, S.A. de C.V.
Boulevard Diaz Ordaz #500
Garza Garcia
Nuevo Leon 66210, Mexico
State of Nuevo Leon, Mexico State of Nuevo Leon, Mexico
Europe
ETIC
Strassburgerallee 5
67657 Kaiserslautern, Germany
Federal Republic of Germany Kaiserslautern, Germany
Other The John Deere entity identied
for the location of your Machine
on www.JDLink.com.
The John Deere entity identied
for the location of your Machine
on www.JDLink.com.
The John Deere entity identied
for the location of your Machine
on www.JDLink.com.
John Deere Online Bookstore
The Technical Service Information Bookstore is available
for John Deere Construction & Forestry, Hitachi, and
Waratah products.
Technical information can be purchased from John Deere.
Publications are available in print, PDF download, or PDF
on DVD formats.
Orders can be made using one of the following:
•
John Deere Technical Information Store:
http://www.johndeeretechinfo.com/
•
Call 1-866-213-3373
•
Contact an authorized John Deere dealer
Available information includes:
•
PARTS CATALOGS listing service parts available
for machines with exploded view illustrations to help
identify the correct parts. It is also useful in assembling
and disassembling.
•
OPERATOR’S MANUALS providing safety, operating,
maintenance, and service information.
•
TECHNICAL MANUALS outlining service information
for machines. Included are specications, illustrated
assembly and disassembly procedures, hydraulic oil
ow diagrams, and wiring diagrams. Some products
have separate manuals for repair and diagnostic
information. Some components, such as engines, are
available in a separate component technical manual.
TX1213033 —UN—07APR16
John Deere Online Bookstore
•
TRAINING GUIDES AND VIDEOS covering
components, preventative maintenance, operation
safety, and demonstration tips.
112321
PN=18
Introduction
Continued on next page TX,TM,FAX -19-03JUL01-1/2
Technical Information Feedback Form
We need your help to continually improve our technical
publications. Please copy this page and FAX or mail your
comments, ideas and improvements.
SEND TO:
John Deere Dubuque Works
18600 South John Deere Road
Attn: Publications, Dept. 324
Dubuque, IA 52004-0538
USA
FAX
NUMBER:
1-563-589-5800 (USA)
Publication Number:
Page Number:
Ideas, Comments:
Name:
Phone:
112321
PN=19
Introduction
TX,TM,FAX -19-03JUL01-2/2
Email Address:
THANK YOU!
112321
PN=20
Contents
Page
Safety—Safety and Operator Conveniences
Safety and Operator Convenience Features .....1-1-1
Safety—General Precautions
Recognize Safety Information ...........................1-2-1
Understand Signal Words..................................1-2-1
Follow Safety Instructions..................................1-2-2
Wear Protective Clothing...................................1-2-2
Protect Against Noise ........................................1-2-3
Inspect Machine ................................................1-2-3
General Precautions for Cab .............................1-2-3
Control Pattern ..................................................1-2-3
Prepare for Emergencies...................................1-2-4
Stay Clear of Moving Parts................................1-2-4
Prevent Parts From Flying.................................1-2-5
Prevent Fires .....................................................1-2-6
In Case of Machine Fire ....................................1-2-7
Prevent Burns....................................................1-2-7
Prevent Battery Explosions ...............................1-2-8
Beware of Exhaust Fumes ................................1-2-8
Beware of Asbestos and Silicon Dust
and Other Contamination ..............................1-2-8
Handle Fluids Safely−Avoid Fires .....................1-2-9
Handle Chemical Products Safely .....................1-2-9
Avoid High-Pressure Fluids .............................1-2-10
Avoid Injury from Attachment Falling
Accident ......................................................1-2-10
Dispose of Waste Properly ..............................1-2-11
Notes for Aftertreatment Device ......................1-2-11
Precautions for Communication Terminal........1-2-11
Safety—Operating Precautions
Use Handholds and Steps.................................1-3-1
Fasten Your Seat Belt........................................1-3-1
Heated and Ventilated Operator’s Seat.............1-3-1
Adjust the Operator's Seat ................................1-3-2
Ensure Safety Before Rising from or
Leaving Operator’s Seat ...............................1-3-2
Operate Only from Operator's Seat...................1-3-2
Prevent Acid Burns............................................1-3-3
Jump Starting ....................................................1-3-3
Install OPG Guard .............................................1-3-4
Keep the Operator Protective Structure
(OPS) in Place ..............................................1-3-4
Notes on Protection of Operator’s
Station when the Machine Rolls Over ...........1-3-5
Restriction of Attachment Installation ................1-3-6
Page
Precautions for Operations................................1-3-6
Investigate Job Site Beforehand........................1-3-7
Move and Operate Machine Safely ...................1-3-8
Keep Person Clear from Working Area .............1-3-8
Keep Riders off Machine ...................................1-3-9
Provide Signals for Jobs Involving
Multiple Machines .........................................1-3-9
Conrm Direction of Machine to be Driven........1-3-9
Drive Machine Safely.......................................1-3-10
Operating on Slopes........................................1-3-11
Avoid Injury from Rollaway Accidents .............1-3-12
Avoid Injury from Back-Over and Swing
Accidents.....................................................1-3-12
Avoid Tipping ...................................................1-3-13
Avoid Undercutting ..........................................1-3-13
Avoid Power Lines...........................................1-3-14
Operate with Caution.......................................1-3-14
Never Ride Attachment ...................................1-3-14
Operate Boom With Care ................................1-3-14
Add and Operate Attachments Safely .............1-3-15
Never Undercut a High Bank...........................1-3-15
Dig with Caution ..............................................1-3-15
Object Handling ...............................................1-3-16
Protect Against Flying Debris ..........................1-3-16
Precautions for Lightning.................................1-3-17
Park Machine Safely........................................1-3-17
Transport Safely ..............................................1-3-18
Saw Chain Hazard...........................................1-3-19
Safety—Maintenance Precautions
Practice Safe Maintenance................................1-4-1
Warn Others of Service Work............................1-4-2
Support Machine Properly .................................1-4-2
Replace Rubber Hoses Periodically ..................1-4-2
Precautions for Welding and Grinding...............1-4-3
Avoid Heating Near Pressurized Fluid Lines .....1-4-3
Avoid Applying Heat to Lines
Containing Flammable Fluids........................1-4-3
Precautions for Handling Accumulator
and Gas Damper...........................................1-4-3
Remove Paint Before Welding or Heating.........1-4-4
Service Air Conditioning System Safely ............1-4-4
Chain Shot Guard Inspection ............................1-4-5
Safety—Safety Signs and Other Instructions
Safety Signs and Other Instructions ..................1-5-1
Continued on next page
Original Instructions. All information, illustrations and specications in this
manual are based on the latest information available at the time of publication.
The right is reserved to make changes at any time without notice.
COPYRIGHT © 2021
DEERE & COMPANY
Moline, Illinois
All rights reserved.
A John Deere ILLUSTRUCTION ™ Manual
Previous Editions
Copyright © 2018, 2019, 2020
i
112321
PN=1
Contents
Page
Operation—Operator's Station
Pedals, Levers, and Panels...............................2-1-1
Switch Panel......................................................2-1-2
Switch Panel Functions .....................................2-1-3
Rear Panel.........................................................2-1-4
Horn Button .......................................................2-1-5
Power Boost Button...........................................2-1-5
Pilot Shutoff Lever .............................................2-1-6
Engine Stop Switch ...........................................2-1-6
Left Console ......................................................2-1-7
Travel Alarm and Travel Alarm Cancel Switch ..2-1-7
Cab Dome Light Switch .....................................2-1-8
Horn Switch—Processor Only ...........................2-1-8
Reversing Fan Switch—If Equipped..................2-1-8
Max Speed Program Switch—If Equipped ........2-1-9
Hydraulic Oil Tank Pressure Vent
Switch—If Equipped....................................2-1-10
Right Console ..................................................2-1-11
Aftertreatment Device Regeneration Switch....2-1-12
Service and Access Lights Switch—If
Equipped .....................................................2-1-13
Service ADVISOR™ Remote (SAR) Switch....2-1-14
USB Charge Port—If Equipped .......................2-1-15
Attachment Combo Switch—If Equipped ........2-1-16
Cab Heater and Air Conditioner ......................2-1-17
Selecting Display Between Celsius and
Fahrenheit ...................................................2-1-18
Operating the AM/FM Radio............................2-1-19
Satellite Radio—If Equipped............................2-1-21
Hydraulic Oil Level Alarm—If Equipped ..........2-1-23
Fire Extinguisher Mounting Location ...............2-1-24
Alternative Exit.................................................2-1-24
Adjusting the Air Suspension Seat ..................2-1-26
Adjusting the Mechanical Suspension
Seat—If Equipped .......................................2-1-28
Adjusting Pilot Control Lever Console Height ..2-1-28
Adjusting Pull-Down Sunshades—If
Equipped .....................................................2-1-29
Side Monitor—If Equipped...............................2-1-30
Operation—Monitor Operation
Monitor...............................................................2-2-1
Monitor Functions ..............................................2-2-2
Aftertreatment Indicators Overview ...................2-2-4
Monitor Start-Up ................................................2-2-5
Main Menu.........................................................2-2-6
Main Menu—Alarm List .....................................2-2-7
Main Menu—Air Conditioner ...........................2-2-14
Main Menu—Radio..........................................2-2-16
Main Menu—Setting Menu ..............................2-2-17
Main Menu—Setting Menu—Date and Time...2-2-18
Main Menu—Setting Menu—Attach-
ment Adjustment—Processor Only .............2-2-18
Main Menu—Setting Menu—Attach-
ment Name Input.........................................2-2-19
Page
Main Menu—Setting Menu—Auto-
Shutdown ....................................................2-2-19
Main Menu—Setting Menu—Aftertreat-
ment Device Regeneration Inhibit ...............2-2-20
Main Menu—Setting Menu—Sub
Meter Selection ...........................................2-2-21
Main Menu—Setting Menu—Rear
View Camera Monitor..................................2-2-22
Main Menu—Setting Menu—Display
Item Selection .............................................2-2-23
Main Menu—Setting Menu—Bright-
ness Adjustment..........................................2-2-23
Main Menu—Setting Menu—Language ..........2-2-23
Main Menu—Setting Menu—Unit Selection ....2-2-24
Main Menu—Setting Menu—Main
Menu Sequence Change ............................2-2-24
Main Menu—Information Menu .......................2-2-25
Main Menu—Information Menu—Operation....2-2-26
Main Menu—Information
Menu—Maintenance ...................................2-2-27
Main Menu—Information
Menu—Troubleshooting ..............................2-2-27
Main Menu—Information Menu—Monitoring...2-2-28
Operation—Operating the Machine
Before Starting Work .........................................2-3-1
Operator Ability..................................................2-3-1
Inspect Machine Daily Before Starting ..............2-3-2
Battery Disconnect Switch.................................2-3-3
Starting Engine ..................................................2-3-4
Cold Weather Start Aid......................................2-3-5
Cold Weather Warm-Up ....................................2-3-6
Operate Within Machine Limits..........................2-3-7
Travel Pedals and Levers..................................2-3-7
Control Levers ...................................................2-3-8
Attachment Combo Control Levers—If
Equipped .....................................................2-3-10
Required Machine Stop Warning.....................2-3-10
Aftertreatment Device......................................2-3-12
Aftertreatment Device Regeneration ...............2-3-14
Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR)
System Overview ........................................2-3-16
Service ADVISOR™ Remote (SAR)
Software Delivery Process ..........................2-3-17
Service ADVISOR™ Remote (SAR)
Operation ....................................................2-3-18
Operating in Water and Mud ...........................2-3-19
Driving Up a Steep or Slippery Slope..............2-3-20
Lifting...............................................................2-3-21
Lower Boom With Engine Stopped..................2-3-22
Parking the Machine........................................2-3-23
Loading Machine for Transport........................2-3-24
Towing-Recovery Procedure ...........................2-3-26
Machine Retrieval............................................2-3-26
Lifting the Machine ..........................................2-3-27
Continued on next page
ii
112321
PN=2
Contents
Page
Maintenance—Machine
Required Emission-Related Information............3-1-1
Diesel Fuel.........................................................3-1-1
Diesel Fuel Specications .................................3-1-1
Lubricity of Diesel Fuel ......................................3-1-1
Handling and Storing Diesel Fuel ......................3-1-2
Biodiesel Fuel ....................................................3-1-2
Testing Diesel Fuel ............................................3-1-2
Supplemental Diesel Fuel Additives ..................3-1-3
Fuel Filters.........................................................3-1-3
Minimizing the Effect of Cold Weather
on Diesel Engines .........................................3-1-4
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) — Use in
Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR)
Equipped Engines .........................................3-1-4
Relling Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Tank.........3-1-5
Testing Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)...................3-1-6
Storing Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)...................3-1-6
Disposal of Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) ............3-1-7
Alternative and Synthetic Lubricants .................3-1-7
Mixing of Lubricants...........................................3-1-7
Lubricant Storage ..............................................3-1-7
Diesel Engine Oil—Final Tier 4 and
Stage IV ........................................................3-1-8
Oil Filters ...........................................................3-1-8
Hydraulic Oil ......................................................3-1-9
Swing Gear Case and Travel Gear
Case Oils.....................................................3-1-10
Pump Drive Gear Case Oil ..............................3-1-10
Cab Tilt Oil—Rear Entry Cab Only ..................3-1-11
Track Adjuster, Working Tool Pivot,
Swing Bearing, and Swing Bearing
Gear Grease ...............................................3-1-11
Diesel Engine Coolant .....................................3-1-12
Water Quality for Mixing with Coolant
Concentrate.................................................3-1-12
Operating in Warm Temperature Climates ......3-1-13
Testing Coolant Freeze Point ..........................3-1-13
Disposing of Coolant .......................................3-1-14
Maintenance—Periodic Maintenance
Service Machine at Specied Intervals..............3-2-1
Check the Hour Meter Regularly .......................3-2-1
Prepare Machine for Maintenance ....................3-2-2
Open Access Doors for Service ........................3-2-3
Open Engine Cover for Service.........................3-2-4
Cab Tilting Procedure—Rear Entry Cab Only ...3-2-5
Fuel Tank ...........................................................3-2-5
Fluid Analysis Program Test Kits and
3-Way Coolant Test Kit..................................3-2-6
Service Intervals ................................................3-2-7
Required Parts...................................................3-2-9
Maintenance—As Required
Remove and Clean Fuel Tank Inlet Screen .......3-3-1
Page
Clean or Replace Diesel Exhaust Fluid
(DEF) Tank Fill Screen ..................................3-3-2
Clean Cab Fresh Air and Cab
Recirculating Air Filters .................................3-3-3
Check and Adjust Track Sag .............................3-3-7
Clean Rear Camera Lens—If Equipped ............3-3-8
Clean Radiator Air Inlet Screens .......................3-3-9
Clean Auxiliary Hydraulic Cooler
Screen—If Equipped ...................................3-3-10
Lubricate Door Hinges.....................................3-3-10
Check Windshield Washer Fluid
Level—If Equipped......................................3-3-11
Clean and Tighten Battery Terminals ..............3-3-11
Replace High-Pressure Supply
Filter—If Equipped ......................................3-3-12
Replace Case Drain Filter—If Equipped..........3-3-13
Maintenance—Every 10 Hours or Daily
Check Engine Oil Level .....................................3-4-1
Check Engine Coolant Level .............................3-4-2
Check Hydraulic Tank Oil Level.........................3-4-3
Drain Water and Sediment From Fuel
Tank Sump ....................................................3-4-6
Drain Primary Fuel Filter and Water Separator ..3-4-6
Lubricate Front End Pin Joints ..........................3-4-7
Lubricate Working Tool Pivots—If Equipped .....3-4-9
Maintenance—Initial Service—50 Hours
Check and Adjust Fan Belt Tension...................3-5-1
Maintenance—Every 50 Hours or Weekly
Lubricate Swing Bearing....................................3-6-1
Maintenance—Every 100 Hours
Inspect and Re-Torque Track Hardware............3-7-1
Maintenance—Every 250 Hours
Check Swing Gear Case Oil Level ....................3-8-1
Drain Water and Sediment From
Hydraulic Tank...............................................3-8-2
Check Pump Drive Gear Case Oil Level ...........3-8-4
Check Hybrid Battery Electrolyte
Level—If Equipped........................................3-8-5
Check Travel Gear Case Oil Level ....................3-8-7
Check and Adjust Fan Belt Tension...................3-8-7
Clean Primary Air Cleaner Element...................3-8-8
Take Engine Oil Sample ....................................3-8-8
Maintenance—Every 500 Hours
Lubricate Swing Bearing Gear...........................3-9-1
Check Air Intake Hoses .....................................3-9-1
Drain and Rell Engine Oil and Replace Filter ..3-9-2
Check Cab Tilt Oil Level—Rear Entry
Cab Only .......................................................3-9-3
Clean Cooler Inlet Screen .................................3-9-3
Continued on next page
iii
112321
PN=3
Contents
Page
Clean Radiator, Oil Cooler, Charge Air
Cooler, and Fuel Cooler ................................3-9-4
Take Fluid Samples ...........................................3-9-4
Maintenance—Every 1000 Hours
Drain and Rell Swing Gear Case Oil .............3-10-1
Replace Hydraulic Tank Oil Filter ....................3-10-2
Replace Pilot Oil Filter .....................................3-10-4
Replace Primary Fuel Filter and Water
Separator ....................................................3-10-6
Replace Final Fuel Filter..................................3-10-7
Drain and Rell Pump Drive Gear Case Oil ....3-10-8
Check and Adjust Engine Valve Lash..............3-10-8
Replace Fuel Tank Breather ............................3-10-9
Check Coolant Condition.................................3-10-9
Maintenance—Every 1500 Hours
Replace Air Cleaner Elements ........................3-11-1
Maintenance—Every 2000 Hours
Drain and Rell Travel Gear Case Oil .............3-12-1
Maintenance—Every 4000 Hours
Drain, Flush, and Rell Engine Cooling
System ........................................................3-13-1
Maintenance—Every 4500 Hours
Access Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)
Dosing Unit Filter.........................................3-14-1
Change Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)
Dosing Unit Filter.........................................3-14-2
Maintenance—Every 5000 Hours
Drain and Rell Hydraulic Tank Oil and
Clean Suction Screen .................................3-15-1
Replace Hydraulic Tank Cap Breather
Element .......................................................3-15-3
Drain and Rell Cab Tilt Oil—Rear
Entry Cab Only............................................3-15-4
Miscellaneous—Machine
Clean Machine Regularly ..................................4-1-1
Bleed Fuel System ............................................4-1-1
Bleed Hydraulic System ....................................4-1-2
Inspect and Clean Polycarbonate Windows ......4-1-3
Do Not Service or Adjust Injection
Nozzles or High-Pressure Fuel Pump...........4-1-4
Do Not Service Control Valves,
Cylinders, Pumps, or Motors.........................4-1-4
Precautions for Alternator and Regulator ..........4-1-4
Handling, Checking, and Servicing
Batteries Carefully.........................................4-1-5
Using Battery Charger .......................................4-1-6
Using Booster Batteries—24-Volt System.........4-1-8
Replacing Batteries ...........................................4-1-8
Page
Welding on Machine ..........................................4-1-9
Keep Electronic Control Unit
Connectors Clean .........................................4-1-9
Adding 12-Volt Accessories...............................4-1-9
JDLink™ Machine Monitoring System
(MMS)—If Equipped....................................4-1-10
Replacing Fuses..............................................4-1-11
Fluid Sampling Test Ports................................4-1-12
Keep ROPS Installed Properly ........................4-1-12
Tool Mounting Provisions—If Equipped...........4-1-13
Replacing Bucket Teeth—If Equipped .............4-1-14
Replacing Bucket Tooth
Tip—Heavy-Duty Bucket—If Equipped .......4-1-15
Replacing Bucket Teeth—TK Series—If
Equipped .....................................................4-1-15
Removing the Bucket—If Equipped.................4-1-16
Inspect Seat Belt .............................................4-1-16
Replacing Seat Belt .........................................4-1-17
Track Sag General Information .......................4-1-17
Check Track Shoe Hardware ..........................4-1-18
Hardware Torque Specications......................4-1-18
Unied Inch Bolt and Screw Torque Values.....4-1-19
Metric Bolt and Screw Torque Values..............4-1-20
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Operational Checkout........................................4-2-1
Miscellaneous—Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Procedure ...............................4-3-1
Engine ...............................................................4-3-2
Hydraulic System...............................................4-3-7
Front Attachments Electrical Controls ...............4-3-9
Electrical System .............................................4-3-10
Software Update..............................................4-3-12
Miscellaneous—Storage
Prepare Machine for Storage ............................4-4-1
Monthly Storage Procedure...............................4-4-2
Preparing Engine for Long-Term Storage..........4-4-3
Removing Engine From Long-Term Storage .....4-4-4
Miscellaneous—Machine Numbers
Record Product Identication Number (PIN) .....4-5-1
Record Engine Serial Number...........................4-5-1
Record Travel Motor Serial Numbers ................4-5-2
Record Swing Motor Serial Number ..................4-5-2
Record Hydraulic Pump Serial Number.............4-5-2
Keep Proof of Ownership ..................................4-5-2
Keep Machines Secure .....................................4-5-3
Miscellaneous—Specications
Engine Specications ........................................4-6-1
Drain and Rell Capacities ................................4-6-1
Forestry Excavator Machine Specications.......4-6-2
Processor Machine Specications.....................4-6-6
Forestry Excavator Working Ranges...............4-6-10
Continued on next page
iv
112321
PN=4
Contents
Page
Processor Working Ranges.............................4-6-12
ZX260F-FE Forestry Excavator Lift
Capacity—Undercarriage: 2620 mm
(8 ft 7 in) ......................................................4-6-14
ZX260FLC-FE Forestry Excavator Lift
Capacity—Undercarriage: 2790 mm
(9 ft 2 in) ......................................................4-6-16
ZX260F-FE Processor Lift
Capacity—Undercarriage: 2620 mm
(8 ft 7 in) ......................................................4-6-18
ZX260FLC-FE Processor Lift
Capacity—Undercarriage: 2790 mm
(9 ft 2 in) ......................................................4-6-20
v
112321
PN=5
Contents
vi
112321
PN=6
Safety—Safety and Operator Conveniences
Continued on next page KR46761,0001372 -19-06JUN19-1/2
Safety and Operator Convenience Features
Rear Entry Cab
TX1278332
1
2 3
7
8
9
10
14
15
11 13
12
4 5 6
TX1278332 —UN—29MAY19
Safety and Operator Convenience Features
Please remember that the operator is the key to
preventing accidents.
1. Alternative Exit. The roof window provides an exit
path if the cab door is blocked in an emergency situation.
2. ROPS and OPS. Integrated roll-over protective
structure (ROPS) and operator protective structure (OPS)
are designed to protect the operator. The enclosed,
lockable cabin also provides protection from the weather
and reduces vandalism.
3. Cab With Heater, Defroster, and Air Conditioner.
Ventilation system circulates both outside and inside
air through lters for a clean working environment.
Built-in defroster vents direct air ow for effective window
defogging/deicing. Air conditioner provides a comfortable,
temperature-controlled working environment.
4. Horn. Standard horn is useful when driving or signaling
bystanders.
5. Pilot Shutoff Lever. A lever near the cab exit reminds
the operator to deactivate hydraulic functions before
leaving the machine.
6. Seat Belt With Retractors. Seat belt retractors help
keep belts clean and convenient to use.
7. Handrails. Conveniently placed handrails make it easy
to enter or exit the operator's station or service area and
are designed for stability and protection.
8. Swing Brake. Swing brake engages automatically
when the swing is not operating and helps secure
upperstructure when transporting the machine.
9. Steps. Wide, slip-resistant steps make entry and exit
easier. Steps also provide a place to clean shoes.
10. Bypass Start Protection. Shielding over the starter
helps prevent dangerous bypass starting.
11. Engine Fan Guard. A fan guard inside the engine
compartment helps prevent contact with the hydraulically
driven fan.
12. Rear Camera (if equipped). The rear camera offers
the operator a view directly behind the machine.
13. Travel Alarm. The travel alarm alerts bystanders of
forward or reverse machine movement.
14. Toolbox (if equipped). The toolbox is conveniently
located in front of the cab for storage of commonly used
tools.
15. Sunshades (if equipped). Adjustable sunshades
reduce glare when operating in bright sunlight.
1-1-1
112321
PN=27
Safety—Safety and Operator Conveniences
KR46761,0001372 -19-06JUN19-2/2
Side Entry Cab
TX1278333
1 2
3
7
8
14
15
9
10 11 13
12
4 5 6
TX1278333 —UN—21MAY19
Safety and Operator Conveniences
Please remember that the operator is the key to
preventing accidents.
1. ROPS and OPS. Integrated roll-over protective
structure (ROPS) and operator protective structure (OPS)
are designed to protect the operator. The enclosed,
lockable cabin also provides protection from the weather
and reduces vandalism.
2. Cab With Heater, Defroster, and Air Conditioner.
Ventilation system circulates both outside and inside
air through lters for a clean working environment.
Built-in defroster vents direct air ow for effective window
defogging/deicing. Air conditioner provides a comfortable,
temperature-controlled working environment.
3. Alternative Exit. The rear window provides an exit
path if the cab door is blocked in an emergency situation.
4. Horn. Standard horn is useful when driving or signaling
bystanders.
5. Pilot Shutoff Lever. A lever near the cab exit reminds
the operator to deactivate hydraulic functions before
leaving the machine.
6. Seat Belt With Retractors. Seat belt retractors help
keep belts clean and convenient to use.
7. Handrails. Conveniently placed handrails make it easy
to enter or exit the operator's station or service area and
are designed for stability and protection.
8. Swing Brake. Swing brake engages automatically
when the swing is not operating and helps secure
upperstructure when transporting the machine.
9. Steps. Wide, slip-resistant steps make entry and exit
easier. Steps also provide a place to clean shoes.
10. Bypass Start Protection. Shielding over the starter
helps prevent dangerous bypass starting.
11. Engine Fan Guard. A fan guard inside the engine
compartment helps prevent contact with the hydraulically
driven fan.
12. Rear Camera (if equipped). The rear camera offers
the operator a view directly behind the machine.
13. Travel Alarm. The travel alarm alerts bystanders of
forward or reverse machine movement.
14. Toolbox (if equipped). The toolbox is conveniently
located in front of the cab for storage of commonly used
tools.
15. Sunshades (if equipped). Adjustable sunshades
reduce glare when operating in bright sunlight.
1-1-2
112321
PN=28
Safety—General Precautions
MM16284,0001932 -19-26JUL12-1/1
MM16284,0001C43 -19-27OCT15-1/1
Recognize Safety Information
These are the SAFETY ALERT SYMBOLS.
When you see these symbols on your machine or in this
manual, be alert to the potential for personal injury.
Follow recommended precautions and safe operating
practices.
TX1094151 —UN—28JUN13
Understand Signal Words
On machine safety signs, signal words designating the
degree or level of hazard, DANGER, WARNING, or
CAUTION, are used with the safety alert symbol.
•
DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation
which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
•
WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation
which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious
injury.
•
CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation
which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate
injury.
•
DANGER or WARNING safety signs are located near
specic hazards. General precautions are listed on
CAUTION safety signs.
•
Some safety signs are occasionally used on this
machine that do not use any of the designated signal
words mentioned above after the safety alert symbol.
To avoid confusing machine protection with personal
safety messages, a signal word IMPORTANT indicates
a situation which, if not avoided, could result in damage
to the machine.
NOTE: indicates an additional explanation for an
element of information.
TX1094152 —UN—28JUN13
1-2-1
112321
PN=29
Safety—General Precautions
TZ24494,00017C3 -19-14MAR16-1/1
MM16284,0001936 -19-26JUL12-1/1
Follow Safety Instructions
Carefully read and follow all safety signs on the machine
and all safety messages in this manual.
Safety signs should be installed, maintained and replaced
when necessary.
•
If a safety sign or this manual is damaged or missing,
order a replacement from your authorized dealer in the
same way you order other replacement parts (be sure to
state machine model and serial number when ordering).
Learn how to operate the machine and its controls
correctly and safely.
Allow only trained, qualied, authorized personnel to
operate the machine.
Keep your machine in proper working condition.
•
Unauthorized modications of the machine may impair
its function and/or safety and affect machine life.
•
Do not modify any machine parts without authorization.
Failure to do so may deteriorate the part safety,
function, and/or service life. In addition, personal
accident, machine trouble, and/or damage to material
caused by unauthorized modications will void Hitachi
Warranty Policy.
•
Never attempt to modify or disassemble the
inlet/exhaust parts and the aftertreatment device. Avoid
shocks to the element of the aftertreatment device, such
as striking or dropping objects onto the element. Failure
to do so may affect the exhaust gas purifying device,
possibly damaging it or lowering its performance.
•
Do not use attachments and/or optional parts or
equipment not authorized by Hitachi. Failure to do so
TX1094162 —UN—28JUN13
may deteriorate the safety, function, and/or service
life of the machine. In addition, personal accident,
machine trouble, and/or damage to material caused by
using unauthorized attachments and/or optional parts
or equipment will void Hitachi Warranty Policy.
The safety messages in this SAFETY chapter are
intended to illustrate basic safety procedures of machines.
However it is impossible for these safety messages to
cover every hazardous situation you may encounter. If
you have any questions, you should rst consult your
supervisor and/or your authorized dealer before operating
or performing maintenance work on the machine.
Wear Protective Clothing
Wear close tting clothing and safety equipment
appropriate to the job.
You may need:
•
A hard hat
•
Safety shoes
•
Safety glasses, goggles, or face shield
•
Heavy gloves
•
Hearing protection
•
Reective clothing
•
Wet weather gear
•
Respirator or lter mask
Be sure to wear the correct equipment and clothing for the
job. Do not take any chances.
•
Avoid wearing loose clothing, jewelry, or other items that
can catch on control levers or other parts of the machine.
TX1094189 —UN—28JUN13
Operating equipment safely requires the full attention of
the operator. Do not wear radio or music headphones
while operating the machine.
1-2-2
112321
PN=30
Safety—General Precautions
DX,NOISE -19-03OCT17-1/1
MM16284,0001938 -19-12FEB15-1/1
TZ24494,00017C4 -19-14MAR16-1/1
TX,CTRL,PAT -19-24FEB20-1/1
Protect Against Noise
There are many variables that affect the sound level
range, including machine conguration, condition and
maintenance level of the machine, ground surface,
operating environmental, duty cycles, ambient noise, and
attachments.
Exposure to loud noise can cause impairment or loss of
hearing.
Always wear hearing protection. Wear a suitable
hearing protective device such as earmuffs or earplugs
to protect against objectionable or uncomfortable loud
noises.
TS207 —UN—23AUG88
Inspect Machine
Inspect your machine carefully each day or shift by walking
around it before you start it to avoid personal injury.
•
In the walk-around inspection be sure to cover all points
described in the "Inspect Machine Daily Before Starting"
section in the operator’s manual.
TX1094191 —UN—28JUN13
General Precautions for Cab
Before entering the cab, thoroughly remove all dirt and/or
oil such as mud, grease, soil or stones from the soles
of your work boots. If any controls such as a pedal is
operated while with dirt and/or oil on the soles of the
operator’s work boots, the operator’s foot may slip off the
pedal, possibly resulting in a personal accident.
Do not mess up around the operator’s seat with parts,
tools, soil, stones, obstacles that may fold up or turn
over, cans or lunch box. The levers or pedals become
inoperable if obstacle jams in operation stroke of the travel
levers/pedals, pilot control shut-off lever or control levers,
which may result in serious injury or death.
Avoid storing transparent bottles in the cab. Do not
attach any transparent type window decorations on
the windowpanes as they may focus sunlight, possibly
starting a re.
Refrain from listening to the radio, or using music
headphones or mobile telephones in the cab while
operating the machine.
Keep all ammable materials and/or explosives away
from the machine.
After using the ashtray, always cover it to extinguish the
match and/or tobacco.
Do not leave cigarette lighters in the cab. When the
temperature in the cab increases, the lighter may explode.
Correctly lay the oor mat specic to the machine. If
another oor mat is used, it may be displaced and contact
with the travel pedals during operation, resulting in serious
injury or death.
Control Pattern
The control functions are described as they are arranged
when the machine leaves the factory. Some control
functions can be changed to suit particular operating
situations. Ensure that the operator is aware of all of the
functions before operating any of the controls.
1-2-3
112321
PN=31
Safety—General Precautions
MM16284,0001935 -19-26JUL12-1/1
MM16284,000195B -19-26JUL12-1/1
Prepare for Emergencies
Be prepared if a re starts or if an accident occurs.
•
Keep a rst aid kit and re extinguisher on hand.
•
Thoroughly read and understand the label attached on
the re extinguisher to use it properly.
•
To ensure that a re extinguisher can be always used
when necessary, check and service the re extinguisher
at the recommended intervals as specied in the re
extinguisher manual.
•
Establish emergency procedure guidelines to cope with
res and accidents.
•
Keep emergency numbers for doctors, ambulance
service, hospital, and re department posted near your
telephone.
TX1094188 —UN—28JUN13
Stay Clear of Moving Parts
Entanglement in moving parts can cause serious injury.
•
To prevent accidents, care should be taken to ensure
that hands, feet, clothing, jewelry and hair do not
become entangled when working around rotating parts.
TX1094268 —UN—28JUN13TX1094269 —UN—05JUL11
1-2-4
112321
PN=32
Safety—General Precautions
MM16284,0001C55 -19-25AUG14-1/1
Prevent Parts From Flying
Grease in the track adjuster is under high pressure.
Failure to follow the precautions below may result in
serious injury, blindness, or death.
•
Do not attempt to remove GREASE FITTING or VALVE
ASSEMBLY.
•
Do not attempt to remove grease tting securing cover.
•
As pieces may y off, be sure to keep body and face
away from valve.
•
Never attempt to disassemble the track adjuster.
Inadvertent disassembling of the track adjuster may
cause the parts such as a spring to y off, possibly
resulting in severe personal injury or death.
Travel reduction gears are under pressure.
•
As pieces may y off, be sure to keep body and face
away from AIR RELEASE PLUG to avoid injury.
TX1094270 —UN—28JUN13
•
GEAR OIL is hot. Wait for GEAR OIL to cool, then
gradually loosen AIR RELEASE PLUG to release
pressure.
1-2-5
112321
PN=33
Safety—General Precautions
MM16284,0001CD8 -19-07OCT14-1/1
Prevent Fires
Check for Oil Leaks: Fuel, hydraulic oil and lubricant
leaks can lead to res.
•
Check for oil leaks due to missing or loose clamps,
kinked hoses, lines or hoses that rub against each
other, damage to the oil cooler, and loose oil cooler
ange bolts.
•
Tighten, repair or replace any missing, loose or
damaged clamps, lines, hoses, oil cooler and oil cooler
ange bolts.
•
Do not bend or strike high-pressure lines.
•
Never install bent or damaged lines, pipes, or hoses.
•
Replace fuel hoses and hydraulic hoses periodically
even if there is no abnormality in their external
appearance.
Check for Shorts: Short circuits can cause res.
•
Clean and tighten all electrical connections.
•
Check before each shift or after eight (8) to ten (10)
hours operation for loose, kinked, hardened or frayed
electrical cables and wires.
•
Check before each shift or after eight (8) to ten (10)
hours operation for missing or damaged terminal caps.
•
DO NOT OPERATE MACHINE if cable or wires are
loose, kinked, etc.
•
Never attempt to modify electric wirings.
Clean up Flammable Materials: Spilled fuel and oil, and
trash, grease, debris, accumulated coal dust, and other
ammable materials may cause res.
•
Prevent res by inspecting and cleaning the machine
daily, and by removing adhered oil or accumulated
ammable materials immediately. Check and clean
high temperature parts such as the exhaust outlet and
mufers earlier than the normal interval.
•
Do not wrap high temperature parts such as a mufer
or exhaust pipe with oil absorbents.
•
Do not store oily cloths as they are vulnerable to
catching re.
•
Keep ammable materials away from open ames.
•
Do not ignite or crush a pressurized or sealed container.
TX1094261 —UN—28JUN13
•
Wire screens may be provided on openings on the
engine compartment covers to prevent ammable
materials such as dead leaves from entering. However,
ammable materials which have passed through
the wire screen may cause res. Check and clean
the machine every day and immediately remove
accumulated ammable materials.
Check Key Switch: If a re breaks out, failure to stop the
engine will escalate the re, hampering re ghting.
Always check key switch function before operating the
machine every day:
1. Start the engine and run it at slow idle.
2. Turn the key switch to the OFF position to conrm that
the engine stops.
•
If any abnormalities are found, be sure to repair them
before operating the machine.
Check Heat Shields: Damaged or missing heat shields
may lead to res.
•
Damaged or missing heat shields must be repaired or
replaced before operating the machine.
•
If hydraulic hoses are broken while the engine cover is
open, splattered oil on the high temperature parts such
as mufers may cause re. Always close the engine
cover while operating the machine.
1-2-6
112321
PN=34
Safety—General Precautions
TX,MACH,FIRE -19-24FEB20-1/1
MM16284,0001CD7 -19-07OCT14-1/1
In Case of Machine Fire
CAUTION: Avoid personal injury from exposed
ames. Maintain safe distance.
•
Turn the engine off.
•
Turn the battery disconnect switch to the OFF position
(if equipped).
•
If possible, ght the re using the portable re
extinguisher or other re suppression equipment (if
equipped).
•
Ensure that the re does not spread to the surrounding
area. Do not risk injury. If a re is too far advanced,
do not try to extinguish re.
•
Call for help.
TS227 —UN—15APR13
In Case of Machine Fire
Prevent Burns
Hot spraying uids: After operation, engine coolant is
hot and under pressure. Hot water or steam is contained
in the engine, expansion tank and heater lines.
Skin contact with escaping hot water or steam can cause
severe burns.
•
Avoid possible injury from hot spraying water. DO NOT
remove the expansion tank cap until the engine is cool.
When opening, turn the cap slowly to the stop. Allow all
pressure to be released before removing the cap.
•
The hydraulic oil tank is pressurized. Again, be sure to
release all pressure before removing the cap.
Hot uids and surfaces: Engine oil, gear oil and
hydraulic oil also become hot during operation.
The engine, hoses, lines and other parts become hot as
well.
•
Wait for the oil and components to cool before starting
any maintenance or inspection work.
TX1094272 —UN—28JUN13TX1094273 —UN—01JUL11
1-2-7
112321
PN=35
Safety—General Precautions
TX,PREVENT,BATT -19-24FEB20-1/1
MM16284,0001CD9 -19-07OCT14-1/1
MM16284,0001967 -19-26JUL12-1/1
Prevent Battery Explosions
Keep sparks, lighted matches, and open ame away from
the top of battery. Battery gas can explode.
Never check battery charge by placing a metal object
across the posts. Use a voltmeter or hydrometer.
Do not charge a frozen battery; it may explode. Warm
battery to 16°C (60°F).
Keep battery electrolyte levels properly maintained.
TS204 —UN—15APR13
Battery Explosions
Beware of Exhaust Fumes
Prevent asphyxiation. Engine exhaust fumes can cause
sickness or death.
•
If you must operate in a building, be sure there is
adequate ventilation. Either use an exhaust pipe
extension to remove the exhaust fumes or open doors
and windows to bring enough outside air into the area.
•
White smoke may be generated during the
aftertreatment device regeneration. Do not attempt
to do aftertreatment device manual regeneration in a
badly ventilated indoors.
TX1094279 —UN—28JUN13
Beware of Asbestos and Silicon Dust and
Other Contamination
Take care not to inhale dust produced in the work site.
Inhalation of asbestos bers may be the cause of lung
cancer. Inhalation of silicon dust or other contamination
may cause sickness.
•
Depending on the work site conditions, the risk
of inhaling asbestos ber, silicon dust or other
contamination may exist. Spray water to prevent
asbestos bers, silicon dust or other contamination from
becoming airborne. Do not use compressed air.
•
When operating the machine in a work site where
asbestos bers, silicon dust or other contamination
might be present, be sure to operate the machine
from the upwind side and wear a mask rated to
prevent the inhalation of asbestos, silicon dust or other
contamination.
TX1094282 —UN—28JUN13
•
Keep bystanders out of the work site during operation.
•
Asbestos bers might be present in imitation parts. Use
only genuine Hitachi parts.
1-2-8
112321
PN=36
Safety—General Precautions
MM16284,0001956 -19-26JUL12-1/1
MM16284,000196A -19-27OCT15-1/1
Handle Fluids Safely−Avoid Fires
Handle fuel with care; it is highly ammable. If fuel ignites,
an explosion and/or a re may occur, possibly resulting
in serious injury or death.
•
Do not refuel the machine while smoking or when near
open ame or sparks.
•
Always stop the engine before refueling the machine.
•
Fill the fuel tank outdoors.
All fuels, most lubricants, and some coolants are
ammable.
•
Store ammable uids well away from re hazards.
•
Do not incinerate or puncture pressurized containers.
•
Do not store oily rags; they can ignite and burn
spontaneously.
•
Securely tighten the fuel and oil ller cap.
TX1094260 —UN—28JUN13TX1094261 —UN—28JUN13
Handle Chemical Products Safely
Direct exposure to hazardous chemicals can cause
serious injury. Potentially hazardous chemicals used with
your machine include such items as lubricants, coolants,
paints, and adhesives.
•
Safety Data Sheet (SDS) provides specic details on
chemical products: physical and health hazards, safety
procedures, and emergency response techniques.
•
Check the SDS before you start any job using a
hazardous chemical. That way you will know exactly
what the risks are and how to do the job safely. Then
follow procedures and use recommended equipment.
•
See your authorized dealer for SDS’s (available only in
English) on chemical products used with your machine.
TX1189986 —UN—08APR15
1-2-9
112321
PN=37
Safety—General Precautions
MM16284,0001960 -19-26JUL12-1/1
MM16284,0001CD6 -19-07OCT14-1/1
Avoid High-Pressure Fluids
Fluids such as diesel fuel or hydraulic oil under pressure
can penetrate the skin or eyes causing serious injury,
blindness or death.
•
Avoid this hazard by relieving pressure before
disconnecting hydraulic or other lines.
•
Tighten all connections before applying pressure.
•
Search for leaks with a piece of cardboard; take care
to protect hands and body from high-pressure uids.
Wear a face shield or goggles for eye protection.
•
If an accident occurs, see a doctor familiar with this
type of injury immediately. Any uid injected into the
skin must be surgically removed within a few hours or
gangrene may result.
TX1094274 —UN—01JUL11TX1094275 —UN—01JUL11TX1094276 —UN—01JUL11
Avoid Injury from Attachment Falling
Accident
Stored attachments such as buckets, hydraulic hammers,
and blades can fall and cause serious injury or death.
•
To avoid possible personal injury from attachment falling
accident, use a platform when replacing an attachment.
•
Securely store attachments such as a bucket, blade,
breaker and other parts to prevent falling.
•
Keep children and bystanders away from storage areas.
TX1094271 —UN—28JUN13
1-2-10
112321
PN=38
Safety—General Precautions
MM16284,0001CDC -19-17APR15-1/1
MM16284,0001C5D -19-07OCT14-1/1
MM16284,000196E -19-26JUL12-1/1
Dispose of Waste Properly
Improperly disposing of waste can threaten the
environment and ecology. Potentially harmful waste used
with HITACHI equipment includes such items as oil, fuel,
coolant, DEF/AdBlue®, brake uid, lters, and batteries.
•
Use leakproof containers when draining uids. Do not
use food or beverage containers that may mislead
someone into drinking from them.
•
Do not pour waste onto the ground, down a drain, or
into any water source.
•
Air conditioning refrigerants escaping into the air
can damage the Earth’s atmosphere. Government
regulations may require a certied air conditioning
service center to recover and recycle used air
conditioning refrigerants.
•
Inquire on the proper way to recycle or dispose of waste
from your local environmental or recycling center, or
from your authorized dealer.
TX1094286 —UN—28JUN13
AdBlue is a trademark of VDA, the German Association
of the Automotive Industry
Notes for Aftertreatment Device
About Aftertreatment Device
The aftertreatment device removes particulate matter
(PM) and NOx (Nitrogen Oxide) from the exhaust gas.
Follow the instructions below to prevent the aftertreatment
from being damaged.
IMPORTANT: Exhaust gas from the aftertreatment
device, mufer, exhaust piping and tail piping
becomes hot during and right after engine
running and regeneration of aftertreatment
device. Keep away from the exhaust system
or hot gas from the exhaust piping during
regeneration. Be careful to avoid skin contact
with exhaust gas. It may cause severe burns.
White smoke may be generated during the aftertreatment
device regeneration. Do not attempt to do aftertreatment
device manual regeneration in a badly ventilated indoors.
Do not touch water coming directly out of the aftertreatment
device. The water is mildly-acidic by oxidation catalyst
mounted in the aftertreatment device. If lter water spills
on your skin, immediately ush it out with clean water.
Precautions for Communication Terminal
Electrical wave transmitted from the communication
terminal may cause malfunction of other electronic
devices.
Inquire the device manufacturer for electrical wave
disturbance upon using an electronic device near the
communication terminal.
1-2-11
112321
PN=39
Safety—Operating Precautions
TZ24494,00017C5 -19-14MAR16-1/1
MM16284,000193D -19-26JUL12-1/1
DX,SEATHEATER -19-20NOV18-1/1
Use Handholds and Steps
Falling is one of the major causes of personal injury.
•
When you get on and off the machine, always face the
machine and maintain a three-point contact with the
steps and handrails.
•
Do not use any controls as hand-holds.
•
Never jump on or off the machine. Never mount or
dismount a moving machine.
•
Before getting on or off the machine, check the condition
of the steps and handrails for sticking of slippery
material like grease or mud. Thoroughly remove such
material if stuck. In addition, repair the damage to the
steps and/or handrails. Retighten loose bolts.
•
Never get on and off the machine with tools in your
hands.
TX1094193 —UN—28JUN13
Fasten Your Seat Belt
If the machine should overturn, the operator may become
injured and/or thrown from the cab. Additionally the
operator may be crushed by the overturning machine,
resulting in serious injury or death.
•
Prior to operating the machine, thoroughly examine
webbing, buckle and attaching hardware. If any item is
damaged or worn, replace the seat belt or component
before operating the machine.
•
Be sure to remain seated with the seat belt securely
fastened at all times when the machine is in operation
to minimize the chance of injury from an accident.
•
We recommend that the seat belt be replaced every
three years regardless of its apparent condition.
TX1094203 —UN—27JUN13
Heated and Ventilated Operator’s Seat
An overheated seat heater can cause a burn injury or
damage to the seat. To reduce the risk of burns, use
caution when using the seat heater for extended periods
of time, especially if the operator cannot feel temperature
change or pain to the skin. Do not place objects on the
seat, such as a blanket, cushion, cover, or similar item,
which can cause the seat heater to overheat.
H124189 —UN—11MAY18
1-3-1
112321
PN=40
Safety—Operating Precautions
MM16284,000193B -19-27OCT15-1/1
MM16284,0001C46 -19-26AUG14-1/1
MM16284,0001C47 -19-03DEC14-1/1
Adjust the Operator's Seat
A seat which is poorly adjusted for the individual operator,
or the work to be undertaken, may quickly fatigue the
operator leading to misoperation.
•
The seat should be adjusted whenever changing the
operator for the machine.
•
The operator should be able to fully depress the pedals
and to correctly operate the control levers with his back
against the seat back.
•
If not, move the seat forward or backward, and check
again.
•
Adjust the rear view mirror position so that the best
rear visibility is obtained from the operator’s seat. If the
mirror is broken, immediately replace it with a new one.
TX1094194 —UN—28JUN13
Ensure Safety Before Rising from or Leaving
Operator’s Seat
Before rising from the operator’s seat to open/close either
side window or to adjust the seat position, be sure to
rst lower the front attachment to the ground and then
move the pilot control shut-off lever to the LOCK position.
Failure to do so may allow the machine to unexpectedly
move when a body part unintentionally comes in contact
with a control lever and/or pedal, possibly resulting in
serious personal injury or death.
Before leaving the machine, be sure to rst lower the front
attachment to the ground and then move the pilot control
shut-off lever to the LOCK position. Turn the key switch
OFF to stop the engine.
Before leaving the machine, close all windows, doors, and
access covers and lock them up.
Operate Only from Operator's Seat
Inappropriate engine starting procedures may cause the
machine to runaway, possibly resulting in serious injury
or death.
•
Start the engine only when seated in the operator's seat.
•
NEVER start the engine while standing on the track or
on ground.
•
Do not start engine by shorting across starter terminals.
•
Before starting the engine, conrm that all control levers
are in neutral.
•
Before starting the engine, conrm the safety around
the machine and sound the horn to alert bystanders.
TX1094205 —UN—27JUN13
1-3-2
112321
PN=41
Safety—Operating Precautions
DX,POISON -19-21APR93-1/1
MM16284,0001940 -19-26JUL12-1/1
Prevent Acid Burns
Sulfuric acid in battery electrolyte is poisonous. It is strong
enough to burn skin, eat holes in clothing, and cause
blindness if splashed into eyes.
Avoid the hazard by:
1. Filling batteries in a well-ventilated area.
2. Wearing eye protection and rubber gloves.
3. Avoiding breathing fumes when electrolyte is added.
4. Avoiding spilling or dripping electrolyte.
5. Use proper jump start procedure.
If you spill acid on yourself:
1. Flush your skin with water.
2. Apply baking soda or lime to help neutralize the acid.
3. Flush your eyes with water for 15—30 minutes. Get
medical attention immediately.
If acid is swallowed:
1. Do not induce vomiting.
2. Drink large amounts of water or milk, but do not
exceed 2 L (2 quarts).
3. Get medical attention immediately.
TS203 —UN—23AUG88
Jump Starting
Battery gas can explode, resulting in serious injury.
•
If the engine must be jump started, be sure to follow the
instructions shown in the "OPERATING THE ENGINE"
chapter in the operator’s manual.
•
The operator must be in the operator’s seat so that the
machine will be under control when the engine starts.
Jump starting is a two-person operation.
•
Never use a frozen battery.
•
Failure to follow correct jump starting procedures could
result in a battery explosion or a runaway machine.
TX1094207 —UN—28JUN13
1-3-3
112321
PN=42
Safety—Operating Precautions
TZ24494,00017C6 -19-14MAR16-1/1
KR46761,00013BB -19-04OCT16-1/1
Install OPG Guard
In case the machine is operated in areas where the
possibilities of falling stones or debris exist, equip Hitachi
OPG guard. Consult your authorized dealer for installing
the OPG guard. In order not to impair operator protective
structure: Replace damaged OPG guard. Never attempt
to repair or modify the guard.
OPG: Operator Protective Guard
TX1094219 —UN—27JUN13
Keep the Operator Protective Structure (OPS) in Place
The polycarbonate windows are part of the operator
protection system. It is important to keep the operator
protective structure (OPS) in place (doors, screens,
windows, windshield, etc.) to minimize hazards from
whipping or intruding objects.
To maintain OPS protection, replace damaged parts
immediately. Replace if damaged, cloudy, or has visible
micro-cracking or crazing. Replace only with Hitachi
replacement parts to ensure the original operator
protection level.
The protection offered by the OPS will be impaired if
the OPS is subject to structural damage, is involved in
an overturn incident, or is altered by welding, bending,
drilling, or cutting. Damaged OPS components should be
replaced, not reused.
Keep all bolts and attaching hardware tight.
1-3-4
112321
PN=43
Safety—Operating Precautions
Continued on next page KR46761,00013ED -19-27OCT16-1/2
Notes on Protection of Operator’s Station
when the Machine Rolls Over
The cab corresponds to the structure to protect the
operator by absorbing impact energy when the machine
rolls over (Roll-Over Protective Structure (ROPS).
However, when modifying the machine or installing a
special attachment causing the machine mass to exceed
the maximum operating mass described in the ROPS
certication, the cab cannot fulll its protective function,
possibly causing serious injury or death.
In order to ensure the protective structure, follow the
instructions below.
•
Consult your authorized dealer before welding parts or
drilling a hole on the cab, which possibly reducing the
cab strength.
•
Be sure to always fasten the seat belt when operating
the machine. If the machine rolls over without operator
fastening the seat belt, the operator may become
injured, may be thrown out from the cab and/or may
become crushed under the machine even though the
cab has the protective structure.
1— Protective Structure
Certication—ROPS Decal
1
TX1227043 —UN—26OCT16
ROPS Certicate Location—Rear Entry Cab
1
TX1227044 —UN—26OCT16
ROPS Certicate Location—Side Entry Cab
1-3-5
112321
PN=44
Safety—Operating Precautions
KR46761,00013ED -19-27OCT16-2/2
MM16284,0001CDE -19-07OCT14-1/1
MM16284,0001C49 -19-27OCT15-1/1
The ROPS certication is valid under the following
conditions.
•
The machine mass is lower than the maximum
operating mass described in the ROPS certication.
•
The ROPS is properly installed.
•
No modication is made to the ROPS.
•
The ROPS is free from damages.
2— Applicable Machine Model
Number
3— Maximum Operating Weight
Assuring the ROPS
4— Certicate Number of the
ROPS
4
3
2
TX1227051 —19—26OCT16
Protective Structure Certication—ROPS Decal
Restriction of Attachment Installation
Do not install an attachment which exceeds specied
weight for the machine structure.
Precautions for Operations
Investigate the work site before starting operations.
•
Be sure to wear close tting clothing and safety
equipment appropriate for the job, such as a hard hat,
etc. when operating the machine.
•
Keep bystanders and obstacles clear of the area of
machine operation.
Keep persons other than the operator away from areas
where there is danger, such as from ying objects.
Always be aware of the surroundings while operating.
When working in a small area surrounded by obstacles,
take care not to hit the upperstructure against obstacles.
•
When loading onto trucks, bring the bucket over the
truck beds from the rear side. Take care not to swing
the bucket over the cab or over any person.
TX1094209 —UN—27JUN13
1-3-6
112321
PN=45
Safety—Operating Precautions
MM16284,0001943 -19-05OCT16-1/1
Investigate Job Site Beforehand
When working at the edge of an excavation or on a road
shoulder, the machine could tip over, possibly resulting
in serious injury or death.
•
Investigate the conguration and ground conditions of
the job site beforehand to prevent the machine from
falling and to prevent the ground, stockpiles or banks
from collapsing.
•
Make a work plan. Use machines appropriate to the
work and job site.
•
Reinforce ground, edges and road shoulders as
necessary. Keep the machine well back from the edges
of excavations and road shoulders.
•
When working on an incline or on a road shoulder,
employ a signal person as required.
•
Conrm that your machine is equipped with a FOPS
cab before working in areas where the possibility of
falling stones or debris exist.
•
When the ground footing is weak, reinforce the ground
before starting work.
•
When working on frozen ground, be extremely alert.
As ambient temperatures rise, footing becomes loose
and slippery.
•
Beware the possibility of re when operating the
machine near ammable objects such as dry grass.
Make sure the work site has sufcient strength to rmly
support the machine.
When working close to an excavation or at road
shoulders, operate the machine with the tracks positioned
perpendicular to the cliff face with travel motors at the
rear, so that the machine can more easily evacuate if the
cliff face collapses.
If working on the bottom of a cliff or a high bank is
required, be sure to investigate the area rst and conrm
that no danger of the cliff or bank collapsing exists. If any
possibility of cliff or bank collapsing exists, do not work
on the area.
Soft ground may collapse when the machine is operated
on it, possibly causing the machine to tip over. When
working on soft ground is required, be sure to reinforce
the ground rst using steel plates strong and rm enough
to easily support the machine.
TX1094215 —UN—27JUN13TX1094217 —UN—28JUN13
Note that there is always a possibility of machine tipping
over when working on rough terrain or on slopes. Prevent
machine tipping over from occurring. When operating on
rough terrain or on slopes:
•
Reduce the engine speed.
•
Select slow travel speed mode.
•
Operate the machine slowly and be cautious with
machine movements.
1-3-7
112321
PN=46
Safety—Operating Precautions
MM16284,000193E -19-27OCT15-1/1
MM16284,0001C4C -19-27OCT15-1/1
Move and Operate Machine Safely
Bystanders can be run over.
•
Take extra care not to run over bystanders. Conrm
the location of bystanders before moving, swinging, or
operating the machine.
•
Always keep the travel alarm and horn in working
condition (if equipped). It warns people when the
machine starts to move.
•
Use a signal person when moving, swinging, or
operating the machine in congested areas. Coordinate
hand signals before starting the machine.
•
Use appropriate illumination. Check that all lights are
operable before operating the machine. If any faulty
illumination is present, immediately repair it.
•
Ensure the cab door, windows, doors and covers are
securely locked.
•
Check the mirrors and the monitor in the CAB for
problems.
If there is, replace the problem part (s) or clean the
mirror, camera lens and the monitor display.
TX1094204 —UN—27JUN13
Refer to Rear View Monitor section for information on
cleaning the camera lens and the monitor display in the
operator’s manual.
Keep Person Clear from Working Area
People around the operating machine may be hit severely
by the swinging front attachment or counterweight, be
caught in other objects, and/or be struck by ying objects,
resulting in serious injury or death.
•
Set up barriers and/or put a "NO ADMISSION" sign at
the machine operating site and areas exposed by ying
objects to prevent anyone from entering the work area.
•
Before operating the machine, set up barriers to the
sides and rear area of the bucket swing radius to
prevent anyone from entering the work area.
TX1094246 —UN—27JUN13
1-3-8
112321
PN=47
Safety—Operating Precautions
MM16284,0001C48 -19-26AUG14-1/1
MM16284,0001945 -19-26JUL12-1/1
MM16284,0001946 -19-26JUL12-1/1
Keep Riders off Machine
Riders on machine are subject to injury such as being
struck by foreign objects and being thrown off the machine.
•
Only the operator should be on the machine. Keep
riders off.
•
Riders also obstruct the operator’s view, resulting in the
machine being operated in an unsafe manner.
TX1094208 —UN—27JUN13
Provide Signals for Jobs Involving Multiple
Machines
For jobs involving multiple machines, provide signals
commonly known by all personnel involved. Also, appoint
a signal person to coordinate the job site. Make sure that
all personnel obey the signal person’s directions.
TX1094225 —UN—28JUN13
Conrm Direction of Machine to be Driven
Incorrect travel pedal/lever operation may result in serious
injury or death.
•
Before driving the machine, conrm the position of the
undercarriage in relation to the operator’s position. If
the travel motors are located in front of the cab, the
machine will move in reverse when travel pedals/levers
are operated to the front.
TX1094226 —UN—28JUN13
1-3-9
112321
PN=48
Safety—Operating Precautions
Continued on next page MM16284,0001947 -19-26JUL12-1/2
Drive Machine Safely
Before driving the machine, always conrm that the travel
levers/pedals direction corresponds to the direction you
wish to drive.
•
Be sure to detour around any obstructions.
•
Avoid traveling over obstructions. Soil, fragments of
rocks, and/or metal pieces may scatter around the
machine. Do not allow personnel to stay around the
machine while traveling.
Driving on a slope may cause the machine to slip or
overturn, possibly resulting in serious injury or death.
•
Never attempt to ascend or descend 35 degrees or
steeper slopes.
•
Be sure to fasten the seat belt.
•
When driving up or down a slope, keep the bucket
facing the direction of travel, approximately 0.2 to 0.3
m (A) above the ground.
•
If the machine starts to skid or becomes unstable,
immediately lower the bucket to the ground and stop.
•
Driving across the face of a slope or steering on a
slope may cause the machine to skid or turnover. If
the direction must be changed, move the machine to
level ground, then, change the direction to ensure safe
operation.
TX1094228 —UN—28JUN13TX1094229 —UN—06JUL11TX1094230 —UN—06JUL11TX1094231 —19—21JUL11
1-3-10
112321
PN=49
Safety—Operating Precautions
MM16284,0001947 -19-26JUL12-2/2
VD76477,000164A -19-12MAY16-1/1
•
Avoid swinging the upperstructure on slopes. Never
attempt to swing the upperstructure downhill. The
machine may tip over. If swinging uphill is unavoidable,
carefully operate the upperstructure and boom at slow
speed.
•
If the engine stalls on a slope, immediately lower the
bucket to the ground. Return the control levers to
neutral. Then, restart the engine.
•
Be sure to thoroughly warm up the machine before
ascending steep slopes. If hydraulic oil has not warmed
up sufciently, sufcient performance may not be
obtained.
•
Use a signal person when moving, swinging or
operating the machine in congested areas. Coordinate
hand signals before starting the machine.
•
Before moving machine, determine which way to move
travel pedals/levers for the direction you want to go.
When the travel motors are in the rear, pushing down
on the front of the travel pedals or pushing the levers
forward moves the machine forward, towards the idlers.
An arrow-mark seal is stuck on the inside surface of the
side frame to indicate the machine front direction.
•
Select a travel route that is as at as possible. Steer the
machine as straight as possible, making small gradual
changes in direction.
•
Before traveling on them, check the strengths of bridges
and road shoulders, and reinforce if necessary.
•
Use wood plates in order not to damage the road
surface. Be careful of steering when operating on
asphalt roads in summer.
•
When crossing train tracks, use wood plates in order
not to damage them.
•
Do not make contact with electric wires or bridges.
•
When crossing a river, measure the depth of the river
using the bucket, and cross slowly. Do not cross the
river when the depth of the river is deeper than the
upper edge of the upper roller.
•
When traveling on rough terrain, reduce engine speed.
Select slow travel speed. Slower speed will reduce
possible damage to the machine.
•
Avoid operations that may damage the track and
undercarriage components.
•
During freezing weather, always clean snow and ice
from track shoes before loading and unloading machine,
to prevent the machine from slipping.
TX1094239 —UN—28JUN13TX1094240 —UN—06JUL11TX1094241 —UN—06JUL11
Operating on Slopes
Avoid side slope travel whenever possible. When working
on steep slopes, travel as straight up and down as
possible to prevent machine tip over.
Select low gear speed before starting down slope. The
slope on which you can operate safely will be limited by
ground condition and the load being handled.
Be alert to wind direction and velocity.
1-3-11
112321
PN=50
Safety—Operating Precautions
MM16284,0001C4A -19-26AUG14-1/1
MM16284,0001C4B -19-07OCT14-1/1
Avoid Injury from Rollaway Accidents
Death or serious injury may result if you attempt to mount
or stop a moving machine.
To avoid rollaways:
•
Select level ground when possible to park the machine.
•
Do not park the machine on a grade.
•
Lower the bucket and/or other work tools to the ground.
•
Turn the auto-idle switch OFF.
•
Run the engine at slow idle speed without load for 5
minutes to cool down the engine.
•
Stop the engine and remove the key from the key switch.
•
Pull the pilot control shut-off lever to LOCK position.
•
Block both tracks and lower the bucket to the ground.
Thrust the bucket teeth into the ground if you must park
on a grade.
•
Position the machine to prevent rolling.
•
Park at a reasonable distance from other machines.
TX1094242 —UN—28JUN13TX1094243 —UN—05JUL11
Avoid Injury from Back-Over and Swing
Accidents
If any person is present near the machine when backing
or swinging the upperstructure, the machine may hit or
run over that person, resulting in serious injury or death.
To avoid back-over and swing accidents:
•
Always look around BEFORE YOU BACK UP AND
SWING THE MACHINE. BE SURE THAT ALL
BYSTANDERS ARE CLEAR.
•
Keep the travel alarm in working condition (if equipped).
ALWAYS BE ALERT FOR BYSTANDERS MOVING
INTO THE WORK AREA. USE THE HORN OR OTHER
SIGNAL TO WARN BYSTANDERS BEFORE MOVING
MACHINE.
•
USE A SIGNAL PERSON WHEN BACKING UP IF
YOUR VIEW IS OBSTRUCTED. ALWAYS KEEP THE
SIGNAL PERSON IN VIEW. Use hand signals, which
conform to your local regulations, when work conditions
require a signal person.
•
No machine motions shall be made unless signals are
clearly understood by both signal person and operator.
•
Learn the meanings of all ags, signs, and markings
used on the job and conrm who has the responsibility
for signaling.
•
Keep windows, mirrors, and lights clean and in good
condition.
•
Dust, heavy rain, fog, etc., can reduce visibility. As
visibility decreases, reduce speed and use proper
lighting.
TX1094244 —UN—28JUN13TX1094245 —UN—06JUL11
•
Read and understand all operating instructions in the
operator’s manual.
1-3-12
112321
PN=51
Safety—Operating Precautions
MM16284,0001C4D -19-27OCT15-1/1
MM16284,000194C -19-26JUL12-1/1
Avoid Tipping
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO JUMP CLEAR OF TIPPING
MACHINE --- SERIOUS OR FATAL CRUSHING
INJURIES WILL RESULT.
MACHINE WILL TIP OVER FASTER THAN YOU CAN
JUMP FREE.
FASTEN YOUR SEAT BELT.
The danger of tipping is always present when operating
on a grade, possibly resulting in serious injury or death.
To avoid tipping:
Be extra careful before operating on a grade.
•
Prepare machine operating area at.
•
Keep the bucket low to the ground and close to the
machine.
•
Reduce operating speeds to avoid tipping or slipping.
•
Avoid changing direction when traveling on grades.
•
NEVER attempt to travel across a grade steeper than
15 degrees if crossing the grade is unavoidable.
•
Reduce swing speed as necessary when swinging
loads.
Be careful when working on frozen ground.
•
Temperature increases will cause the ground to become
soft and make ground travel unstable.
TX1094249 —UN—27JUN13TX1094251 —UN—06JUL11
Avoid Undercutting
In order to retreat from the edge of an excavation if the
footing should collapse, always position the undercarriage
perpendicular to the edge of the excavation with the travel
motors at the rear.
•
If the footing starts to collapse and if retreat is not
possible, do not panic. Often, the machine can be
secured by lowering the front attachment, in such cases.
TX1094248 —UN—27JUN13
1-3-13
112321
PN=52
Safety—Operating Precautions
MM16284,0001951 -19-27OCT15-1/1
MM16284,0001C4F -19-26AUG14-1/1
MM16284,000196C -19-26JUL12-1/1
TX,OP,BOOM,CARE -19-08MAY20-1/1
Avoid Power Lines
Serious injury or death can result if the machine or front
attachments are not kept a safe distance from electric
lines.
•
When operating near an electric line, never move any
part of the machine or load to within 3 m plus twice the
line insulator length of overhead wires.
•
Check and comply with any local regulations that may
apply.
•
Wet ground will expand the area that could cause any
person on it to be affected by electric shock. Keep all
bystanders or co-workers away from the site.
TX1094255 —UN—28JUN13
Operate with Caution
If the front attachment or any other part of the machine
hits against an overhead obstacle, such as a bridge, both
the machine and the overhead obstacle will be damaged,
and personal injury may result as well.
•
Take care to avoid hitting overhead obstacles with the
boom or arm.
TX1094254 —UN—28JUN13
Never Ride Attachment
Never allow anyone to ride attachments or load. This is
an extremely dangerous practice.
Operate Boom With Care
Always lower the boom so that the attachment is securely
supported when operation is stopped.
When moving the machine, watch that enough clearance
is available on both sides and above the boom. Extra
clearance may be required, particularly where the ground
is uneven.
Maintain a safe operating distance between the
equipment and other personnel. Never swing boom,
stick, attachment, or load elevated above the heads of
bystanders.
Use only prearranged and approved signaling practices.
T147349 —UN—24OCT01
Operate Boom With Care
1-3-14
112321
PN=53
Safety—Operating Precautions
TX,ATTACH -19-20JAN11-1/1
MM16284,000194E -19-26JUL12-1/1
MM16284,0001C4E -19-26AUG14-1/1
Add and Operate Attachments Safely
Always verify compatibility of attachments by contacting
your authorized dealer. Adding unapproved attachments
could affect machine stability or reliability and could create
a hazard for others near the machine.
Ensure that a qualied person is involved in attachment
installation. Add guards to machine if operator protection
is required or recommended. Verify that all connections
are secure and attachment responds properly to controls.
Carefully read attachment manual and follow all
instructions and warnings. In an area free of bystanders
and obstructions, carefully operate attachment to learn its
characteristics and range of motion.
Never Undercut a High Bank
The edges could collapse or a land slide could occur
causing serious injury or death.
TX1094252 —UN—27JUN13
Dig with Caution
Accidental severing of underground cables or gas lines
may cause an explosion and/or re, possibly resulting in
serious injury or death.
•
Before digging check the location of cables, gas lines,
and water lines.
•
Keep the minimum distance required, by law, from
cables, gas lines, and water lines.
•
If a ber optic cable should be accidentally severed, do
not look into the end. Doing so may result in serious
eye injury.
•
Contact your local "diggers hot line" if available in your
area, and/or the utility companies directly.
Have them mark all underground utilities.
TX1094253 —UN—28JUN13
1-3-15
112321
PN=54
Safety—Operating Precautions
MM16284,0001953 -19-27OCT15-1/1
MM16284,0001954 -19-26JUL12-1/1
Object Handling
If a lifted load should fall, any person nearby may be
struck by the falling load or may be crushed underneath
it, resulting in serious injury or death.
•
When using the machine for craning operations, be
sure to comply with all local regulations.
•
Do not use damaged chains or frayed cables, slings,
or ropes.
•
Before craning, position the upperstructure with the
travel motors at the rear.
•
Move the load slowly and carefully. Never move it
suddenly.
•
Keep all persons well away from the load.
•
Never move a load over a person’s head.
•
Do not allow anyone to approach the load until it is
safely and securely situated on supporting blocks or
on the ground.
•
Never attach a sling or chain to the bucket teeth. They
may come off, causing the load to fall.
TX1094257 —UN—28JUN13
Protect Against Flying Debris
If ying debris hit eyes or any other part of the body,
serious injury may result.
•
Guard against injury from ying pieces of metal or
debris; wear goggles or safety glasses.
•
Keep bystanders away from the working area before
striking any object.
•
Always close the front windows, doors, door windows
and the overhead window when operating the machine.
TX1094258 —UN—28JUN13
1-3-16
112321
PN=55
Safety—Operating Precautions
MM16284,0001C62 -19-27OCT15-1/1
MM16284,0001CD4 -19-07OCT14-1/1
Precautions for Lightning
Lightning may strike the machine.
If lightning comes close, immediately stop the operation,
and take the following action.
•
When you are around the machine or operating cab-less
machine, evacuate to a safe place far away from the
machine.
•
When you are in the cab, stay in the cab until lightning
has passed and safety is assured. Close the cab doors
and windows. Lower the bucket to the ground, and stop
the engine. Put your hands on your lap to avoid contact
with any metal surfaces. Never go out of the cab.
If lightning strikes the machine or near the machine, check
all of the machine safety devices for any failure after
lightning has passed and safety is secured. If any trouble
is found, operate the machine only after repairing it.
TX1094256 —UN—28JUN13
Park Machine Safely
To avoid accidents:
•
Park machine on a rm, level surface.
•
Lower bucket to the ground.
•
Turn auto-idle switch OFF.
•
Run engine at slow idle speed without load for 5 minutes.
•
Turn key switch to OFF to stop engine.
•
Remove the key from the key switch.
•
Pull the pilot control shut-off lever to the LOCK position.
•
Close windows, roof vent, and cab door.
•
Lock all access doors and compartments.
TX1094259 —UN—28JUN13
1-3-17
112321
PN=56
Safety—Operating Precautions
MM16284,0001CD5 -19-27OCT15-1/1
Transport Safely
Take care the machine may turn over when loading or
unloading the machine onto or off of a truck or trailer.
•
Observe the related regulations and rules for safe
transportation.
•
Select an appropriate truck or trailer for the machine to
be transported.
•
Be sure to use a signal person.
•
Always follow the following precautions for loading or
unloading:
1. Select solid and level ground.
2. Always use a ramp or deck strong enough to support
the machine weight.
3. Turn auto-idle switch OFF.
4. Always select the slow speed mode with the travel
mode switch.
5. Never load or unload the machine onto or off a truck
or trailer using the front attachment functions when
driving up or down the ramp.
6. Never steer the machine while on the ramp. If the
traveling direction must be changed while on the
ramp, unload the machine from the ramp, reposition
the machine on the ground, then try loading again.
TX1094262 —UN—28JUN13
7. At the top end of the ramp where it meets the atbed,
there is a sudden bump. Take care when traveling
over it.
8. Place blocks in front of and behind the tires. Securely
hold the machine to the truck or trailer deck with wire
ropes.
Be sure to further follow the details described in the
TRANSPORTING section in the operator’s manual.
1-3-18
112321
PN=57
Safety—Operating Precautions
TX,SAW,CHAIN,HAZ -19-08MAY20-1/1
Saw Chain Hazard
Saw chain shot is the high velocity separation and ejection
of a piece or pieces of cutting saw chain from the end of a
broken saw chain in mechanized timber harvesting. Saw
chain shot exposes both harvester head operators and
bystanders to a risk of serious injury or death. Saw chain
shot typically occurs near the saw drive sprocket (4) of
the cutting system. Saw chain shot pieces typically travel
within 15 degrees on either side of the saw bar (2) plane.
A saw chain shot consists of two breaks in a saw chain.
First, the saw chain loop breaks and forms two ends. One
end moves past the saw chain drive sprocket and is rapidly
accelerated due to a whip-like motion of the saw chain
end. The whip action causes a second break in saw chain,
ejecting pieces of the cutting saw chain at high speed.
To reduce the risk of injury from saw chain shot:
•
Operators and bystanders should never be exposed to
the saw chain shot hazard zone when saw chain (1)
is in motion.
•
All harvester heads in saw chain shot hazard zone
should be tted with appropriate guards, shields, and
windows to protect operator and operator structures in
accordance with safety standards and regulations for
forestry operations.
•
Impact resistant polycarbonate windows are
recommended.
•
Inspect the operator’s cab windows regularly and after
any impact. Replace if damaged, cloudy, or has visible
micro-cracking or crazing.
•
Inspect saw chain shot guard (6) (if equipped) each
time the saw chain is replaced. Replace saw chain shot
guard if it is missing or damaged.
•
Do not exceed maximum saw chain speed
recommended by saw manufacturer.
•
Inspect saw chain and cutting system frequently.
Replace dull saw chain. Follow saw chain
manufacturers recommendations for saw chain tension
and saw chain lubrication. Replace damaged saw chain
(1), saw chain drive sprocket (4), saw bar (2), saw chain
shot guard (6), and saw chain catcher (5).
•
Always discard saw chain after the second break.
•
Use only approved new replacement and repair parts
from the same chain or saw manufacturer.
•
Keep saw chains sharp and lubricated. Follow the saw
chain manufacturers recommendation when inspecting,
repairing, sharpening, installing and breaking-in saw
chains.
1— Saw Chain
2— Saw Bar
3— Saw Bar Tip
4— Saw Chain Drive Sprocket
5— Saw Chain Catcher
6— Saw Chain Shot Guard
15
15
15
15
XJ1097618 —UN—13SEP11
Saw Chain Shot Hazard Zone
TX1045990A —UN—08JUN10
Saw Chain Shot Pieces
TX1078028 —UN—14SEP10
Saw Chain Break without Saw Chain Shot Guard
TX1078029 —UN—14SEP10
Saw Chain Break with Saw Chain Shot Guard
6
3
2
1
5
4
TX1078030 —UN—08JUN10
Typical Saw Components
1-3-19
112321
PN=58
Safety—Maintenance Precautions
MM16284,0001C53 -19-05OCT16-1/1
Practice Safe Maintenance
To avoid accidents:
•
Understand service procedures before starting work.
•
Keep the work area clean and dry.
•
Do not spray water or steam inside cab.
•
Never lubricate or service the machine while it is moving.
•
Keep hands, feet and clothing away from power-driven
parts.
Before servicing the machine:
1. Park the machine on a level surface.
2. Lower the bucket to the ground.
3. Turn the auto-idle switch off.
4. Run the engine at slow idle speed without load for 5
minutes.
5. Turn the key switch to OFF to stop engine.
6. Relieve the pressure in the hydraulic system by
moving the control levers several times.
7. Remove the key from the key switch.
8. Attach a “Do Not Operate” tag on the control lever.
9. Pull the pilot control shut-off lever to the LOCK position.
10. Allow the engine to cool.
•
If a maintenance procedure must be performed with the
engine running, do not leave the machine unattended.
•
If the machine must be raised, maintain a 90 to 110
degree angle between the boom and arm. Securely
support any machine elements that must be raised for
service work.
•
Inspect certain parts periodically and repair or replace
as necessary. Refer to the section discussing that part in
the "MAINTENANCE" chapter in the operator’s manual.
•
Keep all parts in good condition and properly installed.
•
Fix damage immediately. Replace worn or broken parts.
Remove any buildup of grease, oil, or debris.
•
When cleaning parts, always use nonammable
detergent oil. Never use highly ammable oil such as
fuel oil and gasoline to clean parts or surfaces.
•
Turn the battery disconnect switch to OFF before
adjusting the electrical systems or performing welding
operation on the machine.
•
Sufciently illuminate the work site. Use a maintenance
work light when working under or inside the machine.
•
Always use a work light protected with a guard. In case
the light bulb is broken, spilled fuel, oil, antifreeze uid,
or window washer uid may catch re.
TX1094263 —UN—28JUN13TX1094264 —UN—28JUN13TX1094265 —UN—28JUN13
1-4-1
112321
PN=59
Safety—Maintenance Precautions
MM16284,0001C63 -19-17SEP14-1/1
MM16284,000195A -19-26JUL12-1/1
MM16284,000195F -19-26JUL12-1/1
Warn Others of Service Work
Unexpected machine movement can cause serious injury.
•
Before performing any work on the machine, attach a
"Do Not Operate" tag on the control lever.
This tag is available from your authorized dealer.
TX1172138 —UN—17SEP14
Support Machine Properly
Never attempt to work on the machine without securing
the machine rst.
•
Always lower the attachment to the ground before you
work on the machine.
•
If you must work on a lifted machine or attachment,
securely support the machine or attachment. Do not
support the machine on cinder blocks, hollow tires, or
props that may crumble under continuous load. Do not
work under a machine that is supported solely by a jack.
TX1094264 —UN—28JUN13
Replace Rubber Hoses Periodically
Rubber hoses that contain ammable uids under
pressure may break due to aging, fatigue, and abrasion. It
is very difcult to gauge the extent of deterioration due to
aging, fatigue, and abrasion of rubber hoses by inspection
alone.
•
Periodically replace the rubber hoses. (See the page
of "Periodic Replacement of Parts" in the operator’s
manual.)
Failure to periodically replace rubber hoses may cause a
re, uid injection into skin, or the front attachment to fall
on a person nearby, which may result in severe burns,
gangrene, or otherwise serious injury or death.
TX1094261 —UN—28JUN13
1-4-2
112321
PN=60
Safety—Maintenance Precautions
MM16284,0001CDA -19-27OCT15-1/1
MM16284,0001CDB -19-28APR15-1/1
MM16284,0001E1B -19-27OCT15-1/1
MM16284,0001E1C -19-28APR15-1/1
Precautions for Welding and Grinding
Welding may generate gas and/or small res.
•
Be sure to perform welding in a well ventilated and
prepared area. Store ammable materials in a safe
place before starting welding.
•
Only qualied personnel should perform welding. Never
allow an unqualied person to perform welding.
•
Turn the battery disconnect switch to the OFF position
before operating the machine.
Grinding on the machine may create re hazards. Store
ammable materials in a safe place before starting
grinding.
After nishing welding and grinding, recheck that there
are no abnormalities such as the area surrounding the
welded area still smoldering.
TX1094280 —UN—28JUN13
Avoid Heating Near Pressurized Fluid Lines
Flammable spray can be generated by heating near
pressurized uid lines, resulting in severe burns to
yourself and bystanders.
•
Do not heat by welding, soldering, or using a torch near
pressurized uid lines or other ammable materials.
•
Pressurized lines can be accidentally cut when
heat goes beyond the immediate ame area. Install
temporary re-resistant guards to protect hoses or other
materials before engaging in welding, soldering, etc.
TX1094281 —UN—28JUN13
Avoid Applying Heat to Lines Containing
Flammable Fluids
•
Do not weld or ame cut pipes or tubes that contain
ammable uids.
•
Clean pipes and tubes thoroughly with non-ammable
solvent before welding or ame cutting.
Precautions for Handling Accumulator and
Gas Damper
High-pressure nitrogen gas is sealed in the accumulator
and the gas damper. Inappropriate handling may cause
explosion, possibly resulting in serious injury or death.
Strictly comply with the following items:
•
Do not disassemble the unit.
•
Keep the units away from open ames and re.
•
Do not bore a hole, do not cut by torch.
•
Avoid giving shocks by hitting or rolling the unit.
•
Before disposing the unit, sealed gas must be released.
Consult your authorized dealer.
1-4-3
112321
PN=61
Safety—Maintenance Precautions
MM16284,0001966 -19-26JUL12-1/1
MM16284,0001969 -19-26JUL12-1/1
Remove Paint Before Welding or Heating
Hazardous fumes can be generated when paint is heated
by welding, soldering, or using a torch. If inhaled, these
fumes may cause sickness.
•
Avoid potentially toxic fumes and dust.
•
Do all such work outside or in a well-ventilated area.
Dispose of paint and solvent properly.
•
Remove paint before welding or heating:
1. If you sand or grind paint, avoid breathing the dust.
Wear an approved respirator.
2. If you use solvent or paint stripper, remove stripper
with soap and water before welding. Remove solvent
or paint stripper containers and other ammable
material from area. Allow fumes to disperse at least
15 minutes before welding or heating.
TX1094282 —UN—28JUN13
Service Air Conditioning System Safely
If spilled onto skin, refrigerant may cause a cold contact
burn.
•
Refer to the instructions described on the container for
proper use when handling the refrigerant.
•
Use a recovery and recycling system to avoid leaking
refrigerant into the atmosphere.
•
Never touch the refrigerant.
TX1094283 —UN—28JUN13
1-4-4
112321
PN=62
Safety—Maintenance Precautions
Continued on next page TX,CHAIN,SHOT,GUARD -19-16NOV20-1/2
Chain Shot Guard Inspection
CAUTION: Serious injury or death can occur.
Harvester head can move unpredictably
during service procedures. Frame lock pin
must always be used during maintenance
or adjustment procedures.
The function of the chain shot guard (6) is to reduce the
risk of serious injury or death to operators and bystanders
from ying saw chain pieces. The chain shot guard must
be in place and structurally sound to absorb the energy
from a broken saw chain (1) and reduce the whip action
that causes a second break of the saw chain, ejecting
pieces of the cutting saw chain at high speed. For
additional information about saw chain shot, refer to Saw
Chain Hazard in the safety section of this manual.
Inspect chain shot guard daily or when saw chain
maintenance is performed.
Saw chain breaks are the primary cause of wear or
damage to chain shot guard.
The chain shot guard, cap screws, and hardware should
be replaced yearly or when excessively worn or damaged.
6
3
2
1
5
4
TX1078030 —UN—08JUN10
Saw
TX1305897A —UN—04NOV20
Typical Saw Components
1— Saw Chain
2— Saw Bar
3— Saw Bar Tip
4— Saw Chain Drive Sprocket
5— Saw Chain Catcher
6— Chain Shot Guard
1-4-5
112321
PN=63
Safety—Maintenance Precautions
TX,CHAIN,SHOT,GUARD -19-16NOV20-2/2
Identication of excessive chain shot guard wear and
damage:
•
Inspect for wear or damage of the chain shot guard,
cap screws, or attaching hardware.
•
Replace cap screws or hardware when missing or not
in place.
•
Inspect for wear on each end of the chain shot guard.
•
Inspect for possible cracking on any portion of the chain
shot guard.
•
Inspect for perforations or holes anywhere on the saw
chain shot guard.
•
Make sure that chain shot guard is not worn thin and
still maintains the original shape and prole.
•
Inspect for possible metal peeling or tearing back over
any portion of the chain shot guard.
Replace the chain-shot guard if any of these condition
are present:
•
Guard does not maintain its original shape
•
Any perforation is present
•
Any cracks, peeling, or tearing are present
•
The front, side, or rear edge is worn by more than 5 mm
Use only approved replacement parts.
TX1305480A —UN—30OCT20
Chain Shot Guard—Perforation Examples
TX1080272A —UN—28JUL10
Chain Shot Guard—Peeled and Torn
TX1305481A —UN—27OCT20
Chain Shot Guard—Worn Thin
TX1080274A —UN—28JUL10
Chain Shot Guard—Edges Worn Away
1-4-6
112321
PN=64
Safety—Safety Signs and Other Instructions
Continued on next page KR46761,0001364 -19-13JUN19-1/69
Safety Signs and Other Instructions
Rear Entry Cab
TX1278199
18
18
13
13
34
16
31
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
3
2
1
24
5
4
22
21
20
19
16
29
23
28
15
14
27
17
17
25
26
19
33
30
32
TX1278199 —UN—13JUN19
Safety Signs and Other Instructions (rear entry cab)
1-5-1
112321
PN=65
Safety—Safety Signs and Other Instructions
KR46761,0001364 -19-13JUN19-2/69
Continued on next page KR46761,0001364 -19-13JUN19-3/69
1— Alternative Exit (2 used)
2— IMPORTANT, Polycarbonate
Windows
3— CAUTION, Attachment
4— IMPORTANT, Operator
Protective Structure (OPS)
5— WARNING, Use Seat Belt
6— CAUTION, Control Pattern
7— WARNING, Avoid Serious
Crushing Injury From Boom
8— CAUTION, Engine Fan
9— CAUTION, Cab Riser
10— DANGER, Electric Lines
11— CAUTION, Operate Machine
Safely
12— Cab Tilting Procedure
13— Lifting Point (4 used)
14— CAUTION, Pressurized Tank
15— CAUTION, Hydraulic
Reservoir Cap
16— CAUTION, Prevent Machine
Fires (2 used)
17— Tiedown (4 used)
18— WARNING, Stay Clear (2
used)
19— WARNING, Rotating Fan
Blade (2 used)
20— WARNING, Fan Belt
21— CAUTION, Pinch Point
22— WARNING, Cab Door
23— Fire Extinguisher Inside
24— Protective Structure
Certication
25— Fire Extinguisher
26— First Aid
27— Retrieval Point (2 used)
28— WARNING, Avoid Machine
Tipover
29— DANGER, Battery
30— WARNING, Falling Hazard
31— WARNING, Track Adjuster (2
used)
32— CAUTION, Pinch Point
33— CAUTION, Do Not Touch
34— CAUTION, Sharp Objects (if
equipped)
1. Alternative Exits
Use alternative exit in an emergency situation.
These safety labels are located inside the cab on the
skylight window and outside the cab on the skylight
window.
TX1233449 —UN—02FEB17
Alternative Exit
TX1234210 —UN—14FEB17
Alternative Exit
1-5-2
112321
PN=66
Safety—Safety Signs and Other Instructions
KR46761,0001364 -19-13JUN19-4/69
KR46761,0001364 -19-13JUN19-5/69
Continued on next page KR46761,0001364 -19-13JUN19-6/69
2. IMPORTANT, Polycarbonate Windows
THIS MACHINE HAS POLYCARBONATE WINDOWS
- Common cleaning agents may be incompatible with
polycarbonate
Clean with John Deere Polycarbonate Cleaner
DO NOT use glass cleaners on polycarbonate
See Operator’s Manual for additional care instructions
This label is located inside the cab on the front window.
TX1238760 —19—11MAY17
IMPORTANT, Polycarbonate Windows
3. CAUTION, Attachment
Attachment can hit cab.
This safety label is located inside the cab on the front
window.
TX1211401 —19—24FEB16
CAUTION, Attachment
4. IMPORTANT, Operator Protective Structure (OPS)
KEEP THE OPERATOR PROTECTIVE STRUCTURE
(OPS) IN PLACE
Keep doors, screens, windows, windshield, etc. in
place to minimize hazards from whipping or intruding
objects. Replace damaged parts immediately.
This safety label is located inside the cab on the left
roll-over protective structure (ROPS) post.
TX1130522 —19—08FEB13
IMPORTANT, Operator Protective Structure (OPS)
1-5-3
112321
PN=67
Safety—Safety Signs and Other Instructions
KR46761,0001364 -19-13JUN19-7/69
KR46761,0001364 -19-13JUN19-8/69
Continued on next page KR46761,0001364 -19-13JUN19-9/69
5. WARNING, Use Seat Belt
Avoid crushing
DO NOT JUMP if machine tips
USE SEAT BELT
This safety label is located inside the cab on the left
roll-over protective structure (ROPS) post.
TX1141220 —19—25JUL13
WARNING, Use Seat Belt
6. CAUTION, Control Pattern
Alternate control patterns are available for this
machine. Always verify control response before
operating.
This safety label is located inside the cab on the right
side window.
TX1211415 —19—24FEB16
CAUTION, Control Pattern
7. WARNING, Avoid Serious Crushing Injury From
Boom
•
AVOID SERIOUS CRUSHING INJURY FROM
BOOM
•
NEVER place any part of body beyond window
frame. It could be crushed by the boom if boom
control lever is accidentally bumped or otherwise
engaged.
•
If window is missing or broken, replace immediately.
This safety label is located inside the cab on the cab
door.
TX1211370 —19—23FEB16
WARNING, Avoid Serious Crushing Injury From Boom
1-5-4
112321
PN=68
Safety—Safety Signs and Other Instructions
KR46761,0001364 -19-13JUN19-10/69
KR46761,0001364 -19-13JUN19-11/69
Continued on next page KR46761,0001364 -19-13JUN19-12/69
8. CAUTION, Engine Fan
Engine fan may unexpectedly purge debris from the
radiator. Flying debris is a hazard and can cause
personal injury.
Stay clear of the machine until the engine has stopped.
This safety label is located inside the cab on the cab
door.
TX1153338 —19—07AUG14
CAUTION, Engine Fan
9. CAUTION, Cab Riser
•
To avoid injury, never operate this machine unless
the cab riser hold down bolts have been properly
installed.
•
Check bolts regularly and retorque when necessary.
This safety label is located inside the cab on the cab
door.
TX1211371 —19—23FEB16
CAUTION, Cab Riser
10. DANGER, Electric Lines
Serious injury or death can result from contact with
electric lines.
Never move any part of unit or load closer to electric
line than 3 M [10 FT.] plus twice the line insulator length.
This safety label is located inside the cab on the right
side window.
TX1104374 —19—19DEC12
DANGER, Electric Lines
1-5-5
112321
PN=69
Safety—Safety Signs and Other Instructions
KR46761,0001364 -19-13JUN19-13/69
Continued on next page KR46761,0001364 -19-13JUN19-14/69
11. CAUTION, Operate Machine Safely
•
AVOID DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY - READ AND
UNDERSTAND THE OPERATOR’S MANUAL AND
SAFETY MANUAL PRIOR TO OPERATING THIS
MACHINE.
•
Controls may be changed for attachment or operator
preference. Try control pattern before operating.
•
Always lower working tools to the ground and
engage hydraulic control lockout lever before leaving
operator's seat.
•
Keep riders off machine.
•
Avoid contact between boom/attachments and
overhead obstacles whenever operating, traveling
or transporting machine.
•
Keep bystanders clear of machine; especially before
moving boom, swinging upperstructure or traveling.
•
Upperstructure position affects travel direction. Try
pedals or levers to determine travel direction before
moving machine.
•
Avoid tipping - Do not lift or move objects that
exceed machine stability.
•
Avoid parking machine on an incline.
This safety label is located inside the cab on the cab
door.
TX1211399 —19—24FEB16
CAUTION, Operate Machine Safely
12. Cab Tilting Procedure
CAB TILTING PROCEDURE
1. Park unit on level surface, lower attachment to
ground.
2. Turn key switch off.
3. DO NOT operate cab tilt mechanism if cab is
occupied.
4. Remove or secure any loose objects which could
fall when cab is tilted.
5. Remove cab riser hold down bolts.
6. Tilt cab down using DOWN toggle switch.
7. Tilt cab up using UP toggle switch.
8. Replace bolts; torque to 500 ft. lbs.
This label is located inside the cab on the right side
window.
TX1228133 —19—10NOV16
Cab Tilting Procedure
1-5-6
112321
PN=70
Safety—Safety Signs and Other Instructions
KR46761,0001364 -19-13JUN19-15/69
KR46761,0001364 -19-13JUN19-16/69
Continued on next page KR46761,0001364 -19-13JUN19-17/69
13. Lifting Points
Route appropriate lifting device through lifting points.
These labels are located strategically throughout
machine.
TX1166778 —UN—23JUL14
Lifting Point
14. CAUTION, Pressurized Tank
PRESSURIZED TANK CAP REMOVAL
1. Insert 4 mm Allen Wrench in base and turn to
release locking pin.
2. Slowly turn cap counter clockwise a few degrees
to relieve pressure. Pressure may suddenly cause
cap to lift off tank.
3. To replace, align notches and turn clockwise.
This safety label is located on top of the hydraulic tank
cap.
TX1227371 —19—31OCT16
CAUTION, Pressurized Tank
15. CAUTION, Hydraulic Reservoir Cap
•
Before removing hydraulic reservoir cap and air
breather always stop engine.
•
Do not remove cap when oil temperature is hot.
•
Do not loosen drain plug when oil temperature is hot.
This safety label is located on top of the hydraulic tank.
TX1212346 —19—09MAR16
CAUTION, Hydraulic Reservoir Cap
1-5-7
112321
PN=71
Safety—Safety Signs and Other Instructions
KR46761,0001364 -19-13JUN19-18/69
KR46761,0001364 -19-13JUN19-19/69
Continued on next page KR46761,0001364 -19-13JUN19-20/69
16. CAUTION, Prevent Machine Fires
PREVENT MACHINE FIRES
Keep engine compartment and other machine areas
free of trash and debris. Clean daily.
Check for fuel or oil leaks every day. Repair and clean
up spills immediately.
Keep re extinguishers on machine and properly
maintained. Recharge immediately after use.
These safety labels are located inside the left front
service door and right rear service door.
TX1210058 —19—17FEB16
CAUTION, Prevent Machine Fires
17. Tiedowns
Route appropriate tiedown device through tiedown
points.
These labels are located strategically throughout
machine.
TX1166256 —UN—24JUL14
Tiedown
18. WARNING, Stay Clear
Operator may swing or reverse machine
STAY CLEAR
This safety label is located at the rear of the machine
on each side of the counterweight.
TX1104370 —19—19DEC12
WARNING, Stay Clear
1-5-8
112321
PN=72
Safety—Safety Signs and Other Instructions
KR46761,0001364 -19-13JUN19-21/69
KR46761,0001364 -19-13JUN19-22/69
Continued on next page KR46761,0001364 -19-13JUN19-23/69
19. WARNING, Rotating Fan Blade
Be sure to stop the engine before servicing the
machine. Personal injury or death may result if you
become entangled with fan.
This safety label is located inside the engine
compartment on top of the fan.
TX1222986 —19—15SEP16
WARNING, Rotating Fan Blade
20. WARNING, Fan Belt
Be sure to stop the engine before servicing the
machine. Personal injury or death may result if you
become entangled with fan belts.
This safety label is located inside the engine
compartment on top of the fan.
TX1222982 —UN—15SEP16
WARNING, Fan Belt
21. CAUTION, Pinch Point
PINCH POINT
Keep clear when cab tilt mechanism is being operated.
This safety label is located between the machine
frame and the cab.
TX1210056 —19—17FEB16
CAUTION, Pinch Point
1-5-9
112321
PN=73
Safety—Safety Signs and Other Instructions
KR46761,0001364 -19-13JUN19-24/69
Continued on next page KR46761,0001364 -19-13JUN19-25/69
22. WARNING, Cab Door
Cab door must be closed before tilting cab.
This safety label is located inside the cab on the cab
door.
TX1211402 —19—24FEB16
WARNING, Cab Door
23. Fire Extinguisher Inside
FIRE EXTINGUISHER INSIDE
This safety label is located on the outside of the cab
door.
TX1211400 —19—24FEB16
Fire Extinguisher
1-5-10
112321
PN=74
Safety—Safety Signs and Other Instructions
Continued on next page KR46761,0001364 -19-13JUN19-26/69
24. Protective Structure Certication
NOTE: Depending on machine conguration, the roll-over
protective structure (ROPS) label will vary.
To maintain unimpaired operator protection and
manufacturer's protective structure certication:
- Damaged Falling Object Guard, Operator Protective
Structure (OPS), or Roll Over Protective Structure
(ROPS) must be replaced, not repaired or revised.
- Any alteration to the Falling Object Guard, OPS or
ROPS must be approved by the manufacturer.
This safety label is located inside the cab on the left
ROPS post.
TX1222994 —19—15SEP16
Protective Structure Certication—Rear Entry Cab
TX1222996 —19—15SEP16
Protective Structure Certication—Rear Entry Cab With Forward Riser
1-5-11
112321
PN=75
Safety—Safety Signs and Other Instructions
KR46761,0001364 -19-13JUN19-27/69
KR46761,0001364 -19-13JUN19-28/69
Continued on next page KR46761,0001364 -19-13JUN19-29/69
25. Fire Extinguisher
Fire extinguisher mounting location.
This safety label is located inside the cab near the re
extinguisher.
TX1174246 —UN—10OCT14
Fire Extinguisher
26. First Aid
Keep rst aid kit handy.
This safety label is located inside the cab on the right
side of the rear panel.
TX1170295 —UN—28AUG14
First Aid
27. Retrieval Points
Route appropriate retrieval device through retrieval
points.
This label is located at the front and rear of the
machine’s undercarriage.
TX1170297 —UN—28AUG14
Retrieval Point
1-5-12
112321
PN=76
Safety—Safety Signs and Other Instructions
KR46761,0001364 -19-13JUN19-30/69
Continued on next page KR46761,0001364 -19-13JUN19-31/69
28. WARNING, Avoid Machine Tipover
AVOID MACHINE TIPOVER
Machine is less stable with boom and arm removed.
•
Travel and swing very slowly.
•
Use extreme care when loading.
- Avoid counter-rotation.
- Do not swing counterweight beyond edge of truck
bed.
•
Keep counterweight pointed uphill on inclines.
This safety label is located on the outside of the cab
door.
TX1111959 —19—12APR12
WARNING, Avoid Machine Tipover
29. DANGER, Battery
•
Battery fumes can explode. Keep sparks and ames
away from batteries.
•
Always avoid storing metals like tools or inammable
materials around or on the batteries. Explosion or
re can be caused by short-circuiting batteries.
•
Sulfuric acid in battery electrolyte is poisonous. It is
strong enough to burn skin, eat holes in clothing,
and cause blindness if splashed into eyes.
If you spill acid on yourself:
1. Flush your skin with water.
2. Apply baking soda or lime to help neutralize the
acid.
3. Flush your eyes with water for 10-15 minutes. Get
medical attention immediately.
This safety label is located inside the left rear service
door near the batteries.
TX1222980 —19—15SEP16
DANGER, Battery
1-5-13
112321
PN=77
Safety—Safety Signs and Other Instructions
KR46761,0001364 -19-13JUN19-32/69
KR46761,0001364 -19-13JUN19-33/69
Continued on next page KR46761,0001364 -19-13JUN19-34/69
30. WARNING, Falling Hazard
Don’t stand in this place.
Falling hazard exists.
This safety label is located on the engine cover.
TX1222981 —19—15SEP16
WARNING, Falling Hazard
31. WARNING, Track Adjuster
Spring in track adjuster is loaded, with great force and
grease in the cylinder is under high pressure. NEVER
remove grease tting, valve assembly, or track
adjuster assembly. SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY
could result. Contact your authorized dealer. Carefully
read the procedures described in operator’s manual
before adjusting track tension and strictly comply with
such procedures.
This safety label is located on the inside of each side
of the tracks.
TX1222989 —19—15SEP16
WARNING, Track Adjuster
32. CAUTION, Pinch Point
Avoid personal injury when operating seat fore-and-aft
lever.
This safety label is located on the front of the seat
pedestal.
TX1157159 —UN—04APR14
CAUTION, Pinch Point
1-5-14
112321
PN=78
Safety—Safety Signs and Other Instructions
KR46761,0001364 -19-13JUN19-35/69
Continued on next page KR46761,0001364 -19-13JUN19-36/69
33. CAUTION, Do Not Touch
Avoid personal injury from burns. Do not touch during
operation or immediately after operation, surface will
be hot.
This safety label is located near the aftertreatment
device.
TX1230817 —UN—15DEC16
CAUTION, Do Not Touch
34. CAUTION, Sharp Objects—If Equipped
Prevent possible injury from sharp objects. Always
mount tools with tool head pointed downward.
This safety label is located on the right side of the
machine behind the log deector.
TX1261087 —UN—18JUL18
CAUTION, Sharp Objects (if equipped)
1-5-15
112321
PN=79
Safety—Safety Signs and Other Instructions
Continued on next page KR46761,0001364 -19-13JUN19-37/69
Side Entry Cab
TX1278200
16
16
11
11
14
29
6
7
8
9
10
5
24
22
22
2
1
21
4
3
23
30
20
20
18
17
14
27
26
19
13
12
25
15
15
32
17
31
28
TX1278200 —UN—13JUN19
Safety Signs and Other Instructions (side entry cab)
1— IMPORTANT, Polycarbonate
Windows
2— CAUTION, Attachment
3— IMPORTANT, Operator
Protective Structure (OPS)
4— WARNING, Use Seat Belt
5— CAUTION, Control Pattern
6— WARNING, Avoid Serious
Crushing Injury From Boom
7— CAUTION, Engine Fan
8— CAUTION, Cab Riser
9— DANGER, Electric Lines
10— CAUTION, Operate Machine
Safely
11— Lifting Point (4 used)
12— CAUTION, Pressurized Tank
13— CAUTION, Hydraulic
Reservoir Cap
14— CAUTION, Prevent Machine
Fires (2 used)
15— Tiedown (4 used)
16— WARNING, Stay Clear (2
used)
17— WARNING, Rotating Fan
Blade (2 used)
18— WARNING, Fan Belt
19— Fire Extinguisher Inside
20— Alternative Exit (4 used)
21— Protective Structure
Certication
22— KEEP BACK—Processor
Only (2 used)
23— Fire Extinguisher
24— First Aid
25— Retrieval Point (2 used)
26— WARNING, Avoid Machine
Tipover
27— DANGER, Battery
28— WARNING, Falling Hazard
29— WARNING, Track Adjuster (2
used)
30— CAUTION, Pinch Point
31— CAUTION, Do Not Touch
32— CAUTION, Sharp Objects (if
equipped)
1-5-16
112321
PN=80
Safety—Safety Signs and Other Instructions
KR46761,0001364 -19-13JUN19-38/69
KR46761,0001364 -19-13JUN19-39/69
Continued on next page KR46761,0001364 -19-13JUN19-40/69
1. IMPORTANT, Polycarbonate Windows
THIS MACHINE HAS POLYCARBONATE WINDOWS
- Common cleaning agents may be incompatible with
polycarbonate
Clean with John Deere Polycarbonate Cleaner
DO NOT use glass cleaners on polycarbonate
See Operator’s Manual for additional care instructions
This label is located inside the cab on the front window.
TX1238760 —19—11MAY17
IMPORTANT, Polycarbonate Windows
2. CAUTION, Attachment
Attachment can hit cab.
This safety label is located inside the cab on the front
window.
TX1211401 —19—24FEB16
CAUTION, Attachment
3. IMPORTANT, Operator Protective Structure (OPS)
KEEP THE OPERATOR PROTECTIVE STRUCTURE
(OPS) IN PLACE
Keep doors, screens, windows, windshield, etc. in
place to minimize hazards from whipping or intruding
objects. Replace damaged parts immediately.
This safety label is located inside the cab on the left
roll-over protective structure (ROPS) post.
TX1130522 —19—08FEB13
IMPORTANT, Operator Protective Structure (OPS)
1-5-17
112321
PN=81
Safety—Safety Signs and Other Instructions
KR46761,0001364 -19-13JUN19-41/69
KR46761,0001364 -19-13JUN19-42/69
Continued on next page KR46761,0001364 -19-13JUN19-43/69
4. WARNING, Use Seat Belt
Avoid crushing
DO NOT JUMP if machine tips
USE SEAT BELT
This safety label is located inside the cab on the left
roll-over protective structure (ROPS) post.
TX1141220 —19—25JUL13
WARNING, Use Seat Belt
5. CAUTION, Control Pattern
Alternate control patterns are available for this
machine. Always verify control response before
operating.
This safety label is located inside the cab on the right
side window.
TX1211415 —19—24FEB16
CAUTION, Control Pattern
6. WARNING, Avoid Serious Crushing Injury From
Boom
•
AVOID SERIOUS CRUSHING INJURY FROM
BOOM
•
NEVER place any part of body beyond window
frame. It could be crushed by the boom if boom
control lever is accidentally bumped or otherwise
engaged.
•
If window is missing or broken, replace immediately.
This safety label is located inside the cab on the cab
door.
TX1211370 —19—23FEB16
WARNING, Avoid Serious Crushing Injury From Boom
1-5-18
112321
PN=82
Safety—Safety Signs and Other Instructions
KR46761,0001364 -19-13JUN19-44/69
KR46761,0001364 -19-13JUN19-45/69
Continued on next page KR46761,0001364 -19-13JUN19-46/69
7. CAUTION, Engine Fan
Engine fan may unexpectedly purge debris from the
radiator. Flying debris is a hazard and can cause
personal injury.
Stay clear of the machine until the engine has stopped.
This safety label is located inside the cab on the cab
door.
TX1153338 —19—07AUG14
CAUTION, Engine Fan
8. CAUTION, Cab Riser
•
To avoid injury, never operate this machine unless
the cab riser hold down bolts have been properly
installed.
•
Check bolts regularly and retorque when necessary.
This safety label is located inside the cab on the cab
door.
TX1211371 —19—23FEB16
CAUTION, Cab Riser
9. DANGER, Electric Lines
Serious injury or death can result from contact with
electric lines.
Never move any part of unit or load closer to electric
line than 3 M [10 FT.] plus twice the line insulator length.
This safety label is located inside the cab on the right
side window.
TX1104374 —19—19DEC12
DANGER, Electric Lines
1-5-19
112321
PN=83
Safety—Safety Signs and Other Instructions
KR46761,0001364 -19-13JUN19-47/69
Continued on next page KR46761,0001364 -19-13JUN19-48/69
10. CAUTION, Operate Machine Safely
•
AVOID DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY - READ AND
UNDERSTAND THE OPERATOR’S MANUAL AND
SAFETY MANUAL PRIOR TO OPERATING THIS
MACHINE.
•
Controls may be changed for attachment or operator
preference. Try control pattern before operating.
•
Always lower working tools to the ground and
engage hydraulic control lockout lever before leaving
operator's seat.
•
Keep riders off machine.
•
Avoid contact between boom/attachments and
overhead obstacles whenever operating, traveling
or transporting machine.
•
Keep bystanders clear of machine; especially before
moving boom, swinging upperstructure or traveling.
•
Upperstructure position affects travel direction. Try
pedals or levers to determine travel direction before
moving machine.
•
Avoid tipping - Do not lift or move objects that
exceed machine stability.
•
Avoid parking machine on an incline.
This safety label is located inside the cab on the cab
door.
TX1211399 —19—24FEB16
CAUTION, Operate Machine Safely
11. Lifting Points
Route appropriate lifting device through lifting points.
These labels are located strategically throughout
machine.
TX1166778 —UN—23JUL14
Lifting Point
1-5-20
112321
PN=84
Safety—Safety Signs and Other Instructions
KR46761,0001364 -19-13JUN19-49/69
KR46761,0001364 -19-13JUN19-50/69
Continued on next page KR46761,0001364 -19-13JUN19-51/69
12. CAUTION, Pressurized Tank
PRESSURIZED TANK CAP REMOVAL
1. Insert 4 mm Allen Wrench in base and turn to
release locking pin.
2. Slowly turn cap counter clockwise a few degrees
to relieve pressure. Pressure may suddenly cause
cap to lift off tank.
3. To replace, align notches and turn clockwise.
This safety label is located on top of the hydraulic tank
cap.
TX1227371 —19—31OCT16
CAUTION, Pressurized Tank
13. CAUTION, Hydraulic Reservoir Cap
•
Before removing hydraulic reservoir cap and air
breather always stop engine.
•
Do not remove cap when oil temperature is hot.
•
Do not loosen drain plug when oil temperature is hot.
This safety label is located on top of the hydraulic tank.
TX1212346 —19—09MAR16
CAUTION, Hydraulic Reservoir Cap
14. CAUTION, Prevent Machine Fires
PREVENT MACHINE FIRES
Keep engine compartment and other machine areas
free of trash and debris. Clean daily.
Check for fuel or oil leaks every day. Repair and clean
up spills immediately.
Keep re extinguishers on machine and properly
maintained. Recharge immediately after use.
This safety label is located inside the left front service
door and right rear service door.
TX1210058 —19—17FEB16
CAUTION, Prevent Machine Fires
1-5-21
112321
PN=85
Safety—Safety Signs and Other Instructions
KR46761,0001364 -19-13JUN19-52/69
KR46761,0001364 -19-13JUN19-53/69
Continued on next page KR46761,0001364 -19-13JUN19-54/69
15. Tiedowns
Route appropriate tiedown device through tiedown
points.
These labels are located strategically throughout
machine.
TX1166256 —UN—24JUL14
Tiedown
16. WARNING, Stay Clear
Operator may swing or reverse machine
STAY CLEAR
This safety label is located at the rear of the machine
on each side of the counterweight.
TX1104370 —19—19DEC12
WARNING, Stay Clear
17. WARNING, Rotating Fan Blade
Be sure to stop the engine before servicing the
machine. Personal injury or death may result if you
become entangled with fan.
This safety label is located inside the engine
compartment on top of the fan.
TX1222986 —19—15SEP16
WARNING, Rotating Fan Blade
1-5-22
112321
PN=86
Safety—Safety Signs and Other Instructions
KR46761,0001364 -19-13JUN19-55/69
Continued on next page KR46761,0001364 -19-13JUN19-56/69
18. WARNING, Fan Belt
Be sure to stop the engine before servicing the
machine. Personal injury or death may result if you
become entangled with fan belts.
This safety label is located inside the engine
compartment on top of the fan.
TX1222982 —UN—15SEP16
WARNING, Fan Belt
19. Fire Extinguisher Inside
FIRE EXTINGUISHER INSIDE
This safety label is located outside the cab on the rear
window.
TX1211400 —19—24FEB16
Fire Extinguisher
1-5-23
112321
PN=87
Safety—Safety Signs and Other Instructions
Continued on next page KR46761,0001364 -19-13JUN19-57/69
20. Alternative Exits
Use alternative exit in an emergency situation.
These safety labels are located inside the cab on the
rear window and skylight window, and outside the cab
on the rear window and skylight window.
TX1233449 —UN—02FEB17
Alternative Exit
TX1234210 —UN—14FEB17
Alternative Exit
1-5-24
112321
PN=88
Safety—Safety Signs and Other Instructions
KR46761,0001364 -19-13JUN19-58/69
KR46761,0001364 -19-13JUN19-59/69
Continued on next page KR46761,0001364 -19-13JUN19-60/69
21. Protective Structure Certication
To maintain unimpaired operator protection and
manufacturer's protective structure certication:
- Damaged Falling Object Guard, Operator Protective
Structure (OPS), or Roll Over Protective Structure
(ROPS) must be replaced, not repaired or revised.
- Any alteration to the Falling Object Guard, OPS or
ROPS must be approved by the manufacturer.
This safety label is located inside the cab on the left
ROPS post.
TX1222995 —19—15SEP16
Protective Structure Certication
22. KEEP BACK—Processor Only
KEEP BACK 300 FT/90 M
This safety label is located on each side of the boom.
TX1220499 —19—03AUG16
KEEP BACK—Processor Only
23. Fire Extinguisher
Fire extinguisher mounting location.
This safety label is located inside the cab near the re
extinguisher.
TX1174246 —UN—10OCT14
Fire Extinguisher
1-5-25
112321
PN=89
Safety—Safety Signs and Other Instructions
KR46761,0001364 -19-13JUN19-61/69
KR46761,0001364 -19-13JUN19-62/69
Continued on next page KR46761,0001364 -19-13JUN19-63/69
24. First Aid
Keep rst aid kit handy.
This safety label is located inside the cab on the right
side of the rear panel.
TX1170295 —UN—28AUG14
First Aid
25. Retrieval Points
Route appropriate retrieval device through retrieval
points.
This label is located at the front and rear of the
machine’s undercarriage.
TX1170297 —UN—28AUG14
Retrieval Point
26. WARNING, Avoid Machine Tipover
AVOID MACHINE TIPOVER
Machine is less stable with boom and arm removed.
•
Travel and swing very slowly.
•
Use extreme care when loading.
- Avoid counter-rotation.
- Do not swing counterweight beyond edge of truck
bed.
•
Keep counterweight pointed uphill on inclines.
This safety label is located on the left side of the
machine below the cab door.
TX1111959 —19—12APR12
WARNING, Avoid Machine Tipover
1-5-26
112321
PN=90
Safety—Safety Signs and Other Instructions
KR46761,0001364 -19-13JUN19-64/69
Continued on next page KR46761,0001364 -19-13JUN19-65/69
27. DANGER, Battery
•
Battery fumes can explode. Keep sparks and ames
away from batteries.
•
Always avoid storing metals like tools or inammable
materials around or on the batteries. Explosion or
re can be caused by short-circuiting batteries.
•
Sulfuric acid in battery electrolyte is poisonous. It is
strong enough to burn skin, eat holes in clothing,
and cause blindness if splashed into eyes.
If you spill acid on yourself:
1. Flush your skin with water.
2. Apply baking soda or lime to help neutralize the
acid.
3. Flush your eyes with water for 10-15 minutes. Get
medical attention immediately.
This safety label is located inside the left rear service
door near the batteries.
TX1222980 —19—15SEP16
DANGER, Battery
28. WARNING, Falling Hazard
Don’t stand in this place.
Falling hazard exists.
This safety label is located on the engine cover.
TX1222981 —19—15SEP16
WARNING, Falling Hazard
1-5-27
112321
PN=91
Safety—Safety Signs and Other Instructions
KR46761,0001364 -19-13JUN19-66/69
KR46761,0001364 -19-13JUN19-67/69
Continued on next page KR46761,0001364 -19-13JUN19-68/69
29. WARNING, Track Adjuster
Spring in track adjuster is loaded, with great force and
grease in the cylinder is under high pressure. NEVER
remove grease tting, valve assembly, or track
adjuster assembly. SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY
could result. Contact your authorized dealer. Carefully
read the procedures described in operator’s manual
before adjusting track tension and strictly comply with
such procedures.
This safety label is located on the inside of each side
of the tracks.
TX1222989 —19—15SEP16
WARNING, Track Adjuster
30. CAUTION, Pinch Point
Avoid personal injury when operating seat fore-and-aft
lever.
This safety label is located on the front of the seat
pedestal.
TX1157159 —UN—04APR14
CAUTION, Pinch Point
31. CAUTION, Do Not Touch
Avoid personal injury from burns. Do not touch during
operation or immediately after operation, surface will
be hot.
This safety label is located near the aftertreatment
device.
TX1230817 —UN—15DEC16
CAUTION, Do Not Touch
1-5-28
112321
PN=92
Safety—Safety Signs and Other Instructions
KR46761,0001364 -19-13JUN19-69/69
32. CAUTION, Sharp Objects—If Equipped
Prevent possible injury from sharp objects. Always
mount tools with tool head pointed downward.
This safety label is located on the right side of the
machine behind the log deector.
TX1261087 —UN—18JUL18
CAUTION, Sharp Objects (if equipped)
1-5-29
112321
PN=93
Operation—Operator's Station
KR46761,0001373 -19-14SEP16-1/1
Pedals, Levers, and Panels
TX1212590 —UN—01APR16
Rear Entry Cab
TX1212591 —UN—01APR16
Side Entry Cab
Control levers appearance and congurations may vary.
For operation of the buttons and switches on the control
levers, see Control Levers. (Section 2-3.)
1— Left Pilot Control Lever
2— Right Pilot Control Lever
3— Left Travel Lever
4— Right Travel Lever
5— Left Travel Pedal
6— Right Travel Pedal
7— Monitor
8— Switch Panel
9— Key Switch
10— Right Console
11— Storage
12— Lighter/Accessory Power
Port
13— Fuse Box Cover
14— Operator's Seat
15— Left Console
16— Pilot Shutoff Lever
17— Engine Stop Switch
TX1223380 —UN—13SEP16
Engine Stop Switch
2-1-1
112321
PN=94
Operation—Operator's Station
OUT4001,000073B -19-23FEB16-1/1
Switch Panel
1— Back Button
2— Home Button
3— Monitor Dial
4— Temperature Control/Mode
Switch
5— Blower Speed Switch
6— Radio Tuning Switch
7— Radio Power and Volume
Switch
8— Engine Speed Dial
9— Auto-Idle Switch
10— Travel Mode Switch
11— Power Mode Button
12— Work Light Switch
13— Windshield Wiper and
Washer Switch
14— Key Switch
15— Keypad
TX1086613 —UN—10JAN11
Switch Panel
2-1-2
112321
PN=95
Operation—Operator's Station
Continued on next page KR46761,0001154 -19-14DEC16-1/2
Switch Panel Functions
1. Back Button (for monitor use)—Press button to
return to previous menu.
2. Home Button (for monitor use)—Press button to
return to default screen when in any of the monitor menus.
If key switch is in OFF position, press and hold button to
check hour meter and fuel amount on monitor.
3. Monitor Dial (for monitor use)—Press dial to go
from default screen to main menu screen. Rotate dial to
highlight desired menu function on monitor. Press dial to
select desired screen information or to conrm desired
action.
4. Temperature Control/Mode Switch—Press switch to
toggle between different air vent settings. Air conditioner
display on monitor shows different settings each time
switch is pressed. There are four different settings:
•
Air ows out of front vent and defroster vents.
•
Air ows out of front, rear, and defroster vents.
•
Air ows out of front, rear, foot, and defroster vents.
•
Air ows out of foot vents.
Rotate switch counterclockwise for cooler air setting and
clockwise for warmer air setting. Temperature setting
changes on air conditioner display as switch is rotated
either way.
5. Blower Speed Switch—Press switch while air
conditioner is OFF to select AUTO mode (blower speed
setting and air ow setting are selected automatically).
Temperature control/mode switch can be rotated to
operator's preferred cab temperature setting. Blower
speed and air ow settings adjust automatically to reach
and maintain desired cab temperature.
If blower speed switch is rotated or temperature
control/mode switch is pressed while in AUTO mode,
AUTO mode is canceled and all settings need to be
adjusted by operator as needed.
If blower speed switch is pressed while air conditioner is
on, air conditioner turns off. Blower speed switch must be
on to operate on/off function of air conditioner in monitor
menu.
Rotate switch to adjust blower speed to desired setting
when not in AUTO mode.
6. Radio Tuning Switch—Press switch to toggle between
AM and FM frequency. Rotate switch to select desired
radio station.
On machines equipped with the auxiliary input, when
personal device is plugged in, the radio tuning switch will
toggle between AM, FM, and AUX. See Operating the
AM/FM Radio in this section.
7. Radio Power and Volume Switch—Press switch to
turn radio on or off. Rotate switch to adjust volume to
desired setting.
8. Engine Speed Dial—Turn dial clockwise to increase
engine speed or counterclockwise to decrease engine
speed.
9. Auto-Idle Switch—Turn switch to select between A/I
ON or A/I OFF.
With engine on, move auto-idle switch to A/I ON and
engine speed dial to above auto-idle speed. Auto-idle
indicator appears on monitor when auto-idle is on. Engine
runs at engine speed dial setting for 4 seconds and then
auto-idle system slows engine to auto-idle engine speed.
When any pilot control lever is operated, engine speed
increases to engine speed dial setting. When pilot control
levers are placed back in neutral position, auto-idle circuit
automatically slows engine to auto-idle engine speed after
4 seconds.
Turn auto-idle switch to A/I OFF and set engine speed dial
to improve machine control in difcult work areas, loading,
and unloading. Auto-idle indicator disappears on monitor.
10. Travel Mode Switch—Turn switch to select between
fast (rabbit) or slow (turtle) speed travel.
11. Power Mode Button—Press button to select different
engine speed modes:
•
ECO (economy) Mode—use to improve fuel efciency
and reduce noise level with a small difference in engine
speed.
•
PWR (power) Mode—use when general digging work is
needed.
•
H/P (high power) Mode—use when more ow is desired
for booming up or rolling in the arm in excavation work.
12. Work Light Switch—Switch has three positions:
•
First Position—drive light on base of machine turns on.
Switch panel also illuminates.
•
Second Position—drive light on base of machine,
upper cab lights, boom lights, arm lights (if equipped),
and rear cab lights (if equipped) turn on. Switch
panel illuminates and monitor changes to night mode
(background lighting is dimmed).
•
OFF—work lights and switch panel illumination turns off.
13. Windshield Wiper and Washer Switch—Switch has
ve operating positions:
•
OFF—wiper stops operating and is retracted.
•
INT (slow)—wiper operates intermittently at 8-second
intervals.
•
INT (medium)—wiper operates intermittently at
6-second intervals.
•
INT (fast)—wiper operates intermittently at 3-second
intervals.
•
ON—wiper operates continuously.
Push and hold switch to squirt uid on windshield. If
switch is held more than 2 seconds, wiper operates until
switch is released. Do not hold-down switch for more than
20 seconds.
2-1-3
112321
PN=96
Operation—Operator's Station
KR46761,0001154 -19-14DEC16-2/2
KR46761,00010FB -19-18NOV16-1/1
14. Key Switch—Switch has four positions:
•
OFF
•
ACC
•
ON
•
START
15. Keypad—Keypad has different applications:
•
Use numbers 0—9 to enter password at machine
start-up if equipped.
•
Press keypad numbers 1—8 while radio is on to switch
between programmed stations.
•
When work light switch is on position 2, monitor
changes to night mode (background lighting is dimmed).
Press and hold number 0 on keypad to adjust monitor
back to daytime mode display.
Rear Panel
Lighter (1): For operator convenience. Can also be used
as an electrical port for 24-volt appliances only.
Accessory Power Port (2): 12-volt, 5-amp electrical port
provided for service and maintenance.
Fuse Box Cover (3): Prevents damage to fuses. For
more on fuses, see Replacing Fuses. (Section 4-1.)
TX1213195 —UN—22MAR16
Rear Panel—Rear Entry Cab
TX1213194 —UN—22MAR16
Rear Panel—Side Entry Cab
2-1-4
112321
PN=97
Operation—Operator's Station
KR46761,00011C3 -19-30JAN17-1/1
KR46761,00011C4 -19-30JAN17-1/1
Horn Button
NOTE: For machines equipped with a processor, see
Horn Switch—Processor Only in this section.
The horn button (1) is located on top of the left pilot control
lever.
On machines equipped with a thumb, the horn button (1)
is located on the back side of the left pilot control lever.
1— Horn Button
1
TX1213199 —UN—23MAR16
Forestry Excavator or Forestry Excavator With Processor
1
TX1213200 —UN—23MAR16
Forestry Excavator With Thumb (if equipped)
Power Boost Button
NOTE: For machines equipped with a processor, see
attachment manufacturer’s operator’s manual.
The power boost button (1) is located on top of the right
pilot control lever.
On machines equipped with a thumb, the power boost
button is located on the back side of the right pilot control
lever.
Press and hold down power boost button for an 8-second
increase in hydraulic power. Release button to reset
power boost function.
Power boost is automatically activated when the following
conditions are met:
•
Boom up
•
No arm in
•
High delivery pressure
1— Power Boost Button
1
TX1213208 —UN—28MAR16
Forestry Excavator or Forestry Excavator With Processor
1
TX1213209 —UN—28MAR16
Forestry Excavator With Thumb (if equipped)
2-1-5
112321
PN=98
Operation—Operator's Station
DW90712,00004D0 -19-12APR16-1/1
KR46761,0001374 -19-13SEP16-1/1
Pilot Shutoff Lever
The pilot shutoff lever shuts off hydraulic pilot pressure
to all pilot control valves. When pilot shutoff lever is in
locked (UP) position, the machine will not move if a lever
or pedal is accidentally moved. Engine will not start with
pilot shutoff lever in the unlocked (DOWN) position.
Always pull pilot shutoff lever to locked (UP) position when
stopping the engine or leaving operator’s station.
Push pilot shutoff lever forward to unlocked (DOWN)
position to operate machine.
T216779 —UN—22NOV05
Pilot Shutoff Lever (unlocked position)
Engine Stop Switch
The engine stop switch (1) is located at the front, left side
of the seat stand inside the cab.
If the engine does not stop, even if the key switch is
turned OFF, move engine stop switch downward to stop
the engine. After operating switch, be sure to return the
switch back to the upward position.
1— Engine Stop Switch
TX1223382 —UN—13SEP16
Engine Stop Switch
2-1-6
112321
PN=99
Operation—Operator's Station
KR46761,0001152 -19-17AUG18-1/1
KR46761,0001379 -19-15SEP16-1/1
Left Console
NOTE: There are standard and optional switches on
the left console. Before using the switches on the
left console, be aware of what kind of optional
devices are equipped on the machine.
Raise the armrest when operating the switches.
1— Travel Alarm Cancel Switch
2— Cab Dome Light Switch
3— Horn Switch (processor
only)
4— Reversing Fan Switch (if
equipped)
5— Max Speed Program
Switch (early production, if
equipped) or Service and
Access Lights Switch (late
production, if equipped)
6— Hydraulic Oil Tank Pressure
Vent Switch (if equipped)
TX1262731A —UN—17AUG18
Left Console (early production)
TX1262732A —UN—17AUG18
Left Console (late production)
Travel Alarm and Travel Alarm Cancel Switch
NOTE: If alarm is not operating during normal transport, or
if alarm sounds when engine is running and machine
is stationary, see an authorized Hitachi dealer.
The travel alarm sounds when a travel pedal or lever
is activated and will continue as long as the tracks are
moving. When travel motion stops, the travel alarm switch
is reset.
After the initial 13-second alarm, alarm can be silenced by
depressing the right half of the travel alarm cancel switch
(1) located on the left console.
1— Travel Alarm Cancel Switch
TX1001227 —UN—14DEC05
Travel Alarm Cancel Switch
2-1-7
112321
PN=100
Operation—Operator's Station
KR46761,000114C -19-05APR16-1/1
KR46761,000114D -19-23MAR16-1/1
KR46761,00013E5 -19-20OCT16-1/1
Cab Dome Light Switch
There are two cab dome lights located in the cab.
Press cab dome light switch to on position (1) to turn the
cab dome lights on. Press cab dome light switch to off
position (2) to turn cab dome lights off.
1— On Position 2— Off Position
TX1213214 —UN—22MAR16
Cab Dome Light Switch
Horn Switch—Processor Only
NOTE: Machines equipped with a processor do not
include a horn button on the joysticks.
Press and hold horn switch (1) to sound horn.
1— Horn Switch
TX1213273 —UN—23MAR16
Horn Switch
Reversing Fan Switch—If Equipped
IMPORTANT: Prevent machine damage from
overheating. Do not manually reverse fan
immediately after last completion. Wait 1
minute before reactivating.
NOTE: Reversing fan is more effective at higher
engine speeds.
The reversing fan switch has three positions:
•
AUTO: Every 60 minutes, the radiator cooling fan will
automatically reverse direction for 30 seconds without
intervention from the operator when engine rpm is above
auto-idle speed. The default time setting is 60 minutes.
To adjust time setting, see an authorized Hitachi dealer.
•
OFF: Fan resumes normal operation.
•
MANUAL: Press and hold right side of switch to reverse
fan. Fan will stop reversing when switch is released or
when 1 minute has passed.
TX1000844A —UN—29NOV05
Reversing Fan Switch
When reversing fan is activated, the reversing fan
indicator will appear on the monitor display.
2-1-8
112321
PN=101
Operation—Operator's Station
KR46761,000114E -19-09JUL18-1/1
Max Speed Program Switch—If Equipped
Early Production
The max speed program switch (1) allows the operator
to set maximum speed of attachment rotation and
open/close functions.
Position and hold proportional slider switch (2) on control
lever to desired maximum speed and press max speed
program switch to set maximum speed. When maximum
speed is activated, the LED on the max speed program
switch will illuminate.
1— Max Speed Program Switch 2— Proportional Slider Switch
TX1213304 —UN—23MAR16
Max Speed Program Switch
2
TX1213620 —UN—26APR16
Left Control Lever (forestry excavator and log loader shown)
2-1-9
112321
PN=102
Operation—Operator's Station
KR46761,000114F -19-05APR16-1/1
Hydraulic Oil Tank Pressure Vent Switch—If
Equipped
The purpose of this system is to provide the operator a
method of minimizing oil leakage in the event of an oil line
rupture or part malfunction. The hydraulic oil tank on the
machine is tted with a ller cap that allows a pressure of
48 kPa (0.48 bar) (7 psi) to be created inside the tank.
The purpose of this pressure is to maintain a positive
pressure on the suction side of the main pumps to prevent
pump cavitation. The downside effect of this pressure is
that hydraulic oil will continue to leak until the operator
vents this pressure.
The system incorporates a hydraulic oil tank pressure
vent solenoid (2) that bypasses the cap and provides
an electrically controlled method for venting the tank
pressure. The hydraulic oil tank pressure vent switch (1)
(momentary push-button switch) on the left console in the
cab operates this valve. To prevent inadvertent actuation
and possible pump cavitation, the controls are electrically
interlocked with the key switch so that key switch must be
in OFF position before the system can be activated.
1— Hydraulic Oil Tank Pressure
Vent Switch
2— Hydraulic Oil Tank Pressure
Vent Solenoid
TX1213303 —UN—01JUN16
Hydraulic Vent Switch
2
TX1213706 —UN—04APR16
Hydraulic Tank
2-1-10
112321
PN=103
Operation—Operator's Station
KR46761,0001334 -19-23AUG18-1/1
Right Console
NOTE: There are standard and optional switches on the
right console. Before using the switches on the
right console, be aware of what kind of optional
devices are equipped on the machine.
Raise the armrest when operating the switches.
1— Aftertreatment Device
Regeneration Switch
2— Service and Access Lights
Switch (early production, if
equipped) or USB Charge
Port (late production, if
equipped)
3— Service ADVISOR™
Remote (SAR) Switch
4— Attachment Combo Switch
(if equipped)
TX1262734A —UN—17AUG18
Right Console (early production)
TX1262735A —UN—17AUG18
Right Console (late production)
Service ADVISOR is a trademark of Deere & Company
2-1-11
112321
PN=104
Operation—Operator's Station
CN93077,0000583 -19-06MAY15-1/1
Aftertreatment Device Regeneration Switch
CAUTION: Servicing machine during
aftertreatment device regeneration can result in
serious personal injury. Avoid exposure and skin
contact with hot gases and components.
During aftertreatment device regeneration,
the engine may run at elevated idle and
hot temperatures for an extended period of
time. Aftertreatment gases and aftertreatment
device components may reach temperatures
hot enough to burn people and ignite or
melt common materials.
Avoid death or serious injury from machine
movement. Do not leave running machine
unattended during aftertreatment device
regeneration.
IMPORTANT: Avoid machine damage. Always
park machine in a safe location and check
for adequate fuel and diesel exhaust uid
(DEF) level before beginning aftertreatment
device regeneration.
The aftertreatment device regeneration switch (1) is
located on the right console.
Before starting the aftertreatment device regeneration
process, machine needs to be in a predetermined safe
state. This safe state includes three conditions:
•
Machine is parked in a safe place with the front
attachment lowered to the ground.
•
Pilot shutoff lever is in locked (UP) position.
TX1086795A —UN—11JAN11
Aftertreatment Device Regeneration Switch
1— Aftertreatment Device
Regeneration Switch
•
Engine speed dial is set to slow idle.
An aftertreatment device regeneration request will appear
on the monitor to inform the operator when a manual
regeneration needs to take place.
Once the safe state conditions are met, press and hold
the right half of aftertreatment device regeneration switch
for 3 seconds to begin a manual regeneration.
Monitor will show a progress screen during the
regeneration and will prompt the operator when the
regeneration is complete.
For more information, see Aftertreatment Device
Regeneration. (Section 2-3.)
2-1-12
112321
PN=105
Operation—Operator's Station
KR46761,0001384 -19-27JUL18-1/1
Service and Access Lights Switch—If Equipped
TX1213307 —UN—28MAR16
Service and Access Lights Switches (console switches)
TX1224218 —UN—21SEP16
Service and Access Lights Switches (step switches)
There are two sets of service and access lights switches
(1 and 2). Both sets of switches control the same lights.
One set of switches is located in the cab on the right
console (early production) or left console (late production)
and the other set of switches is located on the bottom of
the steps on the right side of machine.
Press service lights switch (1) to turn on all compartment
lights.
Compartment light locations:
•
Engine compartment
•
Right service compartments
•
Left service compartments
•
Cab riser compartment (if equipped)
Press the access light switch (2) to turn on the access
light (3) on the rear side of the cab.
1— Service Lights Switch
2— Access Light Switch
3— Access Light
TX1224219 —UN—21SEP16
Access Light—Rear Entry Cab
TX1224220 —UN—21SEP16
Access Light—Side Entry Cab
2-1-13
112321
PN=106
Operation—Operator's Station
OUT4001,0000748 -19-15MAY19-1/1
Service ADVISOR™ Remote (SAR) Switch
The Service ADVISOR™ Remote (SAR) switch (1) allows
operator to accept or decline software updates available
to the machine when prompted by an alarm on the
monitor. LEDs on the SAR switch will illuminate when the
alarm appears. The left LED will be red and the right LED
will be green.
Press left side of SAR switch (red LED) to DECLINE
installation (2) of software updates.
Press right side of SAR switch (green LED) to ACCEPT
installation (3) of software updates.
For more information on SAR functionality, see Service
ADVISOR™ Remote (SAR) Software Delivery Process
and Service ADVISOR™ Remote (SAR) Operation.
(Section 2-3.)
TX1086797A —UN—21JAN11
Service ADVISOR™ Remote Switch
1— Service ADVISOR™
Remote (SAR) Switch
2— DECLINE Installation
3— ACCEPT Installation
Service ADVISOR is a trademark of Deere & Company
2-1-14
112321
PN=107
Operation—Operator's Station
TD48962,00000E4 -19-25JUL18-1/1
USB Charge Port—If Equipped
The USB charge port (3) allows operator to charge
USB-connected devices only. The USB charge port will
not transfer data to or from a connected device.
The USB charge port location (1) for machines not
equipped with satellite radio is on the right console.
The USB charge port location for machines equipped
with satellite radio is on the right side wall behind the
operator’s seat.
1. Open USB charge port cover (2).
2. Connect device to USB charge port with a USB cord.
3. Turn key switch to the ACC or ON position to charge
a connected device.
1— USB Charge Port Location
2— USB Charge Port Cover
3— USB Charge Port
TX1260701A —UN—13JUL18
USB Charge Port Location (machines not equipped with satellite radio)
TX1260702A —UN—13JUL18
USB Charge Port Location (machines equipped with satellite radio)
TX1260704A —UN—13JUL18
USB Charge Port Cover
2-1-15
112321
PN=108
Operation—Operator's Station
KR46761,0001151 -19-31MAY16-1/1
Attachment Combo Switch—If Equipped
NOTE: When the LED on the attachment combo switch
(1) is illuminated, the machine is in bucket and
thumb attachment mode. When the LED is off, the
machine is in log loader attachment mode.
The attachment combo switch (1) changes the button and
switch congurations on the control levers. This allows
the operator to alternate between bucket and thumb
attachment and log loader attachments.
NOTE: If pilot shutoff lever is in the unlocked (DOWN)
position while attempting to change to combo
mode, the LED will ash rapidly.
1. Place pilot shutoff lever in locked (UP) position.
2. Turn key switch to ON position. Do not start engine.
3. Press and hold the attachment combo switch for 2
seconds. The LED on the switch will go off.
4. Turn key switch to OFF position then to ON position to
initiate log loader attachment mode. Start engine.
5. Place pilot shutoff lever in unlocked (DOWN) position.
Operate attachment. See Attachment Combo Control
Levers—If Equipped. (Section 2-3.)
6. To return to bucket and thumb attachment mode, stop
engine. Turn key switch to ON position.
TX1213610 —UN—31MAR16
Attachment Combo Switch
1— Attachment Combo Switch
7. Press and hold the attachment combo switch for 2
seconds. The LED on the switch will illuminate.
8. Turn key switch to OFF position then to ON position to
initiate bucket and thumb attachment mode.
9. Start engine. Operate attachment. See Control
Levers. (Section 2-3.)
2-1-16
112321
PN=109
Operation—Operator's Station
Continued on next page OUT4001,0000741 -19-19FEB18-1/2
Cab Heater and Air Conditioner
CAB HEATER OPERATION
AUTO Operation
1. Press blower speed switch (1) while air conditioner
is OFF to set blower speed to AUTO mode (blower
speed setting and air ow setting are then selected
automatically).
2. Rotate temperature control/mode switch (2) to
reach operator's preferred cab degree heat setting.
Temperature setting will change on the air conditioner
display on the monitor as the switch is rotated either
way. Blower speed and air ow settings adjust
automatically to reach and maintain desired cab
temperature.
Manual Operation
1. Press blower speed switch (1) while air conditioner
is OFF to set blower speed to AUTO mode. Rotate
blower speed switch either way to cancel AUTO mode
and set the blower speed manually to desired speed
setting.
2. Rotate temperature control/mode switch (2) to
reach operator's preferred cab degree heat setting.
Temperature setting will change on the air conditioner
display on the monitor as the switch is rotated either
way.
3. Press temperature control/mode switch to toggle
between different air vent options. The air conditioner
display on the monitor will show the different settings
each time the switch is pressed. There are four
different settings:
- Air ows out of front vent and the defroster vents.
- Air ows out of front, rear, and the defroster vents.
- Air ows out of front, rear, foot, and the defroster
vents.
- Air ows out of foot vents.
NOTE: Usually the cab heater turns the dehumidier
function off. Dehumidier function can be turned
on from monitor menu. See Main Menu—Air
Conditioner. (Section 2-2.)
Defroster Operation
1. Press blower speed switch (1) while air conditioner is
OFF to set blower speed to AUTO mode. During cold
weather season when starting the engine, the engine
coolant temperature and air temperature in the cab
are low. The air conditioner and heater unit controls
the blow rate to the minimum in order to restrict cool
air from owing into the cab.
2. Rotate temperature control/mode switch (2) to
reach operator's preferred cab degree heat setting.
Temperature setting will change on the air conditioner
display on the monitor as the switch is rotated either
way.
3. Set the circulation mode to fresh air using the monitor
menu. See Main Menu—Air Conditioner. (Section 2-2.)
4. Once AUTO mode is operating and cab starts to heat
up, press temperature control/mode switch to cancel
TX1086733A —UN—11JAN11
Cab Heater and Air Conditioner Operation
1— Blower Speed Switch 2— Temperature Control/Mode
Switch
AUTO mode and toggle between different air vent
options. The air conditioner display on the monitor
will show the different settings each time the switch is
pressed. For best defrosting results, select either:
- Air ows out of front vent and the defroster vents.
- Air ows out of front, rear, and the defroster vents.
5. Control air ow direction by adjusting the vents in the
cab to blow towards the windows.
6. Rotate temperature control/mode switch as needed to
control preferred air temperature.
7. Rotate blower speed switch as needed to set preferred
fan speed.
Air Conditioner Operation
NOTE: During off season, operate the air conditioner at
least once a month for several minutes with the
engine running at slow idle to protect each part of
the air conditioner compressor from lack of lubricant.
AUTO Operation
1. Press blower speed switch (1) while air conditioner is
OFF to set blower speed to AUTO mode (blower speed
setting and air ow setting are selected automatically).
2. Rotate temperature control/mode switch (2) to reach
operator's preferred cab degree cold air setting.
Temperature setting will change on the air conditioner
display on the monitor as the switch is rotated either
way. Blower speed and air ow settings adjust
automatically to reach and maintain desired cab
temperature.
Manual Operation
2-1-17
112321
PN=110
Operation—Operator's Station
OUT4001,0000741 -19-19FEB18-2/2
OUT4001,0000742 -19-13AUG14-1/1
1. Press blower speed switch while air conditioner is OFF
to set blower speed to AUTO mode. Rotate blower
speed switch either way to cancel AUTO mode and set
the blower speed manually to desired speed setting.
2. Turn the air conditioner ON from the monitor menu.
See Main Menu—Air Conditioner. (Section 2-2.)
3. Rotate temperature control/mode switch to reach
operator's preferred cab degree cold air setting.
Temperature setting will change on the air conditioner
display on the monitor as the switch is rotated either
way.
4. Press temperature control/mode switch to toggle
between different air vent options. The air conditioner
display on the monitor will show the different settings
each time the switch is pressed. There are four
different settings:
NOTE: If lower front window becomes cloudy,
defroster vents should be closed.
- Air ows out of front vent and the defroster vents.
- Air ows out of front, rear, and the defroster vents.
- Air ows out of front, rear, foot, and the defroster
vents.
- Air ows out of foot vents.
Selecting Display Between Celsius and
Fahrenheit
The cab temperature (1) is always shown in the air
conditioner display on the monitor. Temperature display
can be changed between degrees Celsius (°C) and
Fahrenheit (°F) using the Unit Selection menu. For
more information, see Main Menu—Setting Menu—Unit
Selection. (Section 2-2.)
Degrees Celsius (°C) can be set in a range from
18°C—32°C.
Degrees Fahrenheit (°F) can be set in a range from
63°F—91°F.
1— Cab Temperature
TX1087258A —UN—24JAN11
Air Conditioner Display on the Monitor
2-1-18
112321
PN=111
Operation—Operator's Station
Continued on next page KR46761,00011D3 -19-02JUN16-1/2
Operating the AM/FM Radio
NOTE: If machine is equipped with satellite this radio
becomes obsolete. See Satellite Radio—If
Equipped in this section.
Press the radio power and volume switch (1) to turn on
the radio. Rotate the radio power and volume switch to
desired volume setting. Treble and base settings are
available through the monitor menu. For more information,
see Main Menu—Radio. (Section 2-2.)
Press the radio tuning switch (2) to toggle between AM
or FM frequency. Rotate radio tuning switch to tune
radio to desired AM or FM station. To nd the clearest
reception stations for the area, use the seek function
that is available through the monitor menu. For more
information, see Main Menu—Radio. (Section 2-2.)
Press buttons 1—8 on the keypad (3) to move between
preset memory radio stations. Radio display (4) on
monitor shows the station and frequency setting that
corresponds with each keypad button.
NOTE: Presetting memory radio stations can also be
done using the monitor menu. Stations can be
automatically selected for the area using the auto
preset option in the monitor menu. For more
information, see Main Menu—Radio. (Section 2-2.)
To preset memory radio stations or to change previously
set stations using the keypad, tune radio to desired
station setting. Press and hold one of the keypad buttons
(1—8) for more than 1 second. Setting is stored to that
corresponding button. Repeat procedure for seven other
desired stations.
1— Radio Power and Volume
Switch
2— Radio Tuning Switch
3— Keypad
4— Radio Display
TX1087264A —UN—24JAN11
Radio Controls on Switch Panel
TX1087265A —UN—24JAN11
Radio Display on Monitor
2-1-19
112321
PN=112
Operation—Operator's Station
KR46761,00011D3 -19-02JUN16-2/2
Auxiliary Input—If Equipped
The auxiliary input jack (4) allows the operator to connect
personal devices to the sound system.
When device is plugged into auxiliary input jack, the radio
tuning switch (2) will toggle between AM, FM, and AUX.
1— Radio Power and Volume
Switch
2— Radio Tuning Switch
3— Keypad
4— Auxiliary Input Jack
TX1087264A —UN—24JAN11
Radio Controls on Switch Panel
TX1216655 —UN—02JUN16
Auxiliary Input
2-1-20
112321
PN=113
Operation—Operator's Station
Continued on next page KR46761,00011D2 -19-27JUL18-1/2
Satellite Radio—If Equipped
TX1159634 —UN—02MAY14
Radio (premium radio shown)
1— Power Button
2— Volume Control Dial
3a— BND Button
3b— Pickup Call Button (if
equipped)
4a— Menu Button
4b— Hang-Up Call Button (if
equipped)
5— Multi-Function Rocker Switch
6— Source Button
7— Bluetooth® Button
8— Preset Button 1
9— Preset Button 2
10— Preset Button 3
11— Preset Button 4
12— Preset Button 5
13— Preset Button 6
14— Audio Button
15— Auxiliary Input Jack (3.5 mm)
16— USB Charge Port
TX1260853A —UN—13JUL18
Auxiliary Input and USB Charge Port (early production)
TX1260734A —UN—17JUL18
Auxiliary Input and USB Charge Port (late production)
NOTE: When equipped with satellite radio, the AM/FM
radio becomes obsolete.
NOTE: The radio can be turned on using the power
button (1) even when the ignition is off. The
radio is then turned off automatically after a
preset time to preserve the machine battery (see
Adjust Turn-Off Time in this section).
1. Power—Press power button (1) to turn on radio. Press
and hold power button to turn off radio.
Adjust Turn-Off Time:
- Press MENU button (4a) until HOUR and the
current turn-off time setting is displayed.
- Turn volume control dial (2) counterclockwise or
clockwise to adjust the turn-off time from 1—60
minutes.
- Press MENU button several times to exit menu.
2. Mute—Press power button to silence radio audio. Turn
on radio audio by pressing power button or turning
volume control dial.
3. AM/FM—Press BND button (3a) to change between
AM bands (AM1 and AMT) and FM bands (FM1, FM2,
and FMT).
4. Preset Stations—Six numbered preset buttons (8—13)
store and recall stations for each AM and FM band.
To store a station, select a band and then select a
station. Press and hold preset button for 3 seconds.
Current station will be stored and corresponding preset
number will appear in display. To recall a station,
select a band and then press preset button. Radio will
automatically tune to stored station.
NOTE: Radio will only change sources if media
is plugged in and available.
5. Press source button (6) to select between radio, AUX,
and SiriusXM® satellite radio.
Audio and Menu Adjustment:
Audio Adjustment—Press audio button (14) to restore
radio to factory settings and to step through the following
adjustment options: bass, treble, and balance (left to
right). When desired option appears on display, rotate
volume control dial to adjust audio feature. When no
adjustments have been made for 3 seconds, radio
resumes normal operation.
Menu Adjustment—Press MENU button to enter menu
adjustment mode and adjust any of the menu options.
2-1-21
112321
PN=114
Operation—Operator's Station
KR46761,00011D2 -19-27JUL18-2/2
When desired option appears on display, rotate volume
control dial to adjust option. When no adjustments are
made for 3 seconds, the radio resumes normal operation.
The following menu options may be adjusted using this
feature:
1. Beep Conrm (on and off)—Determines if a beep will
be heard each time a button is pressed.
2. Display Brightness (-5 min to +5 max)—Determines
brightness level of display.
3. Turn on Volume (5—25)—Selects desired volume
level for radio to assume when turned on.
Volume Adjustment:
Increase Volume—Turn volume control dial clockwise to
increase volume setting.
Decrease Volume—Turn volume control dial
counterclockwise to decrease volume setting.
Tuning Radio:
Increase Manual Tune Frequency—Press up on
multi-function rocker switch (5) to tune frequency one
notch higher.
Decrease Manual Tune Frequency—Press down on
multi-function rocker switch to tune frequency one notch
lower.
Press right side of multi-function rocker switch to seek
next strong station.
Press left side of multi-function rocker switch to seek
previous strong station.
Automatic Tune Frequency—Press and hold left or right
side of multi-function rocker switch to quickly scan to
station of choice.
Auxiliary Input and USB Charge Port
Early Production
Use auxiliary input jack (15) located to the left of the
satellite radio system to connect personal devices to the
sound system. In the same location is a USB charge port
(16). See USB Charge Port—If Equipped in this section.
Late Production
Use auxiliary input jack (15) located behind the operator’s
seat to connect personal devices to the satellite radio
sound system. In the same location is a USB charge port
(16). See USB Charge Port—If Equipped in this section.
Bluetooth®—If Equipped:
This radio system is equipped with an integrated
Bluetooth® module. Using radio communication,
Bluetooth allows for a safe data transfer between the
radio system and a paired, close-range Bluetooth device
such as a cell phone.
Turn on Bluetooth:
•
Press the Bluetooth® button (7). Wait for 2 seconds
until current setting BT OFF or BT ON is displayed.
•
Turn volume control counterclockwise or clockwise to
turn Bluetooth on or off. After 2 seconds, the new setting
becomes active and Bluetooth symbol starts ashing.
•
Display screen will show PAIR. A code will then be
displayed to put into the operator’s personal audio
device to securely connect.
To change connection type, press hang-up call button (if
equipped) (4b) until CON-TYPE is displayed. Turn volume
control counterclockwise or clockwise to select connection
type (phone/audio stream).
Receive a Call:
When the radio system is paired with a cell phone, calls
can be received and placed.
When a call is coming in, a ring tone will sound and CALL
will be displayed. After 2 seconds, the display changes to
show the contact name or phone number of the caller.
•
Press the pickup call button (if equipped) (3b) to answer
the call.
•
Use the volume control dial to adjust the phone volume.
•
Press the hang-up call button to end the call. CALL
END is displayed for 2 seconds and the radio system
returns to the currently selected mode.
Place a Call:
•
Press and hold the source button for more than 3
seconds to open the contact list.
•
Use multi-function rocker switch to select the desired
contact and press pickup call button to establish the
connection.
•
Press the hang-up call button to end the call. CALL
END is displayed for 2 seconds and the radio system
returns to the currently selected mode.
SiriusXM® Radio—If Equipped:
This radio system is equipped with a SiriusXM tuner to
receive digital radio stations via satellite (e.g. SiriusXM
radio). There are three SiriusXM bands (SiriusXM1,
SiriusXM2, and SiriusXM3 memory levels) with up to six
channels each that can be assigned to the six preset
buttons. Storing the SiriusXM channels on preset buttons
is identical to storing analog radio stations.
A SiriusXM subscription is necessary to use service.
To turn on SiriusXM radio for the rst time, press hang-up
call button until XM OFF is displayed. Turn volume control
clockwise to enable SiriusXM radio.
Bluetooth is a trademark of Bluetooth SIG
SiriusXM is a trademark of Sirius XM Radio Inc.
2-1-22
112321
PN=115
Operation—Operator's Station
TD48962,00000E6 -19-14SEP20-1/1
Hydraulic Oil Level Alarm—If Equipped
IMPORTANT: Avoid possible machine damage
to hydraulic pump. Immediately park
and turn off machine if hydraulic oil level
alarm (1) is activated.
When hydraulic oil tank level is critically low, the hydraulic
oil level alarm (1) is activated. The indicator illuminates
as an audible warning advises the operator to park and
turn off machine within 5 seconds to avoid hydraulic pump
damage.
1— Hydraulic Oil Level Alarm
TX1260999A —UN—17JUL18
Hydraulic Oil Level Alarm (early production)
TX1302520A —UN—09SEP20
Hydraulic Oil Level Alarm (late production)
2-1-23
112321
PN=116
Operation—Operator's Station
KR46761,0001140 -19-14MAR16-1/1
Continued on next page KR46761,0001112 -19-04AUG21-1/3
Fire Extinguisher Mounting Location
MOUNTING LOCATION:
On both the rear entry and side entry cabs, the designated
re extinguisher mounting location (1) is inside the cab
door on the right side.
USE:
NOTE: All re extinguishers do not operate the same.
Read operating instructions on canister.
The portable re extinguisher is used to aid in the
extinguishing of small res. Refer to individual
manufacturer’s instructions and proper re ghting
procedures before the need to use the re extinguisher
arises. See Prevent Fires. (Section 1-2.)
MAINTENANCE:
IMPORTANT: Avoid possible machine damage. Check
gauge (if equipped) on re extinguisher. If re
extinguisher is not fully charged, recharge
or replace re extinguisher according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
Inspect and maintain the re extinguisher following the
manufacturer’s recommendations and all local, regional,
and national regulations.
1— Fire Extinguisher Mounting
Location
TX1212613 —UN—14MAR16
Rear Entry Cab
TX1212614 —UN—22MAR16
Side Entry Cab
Alternative Exit
Rear Entry Cab—Lever Latch
The skylight provides an alternative exit path if the cab
door is blocked in an emergency situation.
Remove pins (1), release latches (2), and push on skylight
pane to remove and to open exit path.
1— Pin (2 used) 2— Latch (2 used)
TX1213130 —UN—21MAR16
Alternative Exit
2-1-24
112321
PN=117
Operation—Operator's Station
KR46761,0001112 -19-04AUG21-2/3
KR46761,0001112 -19-04AUG21-3/3
Rear Entry Cab—Knob Latch
The skylight provides an alternative exit path if the cab
door is blocked in an emergency situation.
Remove pins (1), loosen knobs (2), and push on skylight
pane to remove and to open exit path.
1— Pin (2 used) 2— Knob (2 used)
TX1314651A —UN—12JUL21
Alternative Exit
Side Entry Cab
The rear window provides an alternative exit path if the
cab door is blocked in an emergency situation.
NOTE: There are also knobs on the outside of the
cab that can open the rear window.
Loosen knobs (1) and push on rear window pane to
remove and to open exit path.
The skylight is another alternative exit. See Rear Entry
Cab in this section.
1— Knob (4 used)
TX1213129 —UN—21MAR16
Alternative Exit
2-1-25
112321
PN=118
Operation—Operator's Station
Continued on next page KR46761,00011AB -19-03AUG17-1/2
Adjusting the Air Suspension Seat
Air Suspension Seat With Heater
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury. Do not adjust
seat settings while operating the machine.
With the machine parked and the operator in the operator’s
seat (1), pull and release the weight and height adjustment
lever (7) to adjust the seat for the operator’s weight.
The seat height can be set pneumatically and is
continuously adjustable. Pull or push weight and height
adjustment lever fully up or down and release lever to
select desired seat height.
The seat heater switch (3) has two positions: OFF and
ON. Turn the seat heater switch to desired setting.
Turn lumbar adjustment knob (4) clockwise to increase
lumbar support. Turn lumbar adjustment knob
counterclockwise to decrease lumbar support.
Pull up on backrest lever (5) to release backrest lock.
Move backrest to desired position. Release lever.
The seat fore-and-aft isolator lever (if equipped) (6) has
two positions: OFF and ON. Under certain operating
conditions, having the seat fore-and-aft isolator lever in
the ON position will absorb fore and aft impacts to the
operator’s seat.
Adjust suspension rmness of seat for a comfortable ride.
The adjustable damper lever (8) controls suspension
rmness of the seat. The adjustable damper lever has
three positions. Pull up on lever to decrease suspension
rmness. Push down on lever to increase suspension
rmness.
Pull up on seat fore-and-aft lever (9) to unlock seat. Slide
seat to desired distance from pilot control levers. Release
lever.
Pull up on seat pan angle adjustment handle (10) and
apply pressure to front or rear part of the seat to adjust
seat pan angle. Release handle.
TX1215786 —UN—16MAY16
Air Suspension Seat With Heater
1— Operator’s Seat
2— Headrest
3— Seat Heater Switch
4— Lumbar Adjustment Knob
5— Backrest Lever
6— Seat Fore-and-Aft Isolator
Lever (if equipped)
7— Weight and Height
Adjustment Lever
8— Adjustable Damper Lever
9— Seat Fore-and-Aft Lever
10— Seat Pan Angle
Adjustment Handle
11— Seat Depth Adjustment
Handle
12— Armrest (2 used)
13— Armrest Dial (2 used)
Pull up on seat depth adjustment handle (11) and slide
seat cushion to desired distance from pilot control levers.
Release handle.
Pull headrest (2) upward or push downward to desired
height. Move headrest to desired angle.
Pull up on armrests (12) to move armrests out of the way
when exiting the cab.
Turn armrest dials (13) to adjust angle of armrests.
2-1-26
112321
PN=119
Operation—Operator's Station
KR46761,00011AB -19-03AUG17-2/2
Air Suspension Seat With Heater and Vent
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury. Do not adjust
seat settings while operating the machine.
With the machine parked and the operator in the operator’s
seat (1), pull and release the weight and height adjustment
lever (7) to adjust the seat for the operator’s weight.
The seat height can be set pneumatically and is
continuously adjustable. Pull or push weight and height
adjustment lever fully up or down and release lever to
select desired seat height.
The seat heater switch (3) has three positions:
•
Seat heater and ventilation OFF
•
Seat heater ON (ventilation OFF)
•
Seat ventilation ON (heater OFF)
Turn the seat heater switch to desired setting.
Adjust the upper and lower lumbar support using the
lumbar adjustment switches (4). Press the “+” side of the
switches to increase the lumbar support. Press the “-”
side of the switches to decrease the lumbar support.
Pull up on backrest lever (5) to release backrest lock.
Move backrest to desired position. Release lever.
The seat fore-and-aft isolator lever (if equipped) (6) has
two positions: OFF and ON. Under certain operating
conditions, having the seat fore-and-aft isolator lever in
the ON position will absorb fore and aft impacts to the
operator’s seat.
Adjust suspension rmness of seat for a comfortable ride.
The adjustable damper lever (8) controls suspension
rmness of the seat. The adjustable damper lever has
three positions. Pull up on lever to decrease suspension
rmness. Push down on lever to increase suspension
rmness.
Pull up on seat fore-and-aft lever (9) to unlock seat. Slide
seat to desired distance from pilot control levers. Release
lever.
Pull up on seat pan angle adjustment handle (10) and
apply pressure to front or rear part of the seat to adjust
seat pan angle. Release handle.
TX1215786 —UN—16MAY16
Air Suspension Seat With Heater and Vent
1— Operator’s Seat
2— Headrest
3— Seat Heater Switch
4— Lumbar Adjustment Switch
(2 used)
5— Backrest Lever
6— Seat Fore-and-Aft Isolator
Lever (if equipped)
7— Weight and Height
Adjustment Lever
8— Adjustable Damper Lever
9— Seat Fore-and-Aft Lever
10— Seat Pan Angle
Adjustment Handle
11— Seat Depth Adjustment
Handle
12— Armrest (2 used)
13— Armrest Dial (2 used)
Pull up on seat depth adjustment handle (11) and slide
seat cushion to desired distance from pilot control levers.
Release handle.
Pull headrest (2) upward or push downward to desired
height. Move headrest to desired angle.
Pull up on armrests (12) to move armrests out of the way
when exiting the cab.
Turn armrest dials (13) to adjust angle of armrests.
2-1-27
112321
PN=120
Operation—Operator's Station
KR46761,0001158 -19-11JAN17-1/1
OUT4001,000077E -19-19FEB18-1/1
Adjusting the Mechanical Suspension
Seat—If Equipped
CAUTION: Prevent possibly injury. Do not adjust
seat settings while operating the machine.
While sitting on seat, push down on seat angle lever (1) to
adjust seat to desired angle. Release lever.
Pull up on seat fore-and-aft handle (2) to unlock seat.
Slide seat to desired distance from pilot control levers.
Release handle.
Turn weight adjustment knob (3) to adjust seat to weight
of operator.
Squeeze lumbar ball (4) to add air for rmness to lower
backrest area. Press button on bottom of lumbar ball to
release air and decrease rmness.
Pull up on backrest lever (5) to release backrest lock.
Move backrest to desired position. Release lever.
Pull headrest (6) upward or push downward to desired
height. Move headrest to desired angle.
Pull up on armrest (7) to move armrest out of the way
when exiting the cab.
Turn armrest dial (8) to adjust angle of armrest.
Pull seat and console handle (9) up toward operator. Slide
entire seat and consoles to desired distance from travel
pedals and levers. Release handle.
TX1000836A —UN—29NOV05
Mechanical Suspension Seat
T140133 —UN—02MAY01
Adjusting the Seat
1— Seat Angle Lever
2— Seat Fore-and-Aft Handle
3— Weight Adjustment Knob
4— Lumbar Ball
5— Backrest Lever
6— Headrest
7— Armrest
8— Armrest Dial
9— Seat and Console Handle
Adjusting Pilot Control Lever Console Height
1. Ensure engine is off and pilot shutoff lever is in locked
(UP) position.
CAUTION: Avoid possible crushing injury
from console unexpectedly dropping. Before
loosening the cap screws (1), support the console.
2. Remove right console holding cap screws (1).
3. Loosen cap screw (2) and adjust the pilot control lever
console height relative to the cab oor.
4. Install holding cap screws in holes for desired console
height and tighten.
5. Tighten cap screw to specication.
Specication
Cap Screw—Torque......................................................................50 N·m
37 lb·ft
TX1087326A —UN—25JAN11
Right Side of Seat Shown
1— Holding Cap Screw (2 used) 2— Cap Screw
6. Repeat procedure for left console.
2-1-28
112321
PN=121
Operation—Operator's Station
TD48962,00001AF -19-03JUN19-1/1
Adjusting Pull-Down Sunshades—If
Equipped
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from operating
the machine when visibility is reduced. Visibility
may be limited when sunshades are in use.
Where visibility is limited, always check to
ensure area is clear before moving or swinging
the machine and attachments.
NOTE: Depending on machine conguration, not all
sunshades may be installed.
Window sunshades reduce glare when operating in bright
sunlight. Operator can use the front pull-down sunshade
(1), side pull-down sunshades (2), or rear pull-down
sunshade (3) and set each to a desired position.
1— Front Pull-Down Sunshade
2— Side Pull-Down Sunshade
(2 used)
3— Rear Pull-Down Sunshade
TX1278525A —UN—22MAY19
Sunshades (rear entry cab shown)
2-1-29
112321
PN=122
Operation—Operator's Station
KR46761,0001576 -19-13JUN17-1/1
Side Monitor—If Equipped
CAUTION: To avoid possible injury or death to
operator or others, the side camera (4) images are
designed to supplement other safety practices
and are not intended to be the sole method of
collision avoidance. Always be alert and aware of
the surroundings when operating this machine.
Avoid personal injury. DO NOT climb on machine
when inspecting or cleaning camera lens.
IMPORTANT: Prevent possible damage to the camera
lens surface. The camera lens surface is a resin
product. Lightly wipe the surface with a wet,
clean cloth. Never use an organic solvent.
An image captured by side camera (4) is displayed on the
side monitor (1) located in the cab.
1. Press power switch (2) to turn side monitor on or off.
2. With side monitor on, press screen changeover switch
(3) to select camera view options.
•
CAM1: Side monitor displays view from side camera.
•
CAM2: Side monitor displays blank screen.
•
EXT: Side monitor displays view from side camera
and blank screen in a side by side view.
1— Side Monitor
2— Power Switch
3— Screen Changeover Switch
4— Side Camera
TX1213511 —UN—30MAR16
Side Monitor
TX1240283 —UN—13JUN17
Side Camera—Rear Entry Cab
TX1240284 —UN—13JUN17
Side Camera—Side Entry Cab
2-1-30
112321
PN=123
Operation—Monitor Operation
KR46761,00013E6 -19-24OCT16-1/1
Monitor
TX1226804
24
.
0
˚C
81.3
10:00
ECO
ST
MHz
VOL
FM
50.0h
AM
A/I
A/S
F
E
C
H
CH1
F
E
20
18
21
13
1
11
3
5
9 108
64
7
12
2
17
16
15
14
19
TX1226804 —UN—25OCT16
Monitor
1— Auto-Idle Indicator
2— Auto-Shutdown Indicator
3— Work Mode Indicator
4— Travel Speed Indicator
5— Aftertreatment Device
Regeneration Indicator
6— Auxiliary Indicator
7— Power Mode Indicator
8— Auxiliary Indicator
9— Auxiliary Indicator
10— Reversing Fan Indicator
(if equipped)
11— Hour Meter and Clock
12— Engine Preheat Indicator
13— Seat Belt Indicator
14— Diesel Exhaust Fluid
(DEF) Gauge
15— Fuel Gauge
16— Fuel Mark
17— Sub Meter
18— Coolant Temperature
Gauge
19— Coolant Temperature Mark
20— Air Conditioner Display
21— Radio Display
22— Alarm Indicators
24
.
0
˚C
81.3
10:00
ECO
ST
MHz
VOL
FM
50.0h
AM
F
E
C
H
CH1
F
E
22
TX1160709 —UN—15MAY14
Alarm Indicators
2-2-1
112321
PN=124
Operation—Monitor Operation
Continued on next page KR46761,00013E7 -19-02FEB17-1/2
Monitor Functions
1. Auto-Idle Indicator: Displays if auto-idle mode is
turned ON from the switch panel. For more information,
see Switch Panel Functions. (Section 2-1.)
2. Auto-Shutdown Indicator: Displays if auto shutdown
was selected by operator from the menu screen. For
more information, see Main Menu—Setting Menu—Auto
Shutdown in this section.
3. Work Mode Indicator: Displays icon for the current
attachment being used.
4. Travel Speed Indicator: Displays travel speed
selected from the switch panel (rabbit—fast speed travel
or turtle—slow speed travel).
5. Aftertreatment Device Regeneration Indicator:
Displays condition of the aftertreatment device
regeneration. Two different indicators could appear here:
•
Aftertreatment Device Regeneration Indicator
appears when aftertreatment device temperature is
high during an auto or manual regeneration.
NOTE: The aftertreatment device regeneration inhibit
indicator will display on the monitor when
the key switch is in ON position. Once the
engine is started, the indicator will disappear
unless aftertreatment device regeneration
inhibit has been turned off by the operator
through the monitor.
•
Aftertreatment Device Regeneration Inhibit Indicator
appears when aftertreatment device regeneration inhibit
has been enabled by the operator. For more information,
see Main Menu—Setting Menu—Aftertreatment Device
Regeneration Inhibit in this section.
6. Auxiliary Indicator: Displays optional auxiliary data
indicator.
7. Power Mode Indicator: Displays a power mode
selected from the switch panel (ECO, PWR, or H/P). For
more information, see Switch Panel Functions. (Section
2-1.)
8. Auxiliary Indicator: Displays optional auxiliary data
indicator.
9. Auxiliary Indicator: Displays optional auxiliary data
indicator.
10. Reversing Fan Indicator (if equipped): Displays
when reversing cooling fan is activated by reversing fan
switch on left panel.
11. Hour Meter and Clock: Displays total machine
operation hours counted since the machine started
working in the unit of hours (h). One digit after the decimal
point indicates tenths of an hour (6 minutes).
Clock indicates present time.
TX1086447 —UN—05JAN11
Aftertreatment Device
Regeneration Indicator
TX1086347 —UN—06JAN11
Aftertreatment Device
Regeneration Inhibit Indicator
12. Engine Preheat Indicator:
IMPORTANT: Prevent engine damage. Do not
use ether in this machine.
If preheating is required, the engine preheat indicator is
automatically lit. If preheating is not required, this indicator
will not display.
13. Seat Belt Indicator: Displays when key switch is in
ON position, and disappears 5 seconds after the engine
starts.
14. Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Gauge: Displays
approximate level of diesel exhaust uid (DEF) remaining
in the DEF tank. If diesel exhaust uid (DEF) is low, last
segment of DEF gauge and outer ring illuminates yellow.
When DEF level is severely low, engine power derates
and last segment of DEF gauge illuminates yellow and
blinks. When DEF level is empty, engine power and speed
derates. All segments of DEF gauge are off, outer ring
illuminates red, and warning indicators appear. Engine
can start, but machine cannot be operated until DEF tank
is lled. Fill DEF tank before last segment turns yellow.
15. Fuel Gauge: Displays remaining fuel amount as
indicated by the needle. Fuel machine before needle
reaches E.
16. Fuel Mark: If fuel sensor is malfunctioning, color of
the fuel mark changes and the needle disappears. If the
harness between the fuel sensor and the monitor unit is
broken, the needle disappears but the fuel mark color
does not change.
17. Sub Meter: Displays fuel consumption or breaker
hours depending on what is set in the monitor. For more
information, see Main Menu—Setting Menu—Sub Meter
Selection in this section.
18. Coolant Temperature Gauge:
IMPORTANT: Possible engine damage may occur. If
needle points to RED zone, idle engine to bring
back to BLUE zone before stopping engine. If
needle continues to rise, stop engine.
Displays engine coolant temperature. Needle should be
around the center of the scale during operation.
2-2-2
112321
PN=125
Operation—Monitor Operation
KR46761,00013E7 -19-02FEB17-2/2
19. Coolant Temperature Mark: If coolant temperature
sensor is malfunctioning, color of the coolant temperature
mark changes and the needle disappears. If the harness
between the coolant temperature sensor and the monitor
unit is broken, the needle disappears but the coolant
temperature mark color does not change.
20. Air Conditioner Display: Shows blower fan speed,
selected air vent, and temperature setting.
21. Radio Display: Shows current radio station,
frequency, and volume setting.
22. Alarm Indicators: Displays if an abnormality occurs.
If six or more alarms are generated, the indicators can
be scrolled through using the monitor dial on the switch
panel. For more information, see Main Menu—Alarm List
in this section.
2-2-3
112321
PN=126
Operation—Monitor Operation
KR46761,0001386 -19-21SEP16-1/1
Aftertreatment Indicators Overview
The diesel exhaust uid (DEF) indicator illuminates when
the DEF is low. Fill DEF tank.
When the DEF indicator is combined with the warning
indicator or stop engine indicator, engine performance is
reduced by the engine control unit (ECU) because the
DEF is below a measurable level. Fill DEF tank.
When engine emissions temperature indicator illuminates,
aftertreatment device gas temperature is high, elevated
idle is active, or aftertreatment device regeneration is in
process. The machine can be operated as normal unless
the operator determines the machine is not in a safe
location for high aftertreatment temperatures and enables
aftertreatment device regeneration inhibit.
When engine emissions temperature indicator is
combined with the warning indicator or stop engine
indicator, engine performance is reduced by the ECU
because the aftertreatment gas temperature is higher
than expected. Follow diagnostic trouble code (DTC)
procedure or see an authorized Hitachi dealer.
When the aftertreatment device regeneration indicator
illuminates, the aftertreatment device regeneration is in
process, aftertreatment device system has a malfunction,
or the aftertreatment device is in need of regeneration
and the operator has enabled the aftertreatment device
regeneration inhibit. If conditions are safe, the operator
should disable the aftertreatment device regeneration
inhibit setting or perform manual service regeneration or
follow DTC procedure.
When the aftertreatment device regeneration indicator is
combined with the warning indicator, engine performance
is reduced by the ECU because there is an aftertreatment
system malfunction or the soot level of the aftertreatment
device is moderately high. If conditions are safe,
the operator should disable the aftertreatment device
regeneration inhibit function. If conditions are not safe, the
operator should move the machine to a safe location and
engage the aftertreatment device regeneration. Perform
manual service regeneration or follow DTC procedure.
When the aftertreatment device regeneration is combined
with the stop engine indicator, engine performance
is further reduced by the ECU because there is an
aftertreatment system malfunction or the soot level of the
aftertreatment device is extremely high. If this combination
is present, see an authorized Hitachi dealer.
The aftertreatment device regeneration inhibit indicator
illuminates when the operator has engaged the request
to enable the aftertreatment device regeneration inhibit
function. This icon remains illuminated until the operator
reengages aftertreatment device regeneration from
the diagnostic gauge. Enabling inhibit mode is not
RG22487 —UN—21AUG13
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Indicator
RG22488 —UN—21AUG13
Engine Emissions Temperature
Indicator
RG22489 —UN—21AUG13
Aftertreatment Device
Regeneration Indicator
RG22490 —UN—21AUG13
Aftertreatment Device
Regeneration Inhibit Indicator
RG22491 —UN—21AUG13
Aftertreatment Device
Regeneration System Error Alarm
RG22492 —UN—21AUG13
Warning Indicator
RG22493 —UN—21AUG13
Stop Engine Indicator
recommended for any situation unless it is safety related
or if the fuel tank lacks the required fuel to complete the
regeneration process.
The engine emissions system malfunction indicator
illuminates when engine emissions are outside of normal
operating range or engine emissions system malfunction.
Follow DTC procedure or see an authorized Hitachi dealer.
When the engine emissions system malfunction
indicator is combined with the warning indicator, engine
performance is reduced by the ECU because the engine
emissions are outside of normal operating range or engine
emissions system malfunction. Follow DTC procedure or
see an authorized Hitachi dealer.
2-2-4
112321
PN=127
Operation—Monitor Operation
KR46761,0001387 -19-21SEP16-1/1
Monitor Start-Up
NOTE: Engine can be started after the default
screen (2) has displayed.
When the key switch is turned to the ON position, the
system starting screen (1) displays for approximately 2
seconds and then the default screen (2) is displayed.
1— System Starting Screen 2— Default Screen
1
TX1224242 —UN—22SEP16
System Starting Screen
TX1160713A —UN—15MAY14
Default Screen
2-2-5
112321
PN=128
Operation—Monitor Operation
KR46761,00014BA -19-02FEB17-1/1
Main Menu
When the default screen (5) is displayed, press the
monitor dial (2) on the switch panel to display the Main
Menu screen (1).
The Main Menu screen displays submenus which can be
selected to view diagnostic information or change various
operating characteristics of the machine or the monitor.
NOTE: Translations shown on screen may be abbreviated.
The submenus under Main Menu that appear on monitor
include:
NOTE: Alarm List ONLY appears as a submenu
if there is an actual alarm.
•
Alarm List—provides detailed information of generated
alarms.
•
Air Conditioner—provides air conditioner functions.
•
Radio—provides radio functions.
•
Setting Menu—allows operator to change various
monitor and machine functions.
•
Information Menu—allows operator to view
operating hours, maintenance items, troubleshooting
(diagnostic trouble codes [DTCs]), engine speed, and
aftertreatment device accumulation.
NOTE: The Alarm List will always be displayed rst
on the Main Menu if there is an actual alarm.
Air Conditioner and Radio submenus can
be ordered in the sequence that is preferred
according to how often they are used. For
changing the order sequence of these submenus,
see Main Menu—Setting Menu—Main Menu
Sequence Change in this section.
Rotate monitor dial to highlight desired submenu. Press
dial button to display chosen submenu.
Press back button (3) to return to previous screen.
Press home button (4) to return to default screen.
1— Main Menu Screen
2— Monitor Dial
3— Back Button
4— Home Button
5— Default Screen
TX1160715A —UN—15MAY14
Default Screen
TX1086306A —UN—28DEC10
Main Menu Screen
TX1086272A —UN—27DEC10
Switch Panel
2-2-6
112321
PN=129
Operation—Monitor Operation
Continued on next page KR46761,0001337 -19-02FEB17-1/31
Main Menu—Alarm List
The Alarm List menu appears as the rst submenu under
Main Menu, but ONLY if there is an actual alarm generated.
If there is more than one alarm, a list is displayed. If there
are no alarms, Alarm List does not appear as a submenu.
The submenus under Main Menu that appear on monitor
include:
NOTE: Alarm List ONLY appears as a submenu
if there is an actual alarm.
•
Alarm List
•
Air Conditioner
•
Radio
•
Setting Menu
•
Information Menu
At Main Menu screen (1) with Alarm List highlighted, press
monitor dial (2) to view generated alarms.
If there is more than one alarm, rotate monitor dial to
highlight a particular alarm. Press monitor dial to view
detailed information about that alarm and how to rectify
the problem.
When an alarm indicator appears on the monitor display,
an alarm light (5) is also illuminated on the bottom of the
monitor to alert the operator.
Press back button (3) to return to previous screen.
Press home button (4) to return to default screen.
1— Main Menu Screen
2— Monitor Dial
3— Back Button
4— Home Button
5— Alarm Light
TX1086306A —UN—28DEC10
Main Menu Screen
TX1086272A —UN—27DEC10
Switch Panel
TX1160717A —UN—15MAY14
Alarm Light
2-2-7
112321
PN=130
Operation—Monitor Operation
KR46761,0001337 -19-02FEB17-2/31
KR46761,0001337 -19-02FEB17-3/31
KR46761,0001337 -19-02FEB17-4/31
KR46761,0001337 -19-02FEB17-5/31
KR46761,0001337 -19-02FEB17-6/31
Continued on next page KR46761,0001337 -19-02FEB17-7/31
Possible alarm indicators that could appear are:
•Aftertreatment Device Regeneration Request—If
the alarm indicator is illuminated yellow and blinking,
aftertreatment device is restricted and an aftertreatment
device regeneration should be performed. Immediately
move machine to safe area and perform an aftertreatment
device manual regeneration.
TX1086346 —UN—06JAN11
Aftertreatment Device Regeneration Request
• Aftertreatment Device Regeneration Inhibit—Af-
tertreatment device regeneration inhibit is enabled and
aftertreatment device regeneration cannot be performed.
Move machine to safe area and release the aftertreatment
device regeneration inhibit.
TX1086347 —UN—06JAN11
Aftertreatment Device Regeneration Inhibit
• Aftertreatment Device Regeneration System Error
Alarm—There is a system or hardware error causing
the aftertreatment device regeneration to abort. See an
authorized Hitachi dealer.
TX1086356 —UN—06JAN11
Aftertreatment Device Regeneration System Error Alarm
• Engine Oil Level Alarm—Check engine oil level and
rell oil.
TX1086348 —UN—06JAN11
Engine Oil Level Alarm
• Engine Oil Pressure Alarm—Engine oil pressure has
decreased. Immediately stop engine. Check engine oil
system and oil level.
TX1086353 —UN—06JAN11
Engine Oil Pressure Alarm
• Engine Start Disabled Alarm—Engine will not start due
to pilot shutoff lever being lowered or engine stop switch
is in OFF position.
TX1086354 —UN—06JAN11
Engine Start Disabled Alarm
2-2-8
112321
PN=131
Operation—Monitor Operation
KR46761,0001337 -19-02FEB17-8/31
KR46761,0001337 -19-02FEB17-9/31
KR46761,0001337 -19-02FEB17-10/31
KR46761,0001337 -19-02FEB17-11/31
Continued on next page KR46761,0001337 -19-02FEB17-12/31
• Engine Overheat Alarm—Engine coolant temperature
has abnormally increased. Stop operation. Run the engine
at slow idle speed or lower the coolant temperature.
TX1086350 —UN—06JAN11
Engine Overheat Alarm
• Warning Alarm—An abnormal condition has been
detected. Alarm is either red or yellow depending on
severity of problem. Contact an authorized Hitachi dealer.
TX1086352 —UN—06JAN11
Warning Alarm
• Programming Alarm—If this Service ADVISOR™
Remote (SAR) programming alarm appears on the
monitor, different conditions may exist depending on the
color. If this alarm is:
•
YELLOW—Service ADVISOR™ Remote (SAR)
software update is ready to install.
•
RED—SAR programming is in process. Do not turn
OFF machine power until programming is complete.
TX1087187 —UN—21JAN11
Programming Alarm
•
GREEN—SAR programming is complete. Cycle
machine power to complete the process.
Service ADVISOR is a trademark of Deere & Company
• Program Failure Alarm—This alarm will appear along
with a red warning alarm. A problem occurred during
the Service ADVISOR™ Remote (SAR) programming
process. Contact an authorized Hitachi dealer.
TX1087189 —UN—21JAN11
Program Failure Alarm
• Unable to Program Alarm—This alarm will appear
along with a yellow warning alarm. A condition exists that
will not allow the transfer of new Service ADVISOR™
Remote (SAR) software to happen. Retry programming or
contact an authorized Hitachi dealer.
TX1087190 —UN—21JAN11
Unable to Program Alarm
2-2-9
112321
PN=132
Operation—Monitor Operation
KR46761,0001337 -19-02FEB17-13/31
KR46761,0001337 -19-02FEB17-14/31
KR46761,0001337 -19-02FEB17-15/31
KR46761,0001337 -19-02FEB17-16/31
KR46761,0001337 -19-02FEB17-17/31
Continued on next page KR46761,0001337 -19-02FEB17-18/31
• Coolant Level Alarm—Check coolant level and rell
coolant.
TX1086349 —UN—06JAN11
Coolant Level Alarm
• Cooling System Alarm—High temperatures indicate a
cooling system malfunction. Check cooling system.
TX1156523 —UN—11APR14
Cooling System Alarm
• Engine Output Restriction—Engine output is
restricted. Diesel exhaust uid (DEF) level is low or there
is malfunction of DEF system. Rell DEF tank as soon
as possible.
TX1192074 —UN—04MAY15
Engine Output Restriction
• Engine Air Filter Restriction Alarm—Air lter elements
are clogged. Clean or replace air lter elements.
TX1086365 —UN—06JAN11
Engine Air Filter Restriction Alarm
• Engine Derate Alarm—A condition exists which is
causing engine to be derated. Check for diagnostic
trouble codes (DTCs).
TX1156524 —UN—11APR14
Engine Derate Alarm
• Boost Temperature Alarm—Engine intake air
temperature has abnormally increased. Stop operation.
Check intercooler for clogging and intake air piping for
disconnection.
TX1086355 —UN—06JAN11
BOOST
Boost Temperature Alarm
2-2-10
112321
PN=133
Operation—Monitor Operation
KR46761,0001337 -19-02FEB17-19/31
KR46761,0001337 -19-02FEB17-20/31
KR46761,0001337 -19-02FEB17-21/31
KR46761,0001337 -19-02FEB17-22/31
KR46761,0001337 -19-02FEB17-23/31
Continued on next page KR46761,0001337 -19-02FEB17-24/31
• Exhaust Temperature Alarm—Exhaust temperature is
abnormally high. Stop operation. Check exhaust piping.
TX1192075 —UN—04MAY15
Exhaust Temperature Alarm
• Hydraulic Oil Overheat Alarm—Hydraulic oil
temperature has abnormally increased. Stop operation,
check hydraulic oil level, and check for leaks.
TX1086351 —UN—06JAN11
Hydraulic Oil Overheat Alarm
• Hydraulic Oil Filter Restriction Alarm—Hydraulic oil
lter is clogged. Replace lter.
TX1086364 —UN—06JAN11
Hydraulic Oil Filter Restriction Alarm
• Hydraulic Oil Cooling System Alarm—Hydraulic
oil cooling system is abnormal. Contact an authorized
Hitachi dealer.
TX1086357 —UN—06JAN11
Hydraulic Oil Cooling System Alarm
• Alternator Alarm—Electrical system is abnormal.
Contact an authorized Hitachi dealer.
TX1086358 —UN—06JAN11
Alternator Alarm
• Fuel Level Alarm—Fuel level is low. Rell fuel tank as
soon as possible.
TX1086362 —UN—06JAN11
Fuel Level Alarm
2-2-11
112321
PN=134
Operation—Monitor Operation
KR46761,0001337 -19-02FEB17-25/31
KR46761,0001337 -19-02FEB17-26/31
KR46761,0001337 -19-02FEB17-27/31
KR46761,0001337 -19-02FEB17-28/31
KR46761,0001337 -19-02FEB17-29/31
Continued on next page KR46761,0001337 -19-02FEB17-30/31
• Fuel Temperature Alarm—Fuel temperature has
abnormally increased. Stop operation. Check fuel cooler
for any malfunction such as clogging.
TX1086363 —UN—06JAN11
Fuel Temperature Alarm
• Fuel Filter Restriction Alarm—Fuel lter is clogged.
Replace fuel lter elements.
TX1086366 —UN—06JAN11
Fuel Filter Restriction Alarm
• Water-in-Fuel Alarm—Water separator is full. Drain
water from separator.
TX1156519 —UN—14APR14
Water-In-Fuel Alarm
• System Failure Alarm—Satellite communication
system is abnormal. Contact an authorized Hitachi dealer.
TX1086367 —UN—06JAN11
System Failure Alarm
• Pilot Shutoff Lever Alarm—Pilot shutoff lever system
is abnormal. Contact an authorized Hitachi dealer.
TX1086368 —UN—06JAN11
Pilot Shutoff Lever Alarm
• Electric Lever Alarm—Electric Lever system is
abnormal. Contact an authorized Hitachi dealer.
TX1185012 —UN—10FEB15
Electric Lever Alarm
2-2-12
112321
PN=135
Operation—Monitor Operation
KR46761,0001337 -19-02FEB17-31/31
• Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Alarm—Diesel exhaust
uid (DEF) tank is empty or DEF quality is poor. Engine
power is derated. Rell DEF tank as soon as possible.
Monitor Display Messages
The monitor automatically displays a message for specic
machine situations and certain diagnostic trouble codes
(DTCs). Depending on machine situation or if a DTC is
TX1156518 —UN—20MAR14
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Alarm
initially active, a message displays on the monitor until the
situation changes or the DTC is resolved.
Display Message Message Trigger
REFILL DEF
DEF Tank Level Low
DEF tank level is low.
REFILL DEF
DEF Tank Empty
Engine Power Limited
DEF tank level is empty.
REFILL DEF
DEF Tank Empty
Engine Power and Speed
Limited
DEF tank level is empty.
DEF System Fault
Engine Power and Speed
Limited
Check Active Codes
Initiated by Active Code.
DEF Quality Poor
Engine Power Limited
Check Active Codes
Poor DEF quality detected.
DEF System Fault
Engine Power and Speed
Limited
Check Active Codes
Initiated by Active Code.
2-2-13
112321
PN=136
Operation—Monitor Operation
Continued on next page KR46761,0001407 -19-02FEB17-1/2
Main Menu—Air Conditioner
TX1086306A —UN—28DEC10
Main Menu Screen
TX1183787A —UN—29JAN15
Switch Panel
The Air Conditioner menu allows operator to turn the air
conditioner ON or OFF and set the circulation air mode to
recirculating cab air or fresh air.
The submenus under Main Menu that appear on monitor
include:
NOTE: Alarm List ONLY appears as a submenu
if there is an actual alarm.
•
Alarm List
•
Air Conditioner
•
Radio
•
Setting Menu
•
Information Menu
At Main Menu screen (1), rotate monitor dial (2) to
highlight Air Conditioner. Press monitor dial to display
Air Conditioner menu.
Air Conditioner menu items include:
□ (Cab recirculating air mode symbol is displayed.)
Rotate monitor dial to highlight the cab recirculating
air mode symbol. Press monitor dial to turn ON the
cab recirculating air mode. The color of the preceding
square will turn green and a recirculating air icon (5) will
appear in the air conditioner display in the lower left
corner of the monitor. Press monitor dial again to turn
OFF the recirculating air mode and switch to fresh air
mode. The color of the preceding square will be gray
and a fresh air icon (6) will appear in the air conditioner
display in the lower left corner of the monitor.
TX1086310A —UN—28DEC10
Recirculating Air Icon
TX1086311A —UN—28DEC10
Fresh Air Icon
1— Main Menu Screen
2— Monitor Dial
3— Back Button
4— Home Button
5— Recirculating Air Icon
6— Fresh Air Icon
2-2-14
112321
PN=137
Operation—Monitor Operation
KR46761,0001407 -19-02FEB17-2/2
□ A/C
NOTE: Blower speed switch on switch panel needs to
be ON in order to operate the ON/OFF function
of the air conditioner in the monitor menu.
Rotate monitor dial to highlight A/C. Press monitor
dial to turn ON the air conditioner. The color of the
preceding square will turn green and an air conditioner
icon (7) will appear in the air conditioner display in the
lower left corner of the monitor. Press monitor dial
again to turn OFF the air conditioner. The color of the
preceding square will be gray and air conditioner icon
will disappear.
If an exclamation mark appears on the monitor,
communication between the air conditioner and the
monitor is abnormal. See an authorized Hitachi dealer.
Press back button (3) to return to previous screen.
Press home button (4) to return to default screen.
TX1086312A —UN—28DEC10
Air Conditioner Icon
7— Air Conditioner Icon
2-2-15
112321
PN=138
Operation—Monitor Operation
KR46761,0001388 -19-02FEB17-1/1
Main Menu—Radio
The Radio menu allows operator to set preferred radio
stations and adjust the tone settings.
The submenus under Main Menu that appear on monitor
include:
NOTE: Alarm List ONLY appears as a submenu
if there is an actual alarm.
•
Alarm List
•
Air Conditioner
•
Radio
•
Setting Menu
•
Information Menu
At Main Menu screen (1), rotate monitor dial (2) to
highlight Radio. Press monitor dial to display Radio menu.
Radio menu items include:
•
CH1 AM _ _ _ _ kHz
•
CH2 AM _ _ _ _ kHz
•
CH3 AM _ _ _ _ kHz
•
CH4 AM _ _ _ _ kHz
•
CH5 FM _ _ _ ._ MHz
•
CH6 FM _ _ _ ._ MHz
•
CH7 FM _ _ _ ._ MHz
•
CH8 FM _ _ _ ._ MHz
NOTE: Presetting memory radio stations can also be
done using the keypad (6) on switch panel. See
Operating the AM/FM Radio. (Section 2-1.)
Press radio tuning switch (5) to toggle between AM or
FM frequency. Tune radio to desired AM or FM station
by rotating the radio tuning switch. When desired station
is found, rotate monitor dial to highlight CH1. Press and
hold monitor dial for more than 1 second. Current station
is set. Repeat procedure for seven additional AM or FM
stations using CH2 through CH8. Once the stations are
stored, operator can select these programmed stations
by using keys 1—8 on the switch panel keypad (6).
•
<<
Rotate monitor dial to highlight <<. Press monitor dial
to seek next lower frequency station. Continue to press
monitor dial to seek next lower frequency station until
desired station is found.
•
>>
Rotate monitor dial to highlight >>. Press monitor dial to
seek next higher frequency station. Continue to press
monitor dial to seek next higher frequency station until
desired station is found.
•
TONE
Rotate monitor dial to highlight TONE. Press monitor
dial to adjust tone. Backlighting will turn orange. Rotate
monitor dial clockwise to boost treble. Rotate monitor
dial counterclockwise to boost base. Press monitor dial
again to store changes.
•
AUTO PRESET
TX1086306A —UN—28DEC10
Main Menu Screen
TX1086274A —UN—27DEC10
Switch Panel
1— Main Menu Screen
2— Monitor Dial
3— Back Button
4— Home Button
5— Radio Tuning Switch
6— Keypad
Rotate monitor dial to highlight AUTO PRESET. Press
monitor dial to start auto preset process. The AUTO
PRESET scans reception frequency and allocates
stations to CH1 to CH8. AM frequency stations will be
preset to CH1 to CH4 and FM frequency stations will be
preset to CH5 to CH8. Operating the radio during the
scan stops the AUTO PRESET process.
If an exclamation mark appears in the radio display on
the monitor, communication between the radio and the
monitor is abnormal. See an authorized Hitachi dealer.
Press back button (3) to return to previous screen.
Press home button (4) to return to default screen.
2-2-16
112321
PN=139
Operation—Monitor Operation
KR46761,00014BB -19-03FEB17-1/1
Main Menu—Setting Menu
The Setting Menu allows operator to change various
monitor and machine functions.
The submenus under Main Menu that appear on monitor
include:
NOTE: Alarm List ONLY appears as a submenu
if there is an actual alarm.
•
Alarm List
•
Air Conditioner
•
Radio
•
Setting Menu
•
Information Menu
At Main Menu screen (1), rotate monitor dial (2) to highlight
Setting Menu. Press monitor dial to display Setting Menu.
Setting Menu items include:
NOTE: The Attachment Adjustment menu will only appear
on machines equipped with a processor.
•
Date and Time
•
Attachment Adjustment—Processor Only
•
Attachment Name Input
•
Auto Shutdown
•
Aftertreatment Device Regeneration Inhibit
•
Sub Meter Selection
•
Rear View Camera Monitor
•
Display Item Selection
•
Brightness Adjustment
•
Language
•
Unit Selection
•
Main Menu Sequence Change
Rotate monitor dial to highlight a Setting submenu. Press
monitor dial to display chosen Setting submenu.
Press back button (3) to return to previous screen.
Press home button (4) to return to default screen.
TX1086306A —UN—28DEC10
Main Menu Screen
TX1086272A —UN—27DEC10
Switch Panel
1— Main Menu Screen
2— Monitor Dial
3— Back Button
4— Home Button
2-2-17
112321
PN=140
Operation—Monitor Operation
OUT4001,0000724 -19-04APR16-1/1
KR46761,00014AA -19-02FEB17-1/1
Main Menu—Setting Menu—Date and Time
The Date and Time menu provides the capability to
change the date and time settings. Year/month/day format
and 24h/12h display mode can also be changed.
At Setting Menu, rotate monitor dial to highlight Date and
Time. Press monitor dial to display Date and Time menu.
Date and Time menu items include:
•
Time Setting
(present time is displayed here)
- Hour
- Minute
-
Rotate monitor dial to highlight Time Setting. Press
monitor dial to display Time Setting screen. Rotate
monitor dial to highlight Hour and press monitor dial
(backlighting turns orange). Rotate monitor dial to
adjust the hour setting. Rotate clockwise to increment
number and counterclockwise to decrement number.
Press monitor dial when desired hour setting is reached.
Rotate monitor dial to highlight Minute and press
monitor dial (backlighting turns orange). Rotate monitor
dial to adjust the minute setting. Rotate clockwise to
increment number and counterclockwise to decrement
number. Press monitor dial when desired minute setting
is reached. Rotate monitor dial to highlight checkmark
(
). Press monitor dial to store the Time Settings.
•
Date Setting
- Year
- Month
- Day
-
Rotate monitor dial to highlight Date Setting. Press
monitor dial to display Date Setting screen. Rotate
monitor dial to highlight Year and press monitor dial
(backlighting turns orange). Rotate monitor dial to
adjust the year setting. Rotate clockwise to increment
number and counterclockwise to decrement number.
Press monitor dial when desired year setting is reached.
Rotate monitor dial to highlight Month and press monitor
dial (backlighting turns orange). Rotate monitor dial to
adjust the month setting. Rotate clockwise to increment
number and counterclockwise to decrement number.
Press monitor dial when desired month setting is
reached. Rotate monitor dial to highlight Day and press
monitor dial (backlighting turns orange). Rotate monitor
dial to adjust the day setting. Rotate clockwise to
increment number and counterclockwise to decrement
number. Press monitor dial when desired day setting is
reached. Rotate monitor dial to highlight checkmark
(
). Press monitor dial to store the Date Settings.
•
Display Form
- Time
- Date
Rotate monitor dial to highlight Display Form. Press
monitor dial to display Display Form screen. Rotate
monitor dial to highlight Time and press monitor dial.
Press monitor dial to switch between 12h or 24h
settings. When desired time setting is reached, rotate
monitor dial to highlight Date and press monitor dial.
Press monitor dial to switch between YYYY/MM/DD,
MM/DD/YYYY, or DD/MM/YYYY settings.
Press back button to return to previous screen.
Press home button to return to default screen.
Main Menu—Setting Menu—Attachment
Adjustment—Processor Only
NOTE: The Attachment Adjustment menu will only appear
on machines equipped with a processor.
The Attachment Adjustment menu allows the operator
to adjust the pump ow rate to the attachment.
At Setting Menu, rotate monitor dial to highlight
Attachment Adjustment menu. Press monitor dial to
display Attachment Adjustment menu.
Attachment Adjustment menu includes:
•
Pump Flow Rate
Press monitor dial to select Pump Flow Rate menu.
Rotate monitor dial to increase or decrease the pump ow
rate to the attachment.
Press back button to return to previous screen.
Press home button to return to default screen.
2-2-18
112321
PN=141
Operation—Monitor Operation
OUT4001,0000726 -19-31AUG15-1/1
OUT4001,0000727 -19-31AUG15-1/1
Main Menu—Setting Menu—Attachment
Name Input
The Attachment Name Input menu provides the capability
to personalize front attachment with a specic name.
At Setting Menu, rotate monitor dial to highlight
Attachment Name Input. Press monitor dial to display
Attachment Name Input menu. Rotate monitor dial to
highlight desired attachment name. Press monitor dial to
display name change screen. To add specic information
to the attachment name, rotate monitor dial either way to
highlight a character, then press the monitor dial. After
inputting new name, rotate monitor dial to highlight SET
on bottom right corner of monitor. Press monitor dial to
nalize the setting.
To delete the last entered character, rotate monitor dial to
highlight BS on bottom left corner of monitor and then
press monitor dial. To delete all entered characters, rotate
monitor dial to highlight ALL CLEAR and then press
monitor dial.
Press back button to return to previous screen.
Press home button to return to default screen.
Main Menu—Setting Menu—Auto-Shutdown
The Auto-Shutdown menu provides the capability to
turn on this feature and set a desired time for machine
shutdown to take place.
At Setting Menu, rotate monitor dial to highlight
Auto-Shutdown. Press monitor dial to display
Auto-Shutdown menu.
Auto-Shutdown menu items include:
NOTE: When auto-shutdown is ON, the color of the
preceding square is green and A/S will appear on
the default screen. When auto-shutdown is OFF,
the color of the preceding square is gray.
□ ON (Enable)
Rotate monitor dial to highlight ON (enable). Press
monitor dial to turn the auto-shutdown function ON.
Press monitor dial again to turn the auto-shutdown
function OFF.
NOTE: Setting Time minute increment needs to be
set before enabling auto-shutdown.
Setting Time
Rotate monitor dial to highlight Setting Time and
press monitor dial (backlighting turns orange). Rotate
monitor dial to adjust the auto-shutdown acting time.
Auto-shutdown can be set to activate after 1, 2, 3, 4,
5, 7, 10, 15, 20, 25, or 30 minute increments. Press
monitor dial to store desired time setting.
NOTE: Thirty seconds before the engine stops, the monitor
will display Engine Shutdown Soon message.
Press back button to return to previous screen.
Press home button to return to default screen.
2-2-19
112321
PN=142
Operation—Monitor Operation
CN93077,0000581 -19-12JAN16-1/1
Main Menu—Setting Menu—Aftertreatment
Device Regeneration Inhibit
CAUTION: Servicing machine during
aftertreatment device regeneration can result in
serious personal injury. Avoid exposure and skin
contact with hot gases and components.
During aftertreatment device regeneration,
the engine may run at elevated idle and
hot temperatures for an extended period of
time. Aftertreatment gases and aftertreatment
device components may reach temperatures
hot enough to burn people and ignite or
melt common materials.
NOTE: Inhibiting aftertreatment device regeneration is
not preferred. Whenever possible, aftertreatment
device regeneration inhibit should not be enabled
to keep soot buildup to a minimum and to
increase overall machine uptime.
If operating in conditions where it may be unsafe
for elevated aftertreatment device temperatures,
auto-regeneration of the aftertreatment device
regeneration can be disabled.
The Aftertreatment Device Regeneration Inhibit menu
allows the operator to enable or disable the aftertreatment
device auto-regeneration inhibition.
At Setting Menu, rotate monitor dial to highlight
Aftertreatment Device Regeneration Inhibit. Press monitor
dial to display Aftertreatment Device Regeneration Inhibit
menu:
NOTE: To disable aftertreatment device auto-
regeneration, ON (enable) needs to be selected.
□ ON (Enable)
Press monitor dial to turn ON (enable) to disable
aftertreatment device auto-regeneration.
Press monitor dial again to enable aftertreatment
device auto-regeneration. Press Back button to return
to previous screen. Press Home button to return to
default screen.
NOTE: When aftertreatment device auto-regeneration
is disabled, the color of the preceding
24
.
0
˚C
81.3
10:00
ECO
ST
MHz
VOL
FM
50.0h
AM
F
E
C
H
CH1
F
E
1
TX1192144 —UN—05MAY15
Aftertreatment Device Regeneration Inhibit Indicator
24
.
0
˚C
81.3
10:00
ECO
ST
MHz
VOL
FM
50.0h
AM
F
E
C
H
CH1
F
E
2
TX1192145 —UN—05MAY15
Aftertreatment Device Regeneration Indicator
1— Aftertreatment Device
Regeneration Inhibit
Indicator
2— Aftertreatment Device
Regeneration Indicator
square is green and aftertreatment device
regeneration inhibit indicator (1) will appear
on the default screen.
When aftertreatment device auto-regeneration
is enabled, the color of the preceding square is
gray and an aftertreatment device regeneration
indicator (2) will appear on the default screen when
an auto or manual regeneration is taking place.
Press back button to return to previous screen.
Press home button to return to default screen.
2-2-20
112321
PN=143
Operation—Monitor Operation
CN93077,000023D -19-01SEP16-1/1
Main Menu—Setting Menu—Sub Meter
Selection
NOTE: Only one sub meter can be selected at a time.
When one of the selections is ON, the color of
the preceding square is green.
The Sub Meter Selection menu provides the capability
to add a meter on the fuel gauge for fuel consumption
or breaker hours.
At Setting Menu, rotate monitor dial to highlight Sub
Meter Selection. Press monitor dial to display Sub Meter
Selection menu.
Sub Meter Selection menu items include:
□ OFF (Disable)
Rotate monitor dial to highlight OFF. Press monitor dial
to turn OFF any meters.
□ Fuel Consumption Indicator
Rotate monitor dial to highlight Fuel Consumption
Indicator. Press monitor dial to turn ON the fuel
consumption indicator (1). Fuel consumption will be
displayed on the fuel gauge on the default screen.
□ Breaker Hour Meter
Rotate monitor dial to highlight Breaker Hour Meter.
Press monitor dial to turn ON the breaker hour meter
(2). Breaker hours will be displayed on the fuel gauge
on the default screen.
Press back button to return to previous screen.
Press home button to return to default screen.
TX1160739A —UN—15MAY14
Fuel Consumption Indicator
TX1160740A —UN—15MAY14
Breaker Hour Meter
1— Fuel Consumption Indicator
2— Breaker Hour Meter
2-2-21
112321
PN=144
Operation—Monitor Operation
KR46761,00012F7 -19-26JUL16-1/1
Main Menu—Setting Menu—Rear View
Camera Monitor
CAUTION: The rear camera image is designed
to supplement other safety practices and
is not intended to be the sole method of
collision avoidance. Always be alert and
aware of the surroundings when operating
this machine to avoid possible injury or
death to operator or others.
IMPORTANT: Prevent possible damage to the camera
lens surface. The camera lens surface is a resin
product. Lightly wipe the surface with a wet,
clean cloth. Never use an organic solvent.
NOTE: When the Rear View Camera Monitor mode
is enabled, the color of the preceding square is
green and rear view image (1) is continuously
displayed on the default screen.
The Rear View Camera Monitor menu provides the
capability to turn the camera ON or OFF so the view
behind the machine is shown on the monitor.
At Setting Menu, rotate monitor dial to highlight Rear View
Camera Monitor. Press monitor dial to display Rear View
Camera Monitor menu.
□ ON (Enable)
Press monitor dial to turn ON (enable) the rear camera
on the monitor. Press monitor dial again to disable rear
camera.
Never attempt to change the mounting position of the rear
camera (2). If rear camera is not operating properly, see
an authorized dealer.
TX1160741A —UN—15MAY14
Rear View Image
TX1220007 —UN—26JUL16
Rear Camera
1— Rear View Image
2— Rear Camera
Press back button to return to previous screen.
Press home button to return to default screen.
2-2-22
112321
PN=145
Operation—Monitor Operation
KR46761,000140B -19-02NOV16-1/1
OUT4001,000072C -19-31AUG15-1/1
OUT4001,000072D -19-31AUG15-1/1
Main Menu—Setting Menu—Display Item
Selection
NOTE: Only one display item can be selected at a
time. When one of the selections is ON, the color
of the preceding square is green.
The Display Item Selection menu provides the capability
to change what appears on the default screen.
At Setting Menu, rotate monitor dial to highlight Display
Item Selection. Press monitor dial to display Display Item
Selection menu.
Display Item Selection menu items include:
□ Logo
Rotate monitor dial to highlight Logo. Press monitor dial
to have manufacturer logo (1) appear on default screen.
□ Operational Information
Rotate monitor dial to highlight Operational Information.
Press monitor dial to have operational information (2)
appear on default screen.
□ OFF (Disable)
Rotate monitor dial to highlight OFF (disable). Press
monitor dial to turn OFF any images.
Press back button to return to previous screen.
Press home button to return to default screen.
1— Manufacturer Logo 2— Operational Information
1
TX1227564 —UN—02NOV16
Manufacturer Logo
TX1160743A —UN—15MAY14
Operational Information
Main Menu—Setting Menu—Brightness
Adjustment
The Brightness Adjustment menu allows operator to
adjust the brightness of the monitor for better viewing.
At Setting Menu, rotate monitor dial to highlight Brightness
Adjustment. Press monitor dial to display Brightness
Adjustment menu.
Rotate monitor dial clockwise for lighter image and
counterclockwise for darker image.
Press back button to return to previous screen.
Press home button to return to default screen.
Main Menu—Setting Menu—Language
The Language menu allows operator to change the
language text that appears on the monitor to a specic
preference.
At Setting Menu, rotate monitor dial to highlight Language.
Press monitor dial to display Language menu. A list of
different languages appears.
NOTE: Only one language can be selected at a time.
When one of the selections is ON, the color of
the preceding square is green.
Rotate monitor dial to highlight desired language and
press monitor dial to store setting.
Press back button to return to previous screen.
Press home button to return to default screen.
2-2-23
112321
PN=146
Operation—Monitor Operation
OUT4001,000072E -19-31AUG15-1/1
KR46761,00014AB -19-30JAN17-1/1
Main Menu—Setting Menu—Unit Selection
The Unit Selection menu allows operator to change the
unit system that appears on the monitor to either US
or Metric and change temperature display reading on
the monitor between degrees Celcius (°C) or degrees
Fahrenheit (°F).
At Setting Menu, rotate monitor dial (2) to highlight Unit
Selection. Press monitor dial to display Unit Selection
menu.
Unit Selection menu items include:
•
Unit
Rotate monitor dial to highlight Unit and press monitor
dial. Press monitor dial to change setting between US
or Metric.
•
°C/°F
(Blower Must Be ON)
NOTE: Before changing °C or °F, turn the blower
fan ON by pressing the blower speed switch
(1) on the switch panel.
Rotate monitor dial to highlight °C/°F and press monitor
dial. After displaying Wait message, temperature
reading is changed from previous setting in lower left
corner of the screen on the air conditioner display.
Press monitor dial again to change temperature reading
back to opposite setting.
Press back button (3) to return to previous screen.
TX1086278A —UN—27DEC10
Switch Panel
1— Blower Speed Switch
2— Monitor Dial
3— Back Button
4— Home Button
Press home button (4) to return to default screen.
Main Menu—Setting Menu—Main Menu
Sequence Change
The Main Menu Sequence Change menu provides
the capability to change the sequence order of some of
the submenus under the Main Menu according to how
frequently they are used.
At Setting Menu, rotate monitor dial to highlight Main
Menu Sequence Change. Press monitor dial to display
Main Menu Sequence Change menu.
Main Menu Sequence Change menu items include:
•
Air Conditioner
•
Radio
Rotate monitor dial to highlight the submenu that is
preferred to be shown rst. Press monitor dial to change
the submenu sequence.
Press back button to return to previous screen.
Press home button to return to default screen.
2-2-24
112321
PN=147
Operation—Monitor Operation
KR46761,00014BC -19-02FEB17-1/1
Main Menu—Information Menu
The Information Menu provides operating hour
information, maintenance items, troubleshooting
(diagnostic trouble codes [DTCs]), engine speed, and
restriction level in the aftertreatment device.
The submenus under Main Menu that appear on monitor
include:
NOTE: Alarm List ONLY appears as a submenu
if there is an actual alarm.
•
Alarm List
•
Air Conditioner
•
Radio
•
Setting Menu
•
Information Menu
At Main Menu screen (1), rotate monitor dial (2) to
highlight Information Menu. Press monitor dial to display
Information Menu.
Information Menu items include:
•
Operation
•
Maintenance
•
Troubleshooting
•
Monitoring
Press back button (3) to return to previous screen.
Press home button (4) to return to default screen.
1— Main Menu Screen
2— Monitor Dial
3— Back Button
4— Home Button
TX1086306A —UN—28DEC10
Main Menu Screen
TX1086272A —UN—27DEC10
Switch Panel
2-2-25
112321
PN=148
Operation—Monitor Operation
OUT4001,0000731 -19-31AUG15-1/1
Main Menu—Information Menu—Operation
The Operation menu provides fuel consumption and
operating hours of the breaker, front attachment, tracks,
and overall machine hours.
At Information Menu, rotate monitor dial to highlight
Operation. Press monitor dial to display Operation menu.
NOTE: Total fuel consumption and fuel consumption
rate depend on the operating environment and
the operation method of machine.
Operation menu items include:
•
Fuel Consumption
Rotate monitor dial to highlight Fuel Consumption. Press
monitor dial to display Fuel Consumption information:
- Machine Operation Hours ............... XX h
- Fuel Consumption ............................ XX L
- Average Fuel Consumption Rate....XX.X L/h
Press monitor dial to return to the previous menu. To
reset fuel consumption data, rotate monitor dial to
highlight CLEAR in the bottom right corner of screen
and press monitor dial.
•
Breaker Operation
Rotate monitor dial to highlight Breaker Operation.
Press monitor dial to display Breaker Operation
information:
- Operating Time ........................XXXXXX.X h
- Machine Operation Hours ............XXXX.X h
- Operation Ratio................................XXX.X %
Press monitor dial to return to the previous menu. To
reset breaker operating data, rotate monitor dial to
highlight CLEAR in the bottom right corner of screen
and press monitor dial.
•
Attachment Operation
Rotate monitor dial to highlight Attachment Operation.
Press monitor dial to display Attachment Operation
information:
- Operating Time ...........................XXXX.X h
Press monitor dial to return to the previous menu.
To reset attachment operating hours, rotate monitor
dial to highlight CLEAR in the bottom right corner of
screen and press monitor dial.
•
Travel Operation
Rotate monitor dial to highlight Travel Operation. Press
monitor dial to display Travel Operation information:
- Operating Time ...........................XXXX.X h
Press monitor dial to return to the previous menu. To
reset travel operating hours, rotate monitor dial to
highlight CLEAR in the bottom right corner of screen
and press monitor dial.
•
Actual Operation
NOTE: The actual operation time includes the
front attachment operation and the travel
operation hours.
Rotate monitor dial to highlight Actual Operation. Press
monitor dial to display Actual Operation information:
- Operating Time ...........................XXXX.X h
Press monitor dial to return to the previous menu. To
reset actual operating hours, rotate monitor dial to
highlight CLEAR in the bottom right corner of screen
and press monitor dial.
Press back button to return to previous screen.
Press home button to return to default screen.
2-2-26
112321
PN=149
Operation—Monitor Operation
KR46761,0001336 -19-01SEP16-1/1
OUT4001,0000733 -19-31AUG15-1/1
Main Menu—Information
Menu—Maintenance
The Maintenance menu provides the capability to notify
the operator when the next maintenance item is due,
shows hours remaining until next maintenance interval,
and allows the interval hours to be reset.
At Information Menu, rotate monitor dial to highlight
Maintenance. Press monitor dial to display Maintenance
menu.
Maintenance menu items include:
•
Engine Oil
•
Engine Oil Filter
•
Hydraulic Oil
•
Pilot Hydraulic Oil Filter
•
Hydraulic Oil Full-Flow Filter
•
Pump Transmission Oil
•
Travel Reduction Gear Oil
•
Swing Reduction Gear Oil
•
Swing Bearing Grease
•
Air Cleaner Element
•
Fuel Filter
•
Air Conditioner Filter
•
DEF/AdBlue® Filter
•
User Setting 1
•
User Setting 2
•
Maintenance Notice...........ON or OFF
Rotate monitor dial to highlight Maintenance Notice.
Press monitor dial to turn Maintenance Notice ON. Press
monitor dial again to turn Maintenance Notice OFF.
If Maintenance Notice is ON, a message is displayed on
the monitor for 10 seconds (when the key switch is in ON
position) if any of the maintenance items listed come due
for a change. Press the home button on switch panel to
delete the notication.
If Maintenance Notice is OFF, no notication is displayed
on the monitor.
To check if a maintenance item is due for a change,
rotate monitor dial through list to reach specic item and
highlight. If a wrench symbol appears next to the item,
service is due. Press monitor dial to display the following
information for each item:
•
Previous Maintenance
(date is displayed).............X.X h
•
Remains...........................XXX.X h
•
Maintenance Interval......XXX.X h
Press monitor dial to return to previous menu with no
changes.
To reset remaining time data, rotate monitor dial to
highlight RESET at the bottom center of monitor and
press monitor dial. The value of remaining hours is reset
to that of change interval. The previous maintenance date
and hours are updated with current date and time.
To change the maintenance interval, rotate monitor
dial to highlight the wrench with the clock next to it at the
bottom right corner of monitor and press monitor dial.
Backlighting will turn orange for Maintenance Interval.
Rotate monitor dial to adjust the time for scheduled hour
maintenance. Press monitor dial to store the change.
Press back button to return to previous screen.
Press home button to return to default screen.
AdBlue is a trademark of VDA, the German Association
of the Automotive Industry
Main Menu—Information
Menu—Troubleshooting
The Troubleshooting menu provides access to view any
diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) generated by a controller.
At Information Menu, rotate monitor dial to highlight
Troubleshooting. Press monitor dial to begin
Troubleshooting data. After displaying Wait message, the
screen displays controller troubleshooting menu:
•
Engine (00)
•
Main (00)
•
Monitor (00)
•
Information (00)
•
Option (00)
The amount of currently generated DTCs is displayed at
the right side of each item in parentheses. Rotate monitor
dial to highlight an item displaying DTCs. Press monitor
dial to display the actual DTC numbers. Up to 20 DTCs
can be displayed.
Press back button to return to previous screen.
Press home button to return to default screen.
2-2-27
112321
PN=150
Operation—Monitor Operation
CN93077,000057E -19-12JAN16-1/1
Main Menu—Information Menu—Monitoring
The Monitoring menu provides access to view engine
speed.
At Information Menu, rotate monitor dial to highlight
Monitoring. Press monitor dial to display Monitoring menu:
•
Actual Engine Speed...........XXXX min-¹
Press back button to return to previous screen.
Press home button to return to default screen.
2-2-28
112321
PN=151
Operation—Operating the Machine
TX,BEFORE,WORK -19-18MAY20-1/1
DX,ABILITY -19-07DEC18-1/1
Before Starting Work
Review the operating precautions. See
Safety—Operating Precautions. (Section 1-3.)
Use seat belt when operating machine. Remember to
fasten seat belt even during brief periods of use.
T133556 —UN—24AUG00
Reading Operator's Manual
Operator Ability
•
Machine owners must make sure that operators
are responsible, trained, have read the operating
instructions and warnings, and know how to operate the
machine properly and safely.
•
Age, physical ability, and mental capacity can be factors
in machine-related injuries. Operators must be mentally
and physically capable of accessing the operator station
and/or controls, and operating the machine properly
and safely.
•
Never allow a child or an untrained person to operate
the machine. Instruct all operators not to give children a
ride on the machine or an attachment.
•
Never operate machine when distracted, fatigued,
or impaired. Proper machine operation requires the
operator’s full attention and awareness.
2-3-1
112321
PN=152
Operation—Operating the Machine
KR46761,00013C7 -19-27AUG20-1/1
Inspect Machine Daily Before Starting
Perform daily maintenance checks. See
Maintenance—Every 10 Hours or Daily. (Section 3-4.)
•
Clean operator’s station (1), check pedals for freedom
of movement, and check re extinguisher (if equipped)
charge.
•
Inspect radiator and cooler cores (2) for obstructions.
•
Clean engine cover (3).
•
Inspect seat belt. See Inspect Seat Belt. (Section 4-1.)
•
Check fuel level. Remove fuel tank cap (4) and ll tank
with proper fuel (if necessary).
Inspect the following before starting:
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM: Check for worn or frayed wires
and loose or corroded connections.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM: Check for leaks, missing or loose
clamps, kinked hoses, and lines or hoses that are making
contact with each other or other machine parts.
FUEL SYSTEM: Check for leaks, missing or loose clamps,
kinked hoses, and lines or hoses that are making contact
with each other or other machine parts. Drain water and
sediment from primary and auxiliary fuel lters.
HARDWARE: Check for loose or missing parts.
LUBRICATION: Check lubrication points on periodic
maintenance chart. See Service Machine at Specied
Intervals. (Section 3-2.)
SHEET METAL AND TRACKS: Check for bent, broken,
loose, or missing parts.
PROTECTIVE DEVICES: Inspect guards, shields,
roll-over protective structure (ROPS), and seat belt.
SAFETY: Walk around machine to be sure all persons are
away from machine area.
1
2
4
3
TX1278635 —UN—28MAY19
Machine Inspection
1— Operator’s Station
2— Radiator and Cooler Cores
3— Engine Cover
4— Fuel Tank Cap
WINDOWS: Inspect and clean the polycarbonate
windows. See Inspect and Clean Polycarbonate
Windows. (Section 4-1.)
2-3-2
112321
PN=153
Operation—Operating the Machine
KR46761,00013C8 -19-27OCT16-1/1
Battery Disconnect Switch
IMPORTANT: Always turn battery disconnect switch
(1) to OFF position before any maintenance
or repair is performed on machine’s electrical
system or any welding work is performed. The
battery disconnect switch should also be turned
to the OFF position if machine is left unattended.
If switch is left in the ON position for long
periods, batteries may become discharged.
The battery disconnect switch (1) is used to isolate
electrical power from batteries to machine. The battery
disconnect switch has two positions: OFF and ON.
IMPORTANT: Avoid machine damage to diesel
exhaust uid (DEF) system. After key switch
is switched to OFF position, wait at least 5
minutes before turning battery disconnect
switch to OFF position.
The battery disconnect switch is located inside the left
front service door. Move battery disconnect switch to ON
TX1225860 —UN—11OCT16
Battery Disconnect Switch (ON position)
1— Battery Disconnect Switch
position before starting engine. Turn battery disconnect
switch to OFF position when servicing or storing machine.
The battery disconnect decal shows factory positions.
2-3-3
112321
PN=154
Operation—Operating the Machine
KR46761,000137A -19-21SEP16-1/1
Starting Engine
IMPORTANT: Prevent possible damage to the engine.
The diesel-red coolant heater is required
for temperatures -20°C (-4°F) and below. See
an authorized Hitachi dealer.
IMPORTANT: Prevent possible damage to engine.
Temperatures below -20°C (-4°F) require an
additional warm-up period.
For more information on engine warm-up procedure in
temperatures below -20°C (-4°F), see Cold Weather
Warm-Up in this section.
Before Starting the Engine
•
Conrm battery disconnect switch is in the ON position.
•
Conrm pilot shutoff lever is in locked (UP) position.
•
Conrm all control levers are in neutral position.
•
Conrm seat is adjusted to allow full pedal and control
lever operation.
•
Conrm seat belt condition; replace if necessary.
Turn key switch to ON position. The system starting
screen (1) displays for approximately 2 seconds and then
the default screen (2) is displayed.
IMPORTANT: Prevent possible damage to the engine.
Wait until engine preheat indicator (4) is no
longer illuminated before starting the machine.
Starting the Engine
1. Conrm pilot shutoff lever is in the locked (UP) position
to start machine.
2. Move engine speed dial (3) to slow idle position.
3. Sound horn to alert persons nearby.
IMPORTANT: Prevent starter damage. Never operate
starter for more than 20 seconds at a time. If
engine does not start, return key switch to OFF
position. Wait for approximately 2 minutes,
then try again. After a false start, DO NOT
turn key switch until engine stops.
4. Turn key switch to START position. Release key;
switch will return to ON position.
After Starting Check
IMPORTANT: Prevent possible damage to engine.
If alarm indicators remain illuminated after
starting engine, IMMEDIATELY STOP THE
ENGINE. Find and correct the problem.
After the engine is started, check that no alarm indicators
are shown on display.
If the alarm indicators continue to be displayed, stop
the engine immediately. Find and correct the problem.
See Main Menu—Alarm List. (Section 2-2.)
1
TX1224242 —UN—22SEP16
System Starting Screen
TX1086455A —UN—04JAN11
Engine Speed Dial
24
.
0
˚C
81.3
10:00
ECO
ST
MHz
VOL
FM
50.0h
AM
F
E
C
H
CH1
F
E
4
2
TX1219562 —UN—19JUL16
Engine Preheat Indicator
1— System Starting Screen
2— Default Screen
3— Engine Speed Dial
4— Engine Preheat Indicator
Warming the Engine
1. Run engine at 1/3 speed for 30 seconds. Do not run
engine at fast or slow idle. Do not accelerate rapidly
during warm-up.
2. Operate machine at less-than-normal loads and
speeds until engine is at normal operating temperature.
2-3-4
112321
PN=155
Operation—Operating the Machine
KR46761,000137B -19-15SEP16-1/1
Cold Weather Start Aid
CAUTION: Ether is highly ammable. Do
not use ether when starting an engine
equipped with glow plugs.
IMPORTANT: Prevent possible damage to the engine.
The diesel red coolant heater is required
for temperatures -20°C (-4°F) and below. See
an authorized Hitachi dealer.
IMPORTANT: Prevent possible damage to engine.
Temperatures below -20°C (-4°F) require an
additional warm-up period. See Cold Weather
Warm-Up in this section.
This machine is equipped with glow plugs. Glow plugs
are automatically controlled by the engine controller when
the key is turned ON. Do not start engine until the engine
preheat indicator disappears on the monitor.
2-3-5
112321
PN=156
Operation—Operating the Machine
KR46761,000137C -19-15SEP16-1/1
Cold Weather Warm-Up
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from
unexpected machine movement. If hydraulic oil
is cold, hydraulic functions move slowly. DO NOT
attempt normal machine operation until hydraulic
functions move at close-to-normal cycle times.
IMPORTANT: Prevent possible damage to the engine.
The diesel red coolant heater is required
for temperatures -20°C (-4°F) and below. See
an authorized Hitachi dealer.
IMPORTANT: Prevent possible damage to engine.
Temperatures below -20°C (-4°F) require a diesel
red coolant heater warm-up period. At -20°C
(-4°F) the engine requires 1-hour warm-up
period. Temperatures below -20°C (-4°F) require
additional warm-up period. See table below.
Diesel Fired Coolant Heater Warm-Up Period
Temperature Required Warm-Up Period
Before Operation
-20°C (-4°F)
1 Hour
-21°C (-5°F)
1 Hour
-22°C (-7°F)
2 Hours
-23°C (-9°F)
2 Hours
-24°C (-11°F)
2 Hours
-25°C (-13°F)
2 Hours
-26°C (-14°F)
2 Hours
-27°C (-16°F)
2 Hours
-28°C (-18°F)
2 Hours
-29°C (-20°F)
3 Hours
-30°C (-22°F)
4 Hours
-31°C (-23°F)
5 Hours
-32°C (-25°F)
6 Hours
-33°C (-27°F)
7 Hours
-34°C (-29°F)
8 Hours
-35°C (-31°F)
9 Hours
-36°C (-32°F)
10 Hours
-37°C (-34°F)
11 Hours
-38°C (-36°F)
12 Hours
-39°C (-38°F)
13 Hours
-40°C (-40°F)
14 Hours
In extremely cold conditions, an extended warm-up period
is necessary.
Avoid sudden operation of all functions until the engine
and hydraulic oil are thoroughly warm.
1. If temperature is below 0°C (32°F), engine will start
at 800 rpm and ramp to 1200 rpm after 30 seconds.
Engine maintains 1200 rpm until hydraulic temperature
reaches 2°C (35.6°F) or 15 minutes, whichever comes
rst.
2. Run engine at 1/2 speed for 5 minutes. Do not run
at fast or slow idle.
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from
unexpected machine movement. Clear the area
of all bystanders before running machine through
the warm-up procedure. If machine is inside a
building, warm the travel circuit rst and move
the machine to a clear area outside. Cold oil
causes machine functions to respond slowly.
3. Actuate travel and swing functions slowly, initially
moving only short distances.
4. Operate boom, arm, and bucket (if equipped) functions
by moving cylinders a short distance each direction
for the rst time.
5. Continue cycling cylinders by increasing the travel
each cycle until full stroke is obtained.
6. Swing upperstructure so boom is perpendicular to
tracks.
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from machine
sliding backwards. Keep angle between
boom and arm 90—110°.
7. Keeping the angle between boom and arm 90—110°,
fully actuate bucket (if equipped) close function
(cylinder extend) and lower attachment to raise track
off ground.
IMPORTANT: Holding function actuated for more
than 10 seconds can cause damage from
hot spots in the control valve.
8. While rotating raised track in forward direction, actuate
bucket (if equipped) curl function (cylinder extend) for
10 seconds and release for 5 seconds for a period of
2-1/2 minutes.
9. Repeat procedure with track rotating in reverse
direction.
10. Lower machine to ground.
11. Repeat steps 6—10 on opposite track.
12. Operate all hydraulic functions to distribute warm oil
in all cylinders, motors, and lines.
13. If hydraulic functions still move slowly, repeat steps
7 and 8.
2-3-6
112321
PN=157
Operation—Operating the Machine
TX,CYLINDER,LIMITS -19-08JAN21-1/1
ER79617,0000E31 -19-04MAY15-1/1
Operate Within Machine Limits
IMPORTANT: Prevent boom, arm, and bucket cylinder
damage. Operating machine with any cylinder at
end of stroke (1) may apply excessive load which
may damage the cylinders. Avoid operating
machine with any cylinder at end of stroke.
When an excessive load is applied to the boom, arm, or
bucket, hydraulic oil is relieved in those circuits. Relieving
oil reduces hydraulic circuit pressure and load on the
components to protect the machine from damage. If the
cylinders are used at the end of stroke (1), the force is
applied to the cylinders and machine components are no
longer protected by the relief valve. Do not operate the
machine with any cylinder at the end of stroke.
1
1
TX1307270 —UN—14DEC20
Operate Within Machine Limits
1— End of Stroke
Travel Pedals and Levers
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from
unexpected machine movement. Keep
bystanders clear of machine when traveling.
Keep bystanders clear of machine when traveling.
The instructions below apply when the travel motors (4)
are to the rear of the machine. If the travel motors are to
the front of the machine, the machine moves OPPOSITE
to the direction described.
FORWARD TRAVEL (1): Push down on front of both
pedals or push both levers forward.
REVERSE TRAVEL (2): Push down on rear of both
pedals or pull both levers rearward.
NEUTRAL POSITION (3): Travel brakes will automatically
stop and hold the machine.
RIGHT TURN: Push down on front of left pedal or push
left lever forward.
LEFT TURN: Push down on front of right pedal or push
right lever forward.
SHORT TURN (COUNTER ROTATE): Push down the
front of one pedal and the rear of the other or push one
lever forward and pull the other rearward.
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from machine
tipping. Operate control pedals or levers slowly
when traveling down a slope.
TRAVELING DOWN A SLOPE: Operate control pedals or
levers slowly when traveling down a slope.
T137492 —UN—25JAN01
Travel Pedals and Levers
1— Forward Travel
2— Reverse Travel
3— Neutral Position
4— Travel Motor (2 used)
COLD WEATHER OPERATION: Travel pedal and lever
dampers are provided for smooth control. In extremely
cold weather, pedal or lever effort will increase. Operate
pedals or levers several times with pilot shutoff lever in the
locked (UP) position.
2-3-7
112321
PN=158
Operation—Operating the Machine
KR46761,00011DC -19-20JUN19-1/4
Continued on next page KR46761,00011DC -19-20JUN19-2/4
Control Levers
IMPORTANT: Prevent unintended machine
movement. Some control lever functions can
be reassigned to suit operator preference.
Verify machine functions before operating.
For more information, see an authorized
John Deere dealer.
Forestry Excavator
1— Horn Button
2— Power Boost Button
3— Arm Out
4— Arm In
5— Swing Left
6— Swing Right
7— Boom Lower
8— Boom Raise
9— Bucket Curl
10— Bucket Dump
4
3
8
7
6
5 10
9
1 2
TX1213079 —UN—31MAR16
Control Levers
Forestry Excavator With Thumb—If Equipped
1— Not Used
2— Horn Button
3— Thumb Open
4— Thumb Close
5— Power Boost Button
6— Arm Out
7— Arm In
8— Swing Left
9— Swing Right
10— Boom Lower
11— Boom Raise
12— Bucket Curl
13— Bucket Dump
2 5
1
4
3
7
6
11
10
9
8 13
12
TX1213080 —UN—30MAR16
Control Levers
2-3-8
112321
PN=159
Operation—Operating the Machine
KR46761,00011DC -19-20JUN19-3/4
KR46761,00011DC -19-20JUN19-4/4
Forestry Excavator With Processor—If Equipped
Appearance and congurations of control levers may vary.
For operation of the buttons and switches on the control
levers, see attachment manufacturer’s operator’s manual.
1— Horn Button
2— Power Boost Button
3— Arm Out
4— Arm In
5— Swing Left
6— Swing Right
7— Boom Lower
8— Boom Raise
9— Bucket Curl
10— Bucket Dump
4
3
8
7
6
5 10
9
1 2
TX1213079 —UN—31MAR16
Control Levers
Processor—If Equipped
Appearance and congurations of control levers may vary.
For operation of the buttons and switches on the control
levers, see attachment manufacturer’s operator’s manual.
1— Arm Out
2— Arm In
3— Swing Left
4— Swing Right
5— Boom Lower
6— Boom Raise
7— Rotate Grapple
Counterclockwise
8— Rotate Grapple Clockwise
2
1
6
5
4
3 8
7
TX1213604 —UN—31MAR16
Processor
2-3-9
112321
PN=160
Operation—Operating the Machine
KR46761,00011DD -19-20JUN19-1/1
TX,MACH,STOP,WARNING -19-23JUN20-1/6
Continued on next page TX,MACH,STOP,WARNING -19-23JUN20-2/6
Attachment Combo Control Levers—If
Equipped
IMPORTANT: Prevent unintended machine
movement. Some control lever functions can
be reassigned to suit operator preference.
Verify machine functions before operating.
For more information, see an authorized
John Deere dealer.
Forestry Excavator With Power Clam—If Equipped
1— Rotate Grapple Clockwise
2— Rotate Grapple
Counterclockwise
3— Horn Button
4— Grapple Open
5— Grapple Close
6— Power Boost Button
7— Arm Out
8— Arm In
9— Swing Left
10— Swing Right
11— Boom Lower
12— Boom Raise
13— Tilt In
14— Tilt Out
15— Grapple Saw Button (if
equipped)
16— Free Swing Button (if
equipped)
17— Outrigger Raise Button (if
equipped)
18— Outrigger Lower Button (if
equipped)
2
6
3
18
1
17
5
16
4
15
8
7
12
11
10
9 14
13
TX1213557 —UN—31MAR16
Forestry Excavator With Power Clam
Required Machine Stop Warning
NOTE: Engine emissions system malfunction indicator
is for machines equipped with F or L engine.
Machine Stop Mandate Occurs
IMPORTANT: In some situations, machine engine
power may be reduced as described. On
notication, immediately place the machine
in a safe state and move it to a safe location.
A mandated machine stop can only be
removed by a service technician.
Engine emissions system malfunction indicator illuminates
when an emission-related fault occurs.
RG22491 —UN—21AUG13
Engine Emissions System Malfunction Indicator
Warning indicator illuminates when a condition exists
which requires operator action.
RG22492 —UN—21AUG13
Warning Indicator
2-3-10
112321
PN=161
Operation—Operating the Machine
TX,MACH,STOP,WARNING -19-23JUN20-3/6
TX,MACH,STOP,WARNING -19-23JUN20-4/6
TX,MACH,STOP,WARNING -19-23JUN20-5/6
TX,MACH,STOP,WARNING -19-23JUN20-6/6
Engine stop indicator illuminates when a condition exists
which requires immediate operator action and service.
RG22493 —UN—21AUG13
Engine Stop Indicator
Emission System Fault Has Occurred
Four hours or less remaining, engine emissions system
malfunction and warning indicators are illuminated to warn
operator of emissions-related fault. Two hours or less
when pop-up is displayed.
•
Engine power is normal.
•
Machine operation is normal.
•
Place machine in a safe state.
•
Contact service provider.
RG26361 —UN—04SEP14
Engine Emissions System Malfunction and Warning Indicators
Sixty minutes remaining, engine emissions system
malfunction and engine stop indicators are illuminated
and alarm sounds to warn operator of emissions-related
fault. Sixty minutes or less from when pop-up is displayed
until nal power restriction.
•
Engine power and torque will be reduced.
•
Key Off—Key On will temporarily provide full power.
•
Place machine in a safe state.
•
Contact service provider.
RG26972 —UN—26MAR15
Engine Emissions System Malfunction and Engine Stop Indicators
Two minutes or less remaining, engine emissions system
malfunction and engine stop indicators are illuminated and
alarm sounds to warn operator of emissions-related fault
which has not been corrected. “DEF System Fault-Engine
Power and Speed Limited” is displayed on machines with
monitors.
•
Engine power is idle only.
•
Place machine in a safe state.
•
Contact service provider.
RG26972 —UN—26MAR15
Engine Emissions System Malfunction and Engine Stop Indicators
2-3-11
112321
PN=162
Operation—Operating the Machine
Continued on next page KR46761,0001389 -19-21SEP16-1/2
Aftertreatment Device
The aftertreatment device is a critical component in the
engine's emissions control system, which is required
to meet governmental emissions regulations. The
aftertreatment device captures soot and ash to prevent
its release into the atmosphere. The soot and ash must
be eliminated from the aftertreatment device to keep it
functioning properly. The process of eliminating collected
soot is called aftertreatment device regeneration. There
are three types of aftertreatment device regeneration
available to the operator:
•
NATURAL/PASSIVE
•
AUTO
•
MANUAL
Auto-regeneration is able to activate (if not inhibited by
the operator) 30 hours after previous regeneration, either
automatically or manual.
Manual regeneration can only be initiated when
aftertreatment device manual regeneration indicator
illuminates on monitor. See Aftertreatment Device
Regeneration in this section.
If approximately 48 hours have passed without
regeneration being carried out, engine trouble alarm will
be displayed on the monitor. See an authorized Hitachi
dealer.
NOTE: Unnecessary idling can cause aftertreatment
device soot to accumulate more quickly. For the
best possible aftertreatment device operation which
requires the least amount of operator interaction,
idling should be kept to a minimum.
Natural/Passive Cleaning
During normal machine operation, the aftertreatment
device heat will naturally clean the soot build up in the
aftertreatment device.
Auto-Regeneration
CAUTION: Servicing machine during
aftertreatment device regeneration can result in
serious personal injury. Avoid exposure and skin
contact with hot gases and components.
During aftertreatment device regeneration,
the engine may run at elevated idle and
hot temperatures for an extended period of
time. Aftertreatment gases and aftertreatment
device components may reach temperatures
hot enough to burn people and ignite or
melt common materials.
NOTE: Auto-regeneration is performed 30 hours after
the previous regeneration. Auto-regeneration
may start during operation of machine, allowing
operator to continue operating machine.
With aftertreatment device auto-regeneration not inhibited,
aftertreatment device regeneration is automatically
performed as needed, with no interaction from the
operator. An aftertreatment device regeneration request
will illuminate on the default screen of the monitor when
the system is actively performing an aftertreatment device
auto-regeneration. Machine can be operated as normal.
When the aftertreatment device auto-regeneration
process has completed its cycle, the auto-regeneration
request will automatically turn off.
NOTE: Inhibiting aftertreatment device regeneration is
not preferred. Whenever possible, aftertreatment
device regeneration should be enabled to keep
soot buildup to a minimum and to increase
overall machine uptime.
If operating in conditions where it may be unsafe
for elevated aftertreatment device temperatures,
aftertreatment device regeneration can be inhibited
through the monitor. For more information, see
Main Menu—Setting Menu—Aftertreatment Device
Regeneration Inhibit. (Section 2-2.) If aftertreatment
device regeneration is inhibited by the operator, an
aftertreatment device regeneration inhibit indicator will
appear on the default screen of the monitor and remains
on until aftertreatment device regeneration is no longer
inhibited.
Manual Regeneration
CAUTION: Servicing machine during
aftertreatment device regeneration can result in
serious personal injury. Avoid exposure and skin
contact with hot gases and components.
During aftertreatment device regeneration,
the engine may run at elevated idle and
hot temperatures for an extended period of
time. Aftertreatment gases and aftertreatment
device components may reach temperatures
hot enough to burn people and ignite or
melt common materials.
Avoid death or serious injury from machine
movement. Do not leave running machine
unattended during aftertreatment device
regeneration.
IMPORTANT: Avoid machine damage. Always
park machine in a safe location and check
for adequate fuel and diesel exhaust uid
(DEF) level before beginning aftertreatment
device regeneration.
2-3-12
112321
PN=163
Operation—Operating the Machine
KR46761,0001389 -19-21SEP16-2/2
Manual regeneration is a process that allows the operator
to clean the aftertreatment device. Regeneration is
most commonly initiated after extended operation
with aftertreatment device regeneration inhibited or
frequent engine shutdowns have occurred while the
auto-regeneration process was active. (For more detailed
information, see Aftertreatment Device Regeneration in
this section.)
During aftertreatment device regeneration, the engine
speed will be controlled automatically and the machine
must remain parked to complete the procedure. Complete
regeneration time will vary on several criteria including
fuel type, oil type, duty cycle, ambient temperature, and
the number of previously aborted aftertreatment device
regeneration requests.
Manual regeneration is initiated by an aftertreatment
device regeneration request appearing on the monitor. If
aftertreatment device regeneration request is yellow and
blinking, manual regeneration should be performed soon.
Machine needs to be in a predetermined safe state. This
safe state includes six conditions:
•
Keep bystanders clear of machine.
•
Fuel level alarm is not illuminated.
•
Diesel exhaust uid (DEF) level alarm is not illuminated.
•
Machine is parked in a safe place with the front
attachment lowered to the ground.
•
Pilot shutoff lever is in locked (UP) position.
•
Engine speed dial is set to slow idle.
Once the aftertreatment device regeneration switch
is pressed and held for 3 seconds, an aftertreatment
device regeneration progress screen appears on monitor.
Progress status is displayed by a bar graph. The manual
regeneration will continue until one of the following
conditions exist:
•
There is no soot restriction in the aftertreatment device.
•
Operator cancels manual regeneration procedure by
lowering the pilot shutoff lever or increasing engine
speed.
•
Manual regeneration is aborted due to a system
malfunction.
•
Engine runs out of fuel.
•
Engine is shut off by operator (not recommended).
IMPORTANT: Avoid engine damage. If machine will
NOT be returning to operation immediately
after a manual regeneration procedure, allow
the engine and aftertreatment device time
to return to normal operating temperatures
BEFORE stopping engine.
The aftertreatment device regeneration request will be
illuminated on the monitor during manual regeneration.
When manual regeneration procedure is complete,
monitor will display a message that regeneration has
completed, engine will automatically return to slow idle,
and aftertreatment regeneration device indicator will turn
off. Machine is ready to return to operation.
Avoid inhibiting the aftertreatment device regeneration
unless absolutely necessary. Repeated inhibiting of the
aftertreatment device regeneration or ignoring prompts to
perform a manual regeneration, will cause engine power
limitations and can eventually lead to dealer required
service cleaning.
2-3-13
112321
PN=164
Operation—Operating the Machine
Continued on next page KR46761,000138A -19-19OCT16-1/2
Aftertreatment Device Regeneration
CAUTION: Servicing machine during
aftertreatment device regeneration can result in
serious personal injury. Avoid exposure and skin
contact with hot gases and components.
During aftertreatment device regeneration,
the engine may run at elevated idle and
hot temperatures for an extended period of
time. Aftertreatment gases and aftertreatment
device components may reach temperatures
hot enough to burn people and ignite or
melt common materials.
Avoid death or serious injury from machine
movement. Do not leave running machine
unattended during aftertreatment device
regeneration.
IMPORTANT: Avoid machine damage. Always
park machine in a safe location and check
for adequate fuel and diesel exhaust uid
(DEF) level before beginning aftertreatment
device regeneration.
The aftertreatment device regeneration process allows
the system to clean the aftertreatment device when
the device is restricted. Active device regeneration is
most commonly initiated after extended operation with
aftertreatment device regeneration inhibited or frequent
engine shutdowns have occurred while the aftertreatment
device regeneration process was active.
Before starting aftertreatment device regeneration
process, machine needs to be in a predetermined safe
state. This safe state includes six conditions:
•
Keep bystanders clear of machine.
•
Fuel level alarm is not illuminated.
•
Diesel exhaust uid (DEF) level alarm is not illuminated.
•
Machine is parked in a safe place with the front
attachment lowered to the ground.
•
Pilot shutoff lever is in locked (UP) position.
•
Engine speed dial is set to slow idle.
An aftertreatment device regeneration request (1) on
the monitor will inform the operator when a manual
regeneration needs to take place.
•
If the alarm indicator is illuminated yellow and blinking,
aftertreatment device is restricted and an aftertreatment
device regeneration should be done immediately.
Warning alarm indicator will also be illuminated.
Before starting the manual aftertreatment device
regeneration progress, make sure the machine is in a safe
state as listed previously. Once these conditions are met,
press and hold the aftertreatment device regeneration
switch (3) on the right console for 3 seconds.
NOTE: If the safe state conditions are NOT met and
the aftertreatment device regeneration switch is
1
2
TX1192183 —UN—04MAY15
Manual Aftertreatment Device Regeneration Screen
TX1218573A —UN—30JUN16
Aftertreatment Device Regeneration Switch
6
4
5
TX1192185 —UN—04MAY15
Manual Aftertreatment Device Regeneration Screen
1— Aftertreatment Device
Regeneration Request
2— Manual Aftertreatment
Device Regeneration
Screen
3— Aftertreatment Device
Regeneration Switch
4— Aftertreatment Device
Regeneration Indicator
5— Manual Aftertreatment
Device Regeneration
Progress Screen
6— Bar Graph
pressed and held, a manual aftertreatment device
regeneration screen (2) appears on the monitor.
Move the pilot shutoff lever to locked (UP) position
and set engine speed dial to slow idle. Press
and hold the aftertreatment device regeneration
switch again for 3 seconds to begin the manual
aftertreatment device regeneration process.
2-3-14
112321
PN=165
Operation—Operating the Machine
KR46761,000138A -19-19OCT16-2/2
Aftertreatment device regeneration indicator (4) will
illuminate on the monitor and a manual aftertreatment
device regeneration progress screen (5) appears.
Progress status is displayed on the bar graph (6).
During aftertreatment regeneration, the engine speed will
be controlled automatically and the machine must remain
parked to complete the procedure. Complete regeneration
will vary on several criteria including fuel type, oil type,
duty cycle, ambient temperature, and the number of
previously aborted aftertreatment device regeneration
requests. Exhaust combustion may temporarily emit white
smoke during the regeneration process.
The regeneration process will continue until one of the
following conditions exist:
•
Pilot shutoff lever is moved.
•
Engine speed dial is moved.
•
Aftertreatment device regeneration is aborted due to a
system malfunction.
•
Engine runs out of fuel.
•
Engine is shut off by operator (not recommended).
If any of these conditions happen during the
aftertreatment device regeneration, the process will
be cancelled and a message will be displayed on
the monitor informing the operator. The condition will
need to be amended and the aftertreatment device
regeneration must be started over. For a system
malfunction, see an authorized Hitachi dealer.
IMPORTANT: Avoid engine damage. If machine will
NOT be returning to operation immediately
after a manual regeneration, allow the engine
and aftertreatment device regeneration time
to return to normal operating temperatures
BEFORE stopping engine.
NOTE: If machine needs to be operated during the
aftertreatment device regeneration, press the
aftertreatment device regeneration switch again.
The process will be cancelled and a message
will be displayed on the monitor informing the
operator. Machine operation can resume, but
an aftertreatment device regeneration must be
performed as soon as possible.
When there is no restriction in the aftertreatment
device, the aftertreatment device regeneration is
complete. Engine will automatically return to slow idle
and aftertreatment device regeneration request will
turn off. A message will appear on the monitor stating,
“Regeneration Has Completed,” and the machine is ready
to return to operation.
2-3-15
112321
PN=166
Operation—Operating the Machine
TX,SCR,OVERVIEW,2 -19-13JUL20-1/1
Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) System Overview
RG22427 —UN—14FEB13
SCR System
A—SCR Catalyst
B—DEF Dosing Injector
C—DEF Dosing Unit
D—DEF Tank Header Assembly
E—DEF Tank
IMPORTANT: Do not remove battery leads for at least
5 minutes after engine stops. The SCR system
automatically purges itself of diesel exhaust
uid (DEF) immediately after the engine is
stopped. If adequate time is not allowed for
lines to be purged, residual DEF can freeze
and possibly damage components of the SCR
system during cold-weather exposure.
In order to comply with national and local emission
requirements, this engine series contains a selective
catalytic reduction (SCR) system. The main components
of the SCR system include the SCR catalyst (A), DEF
dosing injector (B), DEF dosing unit (C), DEF tank header
assembly (D), and DEF tank (E). The SCR system is
effective at reducing the nitrogen oxides (NOx) emissions.
NOx is a major component of smog and acid rain.
During combustion, NOx molecules are formed in the
exhaust. DEF is injected into the exhaust stream before
the SCR catalyst. Through a chemical reaction in the
SCR, NOx is converted into nitrogen and water.
Water vapor is a normal by-product of combustion. During
cold-weather operation at low exhaust temperatures,
this water vapor can condense and resemble white
smoke from the exhaust. This will dissipate as operating
temperature increases and the water is further vaporized.
This situation is considered normal.
A DEF solution begins to crystallize and freeze at -11°C
(12°F). With climate temperatures that can range much
colder than this, DEF is expected to freeze in the DEF
tank. For this reason, the DEF tank contains a heating
element that provides rapid thawing of DEF upon start-up.
The heating element cycles to maintain uidity during
operation as needed. DEF is not dosed upon initial
start-up; therefore, it is not necessary to have liquid DEF
at cold start-up.
If DEF quality deteriorates and it is no longer within
specications, the engine can derate. DEF should be
crystal clear with a light ammonia smell. If DEF appears
cloudy, has a colored tint, or has a profound ammonia
smell, it is likely not within specication. A diagnostic
trouble code (DTC) is displayed, informing the operator to
replace the DEF. Upon replacement of DEF and operation
of the engine under load for a period of time or an
aftertreatment device regeneration, the code automatically
goes away with no required input from the operator.
2-3-16
112321
PN=167
Operation—Operating the Machine
KR46761,000140D -19-03NOV16-1/1
Service ADVISOR™ Remote (SAR) Software
Delivery Process
Theory of Operation
Service ADVISOR™ is a diagnostic tool used by Hitachi
dealers to perform diagnostics as well as updates to
machine settings and software. Dealers can access
diagnostic trouble codes and diagnostic addresses,
create readings and recordings, and program controllers.
This technology consists of both software and hardware.
Technicians attend a minimum of 8 hours of training to
become certied in utilizing this tool.
Service ADVISOR Remote (SAR) is a function of Service
ADVISOR. SAR allows the dealer technician to connect
to a SAR-enabled machine via the JDLink™ network to
remotely access diagnostic trouble code information and
record diagnostic data as well as program controllers.
Similar to software (payload) updates in the computer
industry, SAR enables Hitachi to remotely deliver updated
software via the JDLink hardware on board. Remote
programming gives Hitachi the ability to update software to
enhance the performance of the machine. This capability
can be used to reprogram most machine controllers. The
user actively participates with the dealer in this process by
installing the software update.
NOTE: Some vehicle controllers may not be compatible
for SAR reprogramming.
For more information about Service ADVISOR Remote,
see an authorized Hitachi dealer.
Vehicle Reprogramming
NOTE: Factory setting is set to always accept
software downloads.
Normal machine operation can continue during
the software download process.
Customer will be notied by Hitachi or a Hitachi dealer of
pending software updates with appropriate installation
instructions via letter or phone.
Customer can determine the appropriate time and place
to install the new software on the machine. For more
information, see Service ADVISOR™ Remote (SAR)
Operation in this section.
Once the customer initiates installation of the software,
SAR will start and manage the installation of the new
payload to the appropriate machine controllers.
NOTE: Software download speed capability depends
on JDLink cellular coverage.
Service ADVISOR is a trademark of Deere & Company
JDLink is a trademark of Deere & Company
2-3-17
112321
PN=168
Operation—Operating the Machine
Continued on next page TX,SAR,OPERATION,2 -19-13JUL20-1/3
Service ADVISOR™ Remote (SAR) Operation
The ex power controller (FPC) will interface with
JDLink™ and the monitor to communicate the availability
of software updates and programming progress. The
Service ADVISOR™ Remote (SAR) switch (1) is wired
directly to the FPC and allows the operator to accept
or decline available updates. Alarm indicators on the
display are controlled through diagnostic trouble codes
(DTCs) originating from the FPC. The FPC will create the
DTCs under certain conditions, which will then prompt
the monitor to display operator instructions. It will be
necessary to interact with a Hitachi dealer or technician
for needed information.
NOTE: The programming alarm indicator is used for
different purposes, but the color of the alarm
indicator changes for each purpose.
When a software update is available to install, a yellow
programming alarm will appear on the monitor, along with
a message stating:
SOFTWARE UPDATE READY
NOTE: Alarm List ONLY appears as a submenu if
there is an actual alarm.
The Alarm List submenu under the Main Menu will give
instructions to guide the operator through the process.
For viewing alarm instructions, see Main Menu—Alarm
List. (Section 2-2.)
Park machine and stop engine. Installation of the software
can only process if the engine is not running and pilot
shutoff lever is in locked (UP) position.
NOTE: Before installing software, make sure the
SOFTWARE TERMS AND CONDITIONS have
been read. Find SOFTWARE TERMS AND
CONDITIONS at the beginning of this manual.
LEDs on the SAR switch will illuminate when this alarm
appears. The left LED will be red and the right LED will
be green.
Press and hold the right side of SAR switch (green LED)
for 3 seconds to begin programming installation. Press left
side of SAR switch (red LED) to cancel software update
and wait until the next power cycle.
TX1086797A —UN—21JAN11
Service ADVISOR™ Remote Switch
TX1087187 —UN—21JAN11
Programming Alarm
1— Service ADVISOR™
Remote (SAR) Switch
2— DECLINE Software Updates
3— ACCEPT Software Updates
If operator chooses to install the new update, the
programming alarm will remain on the monitor, but the
color will change to red and the message will state:
PROGRAMMING IN PROCESS
Green LED on SAR switch will blink while programming
is taking place.
DO NOT turn OFF machine power until the programming
is complete.
Once programming is completed, programming alarm will
turn green and the message will state:
PROGRAMMING COMPLETED
Cycle machine power to complete the installation process.
JDLink is a trademark of Deere & Company
Service ADVISOR is a trademark of Deere & Company
2-3-18
112321
PN=169
Operation—Operating the Machine
TX,SAR,OPERATION,2 -19-13JUL20-2/3
TX,SAR,OPERATION,2 -19-13JUL20-3/3
KR46761,000147C -19-21DEC16-1/1
If a problem occurs during the programming process, a
red program failure alarm will appear on the monitor along
with a red warning alarm. The message on the monitor
will state:
PROGRAM FAILURE
If these alarms appear, see an authorized Hitachi dealer
for solutions.
TX1087189 —UN—21JAN11
Program Failure Alarm
TX1086352 —UN—06JAN11
Warning Alarm
If conditions exist that will not allow the transfer of new
software to happen, a red unable to program alarm
appears on the monitor along with a yellow warning alarm.
The message on the monitor will state:
UNABLE TO REPROGRAM DEVICE
Make sure the engine is stopped and pilot shutoff lever
is in locked (UP) position. Press and hold the right side
of SAR switch (green LED) again for 3 seconds to retry
programming or contact an authorized Hitachi dealer.
TX1087190 —UN—21JAN11
Unable to Program Alarm
TX1086352 —UN—06JAN11
Warning Alarm
Operating in Water and Mud
Be careful not to operate machine in water or mud above
upper track shoe surface (1), causing swing bearing and
rotary manifold to be submerged.
If the swing bearing and rotary manifold are submerged,
remove cover from underneath center of machine.
Remove drain plug (2) to drain water and mud.
Clean swing gear area. Install plug and cover. Lubricate
swing bearing and swing bearing gear. See Lubricate
Swing Bearing. (Section 3-6.) See Lubricate Swing
Bearing Gear. (Section 3-9.)
1— Upper Track Shoe Surface
2— Drain Plug
1
TX1183074 —UN—27JAN15
Upper Track Shoe Surface
TX1208809A —UN—08JAN16
Drain Plug (view from underneath)
2-3-19
112321
PN=170
Operation—Operating the Machine
KR46761,000115F -19-05APR16-1/1
Driving Up a Steep or Slippery Slope
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from machine
roll-over. Use this technique only on a short
slope. Machine depends on support of
boom/arm/attachment during entire procedure
until machine reaches top of slope. Repositioning
the attachment during this procedure is NOT
recommended. DO NOT swing upperstructure
during this procedure. DO NOT reposition
attachment during this procedure.
1. Wear seat belt.
2. Keep the attachment at specied height above ground
when ascending or descending slopes. If machine
starts to slip, becomes unstable, or if engine stalls,
lower the attachment immediately.
Specication
Height Above
Ground—Height......................................................................20—30 cm
8—12 in
3. Do not travel on a slope steeper than 35°.
2-3-20
112321
PN=171
Operation—Operating the Machine
KR46761,000147D -19-21DEC16-1/1
Lifting
NOTE: This procedure is only applicable to machines
equipped with a bucket.
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury when lifting.
Observe these rules when lifting machine:
•
Never move a load over a bystander’s head.
•
Never use machine to lift people.
•
Keep everyone clear of raised loads.
•
Do not exceed lift capacity limits.
•
Never attach sling or chain to bucket teeth.
•
Use tether lines to guide loads.
•
Use hand signals to communicate with others.
•
Never move load suddenly.
•
Keep all bystanders away from raised load
until blocks are supporting it or load is
sitting on the ground.
For more information on lifting, see Object Handling.
(Section 1-3.)
For more information on lift capacity limits, see
Miscellaneous—Specications.
1. Use proper rigging to attach and stabilize loads.
2. Without bucket loop: Curl bucket and retract arm.
Fasten sling or chain to bucket pivot pin (1).
With bucket loop: Curl bucket and retract arm. Fasten
sling or chain to bucket loop (2).
3. Coordinate hand signals with signal person before
starting.
4. Know location of all bystanders in working area.
5. Attach a hand line to load and make sure person
holding hand line is away from load.
6. Check stability by carefully doing a trial lift:
•
Park machine close to load.
•
Attach load to machine.
•
Raise load 50 mm (2 in) above ground.
•
Swing load all the way to one side.
•
While keeping load close to ground, move load away
from machine.
TX1144511 —UN—24OCT13
Without Bucket Loop
TX1144666 —UN—24OCT13
With Bucket Loop
1— Bucket Pivot Pin 2— Bucket Loop
•
If there is any indication of reduced stability of
machine, lower load to ground.
7. Lift load only as high as necessary.
2-3-21
112321
PN=172
Operation—Operating the Machine
KR46761,000115D -19-05APR16-1/1
Lower Boom With Engine Stopped
When an engine stops during operation, the boom cannot
be lowered using the pilot controller because there is no
pilot pressure oil to move the boom valve spool.
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from
unexpected machine movement. Clear all
bystanders from the area before lowering the
boom with the engine stopped.
1. Remove control valve access cover.
CAUTION: To avoid injury from escaping oil
under pressure, stop engine and relieve the
pressure in the system before disconnecting or
connecting hydraulic or other lines. Tighten all
connections before applying pressure.
IMPORTANT: Avoid machine damage. Never loosen
the boom manual lower screw (2) more than
4 turns, as screw may come off.
2. Loosen nut (1). Loosen boom manual lower screw
(2) 1/2 turn. The boom will start to lower. The boom
lowering speed can be adjusted by loosening screw
more.
3. After the attachment is lowered to the ground, tighten
screw, and then nut to specication.
Specication
Screw—Torque................................................................................7 N·m
62 lb·in
Nut—Torque..................................................................................13 N·m
115 lb·in
1— Nut
2— Boom Manual Lower Screw
X9811 —UN—23AUG88
Avoid Injury From Escaping Oil Under Pressure
TX1000642 —UN—29NOV05
Control Valve—Right Side Shown
2-3-22
112321
PN=173
Operation—Operating the Machine
KR46761,000115E -19-12APR16-1/1
Parking the Machine
IMPORTANT: During freezing weather, prevent
damage to undercarriage components from
frozen mud and dirt. Machine must be
parked on a solid, level surface to prevent
tracks freezing in the ground.
1. Park machine on a solid, level surface.
During freezing weather, clean mud and dirt from
tracks, rollers, and track frames. Clean the steps and
walkways after parking the machine.
If tracks are frozen in the ground, slowly raise the
machine using boom to free the tracks. Move machine
carefully.
2. Lower equipment to the ground.
3. Turn auto-idle switch (1) to the A/I OFF position.
IMPORTANT: Turbocharger can be damaged
if procedure to shut down engine is
not done properly.
4. Run engine with engine speed dial (2) at 1/3 position
without load for 2 minutes.
5. Turn engine speed dial to slow idle position.
6. Turn key switch (3) to the OFF position. Remove key
from switch.
7. Place pilot shutoff lever (4) to locked (UP) position.
IMPORTANT: Prevent cab electrical component
damage from bad weather. Windows, roof
vent, and cab door must be closed to
prevent rain from entering.
8. Close windows, roof vent, and cab door.
9. If machine is to be parked overnight, turn battery
disconnect switch to OFF position. See Battery
Disconnect Switch in this section.
If storing longer than overnight, see
Miscellaneous—Storage. (Section 4-4.)
10. Lock all access doors and compartments.
TX1087012A —UN—18JAN11
Switch Panel
4
TX1214198 —UN—12APR16
Pilot Shutoff Lever (unlocked position shown)
1— Auto-Idle Switch
2— Engine Speed Dial
3— Key Switch
4— Pilot Shutoff Lever
2-3-23
112321
PN=174
Operation—Operating the Machine
TD48962,00001CD -19-25OCT19-1/4
Continued on next page TD48962,00001CD -19-25OCT19-2/4
Loading Machine for Transport
NOTE: Follow all federal, state, and local regulations
when transporting machine on public roads.
1. Select appropriate transportation equipment for the
machine. See Machine Specications. (Section 4-6.)
2. Park trailer on a level surface when loading and
unloading the machine.
3. Start the engine. See Starting Engine in this section.
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from
unexpected machine movement. Turn auto-idle
switch (1) to the AI/OFF position. Use slow speed
operating modes and move machine carefully.
4. Turn auto-idle switch (1) to the AI/OFF position.
5. Turn travel mode switch (2) counterclockwise to select
slow (turtle) speed travel.
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from tip
over. Position machine center line over
center line of the trailer bed.
IMPORTANT: Prevent machine or trailer damage.
DO NOT allow machine or attachment
to impact trailer.
6. Before leaving operator’s seat:
4321 5
9876 0
PUSH
INT
OFF
ON
OFF
A
C
C
O
N
S
T
A
R
T
2
1
MODE
OFF
OFFON
A/IA/I
L H
min-
1
PUSH
MENU/SET
PUSH
MODE
PUSH
TUNE/AM
.
FM
PUSH
VOL/PWR
PUSH
/AUTO
/OFF
2
1
TX1282534 —UN—01AUG19
Switch Panel
1— Auto-Idle Switch 2— Travel Mode Switch
a. Lower all equipment onto blocks.
b. Park the machine. See Parking the Machine in this
section.
IMPORTANT: Avoid damage to exhaust system.
Cover the exhaust pipe (3).
7. Cover the exhaust pipe (3) to prevent moisture
and foreign debris from entering and damaging the
machine.
3— Exhaust Pipe
TX1282623A —UN—01AUG19
Exhaust Pipe
2-3-24
112321
PN=175
Operation—Operating the Machine
TD48962,00001CD -19-25OCT19-3/4
TD48962,00001CD -19-25OCT19-4/4
Securing the Machine to Transport Equipment
TX1282625
1
1
TX1282625 —UN—01AUG19
Machine (side entry cab, left side shown)
1— Vertical Tiedown Angle (4
used)
2— Side Tiedown Angle (4 used)
TX1282626
2
2
2
2
TX1282626 —UN—01AUG19
Machine (side entry cab, top of machine shown)
1— Vertical Tiedown Angle (4
used)
2— Side Tiedown Angle (4 used)
IMPORTANT: Avoid machine damage. Fasten
chains or cables to machine frame. Do
not place chains or cables over or against
hydraulic lines or hoses.
1. Fasten machine to trailer using chains or cables with
appropriate load binder at the following points:
•
Front frame tiedown point (2 used)
•
Rear frame tiedown point (2 used)
Ensure vertical tiedown angles (1) and side tiedown
angles (2) have angles between 15—60°.
2. Fasten all equipment to trailer using chains or cables
with appropriate load binder.
2-3-25
112321
PN=176
Operation—Operating the Machine
CN93077,000059D -19-08SEP20-1/1
KR46761,00013C2 -19-10OCT16-1/1
Towing-Recovery Procedure
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from
unexpected machine movement. When travel
gear cases are disconnected, the machine has no
brakes and can move. Place blocks at front and
rear of tracks to prevent machine from rolling.
1. Block tracks.
2. Drain oil from each travel gear case.
3. Remove cover from each gear case.
4. Remove sun gear (1) from each gear case.
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from recovery
device (3) breaking. Do not recover a machine
with frayed or damaged cables, chains,
slings, straps, or wire recovery device. Use
appropriate recovery device.
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from pinching
ngers in recovery device. Wear gloves.
5. Install cover. Fill gear case with oil.
IMPORTANT: Avoid machine damage. Use
protective material (2) between track frame
and recovery device (3).
NOTE: Machines should be as close together as possible.
6. Connect the appropriate recovery device (3) to the
track frame of the machine being recovered.
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from
unexpected machine movement. Keep bystanders
away and operator off of machine being recovered.
T137511 —UN—25JAN01
Sun Gear
TX1192436 —UN—06MAY15
Recovery Device
1— Sun Gear
2— Protective Material
3— Recovery Device
7. Unblock tracks.
8. Slowly recover machine.
Machine Retrieval
For machine retrieval, wrap retrieval device around
bearing tower (1).
1— Bearing Tower
TX1050227A —UN—16OCT08
Machine Retrieval
2-3-26
112321
PN=177
Operation—Operating the Machine
TD48962,00001B8 -19-02JUL19-1/1
Lifting the Machine
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from
unexpected machine movement when lifting
the machine. Check lifting capacity of crane
before lifting the machine. Lift load only
as high as necessary.
Keep all people clear of raised load.
NOTE: The center of gravity (2) will vary depending
on the kind of attachment.
Refer to decals on machine for correct lifting points
(1). There are two lifting points on each side of the
undercarriage.
1. Fully extend arm and bucket (if equipped) cylinders.
2. Position the upperstructure parallel with tracks.
3. Lower boom until attachment comes in contact with
ground.
4. Turn key switch to the OFF position. Remove key
from switch.
5. Pull pilot shutoff lever to locked (UP) position.
6. Close and lock all doors and covers.
3
2
1
TX1229755 —UN—02DEC16
Lifting the Machine (side entry cab shown)
1— Lifting Point (4 used)
2— Center of Gravity
3— Support Bar
7. Route appropriate lifting device through lifting points
and under both sides of the track frame as illustrated.
8. Attach appropriate lifting device to crane.
9. Slowly lift machine. For machine weights, see
Miscellaneous—Specications. (Section 4-6.)
2-3-27
112321
PN=178
Maintenance—Machine
KR46761,00013EE -19-26OCT16-1/1
KR46761,00013EF -19-26OCT16-1/1
TX,FUEL,SPECS -19-26OCT20-1/1
KR46761,00013F0 -19-26OCT16-1/1
Required Emission-Related Information
Service Provider
A qualied repair shop or person of the owner's choosing may maintain, replace, or repair emission control devices and systems with original
or equivalent replacement parts. However, warranty, recall, and all other services paid for by Hitachi must be performed at an authorized
Hitachi service center.
Diesel Fuel
Consult a local fuel distributor for properties of the diesel
fuel available in the area.
In general, diesel fuels are blended to satisfy the low
temperature requirements of the geographical area in
which they are marketed.
Diesel fuels specied to EN 590 or ASTM D975 are
recommended. Renewable diesel fuel produced by
hydrotreating animal fats and vegetable oils is basically
identical to petroleum diesel fuel. Renewable diesel fuel
that meets EN 590 or ASTM D975 is acceptable for use
at indicated mixture levels.
Sulfur Content for Engines That Meet Final Tier
4 and Stage IV Engines
•
Use ONLY ultra low sulfur diesel (ULSD) fuel with a
maximum of 15 mg/kg (15 ppm) sulfur content.
IMPORTANT: Do not mix used diesel engine oil or any
other type of lubricating oil with diesel fuel.
Improper fuel additive usage may cause damage
on fuel injection equipment of diesel engines.
Diesel Fuel Specications
The engine in this machine is designed to operate only
with ultra low sulfur diesel (ULSD) fuel. Use of fuel
other than ULSD will reduce the efciency and durability
of the engine, will harm and permanently damage the
engine’s advanced emissions control systems, reduce
fuel economy, and possibly prevent the engine from
running at all. Emission-related warranties are likely to
be rendered void by the use of fuel that does not meet
these specications.
Lubricity of Diesel Fuel
Most diesel fuels manufactured in the United States,
Canada, and the European Union have adequate lubricity
to ensure proper operation and durability of fuel injection
system components. However, diesel fuels manufactured
in some areas of the world may lack the necessary lubricity.
IMPORTANT: Make sure the diesel fuel used
in your machine demonstrates good
lubricity characteristics.
If fuel of low or unknown lubricity is used, add John Deere
Fuel-Protect Diesel Fuel Conditioner (or equivalent) at
the specied concentration.
Lubricity of BioDiesel Fuel
Fuel lubricity can improve signicantly with BioDiesel
blends up to B5 (5% BioDiesel).
3-1-1
112321
PN=179
Maintenance—Machine
KR46761,00013F1 -19-27OCT16-1/1
KR46761,00013F2 -19-26OCT16-1/1
KR46761,00013F3 -19-27OCT16-1/1
Handling and Storing Diesel Fuel
CAUTION: Reduce the risk of re. Handle fuel
carefully. DO NOT ll the fuel tank when engine
is running. DO NOT smoke while you ll the
fuel tank or service the fuel system.
Fill the fuel tank at the end of each day's operation to
prevent water condensation and freezing during cold
weather.
Keep all storage tanks as full as practical to minimize
condensation.
Ensure that all fuel tank caps and covers are installed
properly to prevent moisture from entering. Monitor water
content of the fuel regularly.
When using biodiesel fuel, the fuel lter may require more
frequent replacement due to premature plugging.
Check engine oil level daily prior to starting engine. A
rising oil level may indicate fuel dilution of the engine oil.
IMPORTANT: The fuel tank is vented through the
ller cap. If a new ller cap is required, always
replace it with an original vented cap.
When fuel is stored for an extended period or if there is a
slow turnover of fuel, add a fuel conditioner to stabilize the
fuel and prevent water condensation. Contact fuel supplier
or authorized Hitachi dealer for recommendations.
Biodiesel Fuel
Biodiesel is a fuel comprised of mono-alkyl esters of long
chain fatty acids derived from vegetable oils or animal
fats. Biodiesel blends are biodiesel mixed with petroleum
diesel fuel on a volume basis.
Before using fuel containing biodiesel, review the
Biodiesel Use Requirements and Recommendations in
this operator's manual.
Environmental laws/regulations may encourage or
prohibit the use of biofuels. Operators should consult
with appropriate governmental authorities prior to using
biofuels.
Biodiesel users in the U.S. are strongly encouraged to
purchase biodiesel blends from a BQ-9000 Certied
Marketer and sourced from a BQ-9000 Accredited
Producer (as certied by the National Biodiesel Board).
Certied Marketers and Accredited Producers can be
found at the following website: http://www.bq-9000.org.
Biodiesel concentrations up to a 5% blend (B5) in
petroleum diesel fuel can be used in this engine.
The petroleum diesel portion of biodiesel blends must
meet the requirements of ASTM D975 (US) or EN 590
(EU) commercial standards.
Request a certicate of analysis from a fuel distributor to
ensure that the fuel is compliant with the specications in
this operator's manual.
When using biodiesel fuel, the engine oil level must be
checked daily. If oil becomes diluted with fuel, shorten
oil change intervals.
The following must be considered when using biodiesel
blends up to B5:
•
Cold weather ow degradation
•
Stability and storage issues (moisture absorption,
oxidation, microbial growth)
•
Possible lter restriction and plugging (usually a problem
when rst switching to biodiesel on used engines)
•
Possible fuel leakage through seals and hoses
•
Possible reduction of service life of engine components
IMPORTANT: Raw pressed vegetable oils are NOT
acceptable for use as fuel in any concentration
in this engine. Use of raw pressed vegetable
oils could cause engine failure.
Testing Diesel Fuel
A fuel analysis program can help to monitor the quality
of diesel fuel. The fuel analysis can provide critical
data such as cetane number, fuel type, sulfur content,
water content, appearance, suitability for cold weather
operations, bacteria, cloud point, acid number, particulate
contamination, and whether the fuel meets specication.
Contact an authorized Hitachi dealer for more information
on diesel fuel analysis.
3-1-2
112321
PN=180
Maintenance—Machine
KR46761,00013F4 -19-27OCT16-1/1
KR46761,00013F5 -19-26OCT16-1/1
Supplemental Diesel Fuel Additives
Diesel fuel can be the source of performance or other
operational problems for many reasons. Some causes
include poor lubricity, contaminants, low cetane number,
and a variety of properties that cause fuel system
deposits. These and others are referenced in other
sections of this operator's manual.
To optimize engine performance and reliability, closely
follow recommendations on fuel quality, storage, and
handling, which are found elsewhere in this Operator's
Manual.
Fuel Filters
The importance of fuel ltration cannot be overemphasized
with modern fuel systems. The combination of increasingly
restrictive emission regulations and more efcient engines
requires fuel system to operate at much higher pressures.
Higher pressures can only be achieved using fuel injection
components with very close tolerances. These close
manufacturing tolerances have signicantly reduced
capacities for debris and water.
Hitachi brand fuel lters have been designed and
produced specically for Isuzu engines.
To protect the engine from debris and water, always
change engine fuel lters as specied in this manual.
3-1-3
112321
PN=181
Maintenance—Machine
KR46761,00013F6 -19-27OCT16-1/1
KR46761,00013F7 -19-26OCT16-1/1
Minimizing the Effect of Cold Weather on Diesel Engines
The engine in this machine is designed to operate
effectively in cold weather.
However, for effective starting and cold-weather operation,
a little extra care is necessary. The following information
outlines steps that can minimize the effect that cold
weather may have on starting and operation of an engine.
See an authorized Hitachi dealer for additional information
and local availability of cold-weather aids.
Use Winter Grade Fuel
When temperatures fall below 0°C (32°F), winter grade
fuel (No. 1-D in North America) is best suited for
cold-weather operation. Winter grade fuel has a lower
cloud point and a lower pour point.
Cloud point is the temperature at which wax begins to
form in the fuel. This wax causes fuel lters to plug. Pour
point is the lowest temperature at which movement of
the fuel is observed.
NOTE: On average, winter grade diesel fuel has a lower
Btu (heat content) rating. Using winter grade fuel
may reduce power and fuel efciency, but should not
cause any other engine performance effects. Check
the grade of fuel being used before troubleshooting
for low-power complaints in cold-weather operation.
Seasonal Viscosity Oil and Proper Coolant
Concentration
Use seasonal grade viscosity engine oil based on the
expected air temperature range between oil changes
and a proper concentration of low silicate antifreeze as
recommended. (See DIESEL ENGINE OIL and ENGINE
COOLANT requirements in this section.)
Diesel Fuel Flow Additive
Use John Deere fuel-protect diesel fuel conditioner (winter
formula), which contains anti-gel chemistry, or equivalent
fuel conditioner to treat non-winter grade fuel (No. 2-D
in North America) during the cold-weather season.
This generally extends operability to about 10°C (18°F)
below the fuel cloud point. For operability at even lower
temperatures, use winter grade fuel.
IMPORTANT: Treat fuel when outside temperature
drops below 0°C (32°F). For best results, use
with untreated fuel. Follow all recommended
instructions on label.
BioDiesel
When operating with biodiesel blends, wax formation
can occur at warmer temperatures. Use John Deere
fuel-protect diesel fuel conditioner (winter formula), at 5°C
(41°F) to treat biodiesel fuels during the cold-weather
season. Use only winter grade petroleum diesel fuel at
temperatures below -10°C (14°F).
Winterfronts
Use of fabric, cardboard, or solid winterfronts is
not recommended with this engine. Their use can
result in excessive engine coolant, oil, and charge air
temperatures. This can lead to reduced engine life, loss
of power, and poor fuel economy. Winterfronts may also
put abnormal stress on fan and fan drive components
potentially causing premature failures.
If winterfronts are used, they should never totally close
off the grill frontal area. Approximately 25% area in the
center of the grill should remain open at all times. At no
time should the air blockage device be applied directly
to the radiator core.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) — Use in Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) Equipped Engines
Diesel exhaust uid (DEF) is a high purity liquid that is
injected into the exhaust system of engines equipped with
selective catalytic reduction (SCR) systems. Maintaining
the purity of DEF is important to avoid malfunctions in the
SCR system. Engines requiring DEF shall use a product
that meets the requirements for aqueous urea solution 32
(AUS 32) according to ISO 22241-1.
Use DEF that is certied by the American Petroleum
Institute (API) Diesel Exhaust Fluid Certication Program
or by the AdBlue™ Diesel Exhaust Fluid Certication
Program. Look for the API certication symbol or the
AdBlue™ name on the container.
In some cases, DEF is referred to by one or more of these
names:
•
Urea
•
Aqueous Urea Solution 32
•
AUS 32
•
AdBlue™
•
NOx Reduction Agent
•
Catalyst Solution
AdBlue is a trademark of VDA, the German Association
of the Automotive Industry.
3-1-4
112321
PN=182
Maintenance—Machine
KR46761,00013F8 -19-27OCT16-1/1
Relling Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Tank
CAUTION: Avoid contact with eyes. In case
of contact, immediately ush eyes with large
amounts of water for a minimum of 15 minutes.
Reference the Materials Safety Data Sheet
(MSDS) for additional information.
Do not ingest DEF. In the event DEF is ingested,
contact a physician immediately. Reference
the Materials Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for
additional information.
IMPORTANT: Use only distilled water to rinse
components that are used to deliver DEF. Tap
water can contaminate DEF. If distilled water is
not available, rinse with clean tap water, then
thoroughly rinse with ample amounts of DEF.
If DEF is spilled or contacts any surface other
than the storage tank, immediately clean the
surface with clear water. DEF is corrosive to
painted and unpainted metallic surfaces and can
distort some plastic and rubber components.
If DEF is lled into engine fuel tank or other
uid compartment, do not operate engine until
system is properly purged of DEF. Contact
an authorized Hitachi dealer immediately to
determine how to clean and purge the system.
Reasonable care should be taken when relling the DEF
tank. Ensure that the DEF tank cap area is free of debris
before removing the cap. Seal containers of DEF between
use to prevent contamination and evaporation.
Avoid splashing DEF and do not allow DEF to come into
contact with skin, eyes, or mouth.
DEF is not harmful to handle, but DEF can be corrosive
to materials such as steel, iron, zinc, nickel, copper,
TS1731 —UN—23AUG13
aluminum, and magnesium. Use suitable containers to
transport and store DEF. Containers made of polyethylene,
polypropylene, or stainless steel are recommended.
Avoid prolonged contact with skin. In case of accidental
contact, wash skin immediately with soap and water.
Keep anything used to store or dispense DEF clean
of dirt and dust. Wash and rinse containers or funnels
thoroughly with distilled water to remove contaminants.
If an unapproved uid, such as diesel fuel or coolant is
added to the DEF tank, contact an authorized Hitachi
dealer immediately to determine how to clean and purge
the system.
If water has been added to the DEF tank, a tank cleaning
is necessary. See Cleaning DEF Tank in this manual.
After relling the tank, check the DEF concentration. See
Testing Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF).
The operator must maintain appropriate DEF levels at all
times. Check the DEF level daily and rell the tank as
needed. The lling port is identied by a blue colored cap
embossed with the DEF symbol, shown.
3-1-5
112321
PN=183
Maintenance—Machine
KR46761,00013F9 -19-26OCT16-1/1
DX,DEF,STORE -19-15JUL20-1/1
Testing Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)
IMPORTANT: Using DEF with the correct
concentration is critical to engine and
aftertreatment system performance. Extended
storage and other conditions can adversely
alter the DEF concentration.
If DEF quality is questionable, draw a sample out of the
DEF tank or storage tank into a clear container. DEF
must be crystal clear with a light ammonia smell. If DEF
appears cloudy, has a colored tint, or has a profound
ammonia smell, it is likely not within specication. DEF
in this condition should not be used. Drain tank, ush
with distilled water and rell with new or good DEF. After
relling the tank, check the DEF concentration.
If the DEF passes the visual and smell test, check the DEF
concentration with a handheld refractometer calibrated
to measure DEF.
DEF concentration should be checked when the engine
has been stored for extended periods, or if there is
suspicion the engine or packaged DEF uid has been
contaminated with water.
Two approved tools are available through Hitachi dealer:
•
JDG11594 Digital DEF Refractometer—A digital tool
providing an easy to read concentration measurement
•
JDG11684 DEF Refractometer—Low-cost alternative
tool providing an analog reading
Follow instructions included with either tool to obtain the
measurement.
The correct DEF concentration is 31.8—33.2% urea. If
the DEF concentration is not within specication, drain the
DEF tank, ush with distilled water and ll with new or good
DEF. If packaged DEF is not within specication, dispose
of DEF packages and replace with new or good DEF.
Storing Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)
CAUTION: Avoid contact with eyes. In case
of contact, immediately ush eyes with large
amounts of water for a minimum of 15 minutes.
Reference the Materials Safety Data Sheet
(MSDS) for additional information.
Do not ingest DEF. In the event DEF is ingested,
contact a physician immediately. Reference
the Materials Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for
additional information.
IMPORTANT: It is unlawful to tamper with or remove
any component of the aftertreatment system.
Do not use DEF that does not meet the required
specications or operate the engine with no DEF.
Never attempt to create DEF by mixing
agricultural grade urea with water. Agricultural
grade urea does not meet the necessary
specications and can damage the
aftertreatment system.
Do not add any chemicals or additives to
DEF in an effort to prevent freezing. Any
chemicals or additives added to DEF can
damage the aftertreatment system.
Never add water or any other uid in place
of, or in addition to DEF. Operating with a
modied DEF or using an unapproved DEF can
damage the aftertreatment system.
Storage information provided below is for reference and is
to be used as a guideline only.
It is preferred to store DEF out of extreme ambient
temperatures. DEF freezes at –11°C (12°F). Exposure to
temperatures greater than 30°C (86°F) can degrade DEF
over time. Do not store DEF in direct sunlight.
Dedicated DEF storage containers must be sealed
between uses to prevent evaporation and contamination.
Containers made of polyethylene, polypropylene, or
stainless steel are recommended to transport and store
DEF.
Ideal conditions for storage of DEF are:
•
Store at temperatures between –5°C and 30°C (23°F
and 86°F)
•
Store in dedicated containers sealed to avoid
contamination and evaporation
Under these conditions, DEF is expected to remain
useable for a minimum of 18 months. Storing DEF
at higher temperatures can reduce its useful life by
approximately 6 months for every 5°C (9°F) temperature
above 30°C (86°F).
If unsure how long or under what conditions DEF has been
stored, test DEF. See Testing Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF).
Long-term storage in the DEF tank (over 12 months) is
not recommended. If long-term storage is necessary,
test DEF prior to operating engine. See Testing Diesel
Exhaust Fluid (DEF).
It is recommended to purchase DEF in quantities that will
be consumed within 12 months.
3-1-6
112321
PN=184
Maintenance—Machine
DX,DEF,DISPOSE -19-13JUN13-1/1
KR46761,00013FA -19-27OCT16-1/1
KR46761,00013FB -19-26OCT16-1/1
DX,LUBST -19-11APR11-1/1
Disposal of Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)
Although there is little issue with minor spillage of DEF on
the ground, large amounts of DEF should be contained. If
large spills occur, contact local environmental authorities
for assistance with clean-up.
If a substantial quantity of DEF is not within specication,
contact the DEF supplier for assistance with disposal. Do
not dump substantial quantities of DEF onto the ground or
send DEF to wastewater treatment facilities.
Alternative and Synthetic Lubricants
Conditions in certain geographical areas may require
lubricant recommendations different from those printed in
this manual.
Some Hitachi brand coolants and lubricants may not be
available in your location.
Consult an authorized Hitachi dealer to obtain information
and recommendations.
Synthetic lubricants may be used if they meet the
performance requirements as shown in this manual.
The temperature limits and service intervals shown in
this manual apply to both conventional and synthetic
lubricants.
Re-rened base stock products may be used if the
nished lubricant meets the performance requirements.
Mixing of Lubricants
In general, avoid mixing different brands or types of oil.
Oil manufacturers blend additives in their oils to meet
certain specications and performance requirements.
Mixing different oils can interfere with the proper
functioning of these additives and degrade lubricant
performance.
Consult an authorized Hitachi dealer to obtain specic
information and recommendations.
Lubricant Storage
Your equipment can operate at top efciency only when
clean lubricants are used.
Use clean containers to handle all lubricants.
Store lubricants and containers in an area protected from
dust, moisture, and other contamination. Store containers
on their side to avoid water and dirt accumulation.
Make certain that all containers are properly marked to
identify their contents.
Properly dispose of all old containers and any residual
lubricant they may contain.
3-1-7
112321
PN=185
Maintenance—Machine
KR46761,00013FC -19-27OCT16-1/1
KR46761,00013FD -19-27OCT16-1/1
Diesel Engine Oil—Final Tier 4 and Stage IV
Use oil viscosity based on the expected air temperature
range during the period between oil changes.
Use high quality oils meeting the following standards.
•
API Service Category CJ-4
•
ACEA Oil Sequence E9
•
ACEA Oil Sequence E6
•
JASO DH-2
Multi-viscosity diesel engine oils are preferred.
Diesel fuel quality and fuel sulfur content must comply
with all existing emissions regulations for the area in
which the engine operates.
IMPORTANT: Use only ultra low sulfur diesel
(ULSD) fuel with a maximum sulfur content
of 15 mg/kg (15 ppm).
SAE 15W-40
SAE 10W-40
SAE 10W-30
SAE 0W-40
SAE 5W-30
50 C
o
40 C
o
30 C
o
20 C
o
10 C
o
0 C
o
-10 C
o
-20 C
o
-30 C
o
-40 C
o
122 F
o
50 F
o
32 F
o
14 F
o
-4 F
o
-22 F
o
-40 F
o
104 F
o
68 F
o
86 F
o
TX1227147 —UN—27OCT16
Oil Viscosities for Air Temperature Ranges
Oil Filters
Filtration of oils is critically important for proper
operation and lubrication. Hitachi brand oil lters have
been designed and produced specically for Hitachi
applications.
Hitachi lters adhere to engineering specications for
quality of the lter media, lter efciency rating, strength
of the bond between the lter media and the element
end cap, fatigue life of the canister (if applicable), and
pressure capability of the lter seal. Non-Hitachi branded
oil lters might not meet these key Hitachi specications.
Always change oil lters regularly as specied in this
manual.
3-1-8
112321
PN=186
Maintenance—Machine
KR46761,00013FE -19-27OCT16-1/1
Hydraulic Oil
IMPORTANT: This machine is factory lled with Super
EX 46HN extended life zinc-free hydraulic oil.
DO NOT MIX ZINC-BASED AND ZINC-FREE OILS.
Flushing system is required when changing
from zinc-free to zinc-based oils. Contact
authorized dealer for the ushing procedure.
Avoid mixing different brands of oils. Oil
manufacturers engineer their oils to meet
certain specications and requirements.
Mixing different oils can degrade lubricant
and machine performance.
Use oil viscosity based on the expected air temperature
range during the period between oil changes.
Low Temperature Operation
•
Do not mix zinc-based and zinc-free oils.
•
A preferred ISO32 hydraulic oil may be added to the
machine for low temperature operations. Hydraulic
system oil viscosity must be 32Cst at 40°C (104°F)
minimum and must not be operated when ambient
temperature exceeds 30°C (86°F).
•
When switching back to warm weather operation, a
preferred ISO46 hydraulic oil may be added to the
machine. The hydraulic system oil viscosity must be
40Cst at 40°C (104°F) minimum and must not be
operated when ambient temperature exceeds 40°C
(104°F).
Seasonal Hydraulic Flushing
•
Do not mix zinc-based and zinc-free oils.
•
Two hydraulic tank ushes are required when changing
hydraulic oils for seasonal operation. Drain and rell
tank with new oil (ISO32-cold, ISO46-warm). Operate
machine to mix oil in system. Drain and rell tank again.
Check oil viscosity.
The following oil is preferred:
5000 hour change interval:
• Zinc-Free Super EX 46HN oil from Hitachi
• Zinc-Free Super Hyrando WP46
2500 hour change interval:
• Zinc-Free Daphne Super Hydro A 32 (for low temperature
operation)
-40˚C
-30˚C
-20˚C
-10˚C
0˚C
10˚C
20˚C
30˚C
40˚C
50˚C
-40˚F
-22˚F
-4˚F
14˚F
32˚F
50˚F
68˚F
86˚F
104˚F
122˚F
Premium AW46
Daphne Super Hydro A 32
Premium AW32
Super EX 46HN
Super Hyrando WP46
TX1165037 —UN—10SEP14
Hydraulic Oil
1500 hour change interval:
IMPORTANT: Avoid damage to the machine.
Zinc-based oils must not be mixed with 2500
hour and 5000 hour zinc-free oils.
The following products may be zinc-based and can be
used provided a complete hydraulic system ush has
been performed. Contact an authorized dealer for this
procedure.
Premium AW oil: AW46 or AW32 (for low temperature
operation)
Biodegradable Hydraulic Oil:
IMPORTANT: Other re resistant and readily
biodegradable oil (also called FR oils) are
not approved in Hitachi Construction and
Forestry equipment.
Use only Exxon Mobil EAL Envirosyn 46H Synthetic
Esther Oil when a biodegradable oil is required. Contact
an authorized Hitachi dealer for this Registration and
Routine Oil Analysis to meet warranty requirements.
3-1-9
112321
PN=187
Maintenance—Machine
KR46761,00013FF -19-27OCT16-1/1
KR46761,0001400 -19-27OCT16-1/1
Swing Gear Case and Travel Gear Case Oils
Use oil viscosity based on the expected air temperature
range during the period between oil changes.
The following oils are preferred:
•
API Service Category GL-5
TS1653 —UN—14MAR96
Swing Gear Case and Travel Gear Case Oils
Pump Drive Gear Case Oil
IMPORTANT: This machine can use 15W/40 engine oil
or 80/90 gear oil in the pump drive gear case.
Use oil viscosity based on the expected air temperature
range during the period between oil changes.
The following oil is preferred:
•
API Service Category CI-4
•
API Service Category CH-4
•
API Service Category CG-4
T197398 —UN—21JAN04
Pump Gear Case Oil
3-1-10
112321
PN=188
Maintenance—Machine
KR46761,00011E2 -19-14NOV16-1/1
KR46761,0001409 -19-02NOV16-1/1
Cab Tilt Oil—Rear Entry Cab Only
IMPORTANT: Prevent damage to enclosure door and
cab tilt system. This machine is factory lled
with John Deere Hydrau™XR zinc-based oil.
Avoid servicing this machine with products
that do not meet these specications. If oils
have been mixed or if alternate service oils
are desired, the complete enclosure door
and cab tilt system needs to be completely
ushed by an authorized dealer.
Avoid machine damage. Mixing different oil
types can degrade lubricant and machine
performance. Oil manufacturers engineer
their oils to meet certain specications and
performance requirements.
The following oil is required:
•
John Deere Hydrau™XR
If John Deere Hydrau™ XR is not available, other oils
must meet the following requirements:
•
Brookeld viscosity at -40°C >9500 cP
•
VI 230-250
•
Oxidation stability per ASTM D943 <7000 hours
•
Denison HF-0
-40˚C
-30˚C
-20˚C
-10˚C
0˚C
10˚C
20˚C
30˚C
40˚C
50˚C
-40˚F
-22˚F
-4˚F
14˚F
32˚F
50˚F
68˚F
86˚F
104˚F
122˚F
JD HYDRAU XR
TX1228191 —UN—14NOV16
Oil Viscosities for Air Temperature Ranges
Hydrau is a trademark of Deere & Company
Track Adjuster, Working Tool Pivot, Swing
Bearing, and Swing Bearing Gear Grease
For working tool pivots and front attachments:
•
Use an Extreme Pressure (EP) grease with at least 3%
Moly content
For all other items:
•
Use an Extreme Pressure (EP) grease
Other greases may be used if they meet the following:
•
NLGI Performance Classication GC-LB
IMPORTANT: Some types of grease thickener are
not compatible with others.
TX1227552 —UN—02NOV16
Grease
3-1-11
112321
PN=189
Maintenance—Machine
KR46761,000140A -19-02NOV16-1/1
DX,COOL19 -19-13JAN18-1/1
Diesel Engine Coolant
Ethylene glycol or propylene glycol base coolants should
be used if they meet the following specication:
•
Pre-mix coolant meeting ASTM D6210 requirements
•
Coolant concentrate meeting ASTM D6210
requirements in a 40—60% mixture of concentrate with
quality water
If coolant meeting one of these specications is
unavailable, use a coolant concentrate or pre-mix coolant
that has a minimum of the following chemical and physical
properties:
•
Is formulated with a nitrite-free additive package
•
Protects the cooling system metals (cast iron, aluminum
alloys, and copper alloys such as brass) from corrosion
Water Quality
Water quality is important to the performance of the
cooling system. Distilled, deionized, or demineralized
water is recommended for mixing with ethylene glycol and
propylene glycol base engine coolant concentrate.
Coolant Drain Intervals
Drain and ush the cooling system and rell with fresh
coolant at the indicated interval.
When coolant meeting ASTM D6210 is used, the drain
interval is 2 years or 4000 hours of operation.
IMPORTANT: Do not use cooling system sealing
additives or antifreeze that contains
sealing additives.
Do not mix ethylene glycol and propylene
glycol base coolants.
Do not use coolants that contain nitrites.
Water Quality for Mixing with Coolant Concentrate
Engine coolants are a combination of three chemical
components: ethylene glycol (EG) or propylene glycol
(PG) antifreeze, inhibiting coolant additives, and quality
water.
Water quality is important to the performance of the
cooling system. Deionized or demineralized water
is recommended for mixing with ethylene glycol and
propylene glycol base engine coolant concentrate.
All water used in the cooling system should meet the
following minimum specications for quality:
Chlorides <40 mg/L
Sulfates <100 mg/L
Total solids
<340 mg/L
Total dissolved I hardness
<170 mg/L
pH 5.5—9.0
IMPORTANT: Do not use bottled drinking water
because it often contains higher concentrations
of total dissolved solids.
Freeze Protection
The relative concentrations of glycol and water in the
engine coolant determine its freeze protection limit.
Ethylene Glycol
Freeze Protection Limit
40% -24°C (-12°F)
50% -37°C (-34°F)
60% -52°C (-62°F)
Propylene Glycol
Freeze Protection Limit
40% -21°C (-6°F)
50% -33°C (-27°F)
60% -49°C (-56°F)
DO NOT use a coolant-water mixture greater than 60%
ethylene glycol or 60% propylene glycol.
3-1-12
112321
PN=190
Maintenance—Machine
KR46761,0001403 -19-27OCT16-1/1
KR46761,000140C -19-03NOV16-1/1
Operating in Warm Temperature Climates
Isuzu engines are designed to operate using
recommended engine coolants.
Always use a recommended engine coolant, even when
operating in geographical areas where freeze protection
is not required.
IMPORTANT: Water may be used as coolant in
emergency situations only.
Foaming, hot surface aluminum and iron
corrosion, scaling, and cavitation occur when
water is used as the coolant, even when
coolant conditioners are added.
Drain cooling system and rell with
recommended engine coolant as soon
as possible.
Testing Coolant Freeze Point
The use of a handheld coolant refractometer is the
quickest, easiest, and most accurate method to determine
coolant freeze point. This method is more accurate than
a test strip or a oat-type hydrometer which can produce
poor results.
A coolant refractometer is available through an authorized
Hitachi dealer under the SERVICEGARD™ tool program.
Part number 75240 provides an economical solution to
accurate freeze point determination in the eld.
To use this tool:
1. Allow cooling system to cool to ambient temperatures.
2. Open radiator cap to expose coolant.
3. With the included dropper, collect a small coolant
sample.
4. Open the lid of the refractometer, place one drop of
coolant on the window and close the lid.
5. Look through the eyepiece and focus as necessary.
6. Record the listed freeze point for the type of coolant
(ethylene glycol coolant or propylene glycol) being
tested.
TS1732 —UN—04SEP13
SERVICEGARD™ Part Number 75240
TS1733 —UN—04SEP13
Image with a Drop of 50/50 Coolant Placed on the Refractometer Window
SERVICEGARD is a trademark of Deere & Company
3-1-13
112321
PN=191
Maintenance—Machine
KR46761,0001404 -19-27OCT16-1/1
Disposing of Coolant
Improperly disposing of engine coolant can threaten the
environment and ecology.
Use leakproof containers when draining uids. Do not use
food or beverage containers that may mislead someone
into drinking from them.
Do not pour waste onto the ground, down a drain, or into
any water source.
Inquire on the proper way to recycle or dispose of waste
from a local environmental or recycling center, or from an
authorized Hitachi dealer.
TS1133 —UN—15APR13
Recycle Waste
3-1-14
112321
PN=192
Maintenance—Periodic Maintenance
KR46761,0001225 -19-14JUN16-1/1
KR46761,0000BCF -19-24JUN15-1/1
Service Machine at Specied Intervals
Lubricate and make service checks and adjustments at
intervals shown on the periodic maintenance chart (1) and
on the following pages.
The periodic maintenance chart is located on the inside of
the left front service door.
Perform service on items at multiples of the original
requirement. For example: at 500 hours, also service
those items (if applicable) listed under 250 hours, 100
hours, 50 hours, and 10 hours or daily.
1— Periodic Maintenance Chart
TX1216759 —UN—14JUN16
Periodic Maintenance Chart
Check the Hour Meter Regularly
NOTE: Hour meter display is located in the upper
right corner of the monitor.
Hour meter (1) displays total machine operation hours.
Use the hour meter to determine when machine needs
periodic maintenance.
Turn key to the ON position to view the default screen
and the hour meter.
Intervals on the periodic maintenance chart are for
operating in normal conditions. If operating the machine in
severe conditions, machine should be serviced at shorter
intervals.
TX1160747A —UN—15MAY14
Hour Meter
1— Hour Meter
3-2-1
112321
PN=193
Maintenance—Periodic Maintenance
KR46761,0001149 -19-26APR16-1/1
Prepare Machine for Maintenance
Before performing maintenance procedures in the
following chapters and before leaving operator's seat,
park machine as described below unless another position
is specied in the procedure.
1. Park machine on a level surface.
2. Lower equipment to the ground.
3. Turn auto-idle switch (1) to the A/I OFF position.
IMPORTANT: Turbocharger can be damaged
if procedure to shut down engine is
not done properly.
4. Run engine with engine speed dial (2) at 1/3 position
without load for 2 minutes.
5. Turn engine speed dial to slow idle position.
6. Turn key switch (3) to the OFF position. Remove key
from switch.
7. Place pilot shutoff lever (4) to locked (UP) position.
IMPORTANT: Avoid machine damage. After
turning key switch to OFF position, only turn
battery disconnect switch to OFF position when
indicator light (if equipped) no longer illuminates.
8. Turn battery disconnect switch to the OFF position.
See Battery Disconnect Switch. (Section 2-3.)
1— Auto-Idle Switch
2— Engine Speed Dial
3— Key Switch
4— Pilot Shutoff Lever
TX1087012A —UN—18JAN11
Switch Panel
4
TX1214198 —UN—12APR16
Pilot Shutoff Lever (unlocked position shown)
3-2-2
112321
PN=194
Maintenance—Periodic Maintenance
KR46761,0001376 -19-22SEP16-1/1
Open Access Doors for Service
TX1223465 —UN—14SEP16
Access Doors—Rear Entry Cab
TX1223464 —UN—14SEP16
Access Doors—Side Entry Cab
In order to open left rear service door (2), the left front
service door (1) must be opened.
To hold doors open, remove rod (5) from stored position
(6) and insert in tab (7).
1— Left Front Service Door
2— Left Rear Service Door
3— Right Front Service Door
4— Right Rear Service Door
5— Rod
6— Stored Position
7— Tab
TX1217572 —UN—16JUN16
Access Door Hold
3-2-3
112321
PN=195
Maintenance—Periodic Maintenance
KR46761,0001375 -19-25OCT16-1/1
Open Engine Cover for Service
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from
cover closing. Ensure cover is secured
in the open position.
NOTE: The terms left engine cover (1) and right engine
cover (2) apply when the operator is standing on the
engine platform and facing the rear of the machine.
NOTE: There is an optional engine cover light (6) under the
right engine cover for the operator’s convenience.
In order to open left engine cover (1), the right engine
cover (2) must be opened.
1. Release latches (3).
2. Pull open latches to unlock engine covers.
3. Raise the covers until the end of the bars (4) are
securely locked into catches (5).
1— Left Engine Cover
2— Right Engine Cover
3— Latch (3 used)
4— Bar (2 used)
5— Catch (2 used)
6— Engine Cover Light (if
equipped)
TX1223400 —UN—23SEP16
Closed Position
TX1223403 —UN—25OCT16
Open Position
3-2-4
112321
PN=196
Maintenance—Periodic Maintenance
KR46761,000114A -19-10NOV16-1/1
KR46761,0001381 -19-19SEP16-1/1
Cab Tilting Procedure—Rear Entry Cab Only
Lowering Cab for Transport
1. Remove or secure any loose objects inside the cab.
2. Turn key switch to OFF position and close cab door.
3. Open cab service door (1).
4. Remove cab riser hold-down bolts (2) and place in
storage slots (4) on the frame.
5. Close cab service door.
6. Open left rear service door to access the cab tilt switch
(3).
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from crushing
or falling objects. Clear area of all bystanders
before operating the cab tilt switch.
7. Press and hold cab tilt switch in the LOWER position
to lower the cab and riser. When the tether cable is
taut, release switch.
8. Close service door.
Raising Cab for Operation
1. Open left rear service door to access the cab tilt switch.
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from crushing
or falling objects. Clear area of all bystanders
before operating the cab tilt switch.
2. Press and hold cab tilt switch in the RAISE position
to raise the cab and riser.
3. Open cab service door.
4. Install cab riser hold-down bolts and tighten to
specication.
Specication
Cab Riser Hold-Down
Bolts—Torque..............................................................................678 N·m
500 lb·ft
5. Close service doors.
TX1213788 —UN—26APR16
Cab Service Door
TX1213785 —UN—31MAY16
Cab Riser Hold-Down Bolts
TX1213786 —UN—26APR16
Cab Tilt Switch
1— Cab Service Door
2— Cab Riser Hold-Down Bolt
(4 used)
3— Cab Tilt Switch
4— Storage Slot (4 used)
Fuel Tank
CAUTION: Fuel is ammable and may ignite if
spilled on hot engine. To prevent injury, handle
fuel carefully. If engine is hot or running, DO NOT
ll the fuel tank. DO NOT smoke while lling
fuel tank or working on fuel system.
IMPORTANT: Avoid engine damage. If machine has
run out of fuel, engine will not start. Contact an
authorized Hitachi dealer for instructions.
To avoid condensation, ll the fuel tank at the end of each
work day. Shut off engine before lling.
3-2-5
112321
PN=197
Maintenance—Periodic Maintenance
KR46761,000140F -19-03NOV16-1/1
Fluid Analysis Program Test Kits and 3-Way
Coolant Test Kit
Fluid Analysis Program Test Kits and the 3-Way Coolant
Test Kit are John Deere uid sampling products to help you
monitor machine maintenance and system condition. The
objective of a uid sampling program is to ensure machine
availability when you need it and to reduce repair costs by
identifying potential problems before they become critical.
Engine, hydraulic, power train, and coolant samples
should be taken from each system on a periodic basis,
before a lter or uid change interval. Certain systems
require more frequent sampling. Consult an authorized
Hitachi dealer on a maintenance program for your specic
application. An authorized Hitachi dealer has the sampling
products and expertise to assist you in lowering your
overall operating costs through uid sampling.
TX1003513A —UN—20FEB06
3-2-6
112321
PN=198
Maintenance—Periodic Maintenance
Continued on next page JL41294,000036F -19-02SEP21-1/2
Service Intervals
Model: PIN/Serial Number:
Hour Meter Reading:
SERVICE INTERVALS
Service machine at intervals shown on this chart. Also, perform service on items at multiples of the original requirement. For example: at 500
hours, also service those items (if applicable) listed under 250 hours, 100 hours, 50 hours, and 10 hours or daily.
FLUID SAMPLING
Fluid samples should be taken from each system at its recommended change interval prior to actually draining the uid. Regular oil sampling will
extend the operational life of the machine.
As Required
□ Remove and clean fuel tank inlet screen □ Clean rear camera lens (if equipped)
□ Check and adjust track sag □ Clean radiator air inlet screens
□ Check windshield washer uid level (if equipped) □ Clean auxiliary hydraulic cooler screen (if equipped)
□ Lubricate door hinges
□ Clean and tighten battery terminals
□ Clean or replace diesel exhaust uid (DEF) tank ll screen □ Replace high-pressure supply lter (if equipped)
□ Clean cab fresh air and cab recirculating air lters □ Replace case drain lter (if equipped)
Every 10 Hours or Daily
□ Check engine oil level □ Drain water and sediment from fuel tank sump
□ Check engine coolant level □ Lubricate front end pin joints
□ Check hydraulic tank oil level □ Lubricate working tool pivots (if equipped)
□ Drain primary fuel lter and water separator
Initial Service—50 Hours
1
□ Check and adjust fan belt tension
Every 50 Hours or Weekly
□ Lubricate swing bearing
Every 100 Hours
□ Inspect and re-torque track hardware
Every 250 Hours
□ Check swing gear case oil level □ Check travel gear case oil level
□ Check pump drive gear case oil level □ Clean primary air cleaner element
□ Check hybrid battery electrolyte level (if equipped) □ Drain water and sediment from hydraulic tank
□ Check and adjust fan belt tension
□ Take engine oil sample
Every 500 Hours
□ Lubricate swing bearing gear □ Take hydraulic oil sample
□ Drain and rell engine oil and replace lter
□ Take swing gear case oil sample
□ Check air intake hoses
□ Take travel gear case oil sample
3-2-7
112321
PN=199
Maintenance—Periodic Maintenance
JL41294,000036F -19-02SEP21-2/2
□ Check cab tilt oil level (rear entry cab only)
□ Take pump drive gear case oil sample
□ Clean radiator, oil cooler, charge air cooler, and fuel cooler □ Take cab tilt oil sample (rear entry cab only)
□ Clean cooler inlet screen
□ Take engine coolant sample
□ Take diesel fuel sample
Every 1000 Hours
□ Drain and rell swing gear case oil □ Replace hydraulic tank oil lter
□ Drain and rell pump drive gear case oil □ Replace pilot oil lter
□ Replace primary fuel lter and water separator □ Check and adjust engine valve lash
□ Replace nal fuel lter □ Check coolant condition
□ Replace fuel tank breather
Every 1500 Hours
□ Replace air cleaner elements
Every 2000 Hours
□ Drain and rell travel gear case oil
Every 4000 Hours
□ Drain, ush, and rell engine cooling system
Every 4500 Hours
□ Replace diesel exhaust uid (DEF) dosing unit lter
Every 5000 Hours
□ Drain and rell hydraulic tank oil and clean suction screen
□ Replace hydraulic tank cap breather element
□ Drain and rell cab tilt oil (rear entry cab only)
1
Perform initial service once after the rst 50 hours of operation and every 250 hours thereafter.
3-2-8
112321
PN=200
Maintenance—Periodic Maintenance
Continued on next page JL41294,0000371 -19-02SEP21-1/2
Required Parts
REQUIRED PARTS
Ensure machine performance and availability; use only genuine Hitachi parts. Verify that part numbers are current and that any
associated parts are also on hand, i.e., lter O-rings.
Description
Every
250
Hours
Every
500
Hours
Every
1000
Hours
Every
1500
Hours
Every
2000
Hours
Every
4000
Hours
Every
4500
Hours
Every
5000
Hours
Engine Oil Filter
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Primary Fuel Filter Element 1 1 1 1
Final Fuel Filter Element 1 1 1 1
Hydraulic Tank Oil Filter Element
1 1 1 1
Pilot Oil Filter Element
1 1 1 1
Engine Rocker Arm Cover Gasket
1 1 1 1
Fuel Tank Breather 1 1 1 1
Primary Air Filter Element 1 1
Secondary Air Filter Element
1 1
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Dosing Unit Filter
1
Hydraulic Tank Cap Breather Element
1
Cab Fresh Air Filter
As Required
Cab Recirculating Air Filter
As Required
Fan Belt As Required
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Tank Fill Screen
As Required
High-Pressure Supply Filter (if equipped)
As Required
Case Drain Filter (if equipped)
As Required
Diesel Engine Oil
1
26.0 L
(6.9 gal)
26.0 L
(6.9 gal)
26.0 L
(6.9 gal)
26.0 L
(6.9 gal)
26.0 L
(6.9 gal)
26.0 L
(6.9 gal)
26.0 L
(6.9 gal)
Pump Drive Gear Case Oil
1
1.0 L
(1.1 qt)
1.0 L
(1.1 qt)
1.0 L
(1.1 qt)
1.0 L
(1.1 qt)
API GL-5 Swing Gear Case Oil
1
11.8 L
(3.1 gal)
11.8 L
(3.1 gal)
11.8 L
(3.1 gal)
11.8 L
(3.1 gal)
API GL-5 Travel Gear Case Oil
1
17.0 L
(4.4 gal)
17.0 L
(4.4 gal)
Diesel Engine Coolant
34.0 L
(9.0 gal)
Hitachi SUPER EX 46HN Hydraulic Oil
1
147.6 L
(39.0
gal)
John Deere Hydrau™ XR Cab Tilt Oil
1
—Rear
Entry Cab Only
3.3 L
(3.4 qt)
Fluid Analysis Kits
2
Diesel Engine Oil
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Hydraulic Oil
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Travel Gear Case Oil
2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Swing Gear Case Oil
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Pump Drive Gear Case Oil
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Cab Tilt Oil—Rear Entry Cab Only
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Diesel Fuel 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
3-2-9
112321
PN=201
Maintenance—Periodic Maintenance
JL41294,0000371 -19-02SEP21-2/2
REQUIRED PARTS
Ensure machine performance and availability; use only genuine Hitachi parts. Verify that part numbers are current and that any
associated parts are also on hand, i.e., lter O-rings.
Description
Every
250
Hours
Every
500
Hours
Every
1000
Hours
Every
1500
Hours
Every
2000
Hours
Every
4000
Hours
Every
4500
Hours
Every
5000
Hours
Engine Coolant
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1
For recommended oil viscosities based on operating temperatures, see Maintenance—Machine. (Section 3-1.)
2
Based on uid analysis results, intervals may need to be adjusted for operating conditions. See an authorized Hitachi dealer.
Hydrau is a trademark of Deere & Company
3-2-10
112321
PN=202
Maintenance—As Required
KR46761,0001328 -19-18OCT16-1/1
Clean or Replace Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)
Tank Fill Screen
NOTE: If diesel exhaust uid (DEF) ll slows, tank ll
screen (3) needs to be cleaned.
1. On right side of machine, at the bottom of the steps,
open access door (1) to access diesel exhaust uid
(DEF) tank cap (2).
CAUTION: Avoid contact with eyes. If there
is contact, immediately ush eyes with large
amounts of water for a minimum of 15 minutes.
Reference the materials safety data sheet
(MSDS) for additional information.
IMPORTANT: If DEF is spilled or contacts any surface
other than the storage tank, immediately clean
the surface with clear water. DEF is corrosive to
painted and unpainted metallic surfaces and can
distort some plastic and rubber components.
Spilled DEF, if left to dry or if only wiped
away with a cloth, leaves a white residue.
Improperly cleaned DEF spill can interfere
with diagnosis of selective catalytic reduction
(SCR) system leakage problems.
2. Open DEF tank cap.
3. Turn lter retainer (4) clockwise until lter retainer
unlocks.
4. Pull lter retainer straight out of DEF tank.
5. Clean ll screen (3) with warm water to remove any
debris. Replace if ll screen does not come clean or
is damaged.
6. Install lter retainer into DEF tank.
7. Turn lter retainer counterclockwise until lter retainer
locks.
8. Close DEF tank cap and access door.
1— Access Door
2— Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)
Tank Cap
3— Fill Screen
4— Filter Retainer
TX1224233 —UN—17OCT16
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Tank
TX1224234 —UN—17OCT16
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Tank Filter Retainer and Fill Screen
3-3-2
112321
PN=204
Maintenance—As Required
Continued on next page KR46761,00010C5 -19-14SEP20-1/4
Clean Cab Fresh Air and Cab Recirculating
Air Filters
NOTE: Replacing air lters after every sixth cleaning
will keep quality air ow circulating throughout
the operator’s station.
Rear Entry Cab
Removing Cab Fresh Air Filter—Early Production
1. Loosen wing nuts (1) and remove cap screws (2)
below the cab door.
2. Remove cover (3) to access cab fresh air lter (4).
3. Squeeze tabs on each side of the lter to remove.
Removing Cab Fresh Air Filter—Late Production
1. Loosen wing nuts (5) below the cab door.
2. Remove cover (3) to access cab fresh air lter (4).
3. Squeeze tabs on each side of the lter to remove.
1— Wing Nut (2 used, early
production)
2— Cap Screw (4 used, early
production)
3— Cover
4— Cab Fresh Air Filter
5— Wing Nut (4 used, late
production)
TX1211663 —UN—08JUN16
Cab Fresh Air Filter Cover (early production)
TX1302977A —UN—10SEP20
Cab Fresh Air Filter Cover (late production)
TX1211664 —UN—25FEB16
Cab Fresh Air Filter
3-3-3
112321
PN=205
Maintenance—As Required
Continued on next page KR46761,00010C5 -19-14SEP20-2/4
Removing Cab Recirculating Air Filter
TX1222364 —UN—31AUG16
Cab Service Door
TX1211685 —UN—26FEB16
Cab Recirculating Air Filter Cover
TX1211687 —UN—26FEB16
Cab Recirculating Air Filter
1— Cab Service Door
2— Cap Screw (4 used)
3— Latch
4— Cover
5— Cab Recirculating Air Filter
1. Open cab service door (1).
2. Remove cap screws (2) and release latch (3).
3. Remove cover (4) to access cab recirculating air lter
(5).
4. Squeeze tabs on each side of the lter to remove.
Cleaning Filters
3-3-4
112321
PN=206
Maintenance—As Required
Continued on next page KR46761,00010C5 -19-14SEP20-3/4
CAUTION: Avoid injury from ying debris. Clear
area of bystanders and wear personal protection
equipment, including eye protection. Reduce
compressed air to less than 196 kPa (1.96 bar)
(28.4 psi) when using for cleaning purposes.
Clean lters using one of the following methods:
•
Use compressed air opposite to the normal air ow.
•
Wash lters with water. Soak the lters in warm, soapy
water for 5 minutes. Flush lter. Allow lter to dry before
installing.
Installing Cab Fresh Air Filter—Early Production
1. Install lter.
2. Install cover and cap screws. Tighten wing nuts.
Installing Cab Fresh Air Filter—Late Production
1. Install lter.
2. Install cover. Tighten wing nuts.
Installing Cab Recirculating Air Filter
1. Install lter.
2. Install cover and cap screws and secure latch.
3. Close cab service door.
3-3-5
112321
PN=207
Maintenance—As Required
KR46761,00010C5 -19-14SEP20-4/4
Side Entry Cab
Removing Cab Fresh Air Filter
1. On the left side of the cab, remove cap screws (1).
2. Remove cover (2) to access cab fresh air lter (3).
3. Squeeze tabs on each side of the lter to remove.
Removing Cab Recirculating Air Filter
1. Move operator's seat forward to access cab
recirculating air lter (4) located under the rear deck.
2. Squeeze tabs on each side of the lter to remove.
Cleaning Filters:
CAUTION: Avoid injury from ying debris. Clear
area of bystanders and wear personal protection
equipment, including eye protection. Reduce
compressed air to less than 196 kPa (1.96 bar)
(28.4 psi) when using for cleaning purposes.
Clean lters using one of the following methods:
•
Use compressed air opposite to the normal air ow.
•
Wash lters with water. Soak the lters in warm, soapy
water for 5 minutes. Flush lter. Allow lter to dry before
installing.
Cab Fresh Air Filter Installation
1. Install lter.
2. Install cover and cap screws.
Cab Recirculating Air Filter Installation
1. Install lter.
2. Move operator’s seat into operating position.
1— Cap Screw (4 used)
2— Cover
3— Cab Fresh Air Filter
4— Cab Recirculating Air Filter
TX1211665 —UN—25FEB16
Cab Fresh Air Filter Cover
TX1211666 —UN—25FEB16
Cab Fresh Air Filter
TX1211690 —UN—26FEB16
Cab Recirculating Air Filter
3-3-6
112321
PN=208
Maintenance—As Required
Continued on next page KR46761,000122A -19-16JUN16-1/2
Check and Adjust Track Sag
Check Track Sag
1. Swing upperstructure 90° and lower attachment to
raise track off ground. Position machine as shown.
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from
unexpected machine movement. Place blocks
under machine frame to support machine
while measuring track sag.
2. Place blocks under machine frame to support machine.
3. Rotate track forward two full rotations and then in
reverse two full rotations.
4. Measure distance (1) at middle track roller from bottom
of track frame to top surface of track shoe.
Specication
Track Sag—Distance..........................................................330—370 mm
13—15 in
1— Distance
T122816 —UN—29JUL99
Forestry Excavator Machine Position
TX1041013 —UN—24APR08
Processor Machine Position
TX1213260 —UN—29MAR16
Track Sag Measurement
3-3-7
112321
PN=209
Maintenance—As Required
KR46761,000122A -19-16JUN16-2/2
KR46761,00012F8 -19-26JUL16-1/1
Adjust Track Sag
IMPORTANT: Prevent possible damage to track
components. DO NOT use the grease tting (1)
on the track adjusting cylinder for lubrication.
Use this tting ONLY for track adjustment.
1. To tighten track, connect a grease gun to grease tting
(1) (located through access hole [4] in track frame).
Add grease until sag is within recommended limits.
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from
high-pressure grease. DO NOT remove
grease tting from nut (2).
2. To loosen, slowly turn nut (2) counterclockwise; grease
will escape through the bleed hole (3).
3. When amount of track sag is satisfactory, turn nut
clockwise to tighten.
Specication
Nut—Torque................................................................................147 N·m
108 lb·ft
1— Grease Fitting
2— Nut
3— Bleed Hole
4— Access Hole
T135187 —UN—06NOV00
Grease Fitting
T135188 —UN—06NOV00
Access Hole
Clean Rear Camera Lens—If Equipped
CAUTION: Avoid personal injury. DO NOT
climb on machine when inspecting or cleaning
rear camera lens (1).
IMPORTANT: Prevent possible damage to the camera
lens surface. The camera lens surface is a resin
product. Lightly wipe the surface with a wet,
clean cloth. Never use an organic solvent.
Inspect rear camera lens (1) for any accumulation of dirt,
mud, snow, ice, or debris.
Clean lens as necessary.
TX1220009 —UN—26JUL16
Rear Camera
1— Rear Camera Lens
3-3-8
112321
PN=210
Maintenance—As Required
KR46761,00013A5 -19-23AUG18-1/2
KR46761,00013A5 -19-23AUG18-2/2
Clean Radiator Air Inlet Screens
Early Production
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from rotating
fan and ying debris. Shut off engine before
opening door. Avoid rotating fan and fan blast.
Clear area of bystanders and wear personal
protection equipment, including eye protection.
Reduce compressed air to less than 196 kPa (1.96
bar) (28.4 psi) when using for cleaning purposes.
1. Open left rear service door to access radiator air inlet
screens (1).
2. Attach an air wand to an air compressor and blow dirt
and debris from radiator air inlet screens.
3. Close service door.
TX1224060 —UN—22SEP16
Radiator Air Inlet Screens (early production)
1— Radiator Air Inlet Screen (3
used)
Late Production
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from rotating
fan and ying debris. Shut off engine before
opening door. Avoid rotating fan and fan blast.
Clear area of bystanders and wear personal
protection equipment, including eye protection.
Reduce compressed air to less than 196 kPa (1.96
bar) (28.4 psi) when using for cleaning purposes.
1. Open left rear service door to access radiator air inlet
screen (1).
2. Release screen latches (2) to remove screen.
3. Attach an air wand to an air compressor and blow dirt
and debris from radiator air inlet screen and service
door frame.
4. Install air inlet screen and connect screen latches.
5. Close service door.
TX1261729A —UN—17AUG18
Radiator Air Inlet Screen (late production)
1— Radiator Air Inlet Screen 2— Screen Latch (2 used)
3-3-9
112321
PN=211
Maintenance—As Required
KR46761,00013A6 -19-22SEP16-1/1
KR46761,0001168 -19-23MAY16-1/1
Clean Auxiliary Hydraulic Cooler Screen—If
Equipped
CAUTION: Clear area of bystanders and wear
personal protection equipment, including
eye protection. Reduce compressed air to
less than 196 kPa (1.96 bar) (28.4 psi) when
using for cleaning purposes.
1. Remove cap screws (1) and lift auxiliary hydraulic
cooler screen (2) to remove.
2. Attach an air wand to an air compressor and blow out
dirt and debris from auxiliary hydraulic cooler screen.
3. Install auxiliary hydraulic cooler screen and cap
screws.
1— Cap Screw (4 used) 2— Auxiliary Hydraulic Cooler
Screen
TX1224061 —UN—22SEP16
Auxiliary Hydraulic Cooler Screen
Lubricate Door Hinges
Lubricate all door hinge grease ttings until grease
escapes at joints. See Track Adjuster, Working Tool
Pivot, Swing Bearing, and Swing Bearing Gear Grease.
(Section 3-1.)
TX1216139 —UN—23MAY16
Door Hinge Grease Fitting
3-3-10
112321
PN=212
Maintenance—As Required
KR46761,00013A7 -19-19DEC16-1/1
TX,55,FF765 -19-30NOV16-1/1
Check Windshield Washer Fluid Level—If
Equipped
1. Open left rear service door to access windshield
washer uid bottle (1).
NOTE: All-season windshield washer uid is
recommended during the winter season.
2. Check uid level in windshield washer uid bottle and
rell as required.
3. Close service door.
1— Windshield Washer Fluid
Bottle
TX1224334 —UN—22SEP16
Windshield Washer Fluid Bottle
Clean and Tighten Battery Terminals
CAUTION: Battery gas can explode. Keep sparks
and ames away from batteries. Always remove
grounded (-) battery clamp rst and replace it last.
1. Disconnect battery clamps, grounded clamp rst.
2. Clean terminal (A) and clamp with a stiff brush.
3. Apply lubricating grease (B) where battery terminal
meets top of battery case to prevent grease from
escaping.
4. Install and tighten clamps, grounded clamp last.
T6758AA —UN—21OCT88
Battery Terminal
A—Terminal
B—Lubricating Grease
3-3-11
112321
PN=213
Maintenance—As Required
JL41294,0000367 -19-26AUG21-1/1
Replace High-Pressure Supply Filter—If
Equipped
1. Prepare machine for maintenance. See Prepare
Machine for Maintenance. (Section 3-2.)
2. Depressurize the hydraulic system. See Drain and
Rell Hydraulic Tank Oil and Clean Suction Screen.
(Section 3-15.)
3. Remove cap screws (1) and cover (2).
4. Open drain plug (4), and drain oil into a suitable
container. Dispose of waste properly.
5. Turn lter bowl (3) counterclockwise, and remove from
head assembly (5).
6. Remove lter element from inside of bowl, and inspect
the surface for contamination.
7. Discard lter element.
8. Inspect lter head assembly for damage. Replace as
necessary.
9. Lubricate O-ring seal, and install new lter element.
10. Ensure the threads of the lter bowl and head
assembly are clean and dry.
11. Lightly lubricate the threads of the lter bowl, and
screw the lter bowl on to the head assembly.
12. Close drain plug.
13. Install cover and cap screws.
14. Bleed air from hydraulic system. See Bleed Hydraulic
System. (Section 4-1.)
TX1316153A —UN—26AUG21
Processor Boom Hydraulic Lines
TX1316154A —UN—26AUG21
High-Pressure Supply Filter and Case Drain Filter
1— Cap Screw (4 used)
2— Cover
3— Filter Bowl
4— Drain Plug
5— Head Assembly
3-3-12
112321
PN=214
Maintenance—As Required
JL41294,0000368 -19-26AUG21-1/1
Replace Case Drain Filter—If Equipped
1. Prepare machine for maintenance. See Prepare
Machine for Maintenance. (Section 3-2.)
2. Depressurize the hydraulic system. See Drain and
Rell Hydraulic Tank Oil and Clean Suction Screen.
(Section 3-15.)
3. Remove cap screws (1) and cover (2).
4. Turn lter bowl (3) counterclockwise, and remove from
head assembly (4).
5. Remove lter element from inside of bowl, and inspect
the surface for contamination.
6. Discard lter element.
7. Inspect lter head assembly for possible damage.
Replace as necessary.
8. Lubricate O-ring seal, and install new lter element.
9. Lightly lubricate the threads of the lter bowl and
O-ring, and screw the lter bowl into the head
assembly.
10. Install cover and cap screws.
11. Bleed air from hydraulic system. See Bleed Hydraulic
System. (Section 4-1.)
1— Cap Screw (4 used)
2— Cover
3— Filter Bowl
4— Head Assembly
TX1316153A —UN—26AUG21
Processor Boom Hydraulic Lines
TX1316155A —UN—26AUG21
High-Pressure Supply Filter and Case Drain Filter
3-3-13
112321
PN=215
Maintenance—Every 10 Hours or Daily
KR46761,00013A8 -19-27OCT16-1/1
Check Engine Oil Level
IMPORTANT: Prevent engine damage. DO NOT run
engine when oil level is below the ADD mark.
The most accurate oil level reading is obtained when the
engine is cold before starting the engine for the day’s
operation.
1. Park machine on a level surface.
IMPORTANT: Turbocharger can be damaged
if procedure to shut down engine is
not done properly.
2. Run engine at slow idle speed without load for 5
minutes.
3. Shut off engine and allow oil to drain into oil pan for
10 minutes.
4. Open engine cover to access engine.
5. Make sure dipstick (1) is fully seated.
6. Remove dipstick to check oil level.
BEFORE THE ENGINE IS STARTED: The engine
is full when oil level is in the cross-hatch area (3). It
is acceptable to run the engine when the oil level is
above the ADD mark.
AFTER THE ENGINE HAS BEEN RUN: Allow the oil
to drain into the oil pan for 10 minutes before checking
the oil level. Ten minutes after shutdown, the engine
oil level must be above the ADD mark.
7. If oil level is below ADD mark, add oil as necessary.
See Diesel Engine Oil—Final Tier 4 and Stage IV.
(Section 3-1.)
IMPORTANT: Avoid engine damage. Make sure that
area around and above engine oil ller cap (2) is
clean and clear of debris before removing cap.
TX1224394 —UN—05OCT16
Engine Oil Dipstick and Filler Cap
FULL
3
ADD
T216546 —UN—29NOV05
Cross-Hatch Area
1— Dipstick
2— Filler Cap
3— Cross-Hatch Area
8. If necessary, remove ller cap (2) to add oil.
9. Install ller cap and dipstick.
10. Close engine cover.
3-4-1
112321
PN=216
Maintenance—Every 10 Hours or Daily
KR46761,00013A9 -19-02NOV16-1/1
Check Engine Coolant Level
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from hot,
spraying uids. Shut off engine. Remove ller
cap only when cool enough to touch with bare
hands. Slowly loosen cap to relieve pressure
before removing completely.
IMPORTANT: Avoid machine damage. Mixing different
coolant types can degrade coolant and machine
performance. Avoid mixing different brands
or types of coolant. Coolant manufacturers
engineer their coolants to meet certain
specications and performance requirements.
1. Open engine cover and check coolant level in surge
tank (1).
2. With engine cold, coolant level must be between MIN
COLD and MAX COLD marks on surge tank.
3. If coolant is below MIN COLD mark, add coolant to
surge tank. See Diesel Engine Coolant. (Section 3-1.)
4. If surge tank is empty, check for leaks in tank, hoses,
and radiator. Repair as required, then rell with
coolant.
5. Close engine cover.
1— Surge Tank
TS281 —UN—15APR13
Pressurized Fluids
TX1224396 —UN—05OCT16
Surge Tank
3-4-2
112321
PN=217
Maintenance—Every 10 Hours or Daily
Continued on next page KR46761,000138B -19-14DEC16-1/3
Check Hydraulic Tank Oil Level
IMPORTANT: Prevent damage to hydraulic system
components. DO NOT run engine without
oil in hydraulic tank.
Avoid machine damage. Mixing different oil
types can degrade lubricant and machine
performance. Oil manufacturers engineer
their oils to meet certain specications and
performance requirements.
Avoid machine damage. This excavator is
factory lled with Super EX 46HN extended
life zinc-free hydraulic oil. Avoid servicing
this excavator with products that do not meet
this specication. If oils have been mixed or if
alternate service oils are desired, the complete
hydraulic system needs to be completely
ushed by an authorized dealer.
1. Park machine on a level surface, and position machine
with arm cylinder fully retracted and bucket cylinder (if
equipped) fully extended.
IMPORTANT: Turbocharger can be damaged
if procedure to shut down engine is
not done properly.
2. Run engine at slow idle speed without load for 5
minutes.
3. Stop engine.
4. Open right front service door to access hydraulic oil
level gauge (1) on hydraulic tank.
TX1217687 —UN—16JUN16
Hydraulic Oil Level Sight Gauge
1— Hydraulic Oil Level Gauge
5. Check hydraulic oil level gauge on hydraulic tank. Oil
must be between marks on window.
3-4-3
112321
PN=218
Maintenance—Every 10 Hours or Daily
Continued on next page KR46761,000138B -19-14DEC16-2/3
6. If necessary, add oil.
To add oil:
a. Insert 4 mm hex wrench (3) into hole (4) and turn
counterclockwise to release locking pin.
CAUTION: Avoid personal injury from
high-pressure uid. High-pressure release
of oil from pressurized system can cause
serious burns or penetrating injury. Relieve
pressure by slowly turning hydraulic tank cap
counterclockwise a few degrees.
To prevent possible burn injury from hot
hydraulic oil, wait for hydraulic oil to cool
before starting work.
b. Slowly turn hydraulic tank cap (2) counterclockwise
a few degrees to relieve pressure. Remove cap.
c. Add oil until it is between marks on sight glass. See
Hydraulic Oil. (Section 3-1.)
d. Install hydraulic tank cap to case assembly (5) using
aligning marks (6) and turning cap clockwise to lock
position.
7. Close service door.
2— Hydraulic Tank Cap
3— Hex Wrench
4— Hole
5— Case Assembly
6— Aligning Mark (2 used)
TS281 —UN—15APR13
Pressurized Fluids
TX1217689 —UN—16JUN16
Hydraulic Tank
2
5
4
3
6
TX1217691 —UN—20JUN16
Hydraulic Tank Cap
3-4-4
112321
PN=219
Maintenance—Every 10 Hours or Daily
KR46761,000138B -19-14DEC16-3/3
Fill Procedure for Hydraulic Oil Transfer
Pump—If Equipped
1. Open right front service door to access the hydraulic
oil transfer pump.
2. Insert 4 mm hex wrench (2) into hole (3) and turn
counterclockwise to release locking pin.
CAUTION: Avoid personal injury from
high-pressure uid. High-pressure release
of oil from pressurized system can cause
serious burns or penetrating injury. Relieve
pressure by slowly turning hydraulic tank cap
(1) counterclockwise a few degrees.
To prevent possible burn injury from hot
hydraulic oil, wait for hydraulic oil to cool
before starting work.
3. Slowly turn hydraulic tank cap (1) counterclockwise a
few degrees to relieve pressure.
4. Place transfer pump hose (6) in hydraulic oil supply
container.
IMPORTANT: Prevent possible machine damage.
The hydraulic oil transfer pump is intended
only for topping off the hydraulic tank. Only
run for 8 minutes maximum.
5. Press and hold transfer pump switch (7) to run the
hydraulic oil transfer pump and to ll the tank with
fresh oil. See Hydraulic Oil. (Section 3-1.)
6. Release transfer pump switch when oil is between
marks on sight glass.
7. Return transfer pump hose to stored position.
8. Install hydraulic tank cap to case assembly (4) using
aligning marks (5) and turning cap clockwise to lock
position.
9. Close service door.
1— Hydraulic Tank Cap
2— Hex Wrench
3— Hole
4— Case Assembly
5— Aligning Mark (2 used)
6— Transfer Pump Hose
7— Transfer Pump Switch
TX1217817 —UN—20JUN16
Hydraulic Tank
1
4
3
2
5
TX1217692 —UN—22JUN16
Hydraulic Tank Cap
TX1224461 —UN—26SEP16
Hydraulic Oil Transfer Pump
3-4-5
112321
PN=220
Maintenance—Every 10 Hours or Daily
KR46761,00013AB -19-01DEC16-1/1
KR46761,00013AC -19-18OCT16-1/1
Drain Water and Sediment From Fuel Tank
Sump
1. Park machine on a level surface. Rotate
upperstructure 90° for easier access.
IMPORTANT: Turbocharger can be damaged
if procedure to shut down engine is
not done properly.
2. Run engine at slow idle speed without load for 5
minutes.
3. Stop engine.
4. Remove fuel tank ll cap.
5. Open right rear service door to access drain valve (1)
for the fuel tank.
6. Open drain valve for several seconds to drain water
and sediment into a suitable container. Dispose of
waste properly. Close drain valve.
TX1224475 —UN—26SEP16
Drain Valve
1— Drain Valve
7. Close service door and install fuel tank ll cap.
Drain Primary Fuel Filter and Water Separator
1. Open right rear service door to access primary fuel
lter and water separator (1).
2. Open drain valve (2) to extract water from fuel system.
Drain uid until water and sediment are removed into
suitable container. Dispose of waste properly.
3. Close drain valve.
4. Prime fuel system and bleed air. See Bleed Fuel
System. (Section 4-1.)
5. Close service door.
1— Primary Fuel Filter and
Water Separator
2— Drain Valve
TX1224477 —UN—13OCT16
Primary Fuel Filter and Water Separator
3-4-6
112321
PN=221
Maintenance—Every 10 Hours or Daily
Continued on next page KR46761,0001233 -19-14FEB17-1/2
Lubricate Front End Pin Joints
Forestry Excavator
TX1211143 —UN—01MAR16
Four Points
TX1211145 —UN—18FEB16
Five Points
TX1211144 —UN—18FEB16
Five Points
TX1211151 —UN—18FEB16
Two Points
Lubricate front end pin joints (16 points) until grease
escapes from joints. See Track Adjuster, Working Tool
Pivot, Swing Bearing, and Swing Bearing Gear Grease.
(Section 3-1.)
Lubricate every 4 hours for rst 20 hours of operation,
then every 10 hours thereafter.
3-4-7
112321
PN=222
Maintenance—Every 10 Hours or Daily
KR46761,0001233 -19-14FEB17-2/2
Processor
TX1211144 —UN—18FEB16
Five Points
TX1211151 —UN—18FEB16
Two Points
NOTE: See attachment manufacturer’s manual for
recommended service.
Lubricate front end pin joints (10 points) until grease
escapes from joints. See Track Adjuster, Working Tool
Pivot, Swing Bearing, and Swing Bearing Gear Grease.
(Section 3-1.)
Lubricate every 4 hours for rst 20 hours of operation,
then every 10 hours thereafter.
TX1234098 —UN—14FEB17
Three Points
3-4-8
112321
PN=223
Maintenance—Every 10 Hours or Daily
KR46761,0001234 -19-30JUN16-1/1
Lubricate Working Tool Pivots—If Equipped
NOTE: See attachment manufacturer’s manual for
recommended service.
Lubricate working tool pivots (4 points) until grease
escapes from joints. See Track Adjuster, Working Tool
Pivot, Swing Bearing, and Swing Bearing Gear Grease.
(Section 3-1.)
Lubricate every 4 hours for rst 20 hours of operation,
then every 10 hours thereafter.
TX1211165 —UN—18FEB16
Forestry Excavator (four points)
3-4-9
112321
PN=224
Maintenance—Initial Service—50 Hours
KR46761,0001329 -19-26SEP16-1/1
Check and Adjust Fan Belt Tension
Perform this service at the rst 50 hours of operation and
then at 250-hour intervals thereafter.
Visually inspect the fan belt (1) for wear and correct
tension. Replace if necessary.
NOTE: After installing a new belt and operating the
engine for 3—5 minutes at slow idle speed,
the tension needs be adjusted to be sure that
the new belt is seated correctly.
1. Check fan belt tension by depressing the midpoint
between the fan pulley (3) and alternator pulley (2)
with thumb. Deection (5) must be within specication.
Specication
Fan Belt—Deection (5).............................................................5—6 mm
0.20—0.24 in
Fan Belt—Depressing
Force.................................................................................................98 N
10 kgf
22 lbf
2. If tension is not within specication, loosen cap screws
(6) on top and bottom of alternator (7).
3. Move alternator forward or backwards by turning
adjustment cap screw (8). Adjust until tension meets
specication.
4. Tighten cap screws on top and bottom of alternator.
1— Fan Belt
2— Alternator Pulley
3— Fan Pulley
4— Crank Pulley
5— Deection
6— Cap Screw (2 used)
7— Alternator
8— Adjustment Cap Screw
1
3
2
5
4
TX1224501 —UN—27SEP16
Fan Belt
6
6
8
7
TX1224503 —UN—27SEP16
Fan Belt Adjustment
3-5-1
112321
PN=225
Maintenance—Every 50 Hours or Weekly
KR46761,00010FF -19-04APR16-1/1
Lubricate Swing Bearing
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from
unexpected machine movement if controls are
moved by another person. Lubricating swing
bearing and rotating the upperstructure must be
done by one person. Before lubricating swing
bearing, clear the area of all bystanders.
1. Park machine on a level surface.
2. Lower attachment to the ground, stop the engine, and
pull pilot shutoff lever to locked (UP) position.
3. Lubricate swing bearing with 8 shots of grease at both
grease ttings.
4. Start engine. Move pilot shutoff lever to unlocked
(DOWN) position. Raise attachment several inches off
the ground and turn upperstructure 45°.
5. Lower attachment to the ground.
T134968 —UN—01NOV00
Swing Bearing
NOTE: It is not necessary to start the engine the last time.
6. Repeat steps 2—4 three times.
3-6-1
112321
PN=226
Maintenance—Every 100 Hours
KR46761,000123F -19-08MAY19-1/1
Inspect and Re-Torque Track Hardware
Each inspection and re-torquing should be documented
by completing a service report for each unit, placing a
copy of this report in the machine le, and forwarding a
copy to the manufacturer’s attention.
For shoes with missing or loose cap screws and nuts,
remove shoes and clean the mating surface of shoes
and links before replacing cap screws and nuts. The
cap screws must be replaced because they have been
stretched to yield previously.
IMPORTANT: Prevent possible machine damage.
Operating a machine with loose shoes can
cause the cap screws and holes in the shoes
and links to wear, making it difcult to keep
the shoes tight. Loose shoes can also cause
hardware malfunction and loss of shoes.
Improper track shoe cap screw torque will
result in serious damage to the undercarriage
components, shorter life expectancy, and
will void the manufacturer's warranty on the
undercarriage components.
Checking Track Shoe Hardware Torque
NOTE: This procedure is for checking the torque
specication on existing track shoe hardware.
1. Tighten cap screws in sequence to specication.
Specication
Cap Screw—Torque..................................................................1020 N·m
752 lb·ft
2. Cap screws that have turned have reduced tightness
and need to be re-torqued.
3. Check track shoe holes for wear or damage. Replace
as necessary.
Re-Torquing Track Shoe Hardware
NOTE: This procedure is for re-torquing existing track
hardware that was found loose during the Checking
Track Shoe Hardware Torque procedure.
1. Loosen cap screws.
2. Tighten cap screws in sequence to specication.
TX1255661 —UN—19APR18
Cap Screw Torque Sequence
Specication
Cap Screw—Initial
Torque.........................................................................................136 N·m
100 lb·ft
3. Re-torque cap screws in sequence to specication.
Specication
Cap Screw—Final
Torque............................................................ 550 N·m + 1/3 Turn (120°)
406 lb·ft + 1/3 Turn (120°)
Torquing Replacement Track Shoe Hardware
IMPORTANT: Prevent possible machine damage.
Clean shoe and link surfaces of dirt, paint,
and debris before installation.
NOTE: This procedure is for installing and torquing new
track shoe hardware to specication.
1. Clean shoe and link surfaces of dirt, paint, or debris.
2. Tighten cap screws in sequence to specication.
Specication
Cap Screw—Initial
Torque.........................................................................................136 N·m
100 lb·ft
3. Torque cap screws in sequence to specication.
Specication
Cap Screw—Final
Torque............................................................ 550 N·m + 1/3 Turn (120°)
406 lb·ft + 1/3 Turn (120°)
3-7-1
112321
PN=227
Maintenance—Every 250 Hours
KR46761,0000BF6 -19-20JUN16-1/1
Check Swing Gear Case Oil Level
1. Park machine on a level surface.
IMPORTANT: Turbocharger can be damaged
if procedure to shutdown engine is not
done properly.
2. Run engine at slow idle speed without load for 5
minutes.
3. Stop engine.
4. Remove dipstick (1). Wipe dipstick clean and replace
completely into tube.
5. Remove dipstick. Oil must be in the cross-hatch area
(3) on the dipstick.
6. If oil is needed, remove ller cap (2) and add oil.
See Swing Gear Case and Travel Gear Case Oils.
(Section 3-1.)
7. Check oil level.
8. Install ller cap.
1— Dipstick
2— Filler Cap
3— Dipstick Cross-Hatch Area
TX1156407A —UN—17MAR14
Swing Gear Case
FULL
3
ADD
T216546 —UN—29NOV05
Dipstick Cross-Hatch Area
3-8-1
112321
PN=228
Maintenance—Every 250 Hours
Continued on next page KR46761,00013AE -19-06DEC16-1/2
Drain Water and Sediment From Hydraulic
Tank
1. Park machine on a level surface. Rotate
upperstructure 90° for easier access.
2. Position machine with arm cylinder fully retracted and
bucket cylinder (if equipped) fully extended.
IMPORTANT: Turbocharger can be damaged
if procedure to shut down engine is
not done properly.
3. Run engine at slow idle speed without load for 5
minutes.
4. Stop engine.
5. Insert 4 mm hex wrench (2) into hole (3) and turn
counterclockwise to release locking pin.
CAUTION: Avoid personal injury from
high-pressure uid. High-pressure release
of oil from pressurized system can cause
serious burns or penetrating injury. Relieve
pressure by slowly turning hydraulic tank cap
(1) counterclockwise a few degrees.
To prevent possible burn injury from hot
hydraulic oil, wait for hydraulic oil to cool
before starting work.
6. Slowly turn hydraulic tank cap (1) counterclockwise a
few degrees to relieve pressure.
1— Hydraulic Tank Cap
2— Hex Wrench
3— Hole
4— Case Assembly
5— Aligning Mark (2 used)
TS281 —UN—15APR13
Pressurized Fluids
TX1217817 —UN—20JUN16
Hydraulic Tank
1
4
3
2
5
TX1217692 —UN—22JUN16
Hydraulic Tank Cap
3-8-2
112321
PN=229
Maintenance—Every 250 Hours
KR46761,00013AE -19-06DEC16-2/2
7. Underneath right side of machine, remove cap screws
(6) and access cover (7) to access drain valve cap
screw (8).
8. After oil is cool, loosen drain valve cap screw for
several seconds to drain water and sediment into
a container. Do not remove cap screw completely.
Dispose of waste properly.
9. Tighten drain valve cap screw.
10. Install hydraulic tank cap (1) to case assembly (4)
using aligning marks (5) and turning cap clockwise
to lock position.
11. Check hydraulic oil level. See Check Hydraulic Tank
Oil Level. (Section 3-4.)
12. Install access cover and cap screws.
1— Hydraulic Tank Cap
2— Hex Wrench
3— Hole
4— Case Assembly
5— Aligning Mark (2 used)
6— Cap Screw (4 used)
7— Access Cover
8— Drain Valve Cap Screw
TX1217818 —UN—20JUN16
Access Cover (view from under machine)
TX1224584 —UN—27SEP16
Drain Valve Cap Screw (view from under machine)
1
4
3
2
5
TX1217692 —UN—22JUN16
Hydraulic Tank Cap
3-8-3
112321
PN=230
Maintenance—Every 250 Hours
KR46761,0001245 -19-20JUN16-1/1
Check Pump Drive Gear Case Oil Level
1. Park machine on a level surface.
IMPORTANT: Turbocharger can be damaged
if procedure to shut down engine is
not done properly.
2. Run engine at slow idle speed without load for 5
minutes.
3. Stop engine.
4. Open right rear service door to access pump drive
gear case.
5. Remove dipstick (1). Wipe dipstick clean and insert
completely into tube.
6. Remove dipstick. Oil level must be approximately
halfway below the H mark. Insert dipstick.
7. If necessary, remove ll plug (2) and add oil. See
Pump Drive Gear Case Oil. (Section 3-1.)
8. Install ll plug.
9. Check oil level on dipstick.
10. Close service door.
1— Dipstick 2— Fill Plug
TX1217831 —UN—19JUL16
Pump Drive Gear Case
T145092 —UN—31AUG01
Dipstick
3-8-4
112321
PN=231
Maintenance—Every 250 Hours
Continued on next page TX,HYBATT,CHK -19-24APR20-1/2
Check Hybrid Battery Electrolyte Level—If
Equipped
CAUTION: Battery gas can explode. Keep sparks
and ames away from batteries. Use a ashlight
to check battery electrolyte level.
NEVER check battery charge by placing
a metal object across the posts. Use a
voltmeter or hydrometer.
ALWAYS remove grounded (-) battery clamp
rst and replace it last.
Sulfuric acid in battery electrolyte is
poisonous. It is strong enough to burn skin,
eat holes in clothing, and cause blindness
if splashed into eyes.
Avoid the hazard by:
1. Filling batteries in a well-ventilated area.
2. Wearing eye protection and rubber gloves.
3. Avoiding breathing fumes when
electrolyte is added.
4. Avoiding spilling or dripping electrolyte.
5. Using proper jump start procedure.
If acid is spilled on skin:
1. Flush skin with water.
2. Apply baking soda or lime to help
neutralize the acid.
3. Flush eyes with water for 15–30 minutes.
4. Get medical attention immediately.
If acid is swallowed:
1. Do not induce vomiting.
TS203 —UN—23AUG88
Avoid Acid Burns
2. Drink large amounts of water or milk but
do not exceed 1.9 L (2 qt).
3. Get medical attention immediately.
1. Remove battery box cover.
3-8-5
112321
PN=232
Maintenance—Every 250 Hours
TX,HYBATT,CHK -19-24APR20-2/2
IMPORTANT: If water is added to batteries during
freezing weather, batteries must be charged
after water is added to prevent batteries from
freezing. Charge battery using a battery
charger or by running the engine.
2. Fill each cell to within the specied range with distilled
water. DO NOT overll.
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury. ALWAYS
remove grounded (-) battery clamp rst
and replace it last.
3. Disconnect battery clamps, grounded clamp rst.
4. Clean battery terminal (4) and clamps with a stiff brush.
5. Apply lubricating grease (5) around battery terminal
base only.
6. Install and tighten clamps, grounded clamp last.
1— Battery Post
2— Fill Tube
3— Electrolyte Level Range
4— Battery Terminal
5— Lubricating Grease
TX1208617 —UN—05JAN16
Battery Terminal and Fill Hole
T137536 —UN—25JAN01
Fill Level
4
5
TX1265575 —UN—03OCT18
Terminal and Grease
3-8-6
112321
PN=233
Maintenance—Every 250 Hours
DB84312,0000147 -19-31JAN17-1/1
KR46761,000132A -19-26SEP16-1/1
Check Travel Gear Case Oil Level
1. Park the machine on level ground, rotating travel gear
case until positioned as shown.
2. Stop engine.
CAUTION: High-pressure release of oils from
pressurized system can cause serious burns.
Wait for travel gear case oil to cool. Keep body
and face away from ll plug (1). Gradually
loosen ll plug to release pressure.
3. After travel gear case has cooled, slowly loosen ll
plug (1) to release air and relieve pressure.
4. Remove check plug (2). Oil must be to bottom of hole.
5. If necessary, remove ll plug and add oil until oil ows
out of check plug hole. See Swing Gear Case and
Travel Gear Case Oils. (Section 3-1.)
6. Wrap threads of plugs with sealing-type tape. Install
plugs. Tighten plugs to specication.
Specication
Plug—Torque.................................................................................50 N·m
37 lb·ft
TX1000270 —UN—15NOV05
Travel Gear Case Oil Level
1— Fill Plug
2— Check Plug
3— Drain Plug
7. Check second travel gear case oil level.
Check and Adjust Fan Belt Tension
See Check and Adjust Fan Belt Tension. (Section 3-5.)
3-8-7
112321
PN=234
Maintenance—Every 250 Hours
KR46761,000132B -19-07NOV16-1/1
KR46761,000138F -19-29SEP16-1/1
Clean Primary Air Cleaner Element
1. Open left front service door to access air cleaner.
2. Release latches (1) to unlock air cleaner cover (2).
3. Remove primary air lter element (3). Be sure not to
remove secondary air lter element.
4. Gently twist and shake primary air lter element to
remove debris.
CAUTION: Avoid injury from ying debris. Clear
area of bystanders and wear personal protection
equipment, including eye protection. Reduce
compressed air to less than 689 kPa (6.89 bar)
(100 psi) when using for cleaning purposes.
IMPORTANT: Avoid damage to primary air lter
element. When using compressed air, keep air
nozzle 50 mm (2 in) or more away from element.
5. Use compressed air and direct air up and down the
pleats from inside to outside to clean primary air lter
element.
6. Inspect element for damage. Replace if necessary.
See Replace Air Cleaner Elements. (Section 3-11.)
7. Install primary air lter element.
8. Install air cleaner cover and secure latches.
9. Close service door.
TX1224603 —UN—27SEP16
Air Cleaner Cover
TX1224604 —UN—27SEP16
Primary Air Filter Element
1— Latch (4 used)
2— Air Cleaner Cover
3— Primary Air Filter Element
Take Engine Oil Sample
See an authorized Hitachi dealer for procedures and
sampling equipment. For more information, see Fluid
Sampling Test Ports. (Section 4-1.)
3-8-8
112321
PN=235
Maintenance—Every 500 Hours
ER79617,0000DE4 -19-07APR16-1/1
KR46761,00013B1 -19-12OCT16-1/1
Lubricate Swing Bearing Gear
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from
unexpected machine movement if controls are
moved by another person. Lubricating swing
bearing and rotating the upperstructure must be
done by one person. Before lubricating swing
bearing gear, clear the area of all persons.
1. Remove swing bearing gear access cover (1).
2. Grease must be 13—25 mm (0.5—1 in) deep,
measured from the bottom of the ring gear. The grease
must also be free of contamination by dirt and water.
If the grease is contaminated, remove grease and
replace with clean grease.
NOTE: If water or mud is found in swing gear area, see
Operating in Water and Mud. (Section 2-3.)
3. Add grease as required (approximately 0.5 kg [1.1 lb]
every 90°). See Track Adjuster, Working Tool Pivot,
Swing Bearing, and Swing Bearing Gear Grease.
(Section 3-1.)
IMPORTANT: Excessive grease can damage the
swing gear case seal.
T136458 —UN—18DEC00
Access Cover
1— Access Cover
4. Remove any excess grease from over the top of the
swing drive pinion.
5. Install access cover.
Check Air Intake Hoses
1. Open engine cover.
2. Check air intake hose (1) for cracks. Replace as
necessary.
3. Check for loose connections and tighten clamps as
necessary.
4. Close engine cover.
1— Air Intake Hose
TX1225942 —UN—12OCT16
Air Intake Hose
3-9-1
112321
PN=236
Maintenance—Every 500 Hours
KR46761,00013D3 -19-27OCT16-1/1
Drain and Rell Engine Oil and Replace Filter
IMPORTANT: Avoid engine damage. Make sure that
area around and above engine oil ller cap (4) is
clean and clear of debris before removing cap.
1. Park machine on a level surface.
IMPORTANT: Turbocharger can be damaged
if procedure to shut down engine is
not done properly.
2. Run engine at slow idle speed without load for 5
minutes.
3. Stop engine.
4. Underneath the middle of the machine, remove cap
screws and open access cover (1).
5. Open drain valve (2) on engine oil pan. Allow oil to
drain into a container. Dispose of waste oil properly.
6. Close drain valve and access cover. Install cap screws.
7. Open right rear service door to access engine oil lter
(3).
8. Turn engine oil lter counterclockwise to remove.
Clean mounting surface on base.
9. Apply thin lm of oil to rubber gasket of new lter.
10. Install new lter. Turn lter clockwise by hand until
gasket touches mounting surface.
11. Tighten lter 1/2—3/4 turn more.
12. Open engine cover.
13. Remove ller cap (4) and ll engine with oil. See Diesel
Engine Oil—Final Tier 4 and Stage IV. (Section 3-1.)
Specication
Engine Oil With
Filter—Capacity.............................................................................. 26.0 L
6.9 gal
14. Install ller cap.
15. Start engine.
16. Stop engine, remove dipstick (5), and check oil level.
Engine is full when oil level is in the cross-hatch area.
17. Check for any leakage at lter. Tighten lter just
enough to stop leakage.
TX1225944 —UN—12OCT16
Engine Oil Drain Valve (view from under machine)
TX1225949 —UN—14OCT16
Engine Oil Filter
TX1225951 —UN—13OCT16
Engine Oil Filler Cap and Dipstick
1— Access Cover
2— Drain Valve
3— Engine Oil Filter
4— Filler Cap
5— Dipstick
18. Close service door and engine cover.
3-9-2
112321
PN=237
Maintenance—Every 500 Hours
KR46761,000124B -19-22AUG16-1/1
KR46761,00013CF -19-12OCT16-1/1
Check Cab Tilt Oil Level—Rear Entry Cab
Only
1. Park machine on a level surface.
CAUTION: Turbocharger can be damaged
if procedure to shut down engine is not
done properly.
2. Run engine at slow idle speed without load for 5
minutes.
3. Stop engine.
4. Open cab service door (1) to access the cab tilt
hydraulic pump.
5. Check oil level on the cab tilt oil tank (2). Oil level
must be at the FILL line.
6. If necessary, remove ll cap (3) and add oil. See Cab
Tilt Oil—Rear Entry Cab Only. (Section 3-1.)
7. Install ll cap.
8. Close cab service door.
1— Cab Service Door
2— Cab Tilt Oil Tank
3— Fill Cap
TX1213788 —UN—26APR16
Cab Service Door
TX1214902 —UN—18MAY16
Cab Tilt Hydraulic Pump
Clean Cooler Inlet Screen
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from rotating
fan and ying debris. Shut off engine before
opening door. Avoid rotating fan and fan blast.
Clear area of bystanders and wear personal
protection equipment, including eye protection.
Reduce compressed air to less than 196 kPa (1.96
bar) (28.4 psi) when using for cleaning purposes.
1. Stop engine.
2. Open engine cover and left rear service door.
3. Release latches (1) and use handles (2) to remove
cooler inlet screen (3).
4. Attach an air wand to an air compressor and blow dirt
and debris from the cooler inlet screen.
5. Install cooler inlet screen and secure latches.
6. Close service door and engine cover.
TX1224929 —UN—29SEP16
Cooler Inlet Screen
1— Latch (3 used)
2— Handle (2 used)
3— Cooler Inlet Screen
3-9-3
112321
PN=238
Maintenance—Every 500 Hours
KR46761,00013B2 -19-20OCT16-1/2
KR46761,00013B2 -19-20OCT16-2/2
KR46761,0001390 -19-29SEP16-1/1
Clean Radiator, Oil Cooler, Charge Air
Cooler, and Fuel Cooler
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from rotating
fan and ying debris. Shut off engine before
opening door. Avoid rotating fan and fan blast.
Clear area of bystanders and wear personal
protection equipment, including eye protection.
Reduce compressed air to less than 196 kPa (1.96
bar) (28.4 psi) when using for cleaning purposes.
1. Stop engine.
2. Open engine cover and left rear service door.
3. Remove cooler inlet screen. See Clean Cooler Inlet
Screen in this section.
4. Attach an air wand to an air compressor and blow dirt
and debris back through cooling system.
5. Close panel and install cap screws.
TX1225972 —UN—12OCT16
Cooler Cores
1— Hydraulic Oil Cooler
2— Radiator
3— Charge Air Cooler
4— Fuel Cooler
5— Air Conditioner Condenser
6. Close service door and engine cover.
If machine is equipped with a hydraulic reverse fan
function, use the reversing fan switch to clean the cooling
system. The reversing fan switch is located on the left
console.
IMPORTANT: Prevent machine damage from
overheating. Do not manually reverse fan
immediately after last completion. Wait 1
minute before reactivating.
NOTE: Reversing fan is more effective at higher
engine speeds.
The reversing fan switch has three positions:
•
AUTO: Every 60 minutes, the radiator cooling fan will
automatically reverse direction for 30 seconds without
intervention from the operator when engine rpm is above
auto-idle speed. The default time setting is 60 minutes.
To adjust time setting, see an authorized Hitachi dealer.
•
OFF: Fan resumes normal operation.
•
MANUAL: Press and hold right side of switch to reverse
fan. Fan will stop reversing when switch is released or
when 1 minute has passed.
TX1000844A —UN—29NOV05
Reversing Fan Switch (if equipped)
When reversing fan is activated, the reversing fan
indicator will appear on the monitor display.
Take Fluid Samples
See an authorized Hitachi dealer for procedures and
sampling equipment. For more information, see Fluid
Sampling Test Ports. (Section 4-1.)
•
Diesel Fuel
•
Engine Coolant
•
Hydraulic Oil
•
Swing Gear Case Oil
•
Pump Drive Gear Case Oil
•
Travel Gear Case Oil
•
Cab Tilt Oil—rear entry cab only
3-9-4
112321
PN=239
Maintenance—Every 1000 Hours
KR46761,0000BF7 -19-04DEC17-1/1
Drain and Rell Swing Gear Case Oil
1. Park machine on a level surface.
IMPORTANT: Turbocharger can be damaged
if procedure to shut down engine is
not done properly.
2. Run engine at slow idle speed without load for 5
minutes.
3. Stop engine.
4. Remove plug mounted on end of drain pipe to drain oil
into a container. Dispose of waste oil properly.
5. Install plug.
6. Remove ller cap (2), and add oil. See Swing Gear
Case and Travel Gear Case Oils. (Section 3-1.)
Specication
Swing Gear Case
Oil—Capacity................................................................................. 11.8 L
3.1 gal
TX1156407A —UN—17MAR14
Swing Gear Case
1— Dipstick
2— Filler Cap
7. Install ller cap.
8. Check oil level on dipstick (1).
3-10-1
112321
PN=240
Maintenance—Every 1000 Hours
Continued on next page KR46761,0001253 -19-12JUL16-1/2
Replace Hydraulic Tank Oil Filter
1. Park and position machine with arm cylinder fully
retracted and bucket cylinder (if equipped) fully
extended.
IMPORTANT: Turbocharger can be damaged
if procedure to shut down engine is
not done properly.
2. Run engine at slow idle speed without load for 5
minutes.
3. Stop engine.
4. Insert 4 mm hex wrench (2) into hole (3) and turn
counterclockwise to release locking pin.
CAUTION: Avoid personal injury from
high-pressure uid. High-pressure release
of oil from pressurized system can cause
serious burns or penetrating injury. Relieve
pressure by slowly turning hydraulic tank cap
(1) counterclockwise a few degrees.
To prevent possible burn injury from hot
hydraulic oil, wait for hydraulic oil to cool
before starting work.
5. Slowly turn hydraulic tank cap (1) counterclockwise a
few degrees to relieve pressure.
6. Hold down hydraulic oil lter cover (6) against light
spring load when removing the last two cap screws (7).
1— Hydraulic Tank Cap
2— Hex Wrench
3— Hole
4— Case Assembly
5— Aligning Mark (2 used)
6— Hydraulic Oil Filter Cover
7— Cap Screw (6 used)
TS281 —UN—15APR13
Pressurized Fluids
TX1217874 —UN—21JUN16
Hydraulic Tank
1
4
3
2
5
TX1217692 —UN—22JUN16
Hydraulic Tank Cap
3-10-2
112321
PN=241
Maintenance—Every 1000 Hours
KR46761,0001253 -19-12JUL16-2/2
7. Remove spring (8), valve (9), and lter element (10).
8. Remove and discard lter element and O-ring (11).
IMPORTANT: Remove element and inspect for
metal particles and debris in bottom of lter
canister. Excessive amounts of brass and
steel particles can indicate a hydraulic pump,
motor, or valve malfunction, or a malfunction
in process. A rubber material can indicate
cylinder packing problem.
9. Install lter element, O-ring, valve, and spring.
10. Install hydraulic oil lter cover and tighten cap screws
to specication.
Specication
Cap Screw—Torque......................................................................50 N·m
37 lb·ft
11. Install hydraulic tank cap (1) to case assembly (4)
using aligning marks (5) and turning cap clockwise
to lock position.
12. Bleed air from hydraulic system. See Bleed Hydraulic
System. (Section 4-1.)
1— Hydraulic Tank Cap
2— Hex Wrench
3— Hole
4— Case Assembly
5— Aligning Mark (2 used)
6— Hydraulic Oil Filter Cover
7— Cap Screw (6 used)
8— Spring
9— Valve
10— Filter Element
11— O-Ring
11
9
10
6
7
8
TX1217872 —UN—22JUN16
Hydraulic Filter Assembly
1
4
3
2
5
TX1217692 —UN—22JUN16
Hydraulic Tank Cap
3-10-3
112321
PN=242
Maintenance—Every 1000 Hours
Continued on next page KR46761,0001417 -19-07NOV16-1/2
Replace Pilot Oil Filter
1. Park and position machine with arm cylinder fully
retracted and bucket cylinder (if equipped) fully
extended.
IMPORTANT: Turbocharger can be damaged
if procedure to shut down engine is
not done properly.
2. Run engine at slow idle speed without load for 5
minutes.
3. Stop engine.
4. Insert 4 mm hex wrench (2) into hole (3) and turn
counterclockwise to release locking pin.
CAUTION: Avoid personal injury from
high-pressure uid. High-pressure release
of oil from pressurized system can cause
serious burns or penetrating injury. Relieve
pressure by slowly turning hydraulic tank cap
(1) counterclockwise a few degrees.
To prevent possible burn injury from hot
hydraulic oil, wait for hydraulic oil to cool
before starting work.
5. Slowly turn hydraulic tank cap (1) counterclockwise a
few degrees to relieve pressure.
1— Hydraulic Tank Cap
2— Hex Wrench
3— Hole
4— Case Assembly
5— Aligning Mark (2 used)
TS281 —UN—15APR13
Pressurized Fluids
TX1217817 —UN—20JUN16
Hydraulic Tank
1
4
3
2
5
TX1217692 —UN—22JUN16
Hydraulic Tank Cap
3-10-4
112321
PN=243
Maintenance—Every 1000 Hours
KR46761,0001417 -19-07NOV16-2/2
6. Open right rear service door to access pilot oil lter (6).
7. Remove lter canister (7) from head cover by turning
counterclockwise.
8. Clean head cover contact area.
9. Remove lter element (8) and O-ring (9).
10. Install new O-ring and lter element.
11. Install lter canister clockwise by hand. Check for any
leakage.
12. Close service door.
13. Install hydraulic tank cap (1) to case assembly (4)
using aligning marks (5) and turning cap clockwise
to lock position.
14. Bleed air from hydraulic system. See Bleed Hydraulic
System. (Section 4-1.)
1— Hydraulic Tank Cap
2— Hex Wrench
3— Hole
4— Case Assembly
5— Aligning Mark (2 used)
6— Pilot Oil Filter
7— Filter Canister
8— Filter Element
9— O-Ring
TX1217913 —UN—19JUL16
Pilot Oil Filter
8
7
9
TX1217707 —UN—22JUN16
Pilot Filter Assembly
1
4
3
2
5
TX1217692 —UN—22JUN16
Hydraulic Tank Cap
3-10-5
112321
PN=244
Maintenance—Every 1000 Hours
KR46761,00013D8 -19-13OCT16-1/1
Replace Primary Fuel Filter and Water
Separator
1. Ensure key switch is in the OFF position.
2. Open right rear service door to access primary fuel
lter and water separator (1).
3. Thoroughly clean exterior of primary fuel lter and
water separator and surrounding area.
4. Disconnect the water-in-fuel (WIF) sensor wiring (3).
5. Open drain valve (2) to extract water from fuel system.
Drain uid until water and sediment are removed.
Collect waste in a container and dispose of waste
properly. Close drain valve.
NOTE: Additional fuel will remain in the primary
fuel lter housing.
6. Rotate primary fuel lter and water separator
counterclockwise and remove from mounting base.
Remove water separator bowl from primary fuel lter.
Dispose of used fuel lter properly.
7. Clean lter mounting base.
8. Clean and dry water separator bowl. Replace if
necessary.
9. Install water separator bowl to new primary fuel lter.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT prell fuel lters. Debris
in unltered fuel will damage fuel system
components.
Only lubricate lter seal with diesel fuel
before installing.
10. Install primary fuel lter and water separator onto
mounting base. Rotate lter housing clockwise by
TX1226143 —UN—13OCT16
Primary Fuel Filter and Water Separator
1— Primary Fuel Filter and
Water Separator
2— Drain Valve
3— Water-in-Fuel (WIF) Sensor
Wiring
hand. Tighten 1/2—3/4 turn after seal contacts
mounting base.
11. Connect WIF sensor wiring.
12. Prime fuel system and bleed air. See Bleed Fuel
System. (Section 4-1.)
13. Close service door.
3-10-6
112321
PN=245
Maintenance—Every 1000 Hours
KR46761,00013D9 -19-08NOV16-1/1
Replace Final Fuel Filter
1. Ensure key switch is in the OFF position.
2. Open right rear service door to access nal fuel lter
(1).
3. Thoroughly clean exterior of nal fuel lter and
surrounding area.
NOTE: Additional fuel will remain in the nal
fuel lter housing.
4. Remove nal fuel lter using a lter wrench. Dispose
of used lter properly.
5. Clean lter mounting base.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT prell fuel lters. Debris
in unltered fuel will damage fuel system
components.
Only lubricate lter seal with diesel fuel
before installing.
6. Install new nal fuel lter onto mounting base. Rotate
lter housing clockwise by hand. Tighten 1/2—3/4 turn
after seal contacts mounting base.
7. Prime fuel system and bleed air. See Bleed Fuel
System. (Section 4-1.)
8. Close service door.
TX1226144 —UN—13OCT16
Final Fuel Filter
1— Final Fuel Filter
3-10-7
112321
PN=246
Maintenance—Every 1000 Hours
KR46761,000125C -19-21JUN16-1/1
KR46761,0001394 -19-22SEP16-1/1
Drain and Rell Pump Drive Gear Case Oil
1. Park machine on a level surface.
IMPORTANT: Turbocharger can be damaged
if procedure to shut down engine is
not done properly.
2. Run engine at slow idle speed without load for 5
minutes.
3. Stop engine.
4. Open right rear service door.
5. Remove ll plug (2).
6. Remove drain plug (3). Allow oil to drain into a
container. Dispose of waste oil properly.
7. Apply liquid pipe thread sealant to drain plug. Install
plug.
8. Add oil. See Pump Drive Gear Case Oil. (Section 3-1.)
Specication
Pump Drive Gear Case
Oil—Capacity................................................................................... 1.0 L
1.1 qt
9. Install ll plug.
10. Remove dipstick (1) and check oil level. Oil level must
be approximately halfway below H mark.
11. Install dipstick.
TX1217931 —UN—19JUL16
Pump Drive Gear Case
1— Dipstick
2— Fill Plug
3— Drain Plug
12. Close service door.
Check and Adjust Engine Valve Lash
See an authorized Hitachi dealer for engine valve
clearance adjustment.
3-10-8
112321
PN=247
Maintenance—Every 1000 Hours
KR46761,0001426 -19-23NOV16-1/1
KR46761,0000BB7 -19-17APR17-1/1
Replace Fuel Tank Breather
1. Remove cap screws (1) and access cover (2).
2. Remove fuel tank breather (3) and discard.
3. Install new fuel tank breather.
4. Install cap screws and access cover.
1— Cap Screw (2 used)
2— Access Cover
3— Fuel Tank Breather
TX1227919 —UN—08NOV16
Access Cover
TX1227920 —UN—08NOV16
Fuel Tank Breather
Check Coolant Condition
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from hot,
spraying uids. Shut off engine. Remove ller
cap only when cool enough to touch with bare
hands. Slowly loosen cap to relieve pressure
before removing completely.
NOTE: Coolant should be checked every 1000 hours or
1 year, or when replacing 1/3 or more of coolant
using SERVICEGARD™ tool program.
1. Open engine cover to access surge tank.
2. Test engine coolant. See Testing Coolant Freeze
Point. (Section 3-1.)
3. Install surge tank cap.
TS281 —UN—15APR13
Pressurized Fluids
4. Close engine cover.
SERVICEGARD is a trademark of Deere & Company
3-10-9
112321
PN=248
Maintenance—Every 1500 Hours
KR46761,00013B0 -19-18OCT16-1/1
Replace Air Cleaner Elements
1. Open left front service door to access air cleaner.
2. Release latches (1) to unlock air cleaner cover (2).
3. Rotate air cleaner cover counterclockwise and remove.
4. Remove primary air lter element (3).
5. Remove secondary air lter element (4).
6. Clean the inside of the lter canister.
7. Install new lter elements, making sure the secondary
air lter element is centered in canister.
8. Install air cleaner cover and secure latches.
9. Close service door.
1— Latch (4 used)
2— Air Cleaner Cover
3— Primary Air Filter Element
4— Secondary Air Filter
Element
TX1224603 —UN—27SEP16
Air Cleaner Cover
TX1224604 —UN—27SEP16
Primary Air Cleaner Element
TX1224605 —UN—27SEP16
Secondary Air Cleaner Element
3-11-1
112321
PN=249
Maintenance—Every 2000 Hours
DB84312,00000ED -19-08APR16-1/1
Drain and Rell Travel Gear Case Oil
1. Park the machine on level ground, rotating travel gear
case until positioned as shown.
2. Stop engine.
CAUTION: High-pressure release of oils from
pressurized system can cause serious burns.
Wait for travel gear case oil to cool. Keep body
and face away from ll plug (1). Gradually
loosen ll plug to release pressure.
3. After travel gear case has cooled, slowly loosen ll
plug (1) to release air and relieve pressure.
4. Remove drain plug (3). Allow oil to drain into a
container. Dispose of waste oil properly.
5. Wrap threads of drain plug with a sealing-type tape.
Install plug. Tighten plug to specication.
Specication
Plug—Torque.................................................................................50 N·m
37 lb·ft
6. Remove ll plug and check plug (2).
7. Add oil until oil ows out of check plug hole. See Swing
Gear Case and Travel Gear Case Oils. (Section 3-1.)
TX1000270 —UN—15NOV05
Travel Gear Case
1— Fill Plug
2— Check Plug
3— Drain Plug
Specication
Travel Gear Case
Oil—Capacity (each)........................................................................ 8.5 L
2.2 gal
8. Wrap threads of check plug and ll plug with
sealing-type tape. Install plugs. Tighten plugs to
specication.
9. Change oil of second travel gear case.
3-12-1
112321
PN=250
Maintenance—Every 4000 Hours
Continued on next page KR46761,00013DC -19-21DEC16-1/4
Drain, Flush, and Rell Engine Cooling System
Drain Cooling System
TS281 —UN—15APR13
Pressurized Fluids
TX1226278 —UN—17OCT16
Surge Tank
1. Open engine cover.
2. Check coolant hoses for cracks and leaks. Replace if
necessary.
3. Check radiator, charge air, and oil cooler for dirt,
grease, leaks, and loose or broken mountings. Clean
radiator, charge air, and oil cooler ns. See Clean
Radiator, Oil Cooler, Charge Air Cooler, and Fuel
Cooler. (Section 3-9.)
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from hot,
spraying uids. Shut off engine. Remove ller
cap only when cool enough to touch with bare
hands. Slowly loosen cap to relieve pressure
before removing completely.
4. Remove surge tank cap (1) to relieve pressure.
5. Underneath left side of machine, remove cap screws
(2) and access cover (3).
6. Turn drain valve (4) counterclockwise to open. Allow
coolant to drain into a container. Dispose of waste
coolant properly.
7. Close drain valve.
1— Surge Tank Cap
2— Cap Screw (4 used)
3— Access Cover
4— Drain Valve
TX1226291 —UN—17OCT16
Access Cover (view from under machine)
TX1226292 —UN—17OCT16
Drain Valve (view from under machine)
3-13-1
112321
PN=251
Maintenance—Every 4000 Hours
Continued on next page KR46761,00013DC -19-21DEC16-2/4
TX1228150 —UN—10NOV16
Coolant Air Bleed Plug
TX1228152 —UN—10NOV16
Coolant Air Bleed Plug (components removed for clarity)
8. Loosen coolant air bleed plug (5). Do not remove plug
completely.
9. Underneath the middle of the machine, remove cap
screws and open access cover (6) to access engine
block drain plug (7).
10. Open engine block drain plug and allow coolant to drain
into suitable container. Dispose of waste properly.
11. Close engine block drain plug and access cover.
Install cap screws.
12. Tighten coolant air bleed plug.
5— Coolant Air Bleed Plug
6— Access Cover
7— Engine Block Drain Plug
TX1228156 —UN—11NOV16
Engine Block Drain Plug (view from under machine)
TX1228161 —UN—10NOV16
Engine Block Drain Plug (components removed for clarity)
3-13-2
112321
PN=252
Maintenance—Every 4000 Hours
Continued on next page KR46761,00013DC -19-21DEC16-3/4
Flush Cooling System
IMPORTANT: To prevent engine damage:
•
Do not pour coolant into a hot engine.
•
Do not operate engine without coolant.
1. Fill cooling system with clean water.
2. Install surge tank cap (1).
3. Start and run engine until engine reaches operating
temperature.
4. Stop engine.
CAUTION: Prevent burns from hot ushing
solution. Avoid skin contact with
ushing solution.
5. Drain cooling system immediately before rust and
dirt settle. Slowly remove surge tank cap and open
radiator drain valve (4). Allow ushing solution to drain
into suitable container. Dispose of waste properly.
6. Close drain valve and install access cover and cap
screws.
1— Surge Tank Cap
4— Drain Valve
TS281 —UN—15APR13
Pressurized Fluids
TX1226278 —UN—17OCT16
Surge Tank
TX1226292 —UN—17OCT16
Drain Valve (view from under machine)
3-13-3
112321
PN=253
Maintenance—Every 4000 Hours
KR46761,00013DC -19-21DEC16-4/4
Fill Cooling System
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from hot,
spraying uids. Shut off engine. Remove ller
cap only when cool enough to touch with bare
hands. Slowly loosen cap to relieve pressure
before removing completely.
IMPORTANT: Avoid mixing different brands or types
of coolant. Coolant manufacturers engineer
their coolants to meet certain specications
and performance requirements. Mixing
different coolant types can degrade coolant
and machine performance.
Use only permanent-type, low silicate, ethylene
glycol antifreeze in coolant solution. Other
types of antifreeze may damage cylinder seals.
Follow directions on container for correct
mixture ratio.
FREEZING TEMPERATURES: Fill with permanent-type,
low silicate, ethylene glycol antifreeze (without stop-leak
additive) and clean soft water.
Remove surge tank cap (1) to relieve pressure. Fill
surge tank to above the full hot mark. See Diesel Engine
Coolant. (Section 3-1.) Install surge tank cap.
Specication
Cooling System—Capac-
ity.................................................................................................... 34.0 L
9.0 gal
Deaeration
The cooling system requires several warm-up and cool
down cycles to deaerate. It will NOT deaerate during
normal operation. Only during warm-up and cool down
cycles will the system deaerate.
1. Start engine. Run engine until coolant reaches a warm
temperature.
2. Stop engine. Allow coolant to cool.
3. Check coolant level at surge tank. See Check Engine
Coolant Level. (Section 3-4.)
TS281 —UN—15APR13
Pressurized Fluids
TX1226278 —UN—17OCT16
Surge Tank
1— Surge Tank Cap
4. Repeat steps 1—3 until surge tank coolant level is
repeatedly at the same level (stabilized).
NOTE: Coolant level MUST BE repeatedly checked after
all drain and rell procedures to ensure that all
air is out of the system, which allows the coolant
level to stabilize. Coolant level should only be
checked when the engine is cold.
5. If necessary, ll surge tank to above the MIN COLD
mark.
6. Install surge tank cap.
3-13-4
112321
PN=254
Maintenance—Every 4500 Hours
KR46761,000132D -19-15NOV16-1/1
Access Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Dosing
Unit Filter
Underneath the middle of the machine, remove cap
screws (1) and access cover (2) to access diesel exhaust
uid (DEF) dosing unit lter (3).
1— Cap Screw (2 used)
2— Access Cover
3— Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)
Dosing Unit Filter
TX1226232 —UN—14OCT16
Access Cover (view from under machine)
TX1226233 —UN—14OCT16
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Dosing Unit Filter Access
3-14-1
112321
PN=255
Maintenance—Every 4500 Hours
DX,DEF,CHANGE,FILT -19-31OCT19-1/1
Change Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Dosing
Unit Filter
CAUTION: Avoid contact with eyes. In case
of contact, immediately ush eyes with large
amounts of water for a minimum of 15 minutes.
Reference the Materials Safety Data Sheet
(MSDS) for additional information.
IMPORTANT: If DEF is spilled or contacts any surface
other than the storage tank, immediately clean
the surface with clear water. DEF is corrosive to
painted and unpainted metallic surfaces and can
distort some plastic and rubber components.
Spilled DEF, if left to dry or if only wiped
away with a cloth, leaves a white residue.
Improperly cleaned DEF spill can interfere with
diagnosis of Selective Catalytic Reduction
(SCR) system leakage problems.
NOTE: See your John Deere equipment technical
manual or OEM manufacturer’s technical manual
for DEF dosing unit lter location.
IMPORTANT: Avoid system and lter damage. Ensure
that DEF system is not frozen before changing
lter. If system is frozen, operate engine until
system has thawed completely.
1. Remove DEF dosing unit lter cover (A).
2. Remove and discard DEF dosing unit lter equalizing
element (B).
NOTE: DEF dosing unit lter tool (C) is supplied
with replacement lter.
3. Insert “Black” end of DEF dosing unit lter tool (C) into
DEF dosing unit lter (D) until CLICK is felt or heard
indicating DEF dosing unit lter tool is fully engaged.
NOTE: A tool such as a screwdriver can be inserted into
DEF dosing unit lter tool slot to assist removal.
RG22534 —UN—21MAR13
DEF Dosing Unit Filter
A—DEF Dosing Unit Filter
Cover
B—DEF Dosing Unit Filter
Equalizing Element
C—DEF Dosing Unit Filter Tool
(supplied with new lter)
D—DEF Dosing Unit Filter
4. Pull DEF dosing unit lter tool and DEF dosing unit
lter from DEF dosing unit. Discard DEF dosing unit
lter and DEF dosing unit lter tool.
5. Clean DEF dosing unit threads and mating surfaces
with distilled water.
6. Lubricate DEF lter O-rings with clean DEF. Carefully
insert DEF dosing unit lter into DEF dosing unit.
7. Install new DEF dosing unit lter equalizing element
into DEF dosing unit lter.
8. Install DEF dosing unit lter cover and tighten to
specication.
Specication
DEF Dosing Unit Filter
Cover—Torque..............................................................................23 N·m
(204 lb·in)
3-14-2
112321
PN=256
Maintenance—Every 5000 Hours
Continued on next page KR46761,0001397 -19-21DEC16-1/2
Drain and Rell Hydraulic Tank Oil and Clean
Suction Screen
Change original factory ll hydraulic oil after rst 5000
hours. Change every 5000 hours thereafter if using Super
EX 46HN zinc-free hydraulic oil. If using alternative oils,
see Hydraulic Oil. (Section 3-1.)
Perform this service at the 5000-hour interval when
operating in normal conditions. When operating with an
attachment, drain and rell as necessary.
IMPORTANT: Prevent damage to hydraulic system
components. DO NOT run engine without
oil in hydraulic tank.
Avoid machine damage. Mixing different oil
types can degrade lubricant and machine
performance. Oil manufacturers engineer
their oils to meet certain specications and
performance requirements.
Avoid machine damage. This excavator is
factory lled with Super EX 46HN extended
life zinc-free hydraulic oil. Avoid servicing
this excavator with products that do not meet
this specication. If oils have been mixed or if
alternate service oils are desired, the complete
hydraulic system needs to be completely
ushed by an authorized dealer.
1. Park machine on level surface with upperstructure
rotated 90° for easier access. Position machine with
arm cylinder fully retracted and bucket cylinder (if
equipped) fully extended.
IMPORTANT: Turbocharger can be damaged
if procedure to shut down engine is
not done properly.
2. Run engine at slow idle speed without load for 5
minutes.
3. Stop engine.
4. Insert 4 mm hex wrench (2) into hole (3) and turn
counterclockwise to release locking pin.
CAUTION: Avoid personal injury from
high-pressure uid. High-pressure release
of oil from pressurized system can cause
serious burns or penetrating injury. Relieve
pressure by slowly turning hydraulic tank cap
(1) counterclockwise a few degrees.
To prevent possible burn injury from hot
hydraulic oil, wait for hydraulic oil to cool
before starting work.
5. Slowly turn hydraulic tank cap (1) counterclockwise a
few degrees to relieve pressure. Remove cap.
6. Remove cap screws (6).
TS281 —UN—15APR13
Pressurized Fluids
TX1217874 —UN—21JUN16
Hydraulic Tank
1
4
3
2
5
TX1217692 —UN—22JUN16
Hydraulic Tank Cap
1— Hydraulic Tank Cap
2— Hex Wrench
3— Hole
4— Case Assembly
5— Aligning Mark (2 used)
6— Cap Screw (6 used)
7— Hydraulic Tank Cover
7. Remove hydraulic tank cover (7).
3-15-1
112321
PN=257
Maintenance—Every 5000 Hours
KR46761,0001397 -19-21DEC16-2/2
TX1217987 —UN—22JUN16
Access Cover (view from under machine)
TX1226243 —UN—14OCT16
Drain Valve Cap Screw (view from under machine)
8. Underneath right side of machine, remove cap screws
(8) and access cover (9) to access drain valve cap
screw.
9. Remove drain valve cap screw (10). Allow oil to drain
into a container. Dispose of waste oil properly.
10. Install drain valve cap screw.
11. Remove suction screen from hydraulic tank cover.
Clean inside of tank and suction screen.
NOTE: The hydraulic tank oil lter and pilot oil lter can
be changed at this point in the procedure. See
Maintenance—Every 1000 Hours. (Section 3-10.)
12. Install suction screen with hydraulic tank cover and
cap screws. Suction screen must seal against outlet
pipe in bottom of tank. If necessary, loosen suction
screen rod nut (12) to adjust rod length.
Specication
Suction Screen Rod
(11)—Length................................................................................ 869 mm
34 in
Suction Screen Rod Nut
(12)—Torque......................................................................... 15—20 N·m
133—177 lb·in
Hydraulic Tank Cover
Cap Screw—Torque......................................................................50 N·m
37 lb·ft
IMPORTANT: If the hydraulic pump is not lled with
oil, it will be damaged when the engine is started.
13. Add oil until it is between marks on sight glass. See
Hydraulic Oil. (Section 3-1.)
Specication
Hydraulic Tank
Oil—Capacity............................................................................... 147.6 L
39.0 gal
14. Install hydraulic tank cap (1) to case assembly (4)
using aligning marks (5) and turning cap clockwise
to lock position.
15. Bleed air from hydraulic system. See Bleed Hydraulic
System. (Section 4-1.)
12
11
TX1218002 —UN—24JUN16
Suction Screen Assembly
1
4
3
2
5
TX1217692 —UN—22JUN16
Hydraulic Tank Cap
1— Hydraulic Tank Cap
2— Hex Wrench
3— Hole
4— Case Assembly
5— Aligning Mark (2 used)
8— Cap Screw (4 used)
9— Access Cover
10— Drain Valve Cap Screw
11— Suction Screen Rod
12— Suction Screen Rod Nut
3-15-2
112321
PN=258
Maintenance—Every 5000 Hours
KR46761,0001270 -19-01JUL16-1/1
Replace Hydraulic Tank Cap Breather
Element
1. Park machine on level surface with upperstructure
rotated 90° for easier access.
2. Position machine with arm cylinder fully retracted and
bucket cylinder (if equipped) fully extended.
IMPORTANT: Turbocharger can be damaged
if procedure to shut down engine is
not done properly.
3. Run engine at slow idle speed without load for 5
minutes.
4. Stop engine.
5. Insert 4 mm hex wrench (2) into hole (3) and turn
counterclockwise to release locking pin.
CAUTION: Avoid personal injury from
high-pressure uid. High-pressure release
of oil from pressurized system can cause
serious burns or penetrating injury. Relieve
pressure by slowly turning hydraulic tank cap
(1) counterclockwise a few degrees.
To prevent possible burn injury from hot
hydraulic oil, wait for hydraulic oil to cool
before starting work.
6. Slowly turn hydraulic tank cap (1) counterclockwise a
few degrees to relieve pressure. Remove cap.
7. Remove screw from top of hydraulic tank cap.
8. Remove and discard breather element.
9. Install new breather element.
10. Instal screw on top of hydraulic tank cap.
11. Install hydraulic tank cap to case assembly (4) using
aligning marks (5) and turning cap clockwise to lock
position.
1— Hydraulic Tank Cap
2— Hex Wrench
3— Hole
4— Case Assembly
5— Aligning Mark (2 used)
TS281 —UN—15APR13
Pressurized Fluids
TX1217817 —UN—20JUN16
Hydraulic Tank
1
4
3
2
5
TX1217692 —UN—22JUN16
Hydraulic Tank Cap
3-15-3
112321
PN=259
Maintenance—Every 5000 Hours
KR46761,000126F -19-22AUG16-1/1
Drain and Rell Cab Tilt Oil—Rear Entry Cab
Only
1. Park machine on a level surface.
CAUTION: Turbocharger can be damaged
if procedure to shut down engine is not
done properly.
2. Run engine at slow idle speed without load for 5
minutes.
3. Stop engine.
4. Open cab service door (1) to access the cab tilt
hydraulic pump.
5. Open ll cap (3).
6. Remove drain plug (4) and allow oil to drain into a
container. Dispose of waste oil properly.
7. Install drain plug.
8. Remove ll cap and add oil. See Cab Tilt Oil—Rear
Entry Cab Only. (Section 3-1.)
Specication
Cab Tilt Tank
Oil—Capacity................................................................................... 3.3 L
3.4 qt
9. Install ll cap.
10. Check oil level on cab tilt oil tank. Oil level must be
at FILL line.
11. Close cab service door.
TX1213788 —UN—26APR16
Cab Service Door
TX1214917 —UN—18MAY16
Cab Tilt Hydraulic Pump
1— Cab Service Door
2— Cab Tilt Oil Tank
3— Fill Cap
4— Drain Plug
3-15-4
112321
PN=260
Miscellaneous—Machine
BB11933,0000076 -19-16JUL20-1/1
KR46761,00013DA -19-19OCT16-1/1
Clean Machine Regularly
Remove any grease, oil, fuel, or debris buildup to avoid
possible injury or machine damage.
IMPORTANT: Avoid using high-pressure washing for
electronic or electric devices installed in, on, or
around the engine, including the engine control
unit (ECU), relays, and harness couplers.
Never steam-clean or pour cold water on the
high-pressure fuel pump while it is still warm;
doing so may cause pump parts to seize. Also,
avoid steam-cleaning electrical components,
wiring, sensors, and the ECU.
Avoid using high-pressure washing when
cleaning the exhaust stack to prevent
damage to engine.
Steam-clean engine thoroughly. High-pressure washing
is not recommended.
High-pressure washing greater than 1379 kPa (13.8 bar)
(200 psi) can damage freshly painted nishes. Paint
T6642EJ —UN—18OCT88
Clean Machine Regularly
should be allowed to air-dry for 30 days minimum after
receipt of machine before cleaning with high pressure. Use
low-pressure wash operations until 30 days have elapsed.
Do not spray oil cooler ns at an angle; doing so may
bend the cooler ns.
Bleed Fuel System
IMPORTANT: DO NOT prell fuel lters. Debris
in unltered fuel will damage fuel system
components.
NOTE: This procedure should be performed after
each fuel lter drain, fuel lter change, or when
the engine has run out of fuel.
Air can enter fuel system when draining fuel lters,
changing fuel lters, or when machine has run out of fuel.
Air in the fuel system can prevent the engine from starting
or cause rough idle. This machine is equipped with a fuel
solenoid pump. Prime fuel system and bleed air as follows:
IMPORTANT: Prevent possible damage to fuel
solenoid pump and possibly discharging
the batteries. Do not hold key switch in ON
position for more than 5 minutes. If air is not
thoroughly bled, return key switch to OFF
position and wait at least 30 seconds before
returning key switch to ON position.
1. Turn key switch to the ON position and hold in position
for approximately 3 minutes, allowing the fuel solenoid
pump to bleed the air.
2. After the nal fuel lter is lled with fuel, hold key
switch in ON position for 30 seconds.
3. Start engine and check for leaks in the fuel system.
If engine does not start, turn key switch to the OFF
position and repeat procedure again.
4-1-1
112321
PN=261
Miscellaneous—Machine
KR46761,0001281 -19-28JUL16-1/1
Bleed Hydraulic System
IMPORTANT: If the hydraulic pump is not lled
with oil, pump will be damaged when
the engine is started.
This procedure should be performed after changing
hydraulic oil, hydraulic oil lter, or pilot oil lter.
Bleed Air From Hydraulic Pump
1. Open right rear service door to access air bleed plugs
(1) on hydraulic pump.
2. Loosen air bleed plugs until oil ows from bleed holes.
3. Purge air and tighten air bleed plugs to specication.
Specication
Air Bleed Plug (2
used)—Torque...............................................................................95 N·m
70 lb·ft
4. Start engine and run for 5—10 seconds to ensure oil
ow to hydraulic pump. Stop engine.
5. Check hydraulic tank oil level. See Check Hydraulic
Tank Oil Level. (Section 3-4.) If necessary, add oil.
See Hydraulic Oil. (Section 3-1.)
6. Start the engine again. Conrm oil level is above
minimum point in hydraulic oil sight gauge. Run
engine for approximately 1 minute to circulate oil
through the system.
Bleed Air From Hydraulic Circuit
TX1218738 —UN—20JUL16
Air Bleed Plugs
1— Air Bleed Plug (2 used)
1. Start engine again. Operate each cylinder and swing
motor repeatedly for 10—15 minutes to purge air from
hydraulic system.
2. Park machine on a level surface with arm cylinder
fully retracted and bucket cylinder (if equipped) fully
extended. Lower attachment to ground.
3. Stop engine.
4. Check hydraulic tank oil level. See Check Hydraulic
Tank Oil Level. (Section 3-4.) If necessary, add oil.
See Hydraulic Oil. (Section 3-1.)
4-1-2
112321
PN=262
Miscellaneous—Machine
KR46761,000139B -19-01JUN17-1/1
Inspect and Clean Polycarbonate Windows
Polycarbonate windows are important for the protection
of the operator and the safe operation of the machine.
Inspect the windows system regularly, and if surface
crazing or cracks are observed, replace windows using
only Hitachi replacement parts to ensure the original
operator protection level. Inspect the windows after any
signicant impact to the windows or frame.
NOTE: The use of cleaning agents, solvents,
polishing compounds, or waxes not listed in this
instruction block is not recommended. Contact
an authorized dealer for additional information
regarding glazing materials.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT use glass cleaners on
polycarbonate windows.
NEVER use abrasive or highly alkaline cleaners
on polycarbonate windows. Some cleaning
compounds may attack the polycarbonate
material, resulting in cracks.
NEVER use aromatic or halogenated
solvents like toluene, benzene, acetone,
tetrachloride, or petroleum products. Gasoline
should not be used.
Acceptable cleaning agents are John Deere
Polycarbonate Cleaner and John Deere
Polycarbonate Wash.
Acceptable soap based cleaning agents
are Joy®, Palmolive® Liquid, and Scott®
Pink Lotion Skin Cleanser.
Cleaning should never be done in direct sunlight or at high
temperatures, as this can lead to staining.
Before washing or applying any cleaning agents
or solvents, inspect the hard coating of window for
microcrazing or cracking. Do NOT apply solvents or
cleaning agents to window with microcrazing or cracks.
Minor scratches and abrasions can be minimized by using
a bufng compound or polish agent like NOVUS 1 or 2.
Test any intended polishing product in a small area before
using on the entire window. All polishing should follow
the manufacturer’s instructions to prevent further damage
to the window’s hard coat.
To begin the cleaning process, ush away as much loose
dirt as possible with water, then clean the windows using
a solution of approved cleaner and lukewarm water. Use
a soft, grit-free cloth or sponge to loosen any dirt or grime.
Never scrub with brushes, steel wool, or other abrasive
materials. Never use squeegees, razor blades, or other
sharp instruments to remove deposits or spots. The
windows are made of a polycarbonate material, which
is less abrasion resistant than glass. The windows will
scratch.
Use of incompatible cleaning materials can cause
structural and/or surface damage.
IMPORTANT: Always rinse window with water
prior to cleaning process.
The edges of polycarbonate sheet are not
protected with an abrasion and chemical
resistance coating. Do not allow cleaning
solutions and solvents to pool along the edges
at any time. Always rinse edges thoroughly with
generous amounts of clean, lukewarm water.
CAUTION: Make sure the work area is well
ventilated when working with organic solvents.
Solvent fumes can be hazardous to health if
proper safety precautions are not taken.
Do not smoke around organic solvents.
Solvents can cause risk of re if proper safety
precautions are not taken.
For all mentioned chemicals, consult the
manufacturer’s material safety data sheet (MSDS)
for proper safety precautions.
Masking adhesive and glazing compounds can be
removed by applying Isopropyl Alcohol or Naphtha VM&P
grade to a soft cloth and rubbing lightly; additionally, any
of these cleaning agents or butyl cellosolve can be used to
remove paints, marking pen inks, lipstick, or other forms
of grafti. Afterwards, wash the window using a solution of
approved cleaner and lukewarm water. Rinse thoroughly
to remove any trace of solvents.
Masking tape and adhesive tape work well for lifting off
old, weathered paints.
To remove labels and stickers, the use of kerosene is
generally effective. If the solvent does not penetrate the
sticker material, apply heat using a hair dryer to soften
the adhesive and promote removal. Afterwards, wash the
window using a solution of approved cleaner and lukewarm
water. Rinse thoroughly to remove any trace of solvents.
To remove tree sap, ush away as much loose dirt as
possible, then use John Deere Polycarbonate Cleaner,
kerosene, or Naphtha VM&P grade on a soft cloth and rub
lightly. Rinse well with clean water and dry with a chamois
or softer cloth to prevent water spotting.
Joy is a trademark of Procter & Gamble
Palmolive is a trademark of Colgate-Palmolive
Scott is a trademark of Kimberly-Clark Corporation
4-1-3
112321
PN=263
Miscellaneous—Machine
KR46761,000139C -19-22SEP16-1/1
KR46761,000139D -19-22SEP16-1/1
CED,OUO1021,185 -19-04MAR20-1/1
Do Not Service or Adjust Injection Nozzles
or High-Pressure Fuel Pump
If injection nozzles are not working correctly or are dirty,
the engine will not run normally. See an authorized Hitachi
dealer for service.
Changing the high-pressure fuel pump in any way not
approved by the manufacturer will end the warranty. See
copy of the Hitachi warranty on this machine.
Do not service a high-pressure fuel pump that is not
operating correctly. See an authorized Hitachi dealer.
Do Not Service Control Valves, Cylinders,
Pumps, or Motors
Special tools and information are needed to service
control valves, cylinders, pumps, or motors.
If these parts need service, see an authorized Hitachi
dealer.
Precautions for Alternator and Regulator
When batteries are connected, follow these rules:
1. Disconnect negative (-) battery cable when working on
or near alternator or regulator.
2. DO NOT TRY TO POLARIZE ALTERNATOR OR
REGULATOR.
3. Be sure that alternator wires are correctly connected
BEFORE connecting batteries.
4. Do not ground alternator output terminal.
5. Do not disconnect or connect any alternator or
regulator wires while batteries are connected or while
the alternator is operating.
6. Connect batteries or a booster battery in the correct
polarity (positive [+] to positive [+] and negative [-] to
negative [-]).
7. Do not disconnect the batteries when engine is
running and alternator is charging.
8. Disconnect battery cables before connecting battery
charger to the batteries. If machine has more than one
battery, each battery must be charged separately.
9. Before washing machine, place a water repellent
cover over the alternator.
10. To prevent component damage, the water jets need
to be set at a 45-degree angle with reduced water
pressure. Avoid direct contact with electrical and
electronic connectors.
4-1-4
112321
PN=264
Miscellaneous—Machine
Continued on next page TX,SERV,BATT,CARE -19-02APR20-1/2
Handling, Checking, and Servicing Batteries
Carefully
NOTE: Under normal operating conditions, general
service of maintenance free batteries is not required.
CAUTION: Battery gas can explode. Keep sparks
and ames away from batteries. Use a ashlight
to check battery electrolyte level.
Never check battery charge by placing
a metal object across the posts. Use a
voltmeter or hydrometer.
Always remove grounded (-) battery clamp
rst and replace it last.
Sulfuric acid in battery electrolyte is poisonous.
Sulfuric acid is strong enough to burn skin,
eat holes in clothing, and cause blindness
if splashed into eyes.
Avoid the hazard by:
1. Filling batteries in a well-ventilated area.
2. Wearing eye protection and rubber gloves.
3. Avoiding breathing fumes when
electrolyte is added.
4. Avoiding spilling or dripping electrolyte.
5. Using proper jump start procedure.
If acid is spilled on a person:
1. Flush contacted skin with water.
2. Apply baking soda or lime to contacted
area to help neutralize the acid.
3. Flush eyes with water for 15—30 minutes.
4. Get medical attention immediately.
If acid is swallowed:
1. Do not induce vomiting.
2. Drink large amounts of water or milk, but
do not exceed 1.9 L (2 qt).
3. Get medical attention immediately.
CAUTION: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and reproductive harm.
Wash hands after handling.
If electrolyte spills on the oor, use one of the following
mixtures to neutralize the acid: 0.5 kg (1 lb) baking soda in
4 L (1 gal) water or 0.47 L (11.0 oz) household ammonia
in 4 L (1 gal) water.
IMPORTANT: Do not overll the battery cells.
Check the specic gravity of electrolyte in each battery cell.
See an authorized John Deere dealer for
SERVICEGARD™ battery and coolant tester. Follow
directions included with the tester.
TS204 —UN—15APR13
Exploding Battery Gas
TS203 —UN—23AUG88
Battery Electrolyte
T85402 —UN—10NOV88
Battery and Coolant Tester
4-1-5
112321
PN=265
Miscellaneous—Machine
TX,SERV,BATT,CARE -19-02APR20-2/2
Continued on next page KR46761,0000C06 -19-17AUG21-1/2
A fully charged battery will have a corrected specic
gravity reading of 1.260. If the reading is below 1.200,
charge the battery.
SERVICEGARD is a trademark of Deere & Company
Using Battery Charger
12-Volt System
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from exploding
battery. Do not charge a battery if ambient
temperature is below 0°C (32°F). Warm battery
to 16°C (60°F) before charging.
Turn off charger before connecting or
disconnecting it.
IMPORTANT: Do not use battery charger as a
booster if a battery has a 1.150 specic
gravity reading or lower.
Disconnect battery ground (-) clamp before
charging batteries in the machine to prevent
damage to electrical components.
NOTE: Some battery chargers may also be used as a
booster to start the engine. Follow battery charger
manufacturer’s operating instruction before boosting.
1. Turn the battery disconnect switch (if equipped) to the
OFF position.
2. Ventilate the area where battery is being charged.
3. Connect positive (+) cable to the positive (+) terminal
of machine battery.
4. Connect negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal
of machine battery.
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from exploding
battery. Follow battery charger manufacturer’s
operating instructions before charging.
IMPORTANT: Prevent battery or machine damage
from improper use of charger. Follow
battery charger manufacturer’s operation
instruction before charging.
TS204 —UN—15APR13
Prevent Battery Explosions
N36890 —UN—07OCT88
Charger
5. Stop or cut back charging rate if battery case becomes
hot or is venting electrolyte. Battery temperature must
not exceed 52°C (125°F).
6. Remove charger cables in reverse order of connection.
4-1-6
112321
PN=266
Miscellaneous—Machine
KR46761,0000C06 -19-17AUG21-2/2
24-Volt System
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from exploding
battery. Do not charge a battery if ambient
temperature is below 0°C (32°F). Warm each
battery to 16°C (60°F) before charging.
Turn off charger before connecting or
disconnecting it.
IMPORTANT: Do not use battery charger as a
booster if a battery has a 1.150 specic
gravity reading or lower.
Disconnect battery ground (-) clamp before
charging batteries in the machine to prevent
damage to electrical components.
NOTE: Some battery chargers may also be used as a
booster to start the engine. Follow battery charger
manufacturer’s operating instruction before boosting.
1. Turn the battery disconnect switch (if equipped) to the
OFF position.
2. Ventilate the area where batteries are being charged.
3. Connect positive (+) cable to the positive (+) terminal
of one machine battery.
4. Connect negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal
of second machine battery.
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from exploding
battery. Follow battery charger manufacturer’s
operating instructions before charging.
IMPORTANT: Prevent battery or machine damage
from improper use of charger. Follow
battery charger manufacturer’s operation
instruction before charging.
TS204 —UN—15APR13
Prevent Battery Explosions
TX1314241 —UN—22JUN21
Charger
5. Stop or cut back charging rate if battery case becomes
hot or is venting electrolyte. Battery temperature must
not exceed 52°C (125°F).
6. Remove charger cables in reverse order of connection.
4-1-7
112321
PN=267
Miscellaneous—Machine
OUT4001,0000238 -19-09MAR17-1/1
KR46761,00013DF -19-17OCT16-1/1
Using Booster Batteries—24-Volt System
Before boost starting, machine must be properly shut
down to prevent unexpected machine movement when
engine starts.
CAUTION: An explosive gas is produced while
batteries are in use or being charged. Keep ames
or sparks away from the battery area. Make sure
the batteries are charged in a well-ventilated area.
IMPORTANT: The machine electrical system is a
24-volt negative (-) ground. Connect two 12-volt
booster batteries together as shown for 24 volts.
1. Connect one end of the positive (+) cable to the
positive (+) terminal of the machine batteries (A) and
the other end to the positive (+) terminal of the booster
batteries (B).
2. Connect one end of the negative (-) cable to the
negative (-) terminal of the booster batteries. Connect
the other end of the negative (-) cable to the machine
frame as far away from the machine batteries as
possible.
3. Start engine.
T7233JN —UN—21MAY90
Booster Batteries, 2-Battery Application
A—Machine Battery (2 used) B—Booster Battery (2 used)
4. Immediately after starting engine, disconnect the end
of the negative (-) cable from the machine frame. Then
disconnect the other end of the negative (-) cable from
the negative (-) terminal of the booster batteries.
5. Disconnect positive (+) cable from booster batteries
and machine batteries.
Replacing Batteries
CAUTION: Avoid personal injury from battery acid.
Always wear protective equipment. Sulfuric acid
in battery electrolyte is poisonous. Sulfuric acid is
strong enough to burn skin, eat holes in clothing,
and cause blindness if splashed into eyes.
NOTE: Reserve capacity is the time in minutes it
takes a fully charged battery at 26.6°C (80°F)
to drop below 10 volts.
Turn battery disconnect switch to the OFF position. See
Battery Disconnect Switch. (Section 2-3.)
Open left rear service door to access batteries (1).
This machine has two 12-volt batteries with negative (-)
ground connected in series to provide 24 volts.
Only use batteries which meet the following specications:
Specication
Battery—Cold Cranking
Amps (CCA) at -18°C
(0°F) per Battery.......................................................................1000 CCA
Battery—Minutes
Reserve Capacity at 25
Amps per Battery......................................................................... 440 min
TX1226253 —UN—14OCT16
Batteries
1— Battery (2 used)
If one battery in a 24-volt system has malfunctioned
but the other is still good, replace the malfunctioned
battery with one of the same type. For example, replace
a malfunctioned maintenance-free battery with a new
maintenance-free battery. Different types of batteries
may have different rates of charge. This difference could
overload one of the batteries and cause it to malfunction.
4-1-8
112321
PN=268
Miscellaneous—Machine
KR46761,000139E -19-22SEP16-1/1
KR46761,000139F -19-22SEP16-1/1
KR46761,00013A0 -19-22SEP16-1/1
Welding on Machine
CAUTION: Avoid potentially toxic fumes and dust.
Hazardous fumes can be generated when paint is
heated by welding, soldering, or using a torch.
Do all work outside or in a well-ventilated area.
Dispose of paint and solvent properly.
When sanding or grinding painted surfaces,
avoid breathing the dust. Wear an approved
respirator. When using solvent or paint stripper,
remove stripper with soap and water before
welding. Remove solvent or paint stripper
containers and other ammable material from
area. Allow fumes to disperse at least 15
minutes before welding or heating.
IMPORTANT: Have only a qualied welder perform
this job. Connect welder ground clamp close to
each weld area so electrical current does not
pass through any bearings, articulation joints,
or pivot points. Remove or protect all parts that
can be damaged by heat or weld splatter.
1. Remove paint before welding or heating.
•
When sanding or grinding paint, avoid breathing the
dust.
•
Wear an approved respirator. When using solvent or
paint stripper, remove stripper with soap and water
before welding.
•
Remove solvent or paint stripper containers and
other ammable material from area.
•
Allow fumes to disperse at least 15 minutes before
welding or heating.
IMPORTANT: Electrical current traveling from
the welder through the machine electrical
system may damage the machine electrical
system, including battery and control units.
Disconnect battery positive and negative
cables before welding on machine.
2. Disconnect the negative (-) battery cables.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) battery cables.
4. Cover, protect, or move any wiring harness sections
away from welding area.
For any repairs, see an authorized Hitachi dealer.
Keep Electronic Control Unit Connectors
Clean
IMPORTANT: Do not open control unit and do not
clean with a high-pressure spray. Moisture,
dirt, and other contaminants may cause
permanent damage.
1. Keep terminals clean and free of foreign debris.
Moisture, dirt, and other contaminants may cause the
terminals to erode over time and not make a good
electrical connection.
2. If a connector is not in use, put on the proper dust cap
or an appropriate seal to protect it from foreign debris
and moisture.
3. Control units are not repairable.
4. Since control units are the components LEAST likely
to fail, isolate failure before replacing by completing
a diagnostic procedure. (See an authorized Hitachi
dealer.)
5. The wiring harness terminals and connectors for
electronic control units are repairable.
Adding 12-Volt Accessories
IMPORTANT: This machine has a 24-volt electrical
system. Installing 12-volt accessories without
addition of 24-volt to 12-volt converter
may cause battery failure.
This machine is equipped with a 12-volt,
5-amp outlet.
When possible, use 24-volt accessories. If 12-volt
accessories are added, use a 24-volt to 12-volt converter.
Converters are available from an authorized Hitachi dealer.
Converter capacity requirements depend on the load
of the accessories installed. Follow electronic dealer
and manufacturer’s recommendations to determine the
capacity of the converter required and its installation
requirements. If standard equipment, verify if amperage
is adequate for application.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT connect an accessory to one
battery. Connecting a 12-volt accessory to one
battery will cause one battery to overcharge,
and the other battery to undercharge,
causing battery failure.
4-1-9
112321
PN=269
Miscellaneous—Machine
KR46761,0001411 -19-03NOV16-1/1
JDLink™ Machine Monitoring System
(MMS)—If Equipped
JDLink™ is an equipment monitoring and information
delivery system. JDLink™ automatically collects and
manages information about where and how construction
and forestry equipment is being used, as well as critical
machine health data and service status.
For more information, see an authorized Hitachi dealer or
visit www.deere.com (browse to Construction, Services
and Support, JDLink™).
JDLink is a trademark of Deere & Company
4-1-10
112321
PN=270
Miscellaneous—Machine
Continued on next page KR46761,00013E1 -19-25OCT16-1/2
Replacing Fuses
The fuse box is located inside the cab underneath the
panel labeled FUSE.
Remove cover.
IMPORTANT: Install fuse with correct amperage
rating to prevent electrical system damage
from overload.
Amperage Rating Color
1 Black
3 Violet
4 Pink
5
Tan
7-1/2
Brown
10 Red
15 Light Blue
20 Yellow
25
Natural (white)
30
Light Green
Fuse Color Codes
F10
F9
F8
F7
F6
F5
F4
F3
F2
F1
F20
F19
F18
F17
F16
F15
F14
F13
F12
F11
TX1086711 —UN—28JUN13
Fuse Block 1
F30
F29
F28
F27
F26
F25
F24
F23
F22
F21
F40
F39
F38
F37
F36
F35
F34
F33
F32
F31
TX1086712 —UN—28JUN13
Fuse Block 2
F1 — LAMP 20 A Fuse
F2 — WIPER 20 A Fuse
F3 — HEATER 20 A Fuse
F4 — SOLENOID 20 A Fuse
F5 — OPT. 1 ALT/SAW 5 A Fuse
F6 — OPT. 2 ALT 20 A Fuse
F7 — START 5 A Fuse
F8 — ECU 30 A Fuse
F9 — BACK UP 10 A Fuse
F10 — CONTROLLER 5 A Fuse
F11 — FUEL PUMP 5 A Fuse
F12 — RADIO 5 A Fuse
F13 — LIGHTER 10 A Fuse
F14 — MONITOR 5 A Fuse
F15 — AUX 10 A Fuse
F16 — GLOW RELAY 5 A Fuse
F17 — POWER ON 5 A Fuse
F18 — IDLE STOP 5 A Fuse
F19 — HORN 10 A Fuse
F20 — OPT. 3 BATT 5 A Fuse
F21 — Not Used
F22 — DC/DC CONVERTER 25 A Fuse
F23 — SEAT 10 A Fuse
F24 — CCM 20 A Fuse
F25 — Not Used
F26 — Not Used
F27 — AUX. 3 10 A Fuse
F28 — SENSOR UNIT 10 A Fuse
F29 — DHSP_OPT 15 A Fuse
F30 — ACM 10 A Fuse
F31 — 24V OPT PLUG3 10 A Fuse
F32 — 24V OPT PLUG2 10 A Fuse
F33 — 24V OPT PLUG1 10 A Fuse
F34 — AUX. 2 10 A Fuse
F35 — DCU 20 A Fuse
F36 — Not Used
F37 — Not Used
F38 — Not Used
F39 — CCM 10 A Fuse
F40 — FPC 10 A Fuse
Additional fuses located inside left rear service door:
F60 — 140 A Fuse
F61 — Battery 70 A Fuse
F6000 — JDLink™ Unswitched Power 7.5 A Fuse
F6001 — JDLink™ Ground 7.5 A Fuse
F6002 — JDLink™ Switched Power 7.5 A Fuse
4-1-11
112321
PN=271
Miscellaneous—Machine
KR46761,00013E1 -19-25OCT16-2/2
KR46761,000141A -19-07NOV16-1/1
KR46761,00010C9 -19-01FEB16-1/1
JDLink is a trademark of Deere & Company
Fluid Sampling Test Ports
Open right rear service door to access engine oil sampling
test port (1) and hydraulic oil sampling test port (2).
1— Engine Oil Sampling Test
Port
2— Hydraulic Oil Sampling Test
Port
TX1227820 —UN—07NOV16
Engine Oil Sampling Test Port
TX1227822 —UN—07NOV16
Hydraulic Oil Sampling Test Port
Keep ROPS Installed Properly
CAUTION: Make certain all parts are installed
correctly if the roll-over protective structure
(ROPS) is loosened or removed for any reason.
Tighten mounting bolts to proper torque.
The protection offered by ROPS will be
impaired if ROPS is subjected to structural
damage, is involved in an overturn incident,
or is in any way altered. A damaged ROPS
should be replaced, not reused.
When installation of equipment on a machine necessitates
loosening or removing ROPS, mounting bolts must be
tightened to specication.
Specication
ROPS Mounting
Bolts—Torque..............................................................................620 N·m
457 lb·ft
TS176 —UN—23AUG88
ROPS Maintenance
4-1-12
112321
PN=272
Miscellaneous—Machine
TD48962,00000E7 -19-09AUG18-1/1
Tool Mounting Provisions—If Equipped
Mounting clamps (1) are provided for securely storing
hand tools. Mounting clamps are located behind the log
deector on the right side of the machine.
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from
sharp edges. Always mount tools with tool
heads pointed downward.
Always mount tools with tool heads pointed downward.
1— Mounting Clamp (4 used)
TX1261038A —UN—17JUL18
Mounting Clamps
4-1-13
112321
PN=273
Miscellaneous—Machine
KR46761,000127C -19-05JUL16-1/1
Replacing Bucket Teeth—If Equipped
CAUTION: Guard against injury from ying pieces
of metal; wear goggles or safety glasses.
IMPORTANT: Angle the drift toward the bucket to
avoid damaging the rubber pin lock.
Check bucket teeth periodically so that wear does not
extend to the bucket tooth shank.
1. Use a hammer and drift to drive out locking pin.
NOTE: Alternate buckets may use different tooth
assemblies.
2. Remove tooth.
3. Inspect rubber pin lock (A) for damage. Replace if
necessary.
4. If rubber pin lock has moved, reposition in slot in
adapter tooth shank.
5. Position the new tooth over the tooth shank.
6. Drive the locking pin into the hole fully.
A—Rubber Pin Lock
T95784 —UN—10NOV88
Bucket Teeth
T95785 —UN—10NOV88
Rubber Pin Lock
T95786 —UN—10NOV88
Tooth Shank
4-1-14
112321
PN=274
Miscellaneous—Machine
KR46761,000127D -19-05JUL16-1/1
KR46761,000127E -19-05JUL16-1/1
Replacing Bucket Tooth Tip—Heavy-Duty
Bucket—If Equipped
1. Clean tooth (A) and tooth tip (B).
2. Insert lock removal tool under U-shaped pin (C).
CAUTION: Avoid possible injury. Pin may y
after pin is released from tooth tip. Keep a
rm grip on pin to prevent injury.
3. Remove pin.
4. Turn tooth tip counterclockwise and pull tooth tip up
to remove.
5. Clean tooth shank.
6. Replace U-shaped pin and tooth tip at the same time.
7. Insert tooth tip on shank turning tip clockwise.
8. Install U-shaped pin. The side of the pin with the
FRONT mark (D) must face tooth tip. Make sure pin is
rmly engaged over tooth tip.
A—Tooth
B—Tooth Tip
C—Pin
D—FRONT Mark
T6879EE —UN—06DEC88
Bucket Tooth Tip
T7527DO —UN—27JUN91
U-Shaped Pin
Replacing Bucket Teeth—TK Series—If
Equipped
IMPORTANT: Prevent machine damage. Check
bucket teeth periodically so that wear does
not extend to the bucket tooth shank.
1. Remove pin (1) by rotating counterclockwise 180°
using a ratchet and socket.
2. Remove tooth.
3. Inspect pin and rubber locks (2) for damage. Replace
if necessary.
4. Position the new tooth over the tooth shank.
5. Install pin by rotating clockwise 180°.
1— Pin
2— Rubber Lock (2 used)
TX1150806 —UN—10JAN14
Pin
TX1150895 —UN—10JAN14
Rubber Lock
4-1-15
112321
PN=275
Miscellaneous—Machine
KR46761,000127F -19-05JUL16-1/1
TD48962,0000228 -19-08SEP20-1/1
Removing the Bucket—If Equipped
1. Lower bucket to the ground.
2. Remove snap rings and locking pins.
3. Slide O-ring seals out of way. Remove bucket pins.
Inspect Seat Belt
CAUTION: Prevent personal injury. Check
condition of seat belt and mounting hardware
before operating machine. Replace if worn,
frayed, or damaged.
Replace seat belt at least every 3 years,
regardless of condition.
1. Examine seat belt (1) webbing for cuts, fraying,
extreme, or unusual wear.
2. Inspect buckle (2) for damage. Insert tongue (3) into
buckle, listen for an audible “click” sound, and tug on
the belt to ensure the belt is properly latched.
3. Examine seat belt for wires that are exposed, frayed,
or broken if belt is equipped with electrical wires.
4. Check seat belt retractor (4) by slowly pulling the belt
and releasing to verify the webbing spools out and
retracts without locking.
5. Examine seat belt mounting hardware attachment
points for rust, corrosion, looseness, or missing
hardware.
1— Seat Belt
2— Buckle
3— Tongue
4— Retractor
5— Right Seat Belt-to-Seat Cap
Screw
6— Seat Belt Switch Connector
7— Left Seat Belt-to-Seat Cap
Screw
TX1300689 —UN—22JUL20
2-Point Seat Belt (retractor side shown)
TX1300690 —UN—22JUL20
2-Point Seat Belt (buckle side shown)
4-1-16
112321
PN=276
Miscellaneous—Machine
TD48962,0000229 -19-08SEP20-1/1
VD76477,00001F7 -19-28AUG09-1/1
Replacing Seat Belt
1. Prepare machine for maintenance. See Prepare
Machine for Maintenance. (Section 3-2.)
2. Remove right seat belt-to-seat cap screw (2).
3. Disconnect seat belt switch connector (3).
4. Remove left seat belt-to-seat cap screw (1).
5. Remove seat belt.
6. Clean and inspect parts and repair or replace as
necessary.
7. Install left seat belt-to-seat cap screw and tighten to
specication.
Specication
Left Seat Belt-to-Seat
Cap Screw—Torque......................................................................39 N·m
29 lb·ft
8. Install right seat belt-to-seat cap screw and tighten
to specication.
Specication
Right Seat Belt-to-Seat
Cap Screw—Torque......................................................................39 N·m
29 lb·ft
9. Connect seat belt switch connector.
TX1277013A —UN—23APR19
Left Seat Belt-to-Seat Cap Screw
TX1277014A —UN—23APR19
Right Seat Belt-to-Seat Cap Screw
1— Left Seat Belt-to-Seat Cap
Screw
2— Right Seat Belt-to-Seat Cap
Screw
3— Seat Belt Switch Connector
Track Sag General Information
To maximize undercarriage life, keep track sag within
specication. Tracks may require adjustment several
times during a working day due to changing soil type and
moisture content.
Adjust tracks in the actual operating conditions.
TIGHT TRACK: Packing causes a tight track. If material
packs in the undercarriage, adjust tracks with the material
packed in the components.
While the track spring will recoil and the machine can
continue to operate with a tight track, continued operation
will result in excessive pin and bushing wear, sprocket
popping, tooth tip wear, and excessive loads on the entire
undercarriage and travel drive system.
Machine productivity and fuel consumption are also
adversely affected because increased horsepower is
needed to move the machine.
LOOSE TRACK: A loose track has more side to side
motion, increasing side wear on the links, rollers, and front
idler. An excessively loose track will slap at high ground
speeds, resulting in high impact loads on the sprocket
teeth, bushings, and carrier rollers.
4-1-17
112321
PN=277
Miscellaneous—Machine
CN93077,00005F0 -19-15APR21-1/1
TX,90,FF1225 -19-15MAR93-1/1
Check Track Shoe Hardware
Check track shoes periodically for loose or missing cap
screws and nuts. For shoes with missing or loose cap
screws and nuts, remove shoes and clean the mating
surface of shoes and links before tightening cap screws
and nuts. Replace cap screws when they have been
stretched to yield previously.
Operating a machine with loose shoes can cause the cap
screws and holes in the shoes and links to wear, making
it difcult to keep the shoes tight. Loose shoes can also
cause hardware malfunction and loss of shoes.
1. Clean the mating surface of shoe and links. Install
shoes.
2. Apply a light coating of oil to cap screw threads before
installing.
3. Install nuts with the rounded corners against milled
surface of link and chamfered side away from link.
Check that nuts are square with the milled surface of
link and there is full contact between nut and milled
surface. As necessary, hold the nut so it does not turn.
TX1255661 —UN—19APR18
Cap Screw Tightening Sequence
4. Starting at any cap screw, tighten all cap screws in
sequence shown to the torque specication, then
tighten an additional 1/2 turn (180°).
Hardware Torque Specications
Check cap screws and nuts to be sure they are tight.
If hardware is loose, tighten to torque shown on the
following charts unless a special torque is specied.
4-1-18
112321
PN=278
Miscellaneous—Machine
DX,TORQ1 -19-30MAY18-1/1
Unied Inch Bolt and Screw Torque Values
TS1671 —UN—01MAY03
SAE Grade 1
a
SAE Grade 2
b
SAE Grade 5, 5.1 or 5.2 SAE Grade 8 or 8.2
Bolt or Screw
Size
Hex Head
c
Flange
Head
d
Hex Head
c
Flange
Head
d
Hex Head
c
Flange
Head
d
Hex Head
c
Flange
Head
d
N·m lb·in N·m lb·in N·m lb·in N·m lb·in N·m lb·in N·m lb·in N·m lb·in N·m lb·in
1/4
3.1 27.3 3.2 28.4 5.1 45.5 5.3 47.3 7.9 70.2 8.3 73.1 11.2 99.2 11.6 103
N·m lb·ft N·m lb·ft
5/16
6.1 54.1 6.5
57.7
10.2 90.2 10.9 96.2 15.7 139 16.8 149 22.2 16.4 23.7 17.5
N·m lb·ft N·m lb·ft
3/8
10.5 93.6 11.5 102 17.6 156 19.2 170 27.3 20.1 29.7 21.9 38.5 28.4 41.9 30.9
N·m lb·ft N·m lb·ft
7/16
16.7 148 18.4 163 27.8 20.5 30.6 22.6 43 31.7 47.3 34.9 60.6 44.7 66.8 49.3
N·m lb·ft N·m lb·ft
1/2
25.9 19.1 28.2 20.8 43.1 31.8 47 34.7 66.6 49.1 72.8 53.7 94 69.3 103 75.8
9/16
36.7 27.1 40.5 29.9 61.1 45.1 67.5 49.8 94.6 69.8 104
77
134 98.5 148 109
5/8
51 37.6 55.9 41.2 85 62.7 93.1 68.7 131 96.9 144 106 186 137 203 150
3/4
89.5 66 98 72.3 149 110 164 121 230 170 252 186 325 240 357 263
7/8
144 106 157 116 144 106 157 116 370 273 405 299 522 385 572 422
1 216 159 236 174 216 159 236 174 556 410 609 449 785 579 860 634
1-1/8
305 225 335 247 305 225 335 247 685 505 751 554 1110 819 1218 898
1-1/4
427 315 469 346 427 315 469 346 957 706 1051
775
1552 1145 1703 1256
1-3/8
564 416 618 456 564 416 618 456 1264 932 1386 1022 2050 1512 2248 1658
1-1/2
743 548 815 601 743 548 815 601 1665 1228 1826 1347 2699 1991 2962 2185
The nominal torque values listed are for general use only with the assumed
wrenching accuracy of 20%, such as a manual torque wrench.
DO NOT use these values if a different torque value or tightening procedure is
given for a specic application.
For lock nuts, for stainless steel fasteners, or for nuts on U-bolts, see the
tightening instructions for the specic application.
Replace fasteners with the same or higher property class. If
higher property class fasteners are used, tighten these to the
strength of the original.
•
Make sure that fastener threads are clean.
•
Apply a thin coat of Hy-Gard™ or equivalent oil under the head and on the threads of the fastener, as shown in the following image.
•
Be conservative with the amount of oil to reduce the potential for hydraulic lockup in blind holes due to excessive oil.
•
Properly start thread engagement.
TS1741 —UN—22MAY18
a
Grade 1 applies for hex cap screws over 6 in (152 mm) long, and for all other types of bolts and screws of any length.
b
Grade 2 applies for hex cap screws (not hex bolts) up to 6 in (152 mm) long.
c
Hex head column values are valid for ISO 4014 and ISO 4017 hex head, ISO 4162 hex socket head, and ISO 4032 hex nuts.
d
Hex ange column values are valid for ASME B18.2.3.9M, ISO 4161, or EN 1665 hex ange products.
4-1-19
112321
PN=279
Miscellaneous—Machine
DX,TORQ2 -19-30MAY18-1/1
Metric Bolt and Screw Torque Values
TS1742 —UN—31MAY18
4.84.8 8.8 9.8 10.9
12.9
12.9
10.9
9.8
8.8
4.8
Class 4.8 Class 8.8 or 9.8 Class 10.9 Class 12.9
Bolt or Screw
Size
Hex Head
a
Flange
Head
b
Hex Head
a
Flange
Head
b
Hex Head
a
Flange
Head
b
Hex Head
a
Flange
Head
b
N·m lb·in N·m lb·in N·m lb·in N·m lb·in N·m lb·in N·m lb·in N·m lb·in N·m lb·in
M6 3.6 31.9 3.9 34.5 6.7 59.3 7.3 64.6 9.8 86.7 10.8 95.6 11.5 102 12.6 112
N·m
lb·ft
N·m
lb·ft N·m lb·ft N·m lb·ft
M8 8.6 76.1 9.4 83.2 16.2 143 17.6 156 23.8 17.6 25.9 19.1 27.8 20.5 30.3 22.3
N·m
lb·ft
N·m
lb·ft
N·m
lb·ft
M10 16.9 150 18.4 13.6 31.9 23.5 34.7 25.6 46.8 34.5 51 37.6
55
40.6 60 44.3
N·m
lb·ft
M12
— — — —
55
40.6 61 45 81 59.7 89 65.6 95 70.1 105 77.4
M14
— — — —
87 64.2 96 70.8 128 94.4 141 104 150 111 165 122
M16
— — — —
135 99.6 149 110 198 146 219 162 232 171 257 190
M18
— — — —
193 142 214 158 275 203 304 224 322 245 356 263
M20
— — — —
272 201 301 222 387 285 428 316 453 334 501 370
M22
— — — —
365 263 405 299 520 384 576 425 608 448 674 497
M24
— — — —
468 345 518 382 666 491 738 544 780
575
864 637
M27
— — — —
683 504 758 559 973 718 1080 797 1139 840 1263 932
M30
— — — —
932 687 1029 759 1327 979 1466 1081 1553 1145 1715 1265
M33
— — — —
1258 928 1398 1031 1788 1319 1986 1465 2092 1543 2324 1714
M36
— — — —
1617 1193 1789 1319 2303 1699 2548 1879 2695 1988 2982 2199
The nominal torque values listed are for general use only with the assumed
wrenching accuracy of 20%, such as a manual torque wrench.
DO NOT use these values if a different torque value or tightening procedure is
given for a specic application.
For lock nuts, for stainless steel fasteners, or for nuts on U-bolts, see the
tightening instructions for the specic application.
Replace fasteners with the same or higher property class. If
higher property class fasteners are used, tighten these to the
strength of the original.
•
Make sure that fastener threads are clean.
•
Apply a thin coat of Hy-Gard™ or equivalent oil under the head and on the threads of the fastener, as shown in the following image.
•
Be conservative with the amount of oil to reduce the potential for hydraulic lockup in blind holes due to excessive oil.
•
Properly start thread engagement.
TS1741 —UN—22MAY18
a
Hex head column values are valid for ISO 4014 and ISO 4017 hex head, ISO 4162 hex socket head, and ISO 4032 hex nuts.
b
Hex ange column values are valid for ASME B18.2.3.9M, ISO 4161, or EN 1665 hex ange products.
4-1-20
112321
PN=280
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
KR46761,0001414 -19-01AUG18-1/50
KR46761,0001414 -19-01AUG18-2/50
KR46761,0001414 -19-01AUG18-3/50
Continued on next page KR46761,0001414 -19-01AUG18-4/50
Operational Checkout
This procedure is used to check operation of machine.
The procedure is designed so the operator can do a
walk-around inspection, check machine operation, and
perform specic checks from the operator's seat.
If there is a problem with machine, diagnostic information
in this checkout will help pinpoint the probable cause.
This information may allow the operator to perform a
simple adjustment to correct the problem. Use the table of
contents to help nd adjustment procedures.
A location will be required which is level and has adequate
space to complete checks. No tools or equipment are
needed to perform checkout.
Complete necessary visual checks (oil levels, oil condition,
external leaks, loose hardware, linkage, and wiring) prior
to doing checkout. The machine must be at operating
temperature for many of the checks.
Read each check completely before performing. If no
problem is found, the operator will be instructed to go to
the next check. If a problem is indicated, the operator
will be referred to a procedure for adjustment, repair, or
replacement.
The monitor can be used to perform diagnostic and
operational checks. The monitor can display engine
speed, pressures, and diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs).
Diagnostic Trouble Code Check
Display and Clear
Trouble Codes
Always check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) and correct them before performing
operational checkout.
Diagnostic trouble codes can be displayed by using one of the following methods:
•
Monitor
•
With Service ADVISOR™
•
MPDr
YES: Correct all
diagnostic trouble codes
before proceeding.
LOOK: Are diagnostic trouble codes present? NO: Proceed with
operational checkout.
Service ADVISOR is a trademark of Deere & Company
Operational Checks—Key Switch Off, Engine Off Checks
4-2-1
112321
PN=281
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Continued on next page KR46761,0001414 -19-01AUG18-5/50
Horn Circuit Check
1
TX1213199 —UN—23MAR16
Forestry Excavator or Forestry Excavator With Processor
1
TX1213200 —UN—23MAR16
Forestry Excavator With Thumb or Forestry Excavator With Power Clam
NOTE: Machines equipped with a processor do not include a horn
button on the pilot control lever.
TX1213273 —UN—23MAR16
Horn Switch (processor only)
1— Horn Button (forestry excavator)
1— Horn Button (forestry excavator with thumb or power clam)
1— Horn Switch (processor)
Key switch in OFF position. YES: Go to next check.
Press horn button (1) located on left pilot control lever or horn switch (1) on the left
console behind the left pilot control lever.
NO: Check horn 10 A
fuse (marked HORN)
(F19). See Replacing
Fuses. (Section 4-1.)
LISTEN: Does horn sound? IF OK: See an authorized
Hitachi dealer.
4-2-2
112321
PN=282
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Continued on next page KR46761,0001414 -19-01AUG18-6/50
Hour Meter and Fuel
Gauge Check
A
C
C
O
N
S
T
A
R
T
5
9
3
8
54
0
2
7
1
6
OFF
2
MODE
1
A/I
ON
A/I
OFF
OFF
OFF
INT
ON
PUSH
HL
PUSH
TUNE/AM-FM
PUSH
MODE
PUSH
MENU/SET
min
-1
L
H
PUSH
VOL/PWR
PUSH
/VOL
/PWR
2
TX1086727 —UN—11JAN11
Switch Panel
50.0 h
10:00
H
C
AM
0.00 gal/h
F
E
1
6
11
TX1160748 —UN—15MAY14
Hour Meter and Fuel Gauge Screen
1— Hour Meter
2— Home Button
6— Fuel Gauge
11— Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Gauge
Press and hold home button (2) until default screen appears. YES: Go to next check.
4-2-3
112321
PN=283
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
KR46761,0001414 -19-01AUG18-7/50
Continued on next page KR46761,0001414 -19-01AUG18-8/50
LOOK: Does hour meter (1) display machine hours? NO: Check data converter
and main controller battery
power 5 A fuse (marked
CONTROLLER) (F10).
See Replacing Fuses.
(Section 4-1.)
LOOK: Does fuel gauge (6) display correct fuel level? IF OK: See an authorized
Hitachi dealer.
Operational Checks—Key Switch On, Engine Off Checks
4-2-4
112321
PN=284
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Continued on next page KR46761,0001414 -19-01AUG18-9/50
Monitor Start-Up Check
TX1188838A —UN—26MAR15
System Starting Screen
TX1160713A —UN—15MAY14
Default Screen
1— System Starting Screen
2— Default Screen
NOTE: The aftertreatment device regeneration inhibit indicator will display on the
monitor when the key switch is in ON position. Once the engine is started,
the indicator will disappear unless aftertreatment device auto regeneration
has been disabled by the operator through the monitor.
When the key switch is turned to the ON position, the system starting screen (1)
displays for approximately 2 seconds and then the default screen (2) is displayed.
Turn key switch to ON position. YES: Go to next check.
LOOK: Does monitor display system starting screen? NO: Check monitor 5 A
fuse (marked MONITOR)
(F14). See Replacing
Fuses. (Section 4-1.)
LOOK: Does default screen with hour meter appear after system starting screen
disappears?
IF OK: See an authorized
Hitachi dealer.
4-2-5
112321
PN=285
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Continued on next page KR46761,0001414 -19-01AUG18-10/50
Monitor, Gauges, and
Battery Relay Checks
TX1160749A —UN—15MAY14
Default Screen
50.0
h
10:00
H
C
AM
AUTO
24.0
˚
C
FM
VOL
CH1
ST
MHz
81.3
ECO
0.00 gal/h
F
E
8
TX1160750 —UN—15MAY14
Engine Preheat Indicator
1— Work Mode Indicator
2— Aftertreatment Device Regeneration Inhibit Indicator
3— Power Mode Indicator
4— Hour Meter
5— Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge
6— Fuel Gauge
7— Travel Mode Indicator
8— Engine Preheat Indicator
11— Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Gauge
IMPORTANT: This machine is equipped with glow plugs. Glow plugs
are automatically controlled by the engine controller when the
key is turned ON. Do not start the engine until the engine preheat
indicator (8) disappears on the monitor. Indicator will not appear
if ambient air temperature is above 0°C (32°F).
NOTE: The aftertreatment device regeneration inhibit indicator (2) will display on
the monitor when the key switch is in ON position. Once the engine is
started, the indicator will disappear unless aftertreatment device regeneration
has been disabled by the operator through the monitor.
NOTE: If engine coolant temperature is below 30°C (86°F), engine
temperature gauge needle may not move.
4-2-6
112321
PN=286
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Continued on next page KR46761,0001414 -19-01AUG18-11/50
Turn key switch to ON position.
LISTEN: Does battery relay “click”?
LOOK: Does engine coolant temperature gauge (5) display correct engine coolant
temperature?
LOOK: Does fuel gauge (6) display correct fuel level?
LOOK: Does diesel exhaust uid (DEF) gauge (11) display correct uid level?
LOOK: Does hour meter (4) display machine hours?
LOOK: Does work mode indicator (1) display correct work mode (bucket or
attachment)?
YES: Go to next check.
LOOK: Does travel mode indicator (7) display correct travel mode? NO: Battery relay does
not click. Verify battery
disconnect switch is turned
to the ON position. See
Battery Disconnect Switch.
(Section 2-3.)
LOOK: Does power mode indicator (3) display correct power mode? NO: Monitor does not
come on. Check battery
70 A fuse (F61). See
Replacing Fuses. (Section
4-1.)
LOOK: Does engine preheat indicator (8) appear on monitor and then disappear after
glow plugs reach specic temperature?
IF OK: See an authorized
Hitachi dealer.
4-2-7
112321
PN=287
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Continued on next page KR46761,0001414 -19-01AUG18-12/50
Rear Camera Check
(if equipped)
TX1160715A —UN—15MAY14
Default Screen
5— Default Screen
TX1086306A —UN—28DEC10
Main Menu Screen
1— Main Menu Screen
TX1086272A —UN—27DEC10
Switch Panel
2— Monitor Dial
3— Back Button
4— Home Button
4-2-8
112321
PN=288
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Continued on next page KR46761,0001414 -19-01AUG18-13/50
CAUTION: The rear camera image is designed to supplement other safety
practices and is not intended to be the sole method of collision avoidance.
Always be alert and aware of the surroundings when operating this
machine to avoid possible injury or death to operator or others.
Turn key switch to ON position.
When the default screen (5) is displayed, press monitor dial (2) on the switch panel.
LOOK: Does main menu screen (1) display?
Rotate monitor dial to highlight settings menu.
Press monitor dial.
LOOK: Does settings menu display?
At settings menu, rotate monitor dial to highlight rear view camera monitor.
Press monitor dial to display rear view camera monitor menu.
LOOK: Does rear view camera monitor menu display?
Press monitor dial to turn camera ON (enable).
Press home button (4).
TX1160752A —UN—15MAY14
Rear Camera Display
6— Rear Camera Display
LOOK: Does rear camera display (6) appear on default screen?
Repeat above steps.
At rear view camera monitor menu, press monitor dial to turn camera OFF (disable).
Press home button.
YES: Go to next check.
LOOK: Does default screen appear without rear camera display? NO: See an authorized
Hitachi dealer.
4-2-9
112321
PN=289
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Continued on next page KR46761,0001414 -19-01AUG18-14/50
Travel Lever and Pedal
Neutral Checks
1
2
TX1093760 —UN—31AUG11
Travel Lever and Pedal
1— Forward
2— Rearward
Push both travel levers and pedals forward (1), then release.
Pull both travel levers and pedals rearward (2), then release.
FEEL: Do levers and pedals require equal effort to operate in forward and reverse? YES: Go to next check.
LOOK: Do levers and pedals return to neutral at the same time when released? NO: See an authorized
Hitachi dealer.
4-2-10
112321
PN=290
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Continued on next page KR46761,0001414 -19-01AUG18-15/50
Light Circuit Checks
A
C
C
O
N
S
T
A
R
T
5
9
3
8
54
0
2
7
1
6
OFF
2
MODE
1
A/I
ON
A/I
OFF
OFF
OFF
INT
ON
PUSH
HL
PUSH
TUNE/AM-FM
PUSH
MODE
PUSH
MENU/SET
min
-1
L
H
PUSH
VOL/PWR
PUSH
/VOL
/PWR
3
TX1086747 —UN—11JAN11
Switch Panel
3— Work Light Switch
Turn work light switch (3) to rst position.
LOOK: Is monitor panel backlight and base machine work light on?
LOOK: Does switch panel illuminate?
Turn work light switch to second position.
YES: Go to next check.
LOOK: Does base machine work light stay on and switch panel stay illuminated? NO: Check work and
boom lights 20 A fuse
(marked LAMP) (F1)
and data converter and
main controller battery
power 5 A fuse (marked
CONTROLLER) (F10).
See Replacing Fuses.
(Section 4-1.)
LOOK: Does upper cab lights, boom lights, arm lights (if equipped), and rear cab
lights (if equipped) come on and monitor panel backlight change to night mode?
IF OK: See an authorized
Hitachi dealer.
4-2-11
112321
PN=291
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Continued on next page KR46761,0001414 -19-01AUG18-16/50
Windshield Wiper
Control Check
A
C
C
O
N
S
T
A
R
T
5
9
3
8
54
0
2
7
1
6
OFF
2
MODE
1
A/I
ON
A/I
OFF
OFF
OFF
INT
ON
PUSH
HL
PUSH
TUNE/AM-FM
PUSH
MODE
PUSH
MENU/SET
min
-1
L
H
PUSH
VOL/PWR
PUSH
/VOL
/PWR
4
TX1086748 —UN—11JAN11
Switch Panel
4— Windshield Wiper and Washer Switch
Turn windshield wiper and washer switch (4) to rst INT position.
LOOK: Does wiper operate intermittently (8-second interval)?
Turn windshield wiper and washer switch to second INT position.
LOOK: Does wiper operate intermittently, but faster than when in rst position
(6-second interval)?
Turn windshield wiper and washer switch to third INT position.
LOOK: Does wiper operate intermittently, but faster than when in second position
(3-second interval)?
Turn windshield wiper and washer switch to ON position.
LOOK: Does wiper operate continuously? YES: Go to next check.
Turn windshield wiper and washer switch to OFF position. NO: Check windshield
wiper and washer 20 A
fuse (marked WIPER)
(F2). See Replacing
Fuses. (Section 4-1.)
LOOK: Does wiper arm stop and retract to left side of windshield? IF OK: See an authorized
Hitachi dealer.
4-2-12
112321
PN=292
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Continued on next page KR46761,0001414 -19-01AUG18-17/50
Windshield Washer
Control Check
A
C
C
O
N
S
T
A
R
T
5
9
3
8
54
0
2
7
1
6
OFF
2
MODE
1
A/I
ON
A/I
OFF
OFF
OFF
INT
ON
PUSH
HL
PUSH
TUNE/AM-FM
PUSH
MODE
PUSH
MENU/SET
min
-1
L
H
PUSH
VOL/PWR
PUSH
/VOL
/PWR
4
TX1086748 —UN—11JAN11
Switch Panel
4— Windshield Wiper and Washer Switch
IMPORTANT: Washer motor may be damaged if washer switch is
held for more than 20 seconds or continually operated with
no uid in the washer uid tank.
NOTE: While wiper is being operated in INT mode, when windshield wiper and washer
switch (4) is pressed, wiper mode is changed to continuous mode.
Press windshield wiper and washer switch (4).
LOOK: Is washer uid supplied to windshield?
Press and hold windshield wiper and washer switch for 3 seconds. YES: Go to next check.
LOOK: Does wiper start and continue operating until switch is released? NO: Check washer
uid level. See Check
Windshield Washer
Fluid Level—If Equipped.
(Section 3-3.)
Release windshield wiper and washer switch.
NO: Check windshield
wiper and washer 20 A
fuse (marked WIPER)
(F2). See Replacing
Fuses. (Section 4-1.)
LOOK: Does wiper stop and retract to left side of windshield? IF OK: See an authorized
Hitachi dealer.
4-2-13
112321
PN=293
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
KR46761,0001414 -19-01AUG18-18/50
Continued on next page KR46761,0001414 -19-01AUG18-19/50
Windshield Washer
Circuit Check
IMPORTANT: Washer motor may be damaged if washer switch is
held for more than 20 seconds or continually operated with
no uid in the washer uid tank.
A
C
C
O
N
S
T
A
R
T
5
9
3
8
54
0
2
7
1
6
OFF
2
MODE
1
A/I
ON
A/I
OFF
OFF
OFF
INT
ON
PUSH
HL
PUSH
TUNE/AM-FM
PUSH
MODE
PUSH
MENU/SET
min
-1
L
H
PUSH
VOL/PWR
PUSH
/VOL
/PWR
4
TX1086748 —UN—11JAN11
Switch Panel
YES: Go to next check.
4— Windshield Wiper and Washer Switch
NO: Check washer
uid level. See Check
Windshield Washer
Fluid Level—If Equipped.
(Section 3-3.)
Press windshield wiper and washer switch (4) and hold for 3 seconds. NO: Check windshield
wiper and washer 20 A
fuse (marked WIPER)
(F2). See Replacing
Fuses. (Section 4-1.)
LOOK: Is washer uid supplied to windshield? IF OK: See an authorized
Hitachi dealer.
Operational Checks—Key Switch On, Engine On Checks
4-2-14
112321
PN=294
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Continued on next page KR46761,0001414 -19-01AUG18-20/50
Monitor and Gauge
Circuit Checks
TX1160754A —UN—15MAY14
Operating Screen
1— Power Mode Indicator
2— Hour Meter
3— Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge
4— Fuel Gauge
5— Alarm Indicator
11— Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Gauge
IMPORTANT: Engine damage could occur if the alarm indicator (5)
or engine oil pressure alarm indicator comes on after engine
starts. Turn off machine immediately.
NOTE: The aftertreatment device regeneration inhibit indicator will display on the
monitor when the key switch is in ON position. Once the engine is started,
the indicator will disappear unless aftertreatment device auto regeneration
has been disabled by the operator through the monitor.
Start engine.
LOOK: Do all alarm indicator displays remain off after engine starts?
LOOK: Does alarm indicator (5) remain off after engine starts? YES: Go to next check.
LOOK: Does engine coolant temperature gauge (3) display correct engine coolant
temperature?
NO: Engine oil pressure
alarm displayed.
Immediately stop engine
and check engine oil level.
See Check Engine Oil
Level. (Section 3-4.)
LOOK: Does fuel gauge (4) display correct fuel level? NO: Alternator alarm
indicator displayed. Check
alternator drive belt.
LOOK: Does diesel exhaust uid (DEF) gauge (11) display correct uid level? IF OK: See an authorized
Hitachi dealer.
4-2-15
112321
PN=295
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Continued on next page KR46761,0001414 -19-01AUG18-21/50
Pilot Shutoff Circuit
Check
1
TX1093762 —UN—28JUN13
Engine Speed Dial
TX1093763 —UN—19JUL11
Locked
1— Engine Speed Dial
CAUTION: Avoid possible injury. Machine may move during this check.
Make sure area is clear and large enough to operate all machine functions.
Turn engine speed dial (1) to L (slow idle) position.
Place pilot shutoff lever in locked (UP) position.
Slowly actuate dig and travel functions. YES: See an authorized
Hitachi dealer.
LOOK: Do dig and travel functions operate? NO: Continue check.
TX1093764 —UN—19JUL11
Unlocked
Place pilot shutoff lever in unlocked (DOWN) position.
Slowly actuate dig and travel functions. YES: Go to next check.
LOOK: Do dig and travel functions operate? NO: See an authorized
Hitachi dealer.
4-2-16
112321
PN=296
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Continued on next page KR46761,0001414 -19-01AUG18-22/50
Engine Speed Dial Check
A
C
C
O
N
S
T
A
R
T
5
9
3
8
54
0
2
7
1
6
OFF
2
MODE
1
A/I
ON
A/I
OFF
OFF
OFF
INT
ON
PUSH
HL
PUSH
TUNE/AM-FM
PUSH
MODE
PUSH
MENU/SET
min
-1
L
H
PUSH
VOL/PWR
PUSH
/VOL
/PWR
1
2
3
4
TX1086753 —UN—11JAN11
Switch Panel
1— Engine Speed Dial
2— Auto-Idle Switch
3— Travel Mode Switch
4— Power Mode Button
Turn auto-idle switch (2) to A/I OFF.
Place pilot shutoff lever in locked (UP) position.
Turn engine speed dial (1) clockwise.
LISTEN: Does engine speed increase? YES: Go to next check.
Turn engine speed dial counterclockwise.
NO: Check data converter
and main controller battery
power 5 A fuse (marked
CONTROLLER) (F10).
See Replacing Fuses.
(Section 4-1.)
LISTEN: Does engine speed decrease? IF OK: See an authorized
Hitachi dealer.
4-2-17
112321
PN=297
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Continued on next page KR46761,0001414 -19-01AUG18-23/50
ECO (economy) Mode
and PWR (power)
Mode Check
A
C
C
O
N
S
T
A
R
T
5
9
3
8
54
0
2
7
1
6
OFF
2
MODE
1
A/I
ON
A/I
OFF
OFF
OFF
INT
ON
PUSH
HL
PUSH
TUNE/AM-FM
PUSH
MODE
PUSH
MENU/SET
min
-1
L
H
PUSH
VOL/PWR
PUSH
/VOL
/PWR
1
2
3
4
TX1086753 —UN—11JAN11
Switch Panel
1— Engine Speed Dial
2— Auto-Idle Switch
3— Travel Mode Switch
4— Power Mode Button
Press power mode button (4) until PWR (power) mode is displayed on monitor.
Turn auto-idle switch (2) to A/I OFF.
Turn engine speed dial (1) to H (fast idle) position.
Press power mode button until ECO (economy) mode is displayed on monitor.
LOOK/LISTEN: Does engine speed decrease?
Press power mode button until PWR (power) mode is displayed on monitor. YES: Go to next check.
LOOK/LISTEN: Does engine speed increase? NO: See an authorized
Hitachi dealer.
4-2-18
112321
PN=298
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Continued on next page KR46761,0001414 -19-01AUG18-24/50
H/P (high power) Mode
Check
A
C
C
O
N
S
T
A
R
T
5
9
3
8
54
0
2
7
1
6
OFF
2
MODE
1
A/I
ON
A/I
OFF
OFF
OFF
INT
ON
PUSH
HL
PUSH
TUNE/AM-FM
PUSH
MODE
PUSH
MENU/SET
min
-1
L
H
PUSH
VOL/PWR
PUSH
/VOL
/PWR
1
2
3
4
TX1086753 —UN—11JAN11
Switch Panel
1— Engine Speed Dial
2— Auto-Idle Switch
3— Travel Mode Switch
4— Power Mode Button
Turn auto-idle switch (2) to A/I OFF.
Turn engine speed dial (1) to H (fast idle) position.
Press power mode button (4) until H/P (high power) mode is displayed on monitor. YES: Go to next check.
Actuate arm in function over relief. NO: Check data converter
and main controller battery
power 5 A fuse (marked
CONTROLLER) (F10).
See Replacing Fuses.
(Section 4-1.)
LOOK/LISTEN: Does engine speed increase as function goes over relief? IF OK: See an authorized
Hitachi dealer.
4-2-19
112321
PN=299
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Continued on next page KR46761,0001414 -19-01AUG18-25/50
Auto-Idle Circuit Check
A
C
C
O
N
S
T
A
R
T
5
9
3
8
54
0
2
7
1
6
OFF
2
MODE
1
A/I
ON
A/I
OFF
OFF
OFF
INT
ON
PUSH
HL
PUSH
TUNE/AM-FM
PUSH
MODE
PUSH
MENU/SET
min
-1
L
H
PUSH
VOL/PWR
PUSH
/VOL
/PWR
1
2
3
4
TX1086753 —UN—11JAN11
Switch Panel
1— Engine Speed Dial
2— Auto-Idle Switch
3— Travel Mode Switch
4— Power Mode Button
Turn engine speed dial (1) to H (fast idle) position.
Press power mode button (4) until H/P (high power) mode is displayed on monitor.
Turn auto-idle switch (2) to A/I OFF.
Place pilot shutoff lever to unlocked (DOWN) position.
Turn auto-idle switch to A/I ON.
LOOK/LISTEN: Does engine speed decrease after 4—6 seconds? YES: Go to next check.
Slowly actuate dig function. NO: Check solenoid 20 A
fuse (marked SOLENOID)
(F4). See Replacing
Fuses. (Section 4-1.)
LOOK/LISTEN: Does engine speed return to fast idle? IF OK: See an authorized
Hitachi dealer.
4-2-20
112321
PN=300
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Continued on next page KR46761,0001414 -19-01AUG18-26/50
Travel Alarm Check
C
A
B
TX1095497 —UN—09AUG11
Travel Alarm
A—Pilot Shutoff Lever
B—Travel Lever and Pedal Forward
C—Travel Lever and Pedal Rearward
CAUTION: Avoid possible injury. Machine will move during this check.
Make sure area is clear and large enough to operate machine.
Place pilot shutoff lever (A) in unlocked (DOWN) position.
Push travel lever and pedal forward (B).
LISTEN: Does travel alarm sound? YES: Go to next check.
Push travel lever and pedal rearward (C). NO: Check optional and
attachment connector
5 A fuse (marked OPT.
1 ALT/SAW) (F5). See
Replacing Fuses. (Section
4-1.)
LISTEN: Does travel alarm sound? IF OK: See an authorized
Hitachi dealer.
4-2-21
112321
PN=301
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Continued on next page KR46761,0001414 -19-01AUG18-27/50
Travel Alarm Cancel
Switch Circuit Check
TX1213268 —UN—02JUN16
Left Console
TX1001227 —UN—14DEC05
Travel Alarm Cancel Switch
1— Travel Alarm Cancel Switch
2— Dome Light Switch
3— Horn Switch (processor only)
4— Reversing Fan Switch (if equipped)
5— Max Speed Program Switch (if equipped)
6— Hydraulic Oil Tank Pressure Vent Switch (if equipped)
CAUTION: Avoid possible injury. Machine will move during this check.
Make sure area is clear and large enough to operate machine.
NOTE: Travel alarm must operate for this check.
Place pilot shutoff lever in unlocked (DOWN) position.
Push travel pedals or levers and allow travel alarm to operate for a minimum of 13
seconds.
LISTEN: Does travel alarm sound? YES: Go to next check.
While continuing travel, press travel alarm cancel switch (1). NO: Check optional and
attachment connector
5 A fuse (marked OPT.
1 ALT/SAW) (F5). See
Replacing Fuses. (Section
4-1.)
LISTEN: Does travel alarm stop sounding? IF OK: See an authorized
Hitachi dealer.
4-2-22
112321
PN=302
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Continued on next page KR46761,0001414 -19-01AUG18-28/50
Hydraulic Oil Tank
Pressurization Check
TX1220231 —UN—01AUG16
Hydraulic Tank
1
4
3
2
5
TX1220233 —UN—01AUG16
Hydraulic Tank Cap
1— Hydraulic Tank Cap
2— Hex Wrench
3— Hole
4— Case Assembly
5— Aligning Mark (2 used)
CAUTION: Avoid personal injury from high-pressure uid. High-pressure
release of oil from pressurized system can cause serious burns
or penetrating injury. Relieve pressure by slowly turning hydraulic
tank cap (1) counterclockwise a few degrees.
Raise boom to full height, then lower boom to ground.
Stop engine.
Insert hex wrench (2) into hole (3) and turn counterclockwise to release locking pin.
Slowly turn hydraulic tank cap counterclockwise a few degrees to relieve pressure. YES: Go to next check.
LISTEN: Is air heard escaping from the hydraulic oil tank? NO: Replace hydraulic oil
tank cover.
4-2-23
112321
PN=303
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Continued on next page KR46761,0001414 -19-01AUG18-29/50
Control Lever Pattern
Check
4
3
8
7
6
5 10
9
1 2
TX1213079 —UN—31MAR16
Forestry Excavator
1— Horn Button
2— Power Boost Button
3— Arm Out
4— Arm In
5— Swing Left
6— Swing Right
7— Boom Lower
8— Boom Raise
9— Bucket Curl
10— Bucket Dump
2 5
1
4
3
7
6
11
10
9
8 13
12
TX1213080 —UN—30MAR16
Forestry Excavator With Thumb (if equipped)
1— Not Used
2— Horn Button
3— Thumb Open
4— Thumb Close
5— Power Boost Button
6— Arm Out
7— Arm In
8— Swing Left
9— Swing Right
10— Boom Lower
11— Boom Raise
12— Bucket Curl
13— Bucket Dump
4-2-24
112321
PN=304
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Continued on next page KR46761,0001414 -19-01AUG18-30/50
4
3
8
7
6
5 10
9
1 2
TX1213079 —UN—31MAR16
Forestry Excavator With Processor (if equipped)
1— Horn Button
2— Power Boost Button
3— Arm Out
4— Arm In
5— Swing Left
6— Swing Right
7— Boom Lower
8— Boom Raise
9— Bucket Curl
10— Bucket Dump
2
1
6
5
4
3 8
7
TX1213604 —UN—31MAR16
Processor (if equipped)
1— Arm Out
2— Arm In
3— Swing Left
4— Swing Right
5— Boom Lower
6— Boom Raise
7— Rotate Grapple Counterclockwise
8— Rotate Grapple Clockwise
4-2-25
112321
PN=305
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Continued on next page KR46761,0001414 -19-01AUG18-31/50
2
6
3
18
1
17
5
16
4
15
8
7
12
11
10
9 14
13
TX1213557 —UN—31MAR16
Forestry Excavator With Power Clam (if equipped)
1— Rotate Grapple Clockwise
2— Rotate Grapple Counterclockwise
3— Horn Button
4— Grapple Open
5— Grapple Closed
6— Power Boost Button
7— Arm Out
8— Arm In
9— Swing Left
10— Swing Right
11— Boom Lower
12— Boom Raise
13— Tilt In
14— Tilt Out
15— Grapple Saw Button (if equipped)
16— Free Swing Button (if equipped)
17— Outrigger Raise Button (if equipped)
18— Outrigger Lower Button (if equipped)
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from unexpected machine movement.
Clear all persons from the area before operating machine.
Turn engine speed dial to L (slow idle) position.
Place pilot shutoff lever in unlocked (DOWN) position.
Slowly move hydraulic levers to all positions. YES: Go to next check.
LOOK: Does pilot control lever operate functions properly according to pattern of
machine conguration?
NO: See an authorized
Hitachi dealer.
4-2-26
112321
PN=306
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Continued on next page KR46761,0001414 -19-01AUG18-32/50
Swing Dynamic Braking
Check
45˚
90˚
TX1095482 —UN—28JUN13
Swing Dynamic Braking
A
C
C
O
N
S
T
A
R
T
5
9
3
8
54
0
2
7
1
6
OFF
2
MODE
1
A/I
ON
A/I
OFF
OFF
OFF
INT
ON
PUSH
HL
PUSH
TUNE/AM-FM
PUSH
MODE
PUSH
MENU/SET
min
-1
L
H
PUSH
VOL/PWR
PUSH
/VOL
/PWR
1
2
3
4
TX1086753 —UN—11JAN11
Switch Panel
1— Engine Speed Dial
2— Auto-Idle Switch
3— Travel Mode Switch
4— Power Mode Button
CAUTION: Avoid possible injury. Make sure area is clear and large enough
to swing extended arm and attachment. Machine must be on level ground.
Position upperstructure with boom to the front.
Move arm to the extended position, attachment to the retracted position, and
attachment-to-arm pivot pin at same level as boom-to-frame pivot pin.
Turn engine speed dial (1) to H (fast idle) position.
Press power mode button (4) until PWR (power) mode is displayed on monitor.
Fully actuate swing function. Swing clockwise 90 degrees and then release lever.
LOOK: Does upperstructure stop within 45 degrees (1/8 turn) or less after releasing
lever?
Position upperstructure with boom to the front.
Fully actuate swing function. Swing counterclockwise 90 degrees and then release
lever.
YES: Go to next check.
LOOK: Does upperstructure stop within 45 degrees (1/8 turn) or less after releasing
lever?
NO: See an authorized
Hitachi dealer.
4-2-27
112321
PN=307
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Continued on next page KR46761,0001414 -19-01AUG18-33/50
Swing Park Brake and
Circuit Drift Check
TX1093770 —UN—28JUN13
Machine Position
Fill the bucket with dirt, if applicable.
Position machine on a hillside with a slope of approximately 25%. If a hill is not
available, raise one side of machine approximately 300 mm (1 ft) with the boom and
then put a block under the track.
Move arm to the fully extended position.
Raise boom so arm-to-attachment pivot pin is the same height as boom-to-frame
pivot pin.
Position upperstructure with cab over travel motors, perpendicular to tracks.
Turn engine speed dial to L (slow idle) position.
Wait approximately 5 minutes with all functions in neutral.
NOTE: Function does not need to be fully actuated to disengage the swing park brake.
Slowly actuate attachment function to disengage the swing park brake. Do not hold
the function over relief for more than 10 seconds.
LOOK: Does upperstructure hold position when swing park brake is engaged?
LOOK: Does upperstructure move only slightly when swing park brake is disengaged?
Swing upperstructure 180 degrees counterclockwise and repeat procedure.
Turn engine speed dial to L (slow idle) position.
Wait approximately 5 minutes with all functions in neutral.
Slowly actuate attachment function to disengage the swing park brake. Do not hold
the function over relief for more than 10 seconds.
LOOK: Does upperstructure hold position when swing park brake is engaged? YES: Go to next check.
LOOK: Does upperstructure move only slightly when swing park brake is disengaged? NO: See an authorized
Hitachi dealer.
4-2-28
112321
PN=308
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Continued on next page KR46761,0001414 -19-01AUG18-34/50
Swing Power Check
TX1093770 —UN—28JUN13
Machine Position
A
C
C
O
N
S
T
A
R
T
5
9
3
8
54
0
2
7
1
6
OFF
2
MODE
1
A/I
ON
A/I
OFF
OFF
OFF
INT
ON
PUSH
HL
PUSH
TUNE/AM-FM
PUSH
MODE
PUSH
MENU/SET
min
-1
L
H
PUSH
VOL/PWR
PUSH
/VOL
/PWR
1
2
3
4
TX1086753 —UN—11JAN11
Switch Panel
1— Engine Speed Dial
2— Auto-Idle Switch
3— Travel Mode Switch
4— Power Mode Button
Fill the bucket with dirt, if applicable.
Position machine on a hillside with a slope of approximately 25%. If a hill is not
available, raise one side of machine approximately 300 mm (1 ft) with the boom and
then put a block under the track.
Move arm to the fully extended position. Raise boom so arm-to-attachment pivot pin is
the same height as boom-to-frame pivot pin.
Swing upperstructure clockwise so it is 90 degrees to the slope.
Turn engine speed dial (1) to H (fast idle) position.
Press power mode button (4) until H/P (high power) mode is displayed on monitor.
Actuate the swing function to swing uphill.
LOOK: Does upperstructure swing uphill?
Swing upperstructure 180 degrees counterclockwise and repeat procedure.
Turn engine speed dial to H (fast idle) position.
Power mode button in H/P (high power) mode.
Actuate the swing function to swing uphill. YES: Go to next check.
LOOK: Does upperstructure swing uphill? NO: See an authorized
Hitachi dealer.
4-2-29
112321
PN=309
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Continued on next page KR46761,0001414 -19-01AUG18-35/50
Dig Function Drift
Check—Forestry
Excavator Only
TX1095487 —UN—28JUN13
Dig Function Drift Check—Forestry Excavator
Fill the bucket with dirt to specication, if applicable.
Specication
Loaded Bucket—Weight (approximate).............................................................. 1500 kg
3307 lb
Position attachment at maximum reach with attachment pivot pin at same height
as boom pivot pin.
Retract arm cylinder, then extend approximately 50 mm (2 in).
Extend attachment cylinder, then retract approximately 50 mm (2 in).
Measure distance from bottom of attachment to ground.
Stop engine.
Measure amount cylinders extend or retract in 5 minutes.
Compare measurements to specications.
Dig Function Drift—Specication
Boom Cylinder—Drift............................................................................................20 mm
0.79 in
Arm Cylinder—Drift............................................................................................... 30 mm
1.18 in
Attachment Cylinder (if applica-
ble)—Drift.............................................................................................................. 20 mm
0.79 in
Bottom of Attachment-to-Ground—Drift.............................................................. 150 mm
5.91 in
YES: Go to next check.
LOOK: Is cylinder drift within specication? NO: See an authorized
Hitachi dealer.
4-2-30
112321
PN=310
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Continued on next page KR46761,0001414 -19-01AUG18-36/50
Boom, Arm, and
Attachment Drift
Check—Processor Only
TX1041265 —UN—28APR08
Boom, Arm, and Attachment Drift Check—Processor
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from machine movement.
Make sure that area is clear of bystanders and large enough
to operate all machine functions.
Position attachment at maximum reach with arm-to-attachment pivot pin the same
height as boom pivot pin.
NOTE: Raise attachment to appropriate height to ensure that attachment does
not settle to the ground during test. If attachment settles to ground during
time limit, raise attachment to a higher level and repeat test.
Retract arm cylinder, then extend approximately 50 mm (2 in).
Measure distance from bottom of attachment to ground.
Stop engine.
Measure amount cylinders extend or retract in 5 minutes.
Compare measurements to specications.
Specication
Boom Cylinder—Drift............................................................................................20 mm
0.79 in
Arm Cylinder—Drift............................................................................................... 30 mm
1.18 in
Bottom of Attachment-to-Ground—Drift.............................................................. 150 mm
5.91 in
YES: Go to next check.
LOOK: Is cylinder drift within specication? NO: See an authorized
Hitachi dealer.
4-2-31
112321
PN=311
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Continued on next page KR46761,0001414 -19-01AUG18-37/50
Swing Priority Circuit
Check
CAUTION: Avoid possible injury. Make sure area is clear and large enough
to swing extended arm and attachment. Machine must be on level ground.
TX1095487 —UN—28JUN13
Swing Priority Check—Forestry Excavator (if equipped)
TX1041265 —UN—28APR08
Swing Priority Check—Processor (if equipped)
A
C
C
O
N
S
T
A
R
T
5
9
3
8
54
0
2
7
1
6
OFF
2
MODE
1
A/I
ON
A/I
OFF
OFF
OFF
INT
ON
PUSH
HL
PUSH
TUNE/AM-FM
PUSH
MODE
PUSH
MENU/SET
min
-1
L
H
PUSH
VOL/PWR
PUSH
/VOL
/PWR
1
2
3
4
TX1086753 —UN—11JAN11
Switch Panel
4-2-32
112321
PN=312
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Continued on next page KR46761,0001414 -19-01AUG18-38/50
1— Engine Speed Dial
2— Auto-Idle Switch
3— Travel Mode Switch
4— Power Mode Button
IMPORTANT: Position machine as shown. Operate swing and arm in
slowly a few times before attempting to perform check to ensure
attachment does not contact machine or ground.
Position machine as shown.
Turn engine speed dial (1) to H (fast idle) position.
Press power mode button (4) until PWR (power) mode is displayed on monitor.
Operate swing function and record time required for 3 complete revolutions.
Divide that time by three to get an average time for 1 revolution.
Specication
Swing Function—Time—(1 revolution)............................................................4.7—5.3 s
Position machine as shown, arm extended and upperstructure 90 degrees to tracks.
Turn engine speed dial (1) to H (fast idle) position.
Press power mode button (4) until PWR (power) mode is displayed on monitor.
Raise boom high enough so attachment does not contact the machine or ground
during arm in and swing combined operation.
Operate swing function and slowly actuate arm in function when upperstructure is in
line with tracks. Record time required for 1 complete revolution.
NOTE: Swing speed should not slow when actuating arm in. YES: Go to next check.
LOOK: Does swing speed remain unchanged when actuating arm in? NO: See an authorized
Hitachi dealer.
4-2-33
112321
PN=313
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Continued on next page KR46761,0001414 -19-01AUG18-39/50
Control Valve Lift
Check Test
TX1095487 —UN—28JUN13
Machine Position—Forestry Excavator (if equipped)
TX1041265 —UN—28APR08
Machine Position—Processor (if equipped)
1
TX1093762 —UN—28JUN13
Engine Speed Dial
1— Engine Speed Dial
Turn engine speed dial (1) to L (slow idle) position.
Position attachment to maximum reach with arm-to-attachment pivot pin at
approximately same height as boom pivot pin.
Forestry Excavator Only—Slowly raise boom, raise arm, and extend bucket cylinder.
Processor Only—Slowly raise boom and arm. YES: See an authorized
Hitachi dealer.
LOOK: Do functions move in opposite direction as pilot control levers are rst moved,
then change direction as levers are moved farther?
NO: Go to next check.
4-2-34
112321
PN=314
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Continued on next page KR46761,0001414 -19-01AUG18-40/50
Travel Speed Selection
Check
A
C
C
O
N
S
T
A
R
T
5
9
3
8
54
0
2
7
1
6
OFF
2
MODE
1
A/I
ON
A/I
OFF
OFF
OFF
INT
ON
PUSH
HL
PUSH
TUNE/AM-FM
PUSH
MODE
PUSH
MENU/SET
min
-1
L
H
PUSH
VOL/PWR
PUSH
/VOL
/PWR
1
2
3
4
TX1086753 —UN—11JAN11
Switch Panel
1— Engine Speed Dial
2— Auto-Idle Switch
3— Travel Mode Switch
4— Power Mode Button
Turn engine speed dial (1) to H (fast idle) position.
Turn travel mode switch (3) to slow speed (turtle) mode.
Actuate travel function to full speed.
Turn travel mode switch to fast speed (rabbit) mode.
LOOK: Does machine travel speed increase?
Actuate a dig function and then return to neutral.
LOOK: Does machine travel speed decrease and then increase as dig function
is actuated and then released?
Turn travel mode switch to slow speed (turtle) mode. YES: Go to next check.
LOOK: Does machine travel speed decrease? NO: See an authorized
Hitachi dealer.
4-2-35
112321
PN=315
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Continued on next page KR46761,0001414 -19-01AUG18-41/50
Travel System Tracking
Check
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from unexpected machine movement.
Clear all persons from the area before operating machine.
Warm hydraulic oil to operating temperature for this check.
9
TX1120783 —UN—20AUG12
Machine Position
9— Attachment Height
Fully extend arm cylinder and attachment cylinder.
Position boom so attachment height (9) is approximately 400 mm (16 in) above ground.
A
C
C
O
N
S
T
A
R
T
5
9
3
8
54
0
2
7
1
6
OFF
2
MODE
1
A/I
ON
A/I
OFF
OFF
OFF
INT
ON
PUSH
HL
PUSH
TUNE/AM-FM
PUSH
MODE
PUSH
MENU/SET
min
-1
L
H
PUSH
VOL/PWR
PUSH
/VOL
/PWR
1
2
3
4
TX1086753 —UN—11JAN11
Switch Panel
1— Engine Speed Dial
2— Auto-Idle Switch
3— Travel Mode Switch
4— Power Mode Button
Turn engine speed dial (1) to H (fast idle) position.
Turn auto-idle switch (2) to A/I OFF position.
Turn travel mode switch (3) to fast speed (rabbit) mode.
Press power mode button (4) until PWR (power) mode is displayed on monitor.
4-2-36
112321
PN=316
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Continued on next page KR46761,0001414 -19-01AUG18-42/50
6
6
7
8
5
TX1120481 —UN—17AUG12
Tracking Check
5— Distance of Mistrack
6— Acceleration and Deceleration Zone (approximate): 3—5 m (10—16 ft)
7— Test Line (distance): 20 m (66 ft)
8— Track Print
Operate machine at full travel forward speed on a at and level surface approximately
30 m (99 ft).
NOTE: When machine mistracks right, hydraulic pump 1 circuit oil ow may be
less than specication. When machine mistracks left, hydraulic pump
2 circuit oil ow may be less than specication.
Observe direction of mistrack.
Create a straight test line 20 m (66 ft) (7) long between two points on track print (8).
Measure and record greatest distance of mistrack (5) between inside edge of track
print and test line.
YES: Go to next check.
Repeat procedure in reverse travel.
NO: Check track sag.
See Check and Adjust
Track Sag. (Section 3-3.)
LOOK: Does machine mistrack less than 200 mm (7.87 in)? IF OK: See an authorized
Hitachi dealer.
4-2-37
112321
PN=317
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Continued on next page KR46761,0001414 -19-01AUG18-43/50
Travel System Tracking
Checks While Operating
a Dig Function
A
C
C
O
N
S
T
A
R
T
5
9
3
8
54
0
2
7
1
6
OFF
2
MODE
1
A/I
ON
A/I
OFF
OFF
OFF
INT
ON
PUSH
HL
PUSH
TUNE/AM-FM
PUSH
MODE
PUSH
MENU/SET
min
-1
L
H
PUSH
VOL/PWR
PUSH
/VOL
/PWR
1
2
3
4
TX1086753 —UN—11JAN11
Switch Panel
1— Engine Speed Dial
2— Auto-Idle Switch
3— Travel Mode Switch
4— Power Mode Button
NOTE: Machine will slow down during this test.
Turn engine speed dial (1) to H (fast idle) position.
Turn travel mode switch (3) to fast speed (rabbit) mode.
Operate machine at full speed forward on a at and level surface.
After machine is moving, actuate arm out from neutral to full actuation and extend
the arm.
YES: See an authorized
Hitachi dealer.
LOOK: Does machine mistrack excessively when the arm is extended? NO: Go to next check.
4-2-38
112321
PN=318
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Continued on next page KR46761,0001414 -19-01AUG18-44/50
Travel System
Maneuverability Check
A
C
C
O
N
S
T
A
R
T
5
9
3
8
54
0
2
7
1
6
OFF
2
MODE
1
A/I
ON
A/I
OFF
OFF
OFF
INT
ON
PUSH
HL
PUSH
TUNE/AM-FM
PUSH
MODE
PUSH
MENU/SET
min
-1
L
H
PUSH
VOL/PWR
PUSH
/VOL
/PWR
1
2
3
4
TX1086753 —UN—11JAN11
Switch Panel
1— Engine Speed Dial
2— Auto-Idle Switch
3— Travel Mode Switch
4— Power Mode Button
Turn engine speed dial (1) to H (fast idle) position.
Turn travel mode switch (3) to fast speed (rabbit) mode.
Drive machine at full speed forward down a slope.
Turn in each direction.
LOOK: Does each track slow down in response to pedal or lever movement in order
to turn?
Repeat the procedure in reverse travel.
Turn travel mode switch to fast speed (rabbit) mode.
Drive machine at full speed in reverse down a slope.
Turn in each direction.
YES: Go to next check.
LOOK: Does each track slow down in response to pedal or lever movement in order
to turn?
NO: See an authorized
Hitachi dealer.
4-2-39
112321
PN=319
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Continued on next page KR46761,0001414 -19-01AUG18-45/50
Cycle Times Check
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from unexpected machine movement.
Clear all persons from the area before operating machine.
NOTE: For accurate cycle time reading, warm hydraulic oil to operating temperature.
NOTE: Cycle times are calculated with attachment removed.
Remove attachment.
A
C
C
O
N
S
T
A
R
T
5
9
3
8
54
0
2
7
1
6
OFF
2
MODE
1
A/I
ON
A/I
OFF
OFF
OFF
INT
ON
PUSH
HL
PUSH
TUNE/AM-FM
PUSH
MODE
PUSH
MENU/SET
min
-1
L
H
PUSH
VOL/PWR
PUSH
/VOL
/PWR
1
5
2
3
4
TX1136301 —UN—10MAY13
Switch Panel
1— Engine Speed Dial
2— Auto-Idle Switch
3— Travel Mode Switch
4— Power Mode Button
5— Monitor Dial
Turn engine speed dial (1) to H (fast idle) position.
Turn auto-idle switch (2) to A/I OFF position.
Press power mode button (4) until PWR (power) mode is displayed on monitor.
4-2-40
112321
PN=320
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Continued on next page KR46761,0001414 -19-01AUG18-46/50
TX1226781 —UN—25OCT16
Boom Cycle Time Position—Forestry Excavator (if equipped)
TX1226782 —UN—25OCT16
Arm, Swing, and Attachment Cycle Time Position—Forestry Excavator (if equipped)
TX1041278 —UN—28APR08
Boom Cycle Time Position—Processor (if equipped)
TX1041279 —UN—28APR08
Arm and Swing Cycle Time Position—Processor (if equipped)
Move machine to position shown for each test.
Record cycle time for each function.
NOTE: Specications are given with attachment removed.
Forestry Excavator—Specication
Boom Raise (cylinder extend)—Cycle
Time.................................................................................................................3.0—3.6 s
Boom Lower (cylinder retract)—Cycle
Time.................................................................................................................2.7—3.3 s
Arm In (cylinder extend)—Cycle Time.............................................................2.9—3.5 s
Arm Out (cylinder retract)—Cycle Time...........................................................2.4—3.0 s
Attachment In (cylinder extend)—Cycle
Time.................................................................................................................3.4—4.0 s
Attachment Out (cylinder retract)—Cycle
Time.................................................................................................................2.1—2.7 s
Swing Left or Right, 3 Revolutions From
a Running Start—Cycle Time.......................................................................14.0—16.0 s
4-2-41
112321
PN=321
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Continued on next page KR46761,0001414 -19-01AUG18-47/50
Drive 20 m (66 ft) From a Running Start (check in forward and reverse
with travel mode switch in FAST position)
Zaxis260F-FE-6N Forestry Excavator
(S.N. —260024)
14.8—16.8 s
Zaxis260FLC-FE-6N Forestry Excavator
(S.N. 260025— )
17.6—19.6 s
Drive 20 m (66 ft) From a Running Start (check in forward and reverse
with travel mode switch in SLOW position)
Zaxis260F-FE-6N Forestry Excavator
(S.N. —260024)
23.8—25.8 s
Zaxis260FLC-FE-6N Forestry Excavator
(S.N. 260025— )
27.2—29.2 s
Track Raised for 3 Revolutions From a Running Start (check in forward
and reverse with travel mode switch in SLOW position)
Zaxis260F-FE-6N Forestry Excavator
(S.N. —260024)
31—37 s
Zaxis260FLC-FE-6N Forestry Excavator
(S.N. —260024)
33—39 s
Zaxis260F-FE-6N Forestry Excavator
(S.N. 260025— )
40—46 s
Zaxis260FLC-FE-6N Forestry Excavator
(S.N. 260025— )
43—49 s
Processor—Specication
Boom Raise (cylinder extend)—Cycle
Time.................................................................................................................3.0—3.6 s
Boom Lower (cylinder retract)—Cycle
Time.................................................................................................................2.8—3.4 s
Arm In (cylinder extend)—Cycle Time.............................................................3.0—3.6 s
Arm Out (cylinder retract)—Cycle Time...........................................................2.3—2.9 s
Swing Left or Right, 3 Revolutions From
a Running Start—Cycle Time.......................................................................14.0—16.0 s
Drive 20 m (66 ft) From a Running Start (check in forward and reverse
with travel mode switch in FAST position)
Zaxis260F-FE-6N Processor (S.N.
—260024)
14.8—16.8 s
Zaxis260FLC-FE-6N Processor (S.N.
260025— )
17.6—19.6 s
Drive 20 m (66 ft) From a Running Start (check in forward and reverse
with travel mode switch in SLOW position)
Zaxis260F-FE-6N Processor (S.N.
—260024)
23.8—25.8 s
Zaxis260FLC-FE-6N Processor (S.N.
260025— )
27.2—29.2 s
4-2-42
112321
PN=322
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
KR46761,0001414 -19-01AUG18-48/50
Continued on next page KR46761,0001414 -19-01AUG18-49/50
Track Raised for 3 Revolutions From a Running Start (check in forward
and reverse with travel mode switch in SLOW position)
Zaxis260F-FE-6N Processor (S.N.
—260024)
31—37 s
Zaxis260FLC-FE-6N Processor (S.N.
—260024)
33—39 s
Zaxis260F-FE-6N Processor (S.N.
260025— )
40—46 s
Zaxis260FLC-FE-6N Processor (S.N.
260025— )
43—49 s
YES: Go to next check.
LOOK: Does machine perform within specications? NO: See an authorized
John Deere dealer.
Heater and Air
Conditioner Circuit
Check
A
C
C
O
N
S
T
A
R
T
5
9
3
8
54
0
2
7
1
6
OFF
2
MODE
1
A/I
ON
A/I
OFF
OFF
OFF
INT
ON
PUSH
HL
PUSH
TUNE/AM-FM
PUSH
MODE
PUSH
MENU/SET
min
-1
L
H
PUSH
VOL/PWR
PUSH
/VOL
/PWR
5
6
TX1086866 —UN—13JAN11
Switch Panel
5— Temperature Control/Mode Switch
6— Blower Speed Switch
Start engine and warm to normal operating temperature.
Turn temperature control/mode switch (5) clockwise to maximum heat position.
FEEL: Does warm air come from the vents?
Turn temperature control/mode switch counterclockwise to maximum cold position. YES: Checks complete.
LISTEN: Does air conditioner compressor clutch solenoid “click”? NO: Heater does not
operate. Check air
conditioner and heater 20
A fuse (marked HEATER)
(F3). See Replacing
Fuses. (Section 4-1.)
FEEL: Does cool air come from the vents? IF OK: See an authorized
Hitachi dealer.
4-2-43
112321
PN=323
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
KR46761,0001414 -19-01AUG18-50/50
Heater and Air
Conditioner Controls
Check (automatic
temperature control)
A
C
C
O
N
S
T
A
R
T
5
9
3
8
54
0
2
7
1
6
OFF
2
MODE
1
A/I
ON
A/I
OFF
OFF
OFF
INT
ON
PUSH
HL
PUSH
TUNE/AM-FM
PUSH
MODE
PUSH
MENU/SET
min
-1
L
H
PUSH
VOL/PWR
PUSH
/VOL
/PWR
5
6
TX1086866 —UN—13JAN11
Switch Panel
50.0 h
10:00
H
C
AM
AUTO
24.0
˚
C
FM
VOL
CH1
ST
MHz
81.3
ECO
0.00 gal/h
F
E
7
10
8
9
TX1160755 —UN—15MAY14
Monitor—Air Conditioner and Heater Display
5— Temperature Control/Mode Switch
6— Blower Speed Switch
7— Fan Speed
8— AUTO Display
9— Vent Position
10— Temperature Setting
Start engine and warm to normal operating temperature.
Press blower speed switch (6).
LISTEN: Does air conditioner compressor clutch solenoid “click”?
LOOK: Does AUTO display (8) display on monitor?
LOOK: Does monitor display vent position (9), fan speed (7), and temperature setting
(10)?
Turn temperature control/mode switch (5) clockwise to maximum heat position.
LOOK: Does vent position change?
4-2-44
112321
PN=324
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
KR46761,0001414 -19-01AUG18-51/50
LOOK: Does temperature setting increase?
FEEL: Does warm air come from the vents?
Turn temperature control/mode switch counterclockwise to maximum cold position.
LOOK: Does vent position change?
LOOK: Does temperature setting decrease?
FEEL: Does cool air come from the vents?
Press blower speed switch.
LISTEN: Does air conditioner compressor clutch solenoid “click”? (Air conditioner and
heater are ON in manual mode.)
LOOK: Does AUTO display go OFF?
Turn temperature control/mode switch clockwise to maximum heat position.
LOOK: Does vent position change?
LOOK: Does temperature setting increase?
FEEL: Does warm air come from the vents?
Turn temperature control/mode switch counterclockwise to maximum cold position.
LOOK: Does vent position change?
LOOK: Does temperature setting decrease?
FEEL: Does cool air come from the vents?
Press temperature control/mode switch.
LOOK: Does vent position change?
Repeat for all four vent positions.
LOOK: Does vent position change each time switch is pressed? YES: Checks complete.
Press blower speed switch.
NO: Heater fan does
not blow air. Check air
conditioner and heater 20
A fuse (marked HEATER)
(F3). See Replacing
Fuses. (Section 4-1.)
LOOK: Are air conditioner and heater OFF? (Press blower speed switch to start air
conditioner and heater.)
IF OK: See an authorized
Hitachi dealer.
4-2-45
112321
PN=325
Miscellaneous—Troubleshooting
KR46761,00013A1 -19-21AUG18-1/1
Troubleshooting Procedure
NOTE: Troubleshooting charts are arranged from the
simplest to verify, to least likely, more difcult
to verify. When diagnosing a problem, use
all possible means to isolate the problem to a
single component or system. Use the following
steps to diagnose problems:
Step 1. Operational checkout procedure
Step 2. Troubleshooting charts
Step 3. Adjustments
Step 4. See an authorized John Deere dealer
4-3-1
112321
PN=326
Miscellaneous—Troubleshooting
Continued on next page KR46761,00013A2 -19-22SEP16-1/5
Engine
Symptom Problem Solution
Engine Will Not Crank
Low battery power
Charge or replace battery.
Corroded or loose battery
connections
Clean battery terminals and
connections.
Fuse
Check ECU 30 A fuse (F8).
Check POWER ON 5 A fuse (F17).
Replace if necessary.
Engine Cranks but Will Not Start
or Hard to Start
Low battery power
Charge or replace battery.
No fuel Add correct fuel. Bleed air. See
Bleed Fuel System. (Section 4-1.)
Incorrect fuel Drain fuel tank and rell with correct
fuel.
Fuel lters restricted Replace lters. Bleed air. Clean fuel
tank inlet screen. See Bleed Fuel
System. (Section 4-1.)
Primary fuel lter and water separator
restricted or not primed
Check primary fuel lter and water
separator. Replace lter, prime lter,
and bleed air from fuel system. See
Bleed Fuel System. (Section 4-1.)
Fuel lter not installed correctly Install new lter and O-ring. Ensure
proper O-ring seal. Bleed air. See
Bleed Fuel System. (Section 4-1.)
Water in fuel tank Check, drain, and rell fuel tank.
Leaks in fuel system Locate source of leak and repair as
required.
Contaminated fuel Drain fuel tank. Replace primary fuel
lter and water separator. Replace
nal fuel lter. Bleed air. Add
clean fuel. See Bleed Fuel System.
(Section 4-1.)
Low crankcase oil level Fill crankcase to proper oil level.
Air in fuel system Bleed air. See Bleed Fuel System.
(Section 4-1.)
4-3-2
112321
PN=327
Miscellaneous—Troubleshooting
Continued on next page KR46761,00013A2 -19-22SEP16-2/5
Symptom Problem Solution
Slow cranking speed (poor electrical
connection)
Clean and tighten battery and starter
connections.
Incorrect engine oil
Drain crankcase and rell with correct
oil.
Air lters restricted or dirty Replace air lter elements.
Starter Repair or replace starter. See an
authorized Hitachi dealer.
Engine Knocks, Runs Irregularly,
or Stops
Air lters restricted or dirty Replace air lter elements.
Fuel lters restricted Replace lters. Bleed air. Clean fuel
tank inlet screen. See Bleed Fuel
System. (Section 4-1.)
Fuel lter not installed correctly Install new lter and O-ring. Ensure
proper O-ring seal. Bleed air. See
Bleed Fuel System. (Section 4-1.)
Air in fuel system Bleed air. See Bleed Fuel System.
(Section 4-1.)
Contaminated fuel Drain fuel tank. Replace primary fuel
lter and water separator. Replace
nal fuel lter. Bleed air. Add
clean fuel. See Bleed Fuel System.
(Section 4-1.)
Low crankcase oil level Fill crankcase to proper oil level.
Coolant temperature low Check for proper thermostat
temperature and operation. Replace
if necessary.
Cold oil Perform hydraulic warm-up
procedure. See Cold Weather
Warm-Up. (Section 2-3.)
Injection pump
See an authorized Hitachi dealer.
Engine speed control system
See an authorized Hitachi dealer.
Excessive Fuel Consumption Air lters restricted or dirty Replace air lter elements.
Incorrect fuel Drain fuel tank and rell with correct
fuel.
4-3-3
112321
PN=328
Miscellaneous—Troubleshooting
Continued on next page KR46761,00013A2 -19-22SEP16-3/5
Symptom Problem Solution
Poor fuel quality Drain fuel and replace with quality
fuel of the proper grade.
Leaks in fuel system Locate source of leak and repair as
required.
Fuel tank inlet screen restricted or
missing
Clean or replace.
Excessive Oil Consumption
Incorrect engine oil
Drain crankcase and rell with correct
oil.
Oil leaks Locate source of leak and repair as
required.
Poor fuel quality Drain fuel and replace with quality
fuel of the proper grade.
Engine temperature too high
Check cooling system.
Air lters restricted or dirty Replace air lter elements.
Worn engine
See an authorized Hitachi dealer.
Engine Idles Poorly
Poor fuel quality Drain fuel and replace with quality
fuel of the proper grade.
Air in fuel system Bleed air. See Bleed Fuel System.
(Section 4-1.)
Air lters restricted or dirty Replace air lter elements.
Fuel lters restricted Replace lters. Bleed air. Clean fuel
tank inlet screen. See Bleed Fuel
System. (Section 4-1.)
Fuel lter not installed correctly Install new lter and O-ring. Ensure
proper O-ring seal. Bleed air. See
Bleed Fuel System. (Section 4-1.)
Diesel exhaust uid empty Rell diesel exhaust uid (DEF) tank.
See Relling Diesel Exhaust Fluid
(DEF) Tank. (Section 3-1.)
Engine speed control system
See an authorized Hitachi dealer.
Worn engine
See an authorized Hitachi dealer.
4-3-4
112321
PN=329
Miscellaneous—Troubleshooting
Continued on next page KR46761,00013A2 -19-22SEP16-4/5
Symptom Problem Solution
Auto-Idle Does Not Work
Auto-idle is off Turn auto-idle switch to the A/I ON
position.
Idle is not above 1000 rpm Advance engine speed dial to high
idle.
Hydraulic functions operating Release hydraulic functions for 10
seconds.
Engine Not Developing Full Power
Air lters restricted or dirty Replace air lter elements.
Fuel lters restricted Replace lters. Bleed air. Clean fuel
tank inlet screen. See Bleed Fuel
System. (Section 4-1.)
Fuel lter not installed correctly Install new lter and O-ring. Ensure
proper O-ring seal. Bleed air. See
Bleed Fuel System. (Section 4-1.)
Contaminated fuel Drain fuel tank. Replace primary fuel
lter and water separator. Replace
nal fuel lter. Bleed air. Add
clean fuel. See Bleed Fuel System.
(Section 4-1.)
Incorrect fuel Drain fuel tank and rell with correct
fuel.
Incorrect engine oil
Drain crankcase and rell with correct
oil.
Fuel line restricted
Repair or replace fuel line. Bleed air.
See Bleed Fuel System. (Section
4-1.)
Diesel exhaust uid empty Rell diesel exhaust uid (DEF) tank.
See Relling Diesel Exhaust Fluid
(DEF) Tank. (Section 3-1.)
Worn engine
See an authorized Hitachi dealer.
Hydraulic issue
See an authorized Hitachi dealer.
Engine Oil Pressure Low
Low crankcase oil level Fill crankcase to proper oil level.
Incorrect engine oil
Drain crankcase and rell with correct
oil.
Oil lter restricted Replace oil lter.
4-3-5
112321
PN=330
Miscellaneous—Troubleshooting
KR46761,00013A2 -19-22SEP16-5/5
Symptom Problem Solution
Oil leaks Locate source of leak and repair as
required.
Excessive oil temperature
See an authorized Hitachi dealer.
Worn engine
See an authorized Hitachi dealer.
Engine Oil Pressure High
Incorrect engine oil
Drain crankcase and rell with correct
oil.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Above Normal
Lack of coolant in cooling system
Fill cooling system to proper level.
Radiator and/or cooler cores
restricted or dirty
Clean radiator and cooler cores as
required.
Loose surge tank cap
Secure cap properly.
Air lters restricted or dirty Replace air lter elements.
Low crankcase oil level Fill crankcase to proper oil level.
Incorrect engine oil
Drain crankcase and rell with correct
oil.
Engine overloaded Reduce engine load.
Engine Emits Excessive Black or
Gray Exhaust Smoke
Incorrect fuel Drain fuel tank and rell with correct
fuel.
Coolant temperature low Check for proper thermostat
temperature and operation. Replace
if necessary.
Engine Emits Excessive White
Exhaust Smoke
Incorrect fuel Drain fuel tank and rell with correct
fuel.
Cold engine
Run engine until warm.
Turbocharger Excessively Noisy
or Vibrates
Excessive crankcase pressure
See an authorized Hitachi dealer.
Oil Dripping From Turbocharger
Adapter
Excessive crankcase pressure
See an authorized Hitachi dealer.
Turbocharger oil return line carbon
buildup
Remove line. Inspect and clean.
NOTE: If any other problems are encountered which
require special tools or machine knowledge to
correct, see an authorized Hitachi dealer.
4-3-6
112321
PN=331
Miscellaneous—Troubleshooting
Continued on next page KR46761,0000C45 -19-19MAY16-1/2
Hydraulic System
Symptom Problem Solution
No Hydraulic Functions
Pilot shutoff lever Place pilot shutoff lever in unlocked
(DOWN) position.
Low hydraulic oil level Fill tank to proper oil level.
Suction screen restricted
Inspect and clean.
Fuse
Check SOLENOID 20 A fuse (F4).
Replace if necessary.
Hydraulic Functions are Slow or
Have Little or No Power
Low hydraulic oil level Fill tank to proper oil level.
Cold oil Perform hydraulic oil warm-up
procedure.
Incorrect oil
Drain hydraulic tank and rell with
correct oil.
Suction screen restricted
Inspect and clean.
Hydraulic tank cap/cover Replace cap/cover.
Engine speed too slow Increase engine speed.
Hydraulic Oil Overheats
Incorrect oil
Drain hydraulic tank and rell with
correct oil.
Low hydraulic oil level Fill tank to proper oil level.
Contaminated oil Drain hydraulic tank and rell with
clean oil.
Restricted radiator or oil cooler
Clean and straighten ns.
Cooler cores restricted Clean cooler cores.
Restricted lters Install new lters.
Oil Foams
High or low oil level
Correct level.
Incorrect oil
Drain hydraulic tank and rell with
correct oil.
Contaminated oil Drain hydraulic tank and rell with
clean oil.
4-3-7
112321
PN=332
Miscellaneous—Troubleshooting
KR46761,0000C45 -19-19MAY16-2/2
Symptom Problem Solution
Water in oil
Drain hydraulic tank and rell with oil.
Air leak in oil line from reservoir
Repair leak.
Kinks or dents in oil lines Inspect and correct.
No Swing Function Pilot shutoff lever Place pilot shutoff lever in unlocked
(DOWN) position.
Pilot control valve hoses pinched or
kinked
Inspect and correct.
Swing Function is Jerky Lack of grease in swing bearing
Fill with grease.
Rocks or mud jammed in track frame
Remove and repair.
Slow Travel Speed Only
Pilot control valve hoses pinched or
kinked
Inspect and correct.
Cold oil Perform hydraulic warm-up
procedure.
Travel is Jerky Engine speed too slow Increase engine speed.
Track sag adjustment Adjust track sag.
Rocks or mud jammed in track frame
Remove and repair.
Engine Stops When Travel or
Control Lever Actuated
Air lters restricted or dirty Replace air lter elements.
Fuel lters restricted Replace lters. Bleed air. Clean fuel
tank inlet screen.
Air in fuel system Bleed air. See Bleed Fuel System.
(Section 4-1.)
4-3-8
112321
PN=333
Miscellaneous—Troubleshooting
KR46761,00013A3 -19-22SEP16-1/1
Front Attachments Electrical Controls
Symptom Problem Solution
Function Does Not Work
Controller switch See an authorized Hitachi dealer.
Relay
See an authorized Hitachi dealer.
Solenoid See an authorized Hitachi dealer.
Connector See an authorized Hitachi dealer.
4-3-9
112321
PN=334
Miscellaneous—Troubleshooting
Continued on next page KR46761,00013A4 -19-26OCT16-1/3
Electrical System
Symptom Problem Solution
No Electrical Functions Battery disconnect switch is in the
OFF position
Turn battery disconnect switch to the
ON position. See Battery Disconnect
Switch. (Section 2-3.)
Batteries undercharged or dead Recharge or replace.
Fuse
Check BATTERY 70 A fuse (F61).
Check 140 A fuse (F60).
Replace if necessary.
Batteries Undercharged Loose or corroded connections
Clean and tighten connections or
replace batteries.
Batteries Will Not Take a Charge
Loose or corroded connections
Clean and tighten connections or
replace batteries.
Weak batteries Replace both batteries.
Battery Uses Too Much Water
Cracked battery case
Replace battery.
High ambient temperature
Rell with distilled water and recharge
battery.
Cracked Battery Case
No battery hold-down clamp Replace battery and install hold-down
clamp.
Loose battery hold-down clamp Replace battery and tighten
hold-down clamp.
Frozen battery
Replace battery. Keep batteries fully
charged in cold weather.
Low Battery Output
Low water level Add distilled water and recharge
battery.
Dirty or wet battery top, causing
discharge
Clean and wipe battery top dry.
Corroded or loose battery cables Clean and tighten battery cables.
Broken battery post
Wiggle battery post by hand. If
post wiggles or turns, replace both
batteries.
Starter Will Not Turn
Battery disconnect switch is in the
OFF position
Turn battery disconnect switch to the
ON position. See Battery Disconnect
Switch. (Section 2-3.)
4-3-10
112321
PN=335
Miscellaneous—Troubleshooting
Continued on next page KR46761,00013A4 -19-26OCT16-2/3
Symptom Problem Solution
Battery undercharged or dead Recharge or replace.
Battery cables making poor
connections
Clean and tighten connections.
Fuse
Check POWER ON 5 A fuse (F17).
Replace if necessary.
Starter Repair or replace starter. See an
authorized Hitachi dealer.
Starter pinion jammed in ywheel
gear
Repair or replace starter or ring gear.
See an authorized Hitachi dealer.
Starter Turns but Will Not Crank
Engine
Starter Repair or replace starter. See an
authorized Hitachi dealer.
Engine Cranks Slowly
Battery cables damaged or broken
internally
Inspect and replace cables.
Battery or starter cable connections
loose or corroded
Clean and tighten connections.
Batteries undercharged or dead Recharge or replace.
Low battery voltage Recharge or replace.
Starter Repair or replace starter. See an
authorized Hitachi dealer.
Starter Continues to Run After
Engine Starts
Starter Repair or replace starter. See an
authorized Hitachi dealer.
Key switch malfunction Disconnect battery ground. See an
authorized Hitachi dealer.
Starter relay Disconnect battery ground. See an
authorized Hitachi dealer.
Charging Indicator Light On,
Engine Running
Loose or corroded electrical
connections on battery, ground strap,
starter, or alternator
Inspect, clean, or tighten electrical
connections.
Worn drive belt Replace belt.
Fuse
Check CONTROLLER 5 A fuse (F10).
Check ECU 30 A fuse (F8).
Check BATTERY 70 A fuse (F61).
Replace if necessary.
4-3-11
112321
PN=336
Miscellaneous—Troubleshooting
KR46761,00013A4 -19-26OCT16-3/3
KR46761,0001412 -19-03NOV16-1/1
Symptom Problem Solution
Noisy Alternator Worn drive belt Replace belt.
Worn pulleys Replace pulleys and belt.
Pulley misaligned Adjust alternator mount.
Alternator bearing Loosen alternator belts. Turn pulley
by hand. If any roughness is felt,
repair alternator.
No Monitor Panel Indicators or
Gauges Work
Fuse
Check CONTROLLER 5 A fuse (F10).
Replace if necessary.
No Switch Panel Switches or
Engine Speed Dial Work
Fuse
Check POWER ON 5 A fuse (F17).
Check MONITOR 5 A fuse (F14).
Check SOLENOID 20 A fuse (F4).
Check BACK UP 10 A fuse (F9).
Replace if necessary.
Software Update
Symptom Problem Solution
Service ADVISOR™ Remote (SAR)
Updates Not Operating Properly
Software updates not operating
properly
Follow screen instructions on the
display monitor.
If problem persists, see an authorized
Hitachi dealer.
Service ADVISOR is a trademark of Deere & Company
4-3-12
112321
PN=337
Miscellaneous—Storage
KR46761,00013B6 -19-02NOV16-1/1
Prepare Machine for Storage
IMPORTANT: Avoid machine damage. Do not use
biodiesel during machine storage. When
using biodiesel blends, switch to petroleum
diesel for long-term storage.
1. Before storage, operate engine on at least one
complete tank of petroleum diesel fuel to purge the
fuel system. Ensure that the fuel tank is full during
storage to prevent water buildup due to condensation.
NOTE: For blends up to and including B5, it is
recommended that biodiesel be used within 3
months of its manufacture. The poor oxidation
stability characteristic of biodiesel can result in
long-term storage problems. Hitachi does not
recommend using biodiesel in engines powering
standby applications or vehicles operating on a
seasonal basis. Consult an authorized Hitachi
dealer or fuel supplier for additives to improve fuel
storage and performance of biodiesel fuels. These
additives must be added to the biodiesel close to
its time of production for them to be effective.
2. Repair worn or damaged parts. If necessary, install
new parts to avoid needless delays later.
3. Replace air cleaner elements.
4. Drain water separator.
IMPORTANT: High-pressure washing greater than
1379 kPa (13.8 bar) (200 psi) can damage freshly
painted nishes. Paint should be allowed to
air dry for a minimum of 30 days after receipt
of machine before cleaning parts or machines
with high pressure. Use low-pressure wash
operations until 30 days have elapsed.
5. Wash the machine. Use low-pressure wash operations
(less than 1379 kPa [13.8 bar] [200 psi]) until 30 days
after receipt of machine have elapsed. Paint areas to
prevent rust. Replace decals where needed.
6. Apply oil to track chains. Run machine back and forth
several times. Park machine on a hard surface to
prevent tracks from freezing to ground.
T5813AM —UN—09FEB89
Prepare Machine for Storage
IMPORTANT: LPS 3® Rust Inhibitor can destroy
painted nish. DO NOT spray LPS 3 Rust
Inhibitor on painted areas.
7. Retract all hydraulic cylinders if possible. If not, coat
exposed cylinder rods with LPS 3 Rust Inhibitor.
8. Lubricate all grease points.
NOTE: If the batteries are kept disconnected for more
than 1 month or when the batteries are reconnected,
resetting of the controllers may be required.
Contact an authorized Hitachi dealer.
9. Turn battery disconnect switch to the OFF position.
See Battery Disconnect Switch. (Section 2-3.)
10. Remove the batteries and store in a dry, protected
place after charging fully. If not removed, disconnect
the negative battery cable from the (-) terminal.
11. Add a fuel stabilizer additive and top off fuel tank with
fuel to prevent condensation.
12. Store machine in a dry, protected place. If stored
outside, cover with a waterproof material.
13. Place a DO NOT OPERATE tag on the right pilot
control lever.
14. Remove keys and lock all covers and doors.
LPS 3 Rust Inhibitor is a trademark of Illinois Tool Works
4-4-1
112321
PN=338
Miscellaneous—Storage
TX,MONTHLY,STORE,PROC -19-01MAR21-1/1
Monthly Storage Procedure
NOTE: The following procedure is used monthly
when the engine has not been prepared for
long-term storage. See Preparing Engine for
Long-Term Storage in this section.
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury or death
from asphyxiation. Engine exhaust fumes
can cause sickness or death. ONLY start
engine in a well-ventilated area.
1. Clear area around machine to allow for movement
2. Charge and install batteries.
3. Turn battery disconnect switch to the ON position. See
Battery Disconnect Switch. (Section 2-2.)
4. Remove LPS 3® Rust Inhibitor from cylinder rods with
a cleaning solvent.
5. For machines with tires, check condition of tires and tire
pressure. For machines with tracks, check condition
of tracks and track sag. For non-sealed and lubricated
track chains, apply oil to the pin-to-bushing joints.
6. Inspect engine compartment and remove any foreign
material.
7. Check belts.
IMPORTANT: Prevent possible engine damage.
During cold temperatures, check uidity of
engine oil on dipstick. If the oil appears waxy
and/or jelly like rather than liquid, DO NOT
attempt to start engine. Use external heat source
to warm the crankcase until oil appears uid.
8. Check all uid levels. If low, check for leaks and add
oil as required.
9. Check condition of all hoses and connections.
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from
unexpected machine movement. Clear the area
of all persons before operating the machine.
NOTE: If the batteries are kept disconnected for more
than 1 month, resetting of the monitor may be
required. Contact an authorized John Deere dealer.
Start engine and run until machine reaches normal
operating temperature.
•
If engine does not start or runs poorly after starting,
change fuel lters. Bleed fuel system.
10. Operate all controls, levers, seat adjustments, etc.
•
If equipped, operate air conditioning system for 2
minutes.
11. Run machine back and forth several times.
12. Park the machine with cylinder rods retracted, if
possible. Shut off engine.
13. Place a DO NOT OPERATE tag in operator’s station
14. Check condition of all hoses and connections.
15. Drain water and sediment from fuel tank.
IMPORTANT: LPS 3® Rust Inhibitor can destroy
painted nish. DO NOT spray LPS 3® Rust
Inhibitor on painted areas.
16. Apply LPS 3Rust Inhibitor to exposed cylinder rod
areas.
17. Lock all covers and doors if equipped
4-4-2
112321
PN=339
Miscellaneous—Storage
KR46761,00013B7 -19-02NOV16-1/1
Preparing Engine for Long-Term Storage
IMPORTANT: Any time the engine is not used for over
6 months, the following recommendations for
storing and removing the engine from storage
helps to minimize corrosion and deterioration.
IMPORTANT: Long-term storage is not advised when
using biodiesel. For storage longer than 1
year, use straight hydrocarbon fuel.
If biodiesel must be used, it is recommended
the blend not exceed B5 and a high-quality
fuel stabilizer be used. Storage should
not exceed 1 year.
For more information, see BioDiesel
Fuel. (Section 3-1.)
NOTE: The following storage preparations are used for
long-term engine storage up to 1 year. After that,
the engine should be started, warmed up, and
retreated for an extended storage period.
1. Change engine oil and replace lter. Used oil does
not give adequate protection. Add 30 mL of rust
preventive oil to the engine crankcase for every 1 L of
engine oil, or 1 oz of rust preventative oil per 1 qt of
engine oil. This rust preventive oil should be a SAE
10 oil with 1%—4% morpholine or equivalent vapor
corrosion inhibitor such as NOX RUST VCI-10 OIL
from Daubert Chemical Company, Inc.
2. Replace air cleaner.
3. Draining and ushing of cooling system is not
necessary if the engine is only stored for less than
1 year. However, for extended storage periods of 1
year or longer, the recommendation is that the cooling
system be drained, ushed, and relled. Rell with
appropriate coolant. See Diesel Engine Coolant.
(Section 3-1.)
4. Prepare a solution of diesel fuel and rust preventive oil
in a temporary container, add 78 mL of rust preventive
oil per 1 L of diesel fuel (10 oz of rust preventive oil
per 1 gal of diesel fuel).
5. Remove existing lines and plugs as required. Run
a temporary line from the temporary container to
the engine fuel intake located before the fuel lters.
Run another temporary line from the fuel return to
the temporary container. This set up allows rust
preventive oil solution to circulate through the injection
system during cranking.
IMPORTANT: Prevent possible damage to starter.
Do not operate starter more than 30 seconds
at a time. Wait at least 2 minutes for starter
to cool before trying again.
6. Crank the engine several revolutions with starter. Do
not allow the engine to start. Cranking the engine
without starting allows rust preventive oil solution to
circulate.
See an authorized Hitachi dealer for the proper
procedure.
7. Remove temporary lines installed in step 5 and replace
any lines or plugs previously removed.
8. Loosen (or remove) and store fan and alternator
poly-vee belt.
9. Remove and clean batteries. Store them in a cool, dry
place and keep them fully charged.
10. Disengage the clutch for any driveline.
11. For extended storage periods of 1 year or longer, drain
or siphon diesel exhaust uid (DEF) from DEF tank.
12. Clean the exterior of the engine with salt-free water
and touch up any scratched or chipped painted
surfaces with a high-quality paint.
13. Coat all exposed bare metal surfaces with grease or
corrosion inhibitor if not feasible to paint.
14. Seal all openings on engine with plastic bags and tape.
15. Store the engine in a dry, protected place. If engine
must be stored outside, cover it with a waterproof
canvas or other suitable protective material and use a
strong, waterproof tape.
4-4-3
112321
PN=340
Miscellaneous—Storage
KR46761,00013B8 -19-03OCT16-1/1
Removing Engine From Long-Term Storage
NOTE: The following storage removal procedure is used
for long-term engine storage up to 1 year. After
that, the engine should be started, warmed up, and
retreated for an extended storage period.
Refer to the appropriate section for detailed services listed
below or have an authorized servicing dealer or engine
distributor perform unfamiliar services.
1. Remove all protective coverings from engine. Unseal
all openings in engine and remove covering from
electrical systems.
2. Remove grease from all exposed metal surfaces.
3. Remove the batteries from storage. Install batteries
(fully charged) and connect the terminals.
4. Install fan and alternator poly-vee belt if removed.
5. Fill fuel tank.
6. If drained, ll diesel exhaust uid tank with new DEF.
If not drained, DEF must pass visual, smell, and
concentration checks before the engine can be ran.
See Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)—Use in Selective
Catalytic Reduction (SCR) Equipped Engines.
(Section 3-1.)
7. Perform all appropriate prestarting checks. See
Inspect Machine Daily Before Starting. (Section 2-3.)
IMPORTANT: Prevent possible damage to starter.
DO NOT operate starter more than 30 seconds
at a time. Wait at least 2 minutes for starter
to cool before trying again.
8. Crank engine for 20 seconds with starter. Do not allow
the engine to start. Wait 2 minutes and crank engine
an additional 20 seconds to ensure bearing surfaces
are adequately lubricated.
See an authorized Hitachi dealer for the proper
procedure.
9. Start engine and run at low idle and no load for 15
minutes.
10. Shut engine off. Change engine oil and replace lter.
11. Warm up engine and check all gauges before placing
engine under load.
12. On the rst day of operation after storage, check
overall engine for leaks and check all gauges for
correct operation.
NOTE: If using biodiesel blends after long-term storage,
frequency of fuel lter plugging can increase initially.
4-4-4
112321
PN=341
Miscellaneous—Machine Numbers
KR46761,0001170 -19-15APR16-1/1
KR46761,00013E3 -19-20OCT16-1/1
Record Product Identication Number (PIN)
Purchase Date:
Product Identication Number (PIN):
Record all 17 characters of the product identication
number (PIN).
The PIN plate (1) is located on the front right corner of
the cab.
1— PIN Plate
TX1213375 —UN—28MAR16
PIN Plate Location—Rear Entry Cab
TX1213374 —UN—28MAR16
PIN Plate Location—Side Entry Cab
Record Engine Serial Number
Engine Serial Number:
The engine serial number plate (2) is located on the right
side bottom part of the cylinder block.
1— Engine Serial Number Plate
Location
2— Engine Serial Number Plate
2
1
TX1226621 —UN—21OCT16
Engine Serial Number Plate
4-5-1
112321
PN=342
Miscellaneous—Machine Numbers
CN93077,0000600 -19-22DEC15-1/1
KR46761,0000BF4 -19-15APR16-1/1
KR46761,0001287 -19-14DEC16-1/1
KR46761,00013BA -19-21OCT16-1/1
Record Travel Motor Serial Numbers
Travel Motor Serial Number:
Travel Motor Serial Number:
Remove covers on travel motors to access travel motor
serial number plates (1).
1— Travel Motor Serial Number
Plate (2 used)
TX1195473 —UN—09JUN15
Travel Motor Serial Number Location
Record Swing Motor Serial Number
Swing Motor Serial Number:
The swing motor serial number plate (1) is located on top
of the swing motor.
1— Swing Motor Serial Number
Plate
TX1156395A —UN—17MAR14
Swing Motor Serial Number
Record Hydraulic Pump Serial Number
Hydraulic Pump Serial Number:
Open right rear service door to access hydraulic pump
serial number plate (1). The hydraulic pump serial number
plate is located on the front of the hydraulic pump.
1— Hydraulic Pump Serial
Number Plate
TX1218761 —UN—20JUL16
Hydraulic Pump Serial Number Plate
Keep Proof of Ownership
1. Maintain in a secure location an up-to-date inventory
of all product and component serial numbers.
2. Regularly verify that identication plates have not
been removed. Report any evidence of tampering to
law enforcement agencies and order duplicate plates.
3. Other steps the operator can take:
- Mark machine with operator’s own numbering
system.
- Take color photographs from several angles of each
machine.
4-5-2
112321
PN=343
Miscellaneous—Machine Numbers
KR46761,00013B9 -19-21OCT16-1/1
Keep Machines Secure
1. Install vandal-proof devices.
2. When machine is in storage:
- Lower equipment to the ground.
- Set wheels to widest position to make loading more
difcult.
- Remove any keys and batteries.
3. When parking indoors, put large equipment in front of
exits and lock storage buildings.
4. When parking outdoors, store in a well-lighted and
fenced area.
5. Make note of suspicious activity and report any thefts
immediately to law enforcement agencies.
6. Notify an authorized Hitachi dealer of any losses.
TS230 —UN—24MAY89
Key Lock
4-5-3
112321
PN=344
Miscellaneous—Specications
KR46761,000133B -19-18OCT16-1/1
KR46761,000133C -19-06SEP16-1/1
Engine Specications
Item Measurement Specication
Isuzu 4HK1XASA11A Type Turbocharged With Air-to-Air Charge Air
Cooler
Non-Road Emission Standards Final Tier 4/Stage IV Emissions
Bore and Stroke 115 x 125 mm
4.53 x 4.92 in
Cylinders 4
Displacement 5.19 L
317 in
3
Net Torque at 1500 rpm 673 N·m
496 lb·ft
Compression Ratio 17.5:1
Net Power at 2000 rpm 132 kW
177 hp
Cooling Fan Direct Drive Suction Fan
Electrical System 24 Volt
Batteries (2) 12 Volt 440 Minutes Reserve Capacity
Alternator 130 A
Drain and Rell Capacities
Item Measurement Specication
Fuel Tank Capacity 800.0 L
211.4 gal
Cooling System Capacity 34.0 L
9.0 gal
Engine Oil, Including Filter Change Capacity 26.0 L
6.9 gal
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Tank Capacity 70.0 L
18.5 gal
Hydraulic Tank Oil Capacity 147.6 L
39.0 gal
Hydraulic System Oil Capacity 280.0 L
74.0 gal
Swing Gear Case Oil Capacity 11.8 L
3.1 gal
Travel Gear Case Oil (each) Capacity 8.5 L
2.2 gal
Pump Drive Gear Case Oil Capacity 1.0 L
1.1 qt
Cab Tilt Tank Oil—Rear Entry
Cab Only
Capacity 3.3 L
3.4 qt
Cab Tilt System Oil—Rear
Entry Cab Only
Capacity 12.5 L
3.3 gal
4-6-1
112321
PN=345
Miscellaneous—Specications
Continued on next page KR46761,0001349 -19-28SEP16-1/4
Forestry Excavator Machine Specications
TX1223609
7
1
6
8
10
3
12
2
4
5
11
9
TX1223609 —UN—19SEP16
Machine Specications—Side Entry Cab
TX1223610
7
1
6
8
10
3
12
2
4
5
11
9
TX1223610 —UN—19SEP16
Machine Specications—Rear Entry Cab
1— Machine Transport Height
2— Machine Transport Length
3— Rear End Swing Radius
4— Sprocket Center to Idler
Center Distance
5— Undercarriage Length
6— Counterweight Clearance
7— Cab Height
8— Upperstructure Width
9— Minimum Ground Clearance
10— Center of Sprocket to Center
of Sprocket Distance
11— Track Shoe Width
12— Undercarriage Width
NOTE: Specications and design are subject to change
without notice. Wherever applicable, specications
are in accordance with PCSA and SAE standards.
Except where otherwise noted, these specications
are based on a machine equipped with 700 mm (28
in) shoes, 4551 kg (10 033 lb) counterweight, 2.95
m (9 ft 8 in) arm, 996 kg (2196 lb) 10.6 m
3
(1.38
yd
3
) 1065 mm (54 in) bucket, full fuel tank, 79 kg
(175 lb) operator, and standard equipment.
NOTE: Machine with rear entry cab is shown in the
transport position. See Loading and Unloading
for Transport. (Section 2-3.)
Item Measurement Specication
1—Machine Transport
Side Entry Cab Height 3840 mm
12 ft 7 in
4-6-2
112321
PN=346
Miscellaneous—Specications
Continued on next page KR46761,0001349 -19-28SEP16-2/4
Item Measurement Specication
Rear Entry Cab Height 3760 mm
12 ft 4 in
2—Machine Transport Length 10 160 mm
33 ft 4 in
3—Rear End Swing Radius 3150 mm
10 ft 4 in
4—Sprocket Center to Idler
Center
2620 mm (8 ft 7 in) Undercarriage Distance 3730 mm
12 ft 3 in
2790 mm (9 ft 2 in) Undercarriage Distance 4060 mm
13 ft 4 in
5—Undercarriage
2620 mm (8 ft 7 in) Undercarriage Length 4070 mm
13 ft 4 in
2790 mm (9 ft 2 in) Undercarriage Length 5030 mm
16 ft 6 in
6—Counterweight Clearance 1400 mm
4 ft 7 in
7—Cab
Side Entry Cab Height 3840 mm
12 ft 7 in
Rear Entry Cab Height 5180 mm
17 ft 0 in
Rear Entry Cab—Tilted Height 3760 mm
12 ft 4 in
8—Upperstructure Width 3377 mm
11 ft 1 in
9—Minimum Ground
2620 mm (8 ft 7 in) Undercarriage Clearance 710 mm
2 ft 4 in
2790 mm (9 ft 2 in) Undercarriage Clearance 760 mm
2 ft 6 in
10—Center of Sprocket to
Center of Sprocket
2620 mm (8 ft 7 in) Undercarriage Distance 2620 mm
8 ft 7 in
2790 mm (9 ft 2 in) Undercarriage Distance 2790 mm
9 ft 2 in
11—Track Shoe Width 660 mm (26 in)
700 mm (28 in)
800 mm (32 in)
4-6-3
112321
PN=347
Miscellaneous—Specications
Continued on next page KR46761,0001349 -19-28SEP16-3/4
Item Measurement Specication
12—Undercarriage With 2620
mm (8 ft 7 in) Undercarriage
660 mm (26 in) Shoe Width 3340 mm
10 ft 11 in
700 mm (28 in) Shoe Width 3340 mm
10 ft 11 in
800 mm (32 in) Shoe Width 3429 mm
11 ft 3 in
12—Undercarriage With 2920
mm (9 ft 2 in) Undercarriage
660 mm (26 in) Shoe Width 3518 mm
11 ft 7 in
700 mm (28 in) Shoe Width 3518 mm
11 ft 7 in
800 mm (32 in) Shoe Width 3607 mm
11 ft 10 in
NOTE: On machines equipped with 2620 mm (8 ft
7 in) undercarriage, the undercarriage is not
the widest point of the machine.
Item Measurement Specication
Machine With 2620 mm (8 ft
7 in) Undercarriage
660 mm (26 in) Shoe Overall Width 3402 mm
11 ft 2 in
700 mm (28 in) Shoe Overall Width 3402 mm
11 ft 2 in
800 mm (32 in) Shoe Overall Width 3446 mm
11 ft 4 in
Machine With 2920 mm (9 ft
2 in) Undercarriage
660 mm (26 in) Shoe Overall Width 3518 mm
11 ft 7 in
700 mm (28 in) Shoe Overall Width 3518 mm
11 ft 7 in
800 mm (32 in) Shoe Overall Width 3607 mm
11 ft 10 in
ZX260F-FE
Side Entry Cab Operating Weight (approximate) 32 846 kg
72 413 lb
Rear Entry Cab Operating Weight (approximate) 33 517 kg
73 892 lb
Rear Entry Cab With Forward Riser Operating Weight (approximate) 33 585 kg
74 042 lb
Side Entry Cab With Heavy
Counterweight
Operating Weight (approximate) 33 395 kg
73 623 lb
4-6-4
112321
PN=348
Miscellaneous—Specications
KR46761,0001349 -19-28SEP16-4/4
Item Measurement Specication
Rear Entry Cab With Heavy
Counterweight
Operating Weight (approximate) 34 066 kg
75 103 lb
Rear Entry Cab With Forward Riser
and Heavy Counterweight
Operating Weight (approximate) 34 134 kg
75 253 lb
ZX260FLC-FE
Side Entry Cab Operating Weight (approximate) 33 636 kg
74 155 lb
Rear Entry Cab Operating Weight (approximate) 34 307 kg
75 634 lb
Rear Entry Cab With Forward Riser Operating Weight (approximate) 34 375 kg
75 784 lb
Side Entry Cab With Heavy
Counterweight
Operating Weight (approximate) 34 185 kg
75 365 lb
Rear Entry Cab With Heavy
Counterweight
Operating Weight (approximate) 34 856 kg
76 844 lb
Rear Entry Cab With Forward Riser
and Heavy Counterweight
Operating Weight (approximate) 34 924 kg
76 994 lb
4-6-5
112321
PN=349
Miscellaneous—Specications
Continued on next page KR46761,000134A -19-27SEP16-1/4
Processor Machine Specications
TX1224156
7
1
6
8
10
3
12
2
4
5
11
9
TX1224156 —UN—22SEP16
Machine Specications—Side Entry Cab
TX1224055
7
1
6
8
10
3
12
2
4
5
11
9
TX1224055 —UN—22SEP16
Machine Specications—Rear Entry Cab
1— Machine Transport Height
2— Machine Transport Length
3— Rear End Swing Radius
4— Sprocket Center to Idler
Center Distance
5— Undercarriage Length
6— Counterweight Clearance
7— Cab Height
8— Upperstructure Width
9— Minimum Ground Clearance
10— Center of Sprocket to Center
of Sprocket Distance
11— Track Shoe Width
12— Undercarriage Width
NOTE: Specications and design are subject to change
without notice. Wherever applicable, specications
are in accordance with PCSA and SAE standards.
Except where otherwise noted, these specications
are based on a machine equipped with 700 mm
(28 in) shoes, 4551 kg (10 033 lb) counterweight,
3.4 m (11 ft 2 in) arm, full fuel tank, 79 kg (175
lb) operator, and standard equipment.
NOTE: Machine with rear entry cab is shown in the
transport position. See Loading and Unloading
for Transport. (Section 2-3.)
Item Measurement Specication
1—Machine Transport
Side Entry Cab Height 3960 mm
13 ft 0 in
4-6-6
112321
PN=350
Miscellaneous—Specications
Continued on next page KR46761,000134A -19-27SEP16-2/4
Item Measurement Specication
Rear Entry Cab Height 3960 mm
13 ft 0 in
2—Machine Transport Length 10 210 mm
33 ft 6 in
3—Rear End Swing Radius 3150 mm
10 ft 4 in
4—Sprocket Center to Idler
Center
2620 mm (8 ft 7 in) Undercarriage Distance 3730 mm
12 ft 3 in
2790 mm (9 ft 2 in) Undercarriage Distance 4060 mm
13 ft 4 in
5—Undercarriage
2620 mm (8 ft 7 in) Undercarriage Length 4070 mm
13 ft 4 in
2790 mm (9 ft 2 in) Undercarriage Length 5030 mm
16 ft 6 in
6—Counterweight Clearance 1400 mm
4 ft 7 in
7—Cab
Side Entry Cab Height 3840 mm
12 ft 7 in
Rear Entry Cab Height 5180 mm
17 ft 0 in
Rear Entry Cab—Tilted Height 3760 mm
12 ft 4 in
8—Upperstructure Width 3377 mm
11 ft 1 in
9—Minimum Ground
2620 mm (8 ft 7 in) Undercarriage Clearance 710 mm
2 ft 4 in
2790 mm (9 ft 2 in) Undercarriage Clearance 760 mm
2 ft 6 in
10—Center of Sprocket to
Center of Sprocket
2620 mm (8 ft 7 in) Undercarriage Distance 2620 mm
8 ft 7 in
2790 mm (9 ft 2 in) Undercarriage Distance 2790 mm
9 ft 2 in
11—Track Shoe Width 660 mm (26 in)
700 mm (28 in)
800 mm (32 in)
12—Undercarriage With 2620
mm (8 ft 7 in) Undercarriage
660 mm (26 in) Shoe Width 3340 mm
10 ft 11 in
4-6-7
112321
PN=351
Miscellaneous—Specications
Continued on next page KR46761,000134A -19-27SEP16-3/4
Item Measurement Specication
700 mm (28 in) Shoe Width 3340 mm
10 ft 11 in
800 mm (32 in) Shoe Width 3429 mm
11 ft 3 in
12—Undercarriage With 2920
mm (9 ft 2 in) Undercarriage
660 mm (26 in) Shoe Width 3518 mm
11 ft 7 in
700 mm (28 in) Shoe Width 3518 mm
11 ft 7 in
800 mm (32 in) Shoe Width 3607 mm
11 ft 10 in
NOTE: On machines equipped with 2620 mm (8 ft
7 in) undercarriage, the undercarriage is not
the widest point of the machine.
Item Measurement Specication
Machine With 2620 mm (8 ft
7 in) Undercarriage
660 mm (26 in) Shoe Overall Width 3402 mm
11 ft 2 in
700 mm (28 in) Shoe Overall Width 3402 mm
11 ft 2 in
800 mm (32 in) Shoe Overall Width 3446 mm
11 ft 4 in
Machine With 2920 mm (9 ft
2 in) Undercarriage
660 mm (26 in) Shoe Overall Width 3518 mm
11 ft 7 in
700 mm (28 in) Shoe Overall Width 3518 mm
11 ft 7 in
800 mm (32 in) Shoe Overall Width 3607 mm
11 ft 10 in
ZX260F-FE
Side Entry Cab Operating Weight (approximate) 33 891 kg
74 717 lb
Rear Entry Cab Operating Weight (approximate) 34 562 kg
76 196 lb
Rear Entry Cab With Forward Riser Operating Weight (approximate) 34 630 kg
76 346 lb
Side Entry Cab With Heavy
Counterweight
Operating Weight (approximate) 34 440 kg
75 927 lb
Rear Entry Cab With Heavy
Counterweight
Operating Weight (approximate) 35 111 kg
77 407 lb
Rear Entry Cab With Forward Riser
and Heavy Counterweight
Operating Weight (approximate) 35 179 kg
77 556 lb
4-6-8
112321
PN=352
Miscellaneous—Specications
KR46761,000134A -19-27SEP16-4/4
Item Measurement Specication
ZX260FLC-FE
Side Entry Cab Operating Weight (approximate) 34 681 kg
76 459 lb
Rear Entry Cab Operating Weight (approximate) 35 352 kg
77 938 lb
Rear Entry Cab With Forward Riser Operating Weight (approximate) 35 420 kg
78 088 b
Side Entry Cab With Heavy
Counterweight
Operating Weight (approximate) 35 230 kg
77 669 lb
Rear Entry Cab Heavy
Counterweight
Operating Weight (approximate) 35 901 kg
79 148 lb
Rear Entry Cab With Forward Riser
and Heavy Counterweight
Operating Weight (approximate) 35 969 kg
79 298 lb
4-6-9
112321
PN=353
Miscellaneous—Specications
Continued on next page KR46761,0001296 -19-28JUL16-1/2
Forestry Excavator Working Ranges
TX1218871
1 7
2
3
5
6
4
TX1218871 —UN—07JUL16
Working Ranges
1— Maximum Digging Reach at
Ground Level Distance
2— Maximum Digging Reach
Distance
3— Maximum Digging Depth
4— Maximum Cutting Height
5— Maximum Dumping Height
6— Minimum Swing Radius
7— Tail Swing Radius
NOTE: Specications and design are subject to change
without notice. Wherever applicable, specications
are in accordance with PCSA and SAE standards.
Except where otherwise noted, these specications
are based on a machine equipped with 700 mm (28
in) shoes, 4551 kg (10 033 lb) counterweight, 2.95
m (9 ft 8 in) arm, 996 kg (2196 lb) 10.6 m
3
(1.38
yd
3
) 1065 mm (54 in) bucket, full fuel tank, 79 kg
(175 lb) operator, and standard equipment.
Item Measurement Specication
4-6-10
112321
PN=354
Miscellaneous—Specications
KR46761,0001296 -19-28JUL16-2/2
Item Measurement Specication
1—Maximum Digging Reach
at Ground Level
Distance 9910 mm
32 ft 6 in
2—Maximum Digging Reach Distance 10 160 mm
33 ft 4 in
3—Maximum Digging Depth 6250 mm
20 ft 6 in
4—Maximum Cutting Height 10 640 mm
34 ft 11 in
5—Maximum Dumping Height 7950 mm
26 ft 1 in
6—Minimum Swing Radius 3230 mm
10 ft 7 in
7—Tail Swing Radius 3150 mm
10 ft 4 in
4-6-11
112321
PN=355
Miscellaneous—Specications
Continued on next page KR46761,0001297 -19-27JUL16-1/2
Processor Working Ranges
TX1218878
2
1 7
6
4
3
5
TX1218878 —UN—08JUL16
Working Ranges
1— Maximum Working Reach at
Ground Level Distance
2— Maximum Working Reach
Distance
3— Maximum Working Depth
4— Maximum Working Height
5— Maximum Log Level Height
6— Minimum Swing Radius
7— Tail Swing Radius
NOTE: Specications and design are subject to change
without notice. Wherever applicable, specications
are in accordance with PCSA and SAE standards.
Except where otherwise noted, these specications
are based on a machine equipped with 700 mm
(28 in) shoes, 4551 kg (10 033 lb) counterweight,
3.4 m (11 ft 2 in) arm, full fuel tank, 79 kg (175
lb) operator, and standard equipment.
Item Measurement Specication
4-6-12
112321
PN=356
Miscellaneous—Specications
KR46761,0001297 -19-27JUL16-2/2
Item Measurement Specication
1—Maximum Digging Reach
at Ground Level
Distance 8640 mm
28 ft 4 in
2—Maximum Digging Reach Distance 8940 mm
29 ft 4 in
3—Maximum Digging Depth 4850 mm
15 ft 11 in
4—Maximum Cutting Height 9880 mm
32 ft 5 in
5—Maximum Dumping Height 7470 mm
24 ft 6 in
6—Minimum Swing Radius 2820 mm
9 ft 3 in
7—Tail Swing Radius 3150 mm
10 ft 4 in
4-6-13
112321
PN=357
Miscellaneous—Specications
Continued on next page KR46761,000134B -19-16DEC16-1/2
ZX260F-FE Forestry Excavator Lift Capacity—Undercarriage: 2620 mm (8 ft 7 in)
Ratings are measured with machine situated on rm,
level, uniform supporting surface.
Figures do not exceed 87 percent of hydraulic capacity
or 75 percent of weight needed to tip machine. Figures
marked with an asterisk (*) are hydraulically limited
capacities. Remaining gures are stability-limited
capacities.
NOTE: Lift capacities are listed in kg (lb).
Arm: 2.95 m (9 ft 8 in) Bucket: 996 kg (2196 lb)
Power Boost: On
LIFTING OVER FRONT
Load Point Height Horizontal Distance From Center Line of Rotation
m (ft) 3.0 (10) 4.5 (15) 6.0 (20) 7.5 (25)
7.5 (25) 5480*
(12 070*)
6.0 (20) 5720*
(12 610*)
5490*
(12 090*)
4.5 (15) 11 490*
(25 320*)
7860*
(17 320*)
6430*
(14 160*)
5720*
(12 610*)
3.0 (10) 9820*
(21 640*)
7330*
(16 170*)
6140*
(13 540*)
1.5 (5) 11 250*
(24 790*)
8130*
(17 920*)
6550*
(14 430*)
Ground Line 17 240*
(37 990*)
11 710*
(25 810*)
8550*
(18 850*)
6750*
(14 870*)
-1.5 (-5) 16 060*
(35 390*)
11 340*
(25 000*)
8450*
(18 620*)
6520*
(14 360*)
-3.0 (-10) 13 930*
(30 690*)
10 150*
(22 360*)
7580*
(16 700*)
-4.5 (-15) 7510*
(16 550*)
LIFTING OVER SIDE
Load Point Height Horizontal Distance From Center Line of Rotation
m (ft) 3.0 (10) 4.5 (15) 6.0 (20) 7.5 (25)
7.5 (25) 5480*
(12 070*)
6.0 (20) 5720*
(12 610*)
5490*
(12 090*)
4.5 (15) 11 490*
(25 320*)
7860*
(17 320*)
6430*
(14 160*)
5720*
(12 610*)
3.0 (10) 9820*
(21 640*)
7330*
(16 170*)
5850
(12 890)
1.5 (5) 11 250*
(24 790*)
7700
(16 970)
5670
(12 490)
Ground Line 17 240*
(37 990*)
11 210
(24 720)
7480
(16 490)
5550
(12 230)
-1.5 (-5) 16 060*
(35 390*)
11 190
(24 660)
7420
(16 360)
5540
(12 200)
-3.0 (-10) 13 930*
(30 690*)
10 150*
(22 360*)
7530
(16 590)
-4.5 (-15) 7510*
(16 550*)
4-6-14
112321
PN=358
Miscellaneous—Specications
Continued on next page KR46761,000134C -19-16DEC16-1/2
ZX260FLC-FE Forestry Excavator Lift Capacity—Undercarriage: 2790 mm (9 ft 2 in)
Ratings are measured with machine situated on rm,
level, uniform supporting surface.
Figures do not exceed 87 percent of hydraulic capacity
or 75 percent of weight needed to tip machine. Figures
marked with an asterisk (*) are hydraulically limited
capacities. Remaining gures are stability-limited
capacities.
NOTE: Lift capacities are listed in kg (lb).
Arm: 2.95 m (9 ft 8 in) Bucket: 996 kg (2196 lb)
Power Boost: On
LIFTING OVER FRONT
Load Point Height Horizontal Distance From Center Line of Rotation
m (ft) 3.0 (10) 4.5 (15) 6.0 (20) 7.5 (25)
7.5 (25) 5480*
(12 070*)
6.0 (20) 5720*
(12 610*)
5490*
(12 090*)
4.5 (15) 11 490*
(25 320*)
7860*
(17 320*)
6430*
(14 160*)
5720*
(12 610*)
3.0 (10) 9820*
(21 640*)
7330*
(16 170*)
6140*
(13 540*)
1.5 (5) 11 250*
(24 790*)
8130*
(17 920*)
6550*
(14 430*)
Ground Line 17 240*
(37 990*)
11 710*
(25 810*)
8550*
(18 850*)
6750*
(14 870*)
-1.5 (-5) 16 060*
(35 390*)
11 340*
(25 000*)
8450*
(18 620*)
6520*
(14 360*)
-3.0 (-10) 13 930*
(30 690*)
10 150*
(22 360*)
7580*
(16 700*)
-4.5 (-15) 7510*
(16 550*)
LIFTING OVER SIDE
Load Point Height Horizontal Distance From Center Line of Rotation
m (ft) 3.0 (10) 4.5 (15) 6.0 (20) 7.5 (25)
7.5 (25) 5480*
(12 070*)
6.0 (20) 5720*
(12 610*)
5490*
(12 090*)
4.5 (15) 11 490*
(25 320*)
7860*
(17 320*)
6430*
(14 160*)
5720*
(12 610*)
3.0 (10) 9820*
(21 640*)
7330*
(16 170*)
6140*
(13 540*)
1.5 (5) 11 250*
(24 790*)
8130*
(17 920*)
6250
(13 770)
Ground Line 17 240*
(37 990*)
11 710*
(25 810*)
8290
(18 270)
6130
(13 500)
-1.5 (-5) 16 060*
(35 390*)
11 340*
(25 000*)
8230
(18 140)
6110
(13 480)
-3.0 (-10) 13 930*
(30 690*)
10 150*
(22 360*)
7580*
(16 700*)
-4.5 (-15) 7510*
(16 550*)
4-6-16
112321
PN=360
Miscellaneous—Specications
Continued on next page KR46761,000134D -19-16DEC16-1/2
ZX260F-FE Processor Lift Capacity—Undercarriage: 2620 mm (8 ft 7 in)
Ratings are measured with machine situated on rm,
level, uniform supporting surface.
Figures do not exceed 87 percent of hydraulic capacity
or 75 percent of weight needed to tip machine. Figures
marked with an asterisk (*) are hydraulically limited
capacities. Remaining gures are stability-limited
capacities.
NOTE: Lift capacities are listed in kg (lb).
Arm: 3.4 m (11 ft 2 in)
Power Boost: On
LIFTING OVER FRONT
Load Point Height Horizontal Distance From Center Line of Rotation
m (ft) 1.5 (5) 3.0 (10) 4.5 (15) 6.0 (20) 7.5 (25)
7.5 (25) 5090*
(11 230*)
6.0 (20) 5710*
(12 590*)
5410*
(11 920*)
5250*
(11 570*)
4.5 (15) 9960*
(21 960*)
7330*
(16 150*)
6170*
(13 610*)
5570*
(12 280*)
3.0 (10) 15 830*
(34 880*)
9430*
(20 780*)
7170*
(15 810*)
6070*
(13 370*)
1.5 (5) 18 580*
(40 950*)
11 150*
(24 570*)
8100*
(17 840*)
6560*
(14 450*)
Ground Line 18 410*
(40 580*)
11 930*
(26 300*)
8670*
(19 120*)
6870*
(15 140*)
-1.5 (-5) 28 640*
(63 130*)
17 370*
(38 280*)
11 840*
(26 100*)
8750*
(19 280*)
6820*
(15 040*)
-3.0 (-10) 15 440*
(34 040*)
10 910*
(24 050*)
8150*
(17 960*)
-4.5 (-15) 8790*
(19 380*)
LIFTING OVER SIDE
Load Point Height Horizontal Distance From Center Line of Rotation
m (ft) 1.5 (5) 3.0 (10) 4.5 (15) 6.0 (20) 7.5 (25)
7.5 (25) 5090*
(11 230*)
6.0 (20) 5710*
(12 590*)
5410*
(11 920*)
5250*
(11 570*)
4.5 (15) 9960*
(21 960*)
7330*
(16 150*)
6170*
(13 610*)
5570*
(12 280*)
3.0 (10) 15 830*
(34 880*)
9430*
(20 780*)
7170*
(15 810*)
5890
(12 970)
1.5 (5) 18 580*
(40 950*)
11 150*
(24 570*)
7750
(17 080)
5700
(12 550)
Ground Line 18 410*
(40 580*)
11 260
(24 810)
7510
(16 550)
5560
(12 250)
-1.5 (-5) 28 640*
(63 130*)
17 370*
(38 280*)
11 160
(24 590)
7410
(16 320)
5500
(12 130)
-3.0 (-10) 15 440*
(34 040*)
10 910*
(24 050*)
7440
(16 400)
-4.5 (-15) 8790*
(19 380*)
4-6-18
112321
PN=362
Miscellaneous—Specications
Continued on next page KR46761,000134E -19-16DEC16-1/2
ZX260FLC-FE Processor Lift Capacity—Undercarriage: 2790 mm (9 ft 2 in)
Ratings are measured with machine situated on rm,
level, uniform supporting surface.
Figures do not exceed 87 percent of hydraulic capacity
or 75 percent of weight needed to tip machine. Figures
marked with an asterisk (*) are hydraulically limited
capacities. Remaining gures are stability-limited
capacities.
NOTE: Lift capacities are listed in kg (lb).
Arm: 3.4 m (11 ft 2 in)
Power Boost: On
LIFTING OVER FRONT
Load Point Height Horizontal Distance From Center Line of Rotation
m (ft) 1.5 (5) 3.0 (10) 4.5 (15) 6.0 (20) 7.5 (25)
7.5 (25) 5090*
(11 230*)
6.0 (20) 5710*
(12 590*)
5410*
(11 920*)
5250*
(11 570*)
4.5 (15) 9960*
(21 960*)
7330*
(16 150*)
6170*
(13 610*)
5570*
(12 280*)
3.0 (10) 15 830*
(34 880*)
9430*
(20 780*)
7170*
(15 810*)
6070*
(13 370*)
1.5 (5) 18 580*
(40 950*)
11 150*
(24 570*)
8100*
(17 840*)
6560*
(14 450*)
Ground Line 18 410*
(40 580*)
11 930*
(26 300*)
8670*
(19 120*)
6870*
(15 140*)
-1.5 (-5) 28 640*
(63 130*)
17 370*
(38 280*)
11 840*
(26 100*)
8750*
(19 280*)
6820*
(15 040*)
-3.0 (-10) 15 440*
(34 040*)
10 910*
(24 050*)
8150*
(17 960*)
-4.5 (-15) 8790*
(19 380*)
LIFTING OVER SIDE
Load Point Height Horizontal Distance From Center Line of Rotation
m (ft) 1.5 (5) 3.0 (10) 4.5 (15) 6.0 (20) 7.5 (25)
7.5 (25) 5090*
(11 230*)
6.0 (20) 5710*
(12 590*)
5410*
(11 920*)
5250*
(11 570*)
4.5 (15) 9960*
(21 960*)
7330*
(16 150*)
6170*
(13 610*)
5570*
(12 280*)
3.0 (10) 15 830*
(34 880*)
9430*
(20 780*)
7170*
(15 810*)
6070*
(13 370*)
1.5 (5) 18 580*
(40 950*)
11 150*
(24 570*)
8100*
(17 840*)
6270
(13 820)
Ground Line 18 410*
(40 580*)
11 930*
(26 300*)
8310
(18 320)
6130
(13 510)
-1.5 (-5) 28 640*
(63 130*)
17 370*
(38 280*)
11 840*
(26 100*)
8210
(18 090)
6080
(13 390)
-3.0 (-10) 15 440*
(34 040*)
10 910*
(24 050*)
8150*
(17 960*)
-4.5 (-15) 8790*
(19 380*)
4-6-20
112321
PN=364
Index
Page
A
Access
Door ....................................................................... 3-2-3
Access light
Switch
If equipped..................................2-1-7, 2-1-11, 2-1-13
Accessory
Electrical ................................................................ 4-1-9
Accessory power port
Rear panel ............................................................. 2-1-4
Adjustment
Armrest ....................................................2-1-26, 2-1-28
Seat..........................................................2-1-26, 2-1-28
Track sag ............................................................... 3-3-7
Aftertreatment device
Auto-regeneration ................................................ 2-3-12
Cleaning types ..................................................... 2-3-12
Information........................................................... 2-3-12
Manual regeneration ............................................ 2-3-12
Natural/passive cleaning...................................... 2-3-12
Regeneration inhibit
Disable ............................................................. 2-2-20
Enable .............................................................. 2-2-20
Restriction levels.................................................. 2-3-12
Aftertreatment device regeneration
Indicator ................................................................. 2-2-1
Function.............................................................. 2-2-2
Manual regeneration procedure........................... 2-3-14
Switch ...................................................... 2-1-11, 2-1-12
Aftertreatment indicators overview ............................ 2-2-4
Air cleaner
Primary lter
Clean.................................................................. 3-8-8
Air conditioner
Cab ...................................................................... 2-1-17
Display ................................................................... 2-2-1
Function.............................................................. 2-2-2
Air conditioner condenser
Clean...................................................................... 3-9-4
Air suspension
Seat...................................................................... 2-1-26
Alarm
Hydraulic oil level
If equipped........................................................ 2-1-23
Indicator ................................................................. 2-2-1
Function.............................................................. 2-2-2
Alternative
Exit....................................................................... 2-1-24
Alternator
Precautions............................................................ 4-1-4
Arm drift
Operational check ................................................ 4-2-31
Armrest
Adjustment...............................................2-1-26, 2-1-28
Page
Attachment combo
Control levers
Operation
If equipped .................................................... 2-3-10
Switch
If equipped............................................ 2-1-11, 2-1-16
Attachment drift
Operational check ................................................ 4-2-31
Attachments
Adding safely ....................................................... 1-3-15
Operating safely................................................... 1-3-15
Auto shutdown
Indicator ................................................................. 2-2-1
Auto-idle
Indicator ................................................................. 2-2-1
Function.............................................................. 2-2-2
Switch .................................................................... 2-1-2
Function.............................................................. 2-1-3
Auto-idle circuit
Operational check ................................................ 4-2-20
Auto-shutdown
Indicator
Function.............................................................. 2-2-2
Auxiliary
Indicator ................................................................. 2-2-1
Function.............................................................. 2-2-2
B
Back
Button..................................................................... 2-1-2
Function.............................................................. 2-1-3
Battery
Acid burns .............................................................. 3-8-5
Booster batteries.................................................... 4-1-8
Clean and tighten................................................. 3-3-11
Disconnect switch .................................................. 2-3-3
Electrolyte level check ........................................... 3-8-5
Explosion ............................................................... 3-8-5
Handling, checking, and servicing ......................... 4-1-5
Replace.................................................................. 4-1-8
Specications......................................................... 4-1-8
Terminals................................................................ 3-8-5
Using charger......................................................... 4-1-6
Battery charger
Using...................................................................... 4-1-6
Before starting work................................................... 2-3-1
Belt
Check and adjust .........................................3-5-1, 3-8-7
Blower speed
Switch .................................................................... 2-1-2
Function.............................................................. 2-1-3
Bolt and screw torque values
Metric ................................................................... 4-1-20
Unied inch .......................................................... 4-1-19
Boom drift
Operational check ................................................ 4-2-31
Continued on next page
Index-1
112321
PN=1
Index
Page
Boom lower
With engine stopped ............................................ 2-3-22
Boost starting............................................................. 4-1-8
Breather
Fuel tank .............................................................. 3-10-9
Bucket
Heavy-duty tooth, replace .................................... 4-1-15
Removal............................................................... 4-1-16
Tooth replacement ............................................... 4-1-15
Tooth, replace ...................................................... 4-1-14
Button
Back....................................................................... 2-1-2
Function.............................................................. 2-1-3
Home ..................................................................... 2-1-2
Function.............................................................. 2-1-3
Horn ....................................................................... 2-1-5
Power boost ........................................................... 2-1-5
Power mode........................................................... 2-1-2
Function.............................................................. 2-1-3
C
Cab
Air conditioner ...................................................... 2-1-17
Fresh air lter
Clean or replace ................................................. 3-3-3
Heater .................................................................. 2-1-17
Recirculating air lter
Clean or replace ................................................. 3-3-3
Tilting procedure
Rear entry........................................................... 3-2-5
Cab dome light
Switch ..........................................................2-1-7, 2-1-8
Cab tilt
Oil
Check ................................................................. 3-9-3
Drain and rell .................................................. 3-15-4
Rear entry cab only .......................................... 3-1-11
Camera
Rear
If equipped.......................................................... 3-3-8
Cap breather element
Hydraulic
Replace ............................................................ 3-15-3
Carbon Dioxide Emissions ........................................... -13
Case drain
Replace lter ........................................................ 3-3-13
Celsius and fahrenheit
Selecting display .................................................. 2-1-18
Chain shot guard
Inspection............................................................... 1-4-5
Chain shot hazard
Safety................................................................... 1-3-19
Charge air cooler
Clean...................................................................... 3-9-4
Clock
Change setting..................................................... 2-2-18
Page
Cold weather
Starting................................................................... 2-3-5
Cold weather start aid................................................ 2-3-5
Cold weather warm-up
Engine.................................................................... 2-3-6
Compartment
Storage .................................................................. 2-1-1
Console
Adjust height ........................................................ 2-1-28
Left......................................................................... 2-1-1
Right....................................................................... 2-1-1
Control lever pattern check - excavator
pattern
Operational check ................................................ 4-2-24
Control levers
Attachment combo
Operation
If equipped .................................................... 2-3-10
Operation ............................................................... 2-3-8
Control pattern
Functions ............................................................... 1-2-3
Control valve lift check valve
Operational check ................................................ 4-2-34
Coolant
Diesel engine ....................................................... 3-1-12
Disposing ............................................................. 3-1-14
Engine
Check ................................................................. 3-4-2
Drain and rell .................................................. 3-13-1
Mixing with concentrate, water quality ................. 3-1-12
Test ...................................................................... 3-10-9
Testing freeze point.............................................. 3-1-13
Warm temperature climates ................................. 3-1-13
Coolant temperature
Gauge .................................................................... 2-2-1
Function.............................................................. 2-2-2
Mark....................................................................... 2-2-1
Function.............................................................. 2-2-2
Cooler
Inlet screen ............................................................ 3-9-3
Cooler inlet screen
Clean...................................................................... 3-9-3
Cover
Engine.................................................................... 3-2-4
Fuse box ................................................................ 2-1-1
Cycle times check
Operational check ................................................ 4-2-40
Cylinder ..................................................................... 4-1-4
Cylinder stroke end.................................................... 2-3-7
D
Date
Change setting..................................................... 2-2-18
Decals
Safety..................................................................... 1-5-1
DEF
Disposal ................................................................. 3-1-7
Continued on next page
Index-2
112321
PN=2
Index
Page
Dosing unit lter, access ...................................... 3-14-1
Dosing unit lter, change...................................... 3-14-2
Storing.................................................................... 3-1-6
Tank, relling .......................................................... 3-1-5
Testing.................................................................... 3-1-6
Use in SCR equipped engines............................... 3-1-4
DEF dosing unit lter
Access ................................................................. 3-14-1
Change ................................................................ 3-14-2
Diagnose malfunctions
Troubleshooting procedure .................................... 4-3-1
Diagnostic trouble code check
Operational check .................................................. 4-2-1
Dial
Engine speed ......................................................... 2-1-2
Function.............................................................. 2-1-3
Monitor................................................................... 2-1-2
Function.............................................................. 2-1-3
Diesel engine oil
Final tier 4 and stage IV......................................... 3-1-8
Diesel engines, cold weather effect........................... 3-1-4
Diesel exhaust uid (DEF)
Indicator ................................................................. 2-2-1
Function.............................................................. 2-2-2
Diesel exhaust uid (DEF) tank ll screen
Clean...................................................................... 3-3-2
Replace.................................................................. 3-3-2
Diesel fuel........................................................3-1-1, 3-1-2
Specications......................................................... 3-1-1
Supplemental additives.......................................... 3-1-3
Diesel fuel specications ........................................... 3-1-1
Diesel fuel, testing
Testing Diesel Fuel................................................. 3-1-2
Dig function drift
Operational check ................................................ 4-2-30
Display
Air conditioner ........................................................ 2-2-1
Function.............................................................. 2-2-2
Radio...................................................................... 2-2-1
Function.............................................................. 2-2-2
Display and clear trouble codes
Operational check .................................................. 4-2-1
Display unit
Software update menu......................................... 2-3-18
Door
Access ................................................................... 3-2-3
Enclosure............................................................... 3-2-3
Hinges
Lubricate........................................................... 3-3-10
Service................................................................... 3-2-3
Drain and rell capacities
Specications......................................................... 4-6-1
Driving
Slopes.................................................................. 2-3-20
Page
E
E (economy) mode
Operational check ................................................ 4-2-18
Effect of cold weather on diesel engines ................... 3-1-4
Electrical
System................................................................. 4-1-11
Electrical system
Troubleshooting ................................................... 4-3-10
Emissions
Required language
EPA .................................................................... 3-1-1
Emissions Performance
Tampering ................................................................. -12
Enclosure
Door ....................................................................... 3-2-3
Engine
Air intake hose
Check ................................................................. 3-9-1
Cold weather warm-up........................................... 2-3-6
Coolant
Check ................................................................. 3-4-2
Drain and rell .................................................. 3-13-1
Test................................................................... 3-10-9
Cover ..................................................................... 3-2-4
Oil
Check ................................................................. 3-4-1
Drain and rell .................................................... 3-9-2
Oil lter
Replace .............................................................. 3-9-2
Specications......................................................... 4-6-1
Starting................................................................... 2-3-4
Troubleshooting ..................................................... 4-3-2
Valve lash............................................................. 3-10-8
Warming................................................................. 2-3-4
Engine air cleaner
Filters
Replace ............................................................ 3-11-1
Engine coolant
Disposing of ......................................................... 3-1-14
Engine cover
Close...................................................................... 3-2-4
Open ...................................................................... 3-2-4
Engine oil
Diesel
Final tier 4 and stage IV ..................................... 3-1-8
Sampling test port ................................................ 4-1-12
Engine preheat
Indicator ................................................................. 2-2-1
Function.............................................................. 2-2-2
Engine speed
Dial......................................................................... 2-1-2
Function.............................................................. 2-1-3
Engine speed dial
Operational check ................................................ 4-2-17
Engine stop
Switch .................................................................... 2-1-1
Continued on next page
Index-3
112321
PN=3
Index
Page
Engine stop switch..................................................... 2-1-6
Engine valve lash
Check and adjust ................................................. 3-10-8
Exit
Alternative............................................................ 2-1-24
F
Fan belt
Check and adjust .........................................3-5-1, 3-8-7
Filter
Cab fresh air
Clean or replace ................................................. 3-3-3
Cab recirculating air
Clean or replace ................................................. 3-3-3
Case drain............................................................ 3-3-13
Engine air cleaner
Replace ............................................................ 3-11-1
Engine oil
Replace .............................................................. 3-9-2
Final fuel
Replace ............................................................ 3-10-7
High-pressure supply ........................................... 3-3-12
Hydraulic oil
Replace ............................................................ 3-10-2
Pilot hydraulic oil
Replace ............................................................ 3-10-4
Primary air cleaner
Clean.................................................................. 3-8-8
Primary fuel
Drain................................................................... 3-4-6
Replace ............................................................ 3-10-6
Filters, Oil
Oil Filters................................................................ 3-1-8
Fire extinguisher
Mounting location................................................. 2-1-24
Fluid analysis test kit ................................................. 3-2-6
Fluid level
Windshield washer
Check
If equipped .................................................... 3-3-11
Front attachment electrical controls
Troubleshooting ..................................................... 4-3-9
Front end pin joints
Lubricate ................................................................ 3-4-7
Fuel
Diesel...........................................................3-1-1, 3-1-2
Final lter
Replace ............................................................ 3-10-7
Gauge .................................................................... 2-2-1
Function.............................................................. 2-2-2
Handling and storing .............................................. 3-1-2
Lubricity.................................................................. 3-1-1
Mark....................................................................... 2-2-1
Function.............................................................. 2-2-2
Primary lter
Drain................................................................... 3-4-6
Replace ............................................................ 3-10-6
Page
System
Bleed .................................................................. 4-1-1
Tank sump
Drain................................................................... 3-4-6
Fuel cooler
Clean...................................................................... 3-9-4
Fuel Filters
Filters, Fuel ............................................................ 3-1-3
Fuel gauge
Operational check .................................................. 4-2-3
Fuel system
Bleed...................................................................... 4-1-1
Fuel tank
Inlet screen
Remove and clean ............................................. 3-3-1
Specication........................................................... 3-2-5
Sump
Drain................................................................... 3-4-6
Fuel tank breather
Replace................................................................ 3-10-9
Fuse
Color codes.......................................................... 4-1-11
Replacing............................................................. 4-1-11
Fuse box
Cover ..................................................................... 2-1-1
Fuxe box cover
Rear panel ............................................................. 2-1-4
G
Gauge
Coolant temperature .............................................. 2-2-1
Function.............................................................. 2-2-2
Diesel exhaust uid (DEF) ..................................... 2-2-1
Function.............................................................. 2-2-2
Fuel........................................................................ 2-2-1
Function.............................................................. 2-2-2
Grease
Extreme pressure and multipurpose .................... 3-1-11
Specication......................................................... 3-1-11
H
Hardware
Track
Inspect................................................................ 3-7-1
Re-torque ........................................................... 3-7-1
Hardware torque values
Metric ................................................................... 4-1-20
Unied inch .......................................................... 4-1-19
Heater
Cab ...................................................................... 2-1-17
Heater and air conditioner controls check
Operational check ................................................ 4-2-44
Heater and air conditioning circuit check
Operational check ................................................ 4-2-43
Continued on next page
Index-4
112321
PN=4
Index
Page
Heavy-duty bucket
Tooth, replace ...................................................... 4-1-15
High-pressure fuel
Pump...................................................................... 4-1-4
High-pressure supply
Replace lter ........................................................ 3-3-12
Home
Button..................................................................... 2-1-2
Function.............................................................. 2-1-3
Horn
Button..................................................................... 2-1-5
Switch
Processor only..........................................2-1-7, 2-1-8
Horn circuit
Operational check .................................................. 4-2-2
Hose
Engine air intake
Check ................................................................. 3-9-1
Hour meter
Check..................................................................... 3-2-1
Operational check .................................................. 4-2-3
Hour meter and clock
Monitor................................................................... 2-2-1
Function.............................................................. 2-2-2
HP (high power) mode
Operational check ................................................ 4-2-19
Hydraulic
Auxiliary cooler screen
If equipped........................................................ 3-3-10
Cap breather element
Replace ............................................................ 3-15-3
Oil
Check ................................................................. 3-4-3
Drain and rell .................................................. 3-15-1
Oil lter
Replace ............................................................ 3-10-2
Oil tank pressure vent
Switch............................................................... 2-1-10
Pilot oil lter
Replace ............................................................ 3-10-4
Shutoff lever........................................................... 2-1-6
System
Bleed .................................................................. 4-1-2
Tank
Drain................................................................... 3-8-2
Hydraulic oil
Sampling test port ................................................ 4-1-12
Specication........................................................... 3-1-9
Hydraulic oil cooler
Clean...................................................................... 3-9-4
Hydraulic oil level
Alarm
If equipped........................................................ 2-1-23
Hydraulic oil tank
Pressure vent switch
If equipped........................................................ 2-1-10
Page
Hydraulic oil tank pressure vent
Switch
If equipped.......................................................... 2-1-7
Hydraulic oil tank pressurization
Operational check ................................................ 4-2-23
Hydraulic system
Bleed...................................................................... 4-1-2
Troubleshooting ..................................................... 4-3-7
Hydraulic tank
Drain ...................................................................... 3-8-2
I
Identication
Manual ........................................................................ -3
Indicator
Aftertreatment device regeneration........................ 2-2-1
Function.............................................................. 2-2-2
Alarm...................................................................... 2-2-1
Function.............................................................. 2-2-2
Auto shutdown ....................................................... 2-2-1
Auto-idle................................................................. 2-2-1
Function.............................................................. 2-2-2
Auto-shutdown
Function.............................................................. 2-2-2
Auxiliary ................................................................. 2-2-1
Function.............................................................. 2-2-2
Engine preheat....................................................... 2-2-1
Function.............................................................. 2-2-2
Power mode.................................................2-2-1, 2-2-2
Reversing fan
Function.............................................................. 2-2-2
If equipped.......................................................... 2-2-1
Seat belt................................................................. 2-2-1
Function.............................................................. 2-2-2
Travel speed .......................................................... 2-2-1
Function.............................................................. 2-2-2
Work mode............................................................. 2-2-1
Function.............................................................. 2-2-2
Indicators overview.................................................... 2-2-4
Injection
Nozzle.................................................................... 4-1-4
Inspection
Daily....................................................................... 2-3-2
Pre-start ................................................................. 2-3-2
J
JDLink...................................................................... 4-1-10
JDLink in-line fuse
Switched power.................................................... 4-1-11
Unswitched power................................................ 4-1-11
Jump starting ............................................................. 4-1-8
Continued on next page
Index-5
112321
PN=5
Index
Page
K
Key
Switch ..........................................................2-1-1, 2-1-2
Function.............................................................. 2-1-3
Key switch off, engine off
Operational check .................................................. 4-2-1
Key switch on, engine off
Operational check .................................................. 4-2-4
Key switch on, engine on
Operational check ................................................ 4-2-14
Keypad ...................................................................... 2-1-2
Function ................................................................. 2-1-3
L
Left
Console.................................................................. 2-1-1
Left console
Switch .................................................................... 2-1-7
Left pilot control
Lever...................................................................... 2-1-1
Left travel
Lever...................................................................... 2-1-1
Pedal...................................................................... 2-1-1
Lever
Left pilot control...................................................... 2-1-1
Left travel ............................................................... 2-1-1
Pilot shutoff ..................................................2-1-1, 2-1-6
Right pilot control ................................................... 2-1-1
Right travel............................................................. 2-1-1
Steering.................................................................. 2-3-7
Levers
Location ................................................................. 2-1-1
Lift capacity
Specications
Forestry excavator................................4-6-14, 4-6-16
Processor .............................................4-6-18, 4-6-20
Lifting....................................................................... 2-3-21
Machine ............................................................... 2-3-27
Light circuit
Operational check ................................................ 4-2-11
Lighter
Rear panel ............................................................. 2-1-4
Lighter/accessory power
Port ........................................................................ 2-1-1
Lights
Access
If equipped........................................................ 2-1-13
Service
If equipped........................................................ 2-1-13
Long-term storage
Preparing engine.................................................... 4-4-3
Removing from....................................................... 4-4-4
Lower boom
With engine stopped ............................................ 2-3-22
Page
Lubricant
Mixing..................................................................... 3-1-7
Lubricant Storage
Storage, Lubricant.................................................. 3-1-7
Lubricants, Safety
Safety, Lubricants .................................................. 3-1-7
Lubricity of diesel fuel ................................................ 3-1-1
M
Machine
Clean regularly....................................................... 4-1-1
Keep secure........................................................... 4-5-3
Lifting ................................................................... 2-3-27
Maintenance position ............................................. 3-2-2
Required stop warning ......................................... 2-3-10
Retrieval points .................................................... 2-3-26
Specications
Forestry excavator.............................................. 4-6-2
Processor ........................................................... 4-6-6
Trailer loading ...................................................... 2-3-24
Main menu
Air conditioner ...................................................... 2-2-14
Alarm list ................................................................ 2-2-7
Information menu ................................................. 2-2-25
Maintenance..................................................... 2-2-27
Monitoring......................................................... 2-2-28
Operation.......................................................... 2-2-26
Troubleshooting................................................ 2-2-27
Monitor................................................................... 2-2-6
Radio.................................................................... 2-2-16
Setting menu........................................................ 2-2-17
Attachment adjustment
Processor only .............................................. 2-2-18
Attachment name input .................................... 2-2-19
Auto-shutdown ................................................. 2-2-19
Brightness adjustment...................................... 2-2-23
Date and time ................................................... 2-2-18
Display item selection....................................... 2-2-23
Language ......................................................... 2-2-23
Main menu sequence change .......................... 2-2-24
Rear view camera monitor ............................... 2-2-22
Sub meter selection.......................................... 2-2-21
Unit selection.................................................... 2-2-24
Main Menu
Setting menu
Aftertreatment device regeneration inhibit........ 2-2-20
Maintenance
Required parts ....................................................... 3-2-9
Service intervals..................................................... 3-2-7
Maintenance position
Machine ................................................................. 3-2-2
Manual
Identication................................................................ -3
Manual regeneration
Operation ............................................................. 2-3-14
Mark
Coolant temperature .............................................. 2-2-1
Continued on next page
Index-6
112321
PN=6
Index
Page
Function.............................................................. 2-2-2
Fuel........................................................................ 2-2-1
Function.............................................................. 2-2-2
Max speed program
Switch
If equipped................................................2-1-7, 2-1-9
Mechanical suspension
Seat...................................................................... 2-1-28
Metric bolt and screw torque values ........................ 4-1-20
Mixing lubricants........................................................ 3-1-7
Monitor
Air conditioner ...................................................... 2-2-14
Alarm list ................................................................ 2-2-7
Dial......................................................................... 2-1-2
Function.............................................................. 2-1-3
Hour meter and clock............................................. 2-2-1
Function.............................................................. 2-2-2
Information menu ................................................. 2-2-25
Maintenance..................................................... 2-2-27
Monitoring......................................................... 2-2-28
Operation.......................................................... 2-2-26
Troubleshooting................................................ 2-2-27
Main menu ............................................................. 2-2-6
Panel...................................................................... 2-1-1
Radio.................................................................... 2-2-16
Setting menu........................................................ 2-2-17
Aftertreatment device ....................................... 2-2-20
Attachment adjustment
Processor only .............................................. 2-2-18
Attachment name input .................................... 2-2-19
Auto-shutdown ................................................. 2-2-19
Brightness adjustment...................................... 2-2-23
Date and time ................................................... 2-2-18
Display item selection....................................... 2-2-23
Language ......................................................... 2-2-23
Main menu sequence change .......................... 2-2-24
Rear view camera monitor ............................... 2-2-22
Sub meter selection.......................................... 2-2-21
Unit selection.................................................... 2-2-24
Start-up .................................................................. 2-2-5
Sub meter .............................................................. 2-2-1
Function.............................................................. 2-2-2
Monitor and gauge circuit
Operational check ................................................ 4-2-15
Monitor start up
Operational check .................................................. 4-2-5
Monitor, gauges and battery relay
Operational check .................................................. 4-2-6
Motor ......................................................................... 4-1-4
Moutning location
Fire extinguisher .................................................. 2-1-24
O
Oil
Cab tilt
Check ................................................................. 3-9-3
Drain and rell .................................................. 3-15-4
Page
Rear entry cab only .......................................... 3-1-11
Engine
Check ................................................................. 3-4-1
Drain and rell .................................................... 3-9-2
Final tier 4 and stage IV ..................................... 3-1-8
Hydraulic
Check ................................................................. 3-4-3
Drain and rell .................................................. 3-15-1
Hydraulic specication ........................................... 3-1-9
Pump drive gear case
Check ................................................................. 3-8-4
Drain and rell .................................................. 3-10-8
Pump drive gear case specication ..................... 3-1-10
Swing gear case drain and rell........................... 3-10-1
Swing gear case specication.............................. 3-1-10
Travel gear case
Check ................................................................. 3-8-7
Drain and rell .................................................. 3-12-1
Travel gear case specication ............................. 3-1-10
Oil level
Swing gear case .................................................... 3-8-1
Operation
Attachment combo
Control levers
If equipped .................................................... 2-3-10
Control levers......................................................... 2-3-8
Operational check
Auto-idle circuit .................................................... 4-2-20
Boom, arm, and attachment drift.......................... 4-2-31
Control lever pattern check - excavator pattern... 4-2-24
Control valve lift check valve................................ 4-2-34
Cycle times check ................................................ 4-2-40
Diagnostic trouble code check ............................... 4-2-1
Dig function drift ................................................... 4-2-30
Display and clear trouble codes............................. 4-2-1
E (economy) mode............................................... 4-2-18
Engine speed dial ................................................ 4-2-17
Fuel gauge ............................................................. 4-2-3
Heater and air conditioner controls check............ 4-2-44
Heater and air conditioning circuit check ............. 4-2-43
Horn circuit............................................................. 4-2-2
Hour meter ............................................................. 4-2-3
HP (high power) mode ......................................... 4-2-19
Hydraulic oil tank pressurization .......................... 4-2-23
Key switch off, engine off ....................................... 4-2-1
Key switch on, engine off ....................................... 4-2-4
Key switch on, engine on ..................................... 4-2-14
Light circuit........................................................... 4-2-11
Monitor and gauge circuit..................................... 4-2-15
Monitor start up ...................................................... 4-2-5
Monitor, gauges and battery relay.......................... 4-2-6
Pilot shutoff circuit................................................ 4-2-16
PWR (standard) mode ......................................... 4-2-18
Rear camera .......................................................... 4-2-8
Swing dynamic braking ........................................ 4-2-27
Swing park brake and circuit drift......................... 4-2-28
Swing power check .............................................. 4-2-29
Swing priority circuit ............................................. 4-2-32
Continued on next page
Index-7
112321
PN=7
Index
Page
Travel alarm ......................................................... 4-2-21
Travel alarm cancel switch circuit ........................ 4-2-22
Travel lever and pedal ......................................... 4-2-10
Travel speed selection ......................................... 4-2-35
Travel system maneuverability ............................ 4-2-39
Travel system tracking ......................................... 4-2-36
Travel system tracking while operating a
dig function......................................................... 4-2-38
Windshield washer circuit .................................... 4-2-14
Windshield washer control ................................... 4-2-13
Windshield wiper controls .................................... 4-2-12
Operator conveniences
Features................................................................. 1-1-1
Operator's
Seat........................................................................ 2-1-1
Ownership
Keep proof ............................................................. 4-5-2
P
Panel
Monitor................................................................... 2-1-1
Switch .................................................................... 2-1-1
Parking machine...................................................... 2-3-23
Pedal
Left travel ............................................................... 2-1-1
Location ................................................................. 2-1-1
Right travel............................................................. 2-1-1
Steering.................................................................. 2-3-7
Periodic maintenance chart
Location ................................................................. 3-2-1
Required parts ....................................................... 3-2-9
Service intervals..................................................... 3-2-7
Pilot control lever
Adjust height ........................................................ 2-1-28
Pilot shutoff
Lever............................................................2-1-1, 2-1-6
Pilot shutoff circuit
Operational check ................................................ 4-2-16
Pilot shutoff lever ....................................................... 2-1-6
Polycarbonate
Window
Check ................................................................. 4-1-3
Inspect................................................................ 4-1-3
Port
Lighter/accessory power ........................................ 2-1-1
Power boost
Button..................................................................... 2-1-5
Power mode
Button..................................................................... 2-1-2
Function.............................................................. 2-1-3
Indicator .......................................................2-2-1, 2-2-2
Product identication number (PIN)........................... 4-5-1
Pull-down sunshade
Adjust
If equipped........................................................ 2-1-29
Pump
Service................................................................... 4-1-4
Page
Pump drive gear case
Oil
Check ................................................................. 3-8-4
Drain and rell .................................................. 3-10-8
Pump drive gear case oil
Specication......................................................... 3-1-10
Pump ow rate
Change setting
Processor only.................................................. 2-2-18
PWR (standard) mode
Operational check ................................................ 4-2-18
R
Radiator
Air inlet screen
Clean.................................................................. 3-3-9
Clean...................................................................... 3-9-4
Radio
Auxiliary input
If equipped........................................................ 2-1-19
Bluetooth
If equipped........................................................ 2-1-21
Display ................................................................... 2-2-1
Function.............................................................. 2-2-2
Operation ............................................................. 2-1-19
Satellite
If equipped........................................................ 2-1-21
Settings................................................................ 2-2-16
XM radio
If equipped........................................................ 2-1-21
Radio power and volume
Switch .................................................................... 2-1-2
Function.............................................................. 2-1-3
Radio tuning
Switch .................................................................... 2-1-2
Function.............................................................. 2-1-3
Rear camera
Operational check .................................................. 4-2-8
Rear camera lens
Clean
If equipped.......................................................... 3-3-8
Rear entry cab
Tilting procedure .................................................... 3-2-5
Rear view camera
Operation ............................................................. 2-2-22
Recovering the machine.......................................... 2-3-26
Regulator
Precautions............................................................ 4-1-4
Replacing
Seat belt............................................................... 4-1-17
Retrieval
Machine ............................................................... 2-3-26
Reversing fan
Indicator
Function.............................................................. 2-2-2
If equipped.......................................................... 2-2-1
Continued on next page
Index-8
112321
PN=8
Index
Page
Switch
If equipped................................................2-1-7, 2-1-8
Right
Console.................................................................. 2-1-1
Right console
Switch .................................................................. 2-1-11
Right pilot control
Lever...................................................................... 2-1-1
Right travel
Lever...................................................................... 2-1-1
Pedal...................................................................... 2-1-1
Roll-over protective structure
Torque values....................................................... 4-1-12
S
Safety
Boom.................................................................... 1-3-14
Caution decals ....................................................... 1-5-1
Chain shot guard inspection .................................. 1-4-5
Features................................................................. 1-1-1
Fire......................................................................... 1-2-7
Heated and ventilated operator's seat ................... 1-3-1
Keep the operator protective structure in place ..... 1-3-4
Operator ability....................................................... 2-3-1
Protect against noise ............................................. 1-2-3
Saw chain hazard ................................................ 1-3-19
Warning decals ...................................................... 1-5-1
Sample
Cab tilt oil
Rear entry cab only ............................................ 3-9-4
Diesel fuel .............................................................. 3-9-4
Engine coolant ....................................................... 3-9-4
Engine oil ............................................................... 3-8-8
Hydraulic oil ........................................................... 3-9-4
Pump drive gear case oil ....................................... 3-9-4
Swing gear case oil................................................ 3-9-4
Travel gear case oil................................................ 3-9-4
Sampling test port
Engine oil ............................................................. 4-1-12
Hydraulic oil ......................................................... 4-1-12
Saw chain hazard
Safety................................................................... 1-3-19
Saw chain shot guard
Inspection............................................................... 1-4-5
SCR
System overview.................................................. 2-3-16
Screen
Fuel tank inlet
Remove and clean ............................................. 3-3-1
Hydraulic auxiliary cooler
If equipped........................................................ 3-3-10
Radiator air inlet
Clean.................................................................. 3-3-9
Seat
Adjustment...............................................2-1-26, 2-1-28
Air suspension ..................................................... 2-1-26
Mechanical suspension........................................ 2-1-28
Page
Operator's .............................................................. 2-1-1
Seat belt
Indicator ................................................................. 2-2-1
Function.............................................................. 2-2-2
Replacing............................................................. 4-1-17
Selecting display
Celsius and fahrenheit ......................................... 2-1-18
Serial number
Engine.................................................................... 4-5-1
Hydraulic pump ...................................................... 4-5-2
Machine ................................................................. 4-5-1
Swing motor ........................................................... 4-5-2
Travel motor........................................................... 4-5-2
Service
Door ....................................................................... 3-2-3
Service ADVISOR Remote
Overview.............................................................. 2-3-17
Reprogramming ................................................... 2-3-17
Terms and conditions ................................................ -15
Service ADVISOR remote (SAR)
Switch ...................................................... 2-1-11, 2-1-14
Service light
Switch
If equipped.............................................. 2-1-7, 2-1-11
Service lights
Switch
If equipped........................................................ 2-1-13
Side camera
Side monitor (if equipped).................................... 2-1-30
Side monitor (if equipped)
Side camera......................................................... 2-1-30
Slopes
Driving.................................................................. 2-3-20
Operation on ........................................................ 1-3-11
Software update
Download and installation .................................... 2-3-18
Troubleshooting ................................................... 4-3-12
Specication
Fuel tank ................................................................ 3-2-5
Grease ................................................................. 3-1-11
Hardware torque .................................................. 4-1-18
Hydraulic oil ........................................................... 3-1-9
Pump drive gear case oil ..................................... 3-1-10
Swing gear case oil.............................................. 3-1-10
Travel gear case oil.............................................. 3-1-10
Specications
Drain and rell capacities....................................... 4-6-1
Engine.................................................................... 4-6-1
Lift capacity
Forestry excavator................................4-6-14, 4-6-16
Processor .............................................4-6-18, 4-6-20
Machine
Forestry excavator.............................................. 4-6-2
Processor ........................................................... 4-6-6
Working ranges.................................................... 4-6-10
Processor ......................................................... 4-6-12
Start-up
Monitor................................................................... 2-2-5
Continued on next page
Index-9
112321
PN=9
Index
Page
Starting
After, check ............................................................ 2-3-4
Before, check ......................................................... 2-3-4
Cold weather.......................................................... 2-3-5
Engine.................................................................... 2-3-4
Steering
Lever...................................................................... 2-3-7
Machine ................................................................. 2-3-7
Pedal...................................................................... 2-3-7
Storage
Compartment ......................................................... 2-1-1
Machine ................................................................. 4-4-1
Monthly .................................................................. 4-4-2
Storing fuel ................................................................ 3-1-2
Sub meter
Monitor................................................................... 2-2-1
Function.............................................................. 2-2-2
Sunshade
Adjust
If equipped........................................................ 2-1-29
Swing
Area cleaning ....................................................... 2-3-19
Swing bearing
Lubricate ................................................................ 3-6-1
Swing bearing gear
Lubricate ................................................................ 3-9-1
Swing dynamic braking
Operational check ................................................ 4-2-27
Swing gear case
Oil drain and rell ................................................. 3-10-1
Oil level check........................................................ 3-8-1
Swing gear case oil
Specication......................................................... 3-1-10
Swing park brake and circuit drift
Operational check ................................................ 4-2-28
Swing power check
Operational check ................................................ 4-2-29
Swing priority circuit
Operational check ................................................ 4-2-32
Switch
Access light
If equipped..................................2-1-7, 2-1-11, 2-1-13
Aftertreatment device regenera-
tion ......................................................... 2-1-11, 2-1-12
Attachment combo
If equipped............................................ 2-1-11, 2-1-16
Auto-idle................................................................. 2-1-2
Function.............................................................. 2-1-3
Battery disconnect ................................................. 2-3-3
Blower speed ......................................................... 2-1-2
Function.............................................................. 2-1-3
Cab dome light.............................................2-1-7, 2-1-8
Engine stop ..................................................2-1-1, 2-1-6
Horn
Processor only..........................................2-1-7, 2-1-8
Hydraulic oil tank pressure vent
If equipped..............................................2-1-7, 2-1-10
Key...............................................................2-1-1, 2-1-2
Page
Function.............................................................. 2-1-3
Left console............................................................ 2-1-7
Max speed program
If equipped................................................2-1-7, 2-1-9
Panel...................................................................... 2-1-1
Radio power and volume ....................................... 2-1-2
Function.............................................................. 2-1-3
Radio tuning........................................................... 2-1-2
Function.............................................................. 2-1-3
Reversing fan
If equipped................................................2-1-7, 2-1-8
Right console ....................................................... 2-1-11
Service ADVISOR remote (SAR)............. 2-1-11, 2-1-14
Service light
If equipped.............................................. 2-1-7, 2-1-11
Service lights
If equipped........................................................ 2-1-13
Temperature control/mode ..................................... 2-1-2
Function.............................................................. 2-1-3
Travel alarm ........................................................... 2-1-7
Travel alarm cancel................................................ 2-1-7
Travel mode ........................................................... 2-1-2
Function.............................................................. 2-1-3
Windshield wiper and washer ................................ 2-1-2
Function.............................................................. 2-1-3
Work light ............................................................... 2-1-2
Function.............................................................. 2-1-3
Switch panel .............................................................. 2-1-2
Functions ............................................................... 2-1-3
System
Fuel
Bleed .................................................................. 4-1-1
Hydraulic
Bleed .................................................................. 4-1-2
T
Temperature control/mode
Switch .................................................................... 2-1-2
Function.............................................................. 2-1-3
Time
Change setting..................................................... 2-2-18
Torque charts
Metric ................................................................... 4-1-20
Unied inch .......................................................... 4-1-19
Torque values
Roll-over protective structure ............................... 4-1-12
Track
Hardware
Inspect................................................................ 3-7-1
Re-torque ........................................................... 3-7-1
Sag....................................................................... 4-1-17
Adjustment ......................................................... 3-3-7
Check ................................................................. 3-3-7
Track shoe hardware
Check cap screws................................................ 4-1-18
Trailer loading.......................................................... 2-3-24
Transporting machine.............................................. 2-3-24
Continued on next page
Index-10
112321
PN=10
Index
Page
Travel alarm
Operational check ................................................ 4-2-21
Switch .................................................................... 2-1-7
Travel alarm cancel
Switch .................................................................... 2-1-7
Travel alarm cancel switch circuit
Operational check ................................................ 4-2-22
Travel gear case
Oil
Check ................................................................. 3-8-7
Drain and rell .................................................. 3-12-1
Travel gear case oil
Specication......................................................... 3-1-10
Travel lever and pedal
Operational check ................................................ 4-2-10
Travel mode
Switch .................................................................... 2-1-2
Function.............................................................. 2-1-3
Travel speed
Indicator ................................................................. 2-2-1
Function.............................................................. 2-2-2
Travel speed selection
Operational check ................................................ 4-2-35
Travel system maneuverability
Operational check ................................................ 4-2-39
Travel system tracking
Operational check ................................................ 4-2-36
Travel system tracking while operating a dig
function
Operational check ................................................ 4-2-38
Troubleshooting
Electrical system .................................................. 4-3-10
Engine.................................................................... 4-3-2
Front attachment electrical controls ....................... 4-3-9
Hydraulic system.................................................... 4-3-7
Software update................................................... 4-3-12
Troubleshooting procedure........................................ 4-3-1
U
Unied inch bolt and screw torque values............... 4-1-19
USB charge port
If equipped ............................................... 2-1-11, 2-1-15
Page
V
Valve
Control ................................................................... 4-1-4
W
Warning
Required machine stop ........................................ 2-3-10
Warranty
Non-road emission control warranty statement .......... -9
Off-road emissions control warranty statement .........-11
Water and mud
Operation ............................................................. 2-3-19
Welding...................................................................... 4-1-9
Window
Polycarbonate
Clean.................................................................. 4-1-3
Inspect................................................................ 4-1-3
Windshield washer
Fluid level
Check
If equipped .................................................... 3-3-11
Windshield washer circuit
Operational check ................................................ 4-2-14
Windshield washer control
Operational check ................................................ 4-2-13
Windshield wiper and washer
Switch .................................................................... 2-1-2
Function.............................................................. 2-1-3
Windshield wiper controls
Operational check ................................................ 4-2-12
Work light
Switch .................................................................... 2-1-2
Function.............................................................. 2-1-3
Work mode
Indicator ................................................................. 2-2-1
Function.............................................................. 2-2-2
Working ranges
Specications....................................................... 4-6-10
Processor ......................................................... 4-6-12
Working tool pivots
Lubricate
If equipped.......................................................... 3-4-9
Index-11
112321
PN=11
Index
Index-12
112321
PN=12
Hitachi Construction Machinery Co., Ltd.
URL:http://www.hitachi-c-m.com
ZAXIS260F-FE-6N • ZAXIS260FLC-FE-6N FORESTRY EXCAVATOR OPERATOR’S MANUAL OMT390731X19
